Tnas Physics Class Tests

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
JEE (Main
JEE (Main + Advanced) 2021
+ Advanced) 2021
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Path to success KOTA (RAJASTHAN )
PHASE : TNAS
Path to success KOTA (RAJASTHAN)
PHASE : TNAS
PHYSICS CLASS TEST # 01
SECTION-I
Single Correct Answer Type 13 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. There are two potential energy (PE) displacement curves as shown for two different particles (of same
mass) doing SHM about same mean position x = 0 on x-axis then we can say.
y
PE
1 2
(A) w1 > w2 (B) w1 < w2 (C) w1 = w2 (D) none

2. A spring block system is fixed in a train suddenly train starts moving with constant acceleration a0 .
Taking origin at initial position of block, what is equation of motion for block in reference frame of train.
Force constant of spring is k. Neglect frction between block and train.
y
a0
l0 x
m
ma 0 ma 0 æ k ö ma 0 ma 0 æ k ö
(A) - k + k cos çç m ÷÷ t (B) k
-
k
cosçç
m
÷t
÷
è ø è ø
ma 0 ma 0 æ k ö ma 0 ma 0 æ k ö
(C) - k - k cos çç m ÷÷ t (D) k + k cos çç m ÷÷ t
è ø è ø
3. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions, one along the x-axis and the other on a line
making an angle of 45° with the x-axis. The two motions are given by x = x0 sin wt and
s = s0 sin wt :-
(A) Path of the particle is straight line. (B) Path of the particle is parabola.
(C) Path of the particle is ellipse (D) Path of the particle is circle
4. Pendulum A is a physical pendulum made from a thin rigid and uniform rod whose length is l. One end
of this rod is attached to the ceiling by a frictionless hinge so that rod is free to swing back and forth.
TA
Pendulum B is a simple pendulum whose length is also l. The ratio T for small angular oscillations-
B
3 2 2 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 3 2
5. A man is swinging on a swing made of 2 ropes of equal length L and in direction perpendicular to the
plane of paper. The time period of the small oscillations about the mean position is :
L 3L
(A) 2p (B) 2p
2g 2g
L L
(C) 2p (D) p
2 3g g
PHYSICS / Class Test # 01 E-1/5

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
TM JEE (Main + Advanced) 2021
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
6. The coefficient of friction between block of mass m and 2m is m = 2 tan q. There is no friction between
block of mass 2m and inclined plane. The maximum amplitude of two block system for which there is
no relative motion between both the blocks.
]
2m
2mg sin q 3mg sin q 6mg sin q 8mg sin q

(A) (B) (C) (D)
k k k k
7. A bar of mass m is suspended horizontally on two vertical springs of spring constant k and 3k. The bar
bounces up and down while remaining horizontal. Find the time period of oscillation of the bar (Neglect
mass of springs and friction everywhere).
Fixed pulley
3K K
m m 2m 3m
(A) 2 p (B) 2p (C) p (D) p
k 3k 3k 4k
8. A block of mass m is attached to a spring of force constant k whose other end is fixed to a horizontal
surface. Initially the spring is in its natural length and the block is released from rest. If average force
acting on the surface by the spring till the instant when the block has zero acceleration for the first time
p m
in time T is F. Then find F (T = ) :-
2 k
mg 2mg 3mg 4mg

(A) (B) (C) (D)
p p p p
9. A particle of mass 10 gm is placed in a potential field given by V = (50 x2 + 100) J/kg. The frequency of
oscillation in cycle/sec is :-
10 5 100 50
(A) (B) (C) (D)
p p p p
E-2/5 PHYSICS / Class Test # 01

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
10. The drawing shows a top view of a frictionless horizontal surface, where there are two identical springs
with particles of mass m1 and m2 attached to them. Each spring has a spring constant of 1200 N/m. The
particles are pulled to the right and then released from the positions shown in the drawing. How much
time passes before the particles are again side by side for the first time if m1 = 3.0 kg and m2 = 27 kg ?
10cm
m1
m2
Natural length
p p 3p p
(A) sec (B) sec (C) sec (D) sec
40 20 40 10
11. Figure shows a system consisting of a massless pulley and two springs of equal constants k each, a
block is attached with an ideal string as shown. If the block is slightly displaced vertically down from it's
equilibrium position and then released, the time period of vertical oscillations is :
k m
m m 2m 5m
(A) 2p (B) 2p (C) 2p (D) 2p
k 2k k k
12. A square frame of mass m and side l is suspended as shown. Find the time period of small oscillations
in vertical plane :-
l 5 2l l 5 2l
(A) 2p g (B) 2p (C) 2p (D) 2p
6 g 2g 3 g
13. A particle starts from rest and performs SHM of amplitude A. Find the ratio of time taken by it from
A 3 A
mean to to time taken by it from A to :-
2 2
1 1
(A) 1 (B) (C) 2 (D)
2 4

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
Multiple Correct Answer Type 2 Q. [4 M (–1)]
14. Acceleration of a particle which is at rest at x = 0 is ar = (4 - 2x)i$ . Select the correct alternatives (s) :-
(A) particle further comes to rest at x = 4 (B) particle oscillates about x = 2

(C) maximum speed of particle is 4 units (D) all of the above
15. Tick the correct alternative (s)
(A ) The displacement of the particle varies with time as x = 12 sin wt – 16 sin3 wt. The motion of particle
is SHM with amplitude 4 units.
pt
(B) A particle oscillates according to equation x = 7 cos where t is in seconds. The point moves from
2
the point of equilibrium to maximum displacement in 1 second

(C) If a simple pendulum of length l0 has maximum angular displacement q0, then the maximum speed
q
of the bob is 2 gl 0 sin
2
(D) None of the above
Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 3Q.) [3 M (-1)]

(Single Correct Answer Type)
Paragraph for Question 16 to 18
Two particles A and B are performing SHM along x and y-axis respectively with equal amplitude and
frequency of 2 cm & 1Hz respectively. Equilibrium positions of the particles A and B are at the coordinates
(3 cm, 0) and (0, 4 cm) respectively. At t = 0, B is at its equilibrium position and moving towards the
origin, while A is nearest to the origin and moving away from the origin.
16. Equation of motion of particle A can be written as-
(A) x = (2 cm) cos 2pt (B) x = (3 cm) – (2 cm) cos 2pt
(C) x = (2 cm) sin 2pt (D) x = (3 cm) – (2 cm) sin 2pt
17. Equation of motion of particle B can be written as-
(A) y = (2 cm) cos 2pt (B) y = (4 cm) – (2 cm) cos 2pt
(C) y = (2 cm) sin 2pt (D) y = (4 cm) – (2 cm) sin 2pt
18. Minimum and maximum distance between A and B during the motion is-
(A) 5 cm and 61 cm (B) 3 cm and 7 cm

(C) 1 cm and 5 cm (D) 9 cm and 16 cm

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-IV
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) 2 Q. [8 M (for each entry +2(0)]
1. In the figure shown below block A is executing SHM on a smooth level ground. Another block B is
kept gently on A in any of the positions mentioned in column-I. The block B sticks to A. Match with
appropriate descriptions in column II.
B
A
Smooth
Column I Column II
(A) Block B placed on the block A when A is (P) Momentum of (A + B) can be assumed
at right extreme. to be conserved at the time block A is
placed on block B
(B) Block B placed on the block A when A is (Q) Mechanical energy is conserved.
at mean position.
(C) Block B placed on the block A when A is (R) Time period of SHM increases.
midway between extreme and mean. (S) Amplitude of SHM decreases.
2. Column I Column II
(A) A bob B hanging from a string A of (P) The acceleration of centre of mass of B
length 3m is projected to left at some time can be equal to g
with a speed of 10 m/s
B
(B) The plat form is pushed down by (Q) The force exerted by A on B can be zero
a distance 2x0 below mean and at some point
released x0 is compression in mean
B
A
position
(C) A spherical solid ball B is released (R) The speed of the body B varies sinusoidaly
on a perfectly rough spherical with time when force exerted by A on B
p
surface A as shown q = is not zero
3
B q
A
(D) Block B is released on a smooth (S) The motion of B is oscillatory

track A as shown
B
(T) The motion of B is periodic

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. Two particles P and Q describe simple harmonic motions of same period, same amplitude, along the
same line about the same equilibrium position O. When P and Q are on opposite sides of O at the same
distance from O they have the same speed of 1.2 m/s in the same direction, when their displacements are
the same they have the same speed of 1.6 m/s in opposite directions. The maximum velocity in m/s of
either particle is :
(A) 2.8 (B) 2.5 (C) 2.4 (D) 2
2. Two blocks of masses m and 4m lies on a smooth horizontal surface connected with a spring in its
natural length. Mass m is given velocity v0 through an impulse as shown in the diagram. Which of the
following is not true about subsequent motion
(A) Kinetic energy is maximum in ground frame and centre of mass (COM) frame simultaneously
(B) Value of maximum kinetic energy & minimum kinetic energy is same in COM frame & ground frame
(C) Minimum kinetic energy is zero in COM frame but non zero in ground frame
1
(D) Maximum and minimum kinetic energies of m in ground frame is respectively mv 20 and zero
2
3. A particle is performing simple harmonic motion with time period T. At an instant its speed is 60% of its
maximum value and is increasing. After an interval Dt its speed becomes 80% of its maximum value and
is decreasing. The smallest value of Dt in terms of T will be :-
T T 3T 3T
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 2 8 4
4. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the spring of stiffness k is in contact with the completely
elastic wall, and the compression in the spring is 'e'. The spring is compressed further by 'e' by displacing
the blocktowards left and is then released. If the collision between the block and the wall is completely
elastic then the time period of oscillations of the block will be:
2p m m
(A) (B) 2p
3 k k
p m p m
(C) (D)
3 k 6 k
5. A thin L-shaped glass tube is fixed in the vertical plane as shown. Initially, the left part of the tube
contains a column of water of length d. A valve at the bottom of the tube prevents the water from
moving. Suddenly, the valve is opened. Find the time water takes to move completely into the right part
of the tube. Neglect viscous forces.
o o
45 45
d d d d
(A) t = 2p (B) t = 2p (C) t = p 2g (D) t = p
2g 2g 2g

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
6. A solid sphere (m kg, R meter) placed on a horizontal rough plane, is attached to a spring S1 , fixed to a
light rod OA of length L meter ,as shown in the figure. The other end O of the rod is hinged to rotate in
the plane about vertical axis passing through it. A spring S 2 is fixed to the midpoint B of the rod. If the
spring constants of both springs are k Nm -1 each, then the angular frequency of oscillations of the mass
would be (in rad s -1 )
k 11k
(A) w = (B) w =
7m 28m
2k 2k
(C) w = (D) w =
7m 5m
7. Two particles of mass 3M and M, are connected by a massless spring of free length L and force
4
constant k. These masses are initially at rest L apart on a horizontal frictionless table. A particle of mass
M
moving with speed v along the line joining the two connected masses, collides with and sticks to the
4
3M
particle of mass . Find the amplitude A and period T with which each of the masses vibrate
4
v M v M M M
(A)A = (B) A = (C) T = 2p (D) T = p
8 2k 4 2k 2k 2k
8. The potential energy U of a particle is given by U = {20 + (x–4)2}J. Total mechanical energy of the
particle is 36 J. Select the correct alternative(s)
(A) the particle oscillates about point x=4 m
(B) the amplitude of the particle is 4m
(C) the kinetic energy of the particle at x=2 m is 12 J
(D) the motion of the particle is periodic but not simple harmonic
æ pö
9. A 20 gm particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions x1 = 2 sin 10t, x2 = 4 sin ç10t + ÷ along
3 è ø
same straight line. Where x1 and x2 are in metre and t is in sec.
(A) the displacement of the particle at t = 0 will be 2 3 m
(B) maximum speed of the particle will be 20 7 m/s
(C) magnitude of maximum acceleration of the particle will be 200 7 m/s2.
(D) Energy of the resultant motion will be 28 J.
10. The uniform solid cylinder rolls without slipping on the surface as shown. If the maximum compression
in spring is 15cm, the possible values of friction force acting on the cylinder during its motion is :
//////////////////////////////
3kg
200N/m
/////////////////////////////////////////////////
(A) 4N (B) 10N (C) 12N (D) 15N

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

Paragraph for Questions No. 11 and 12
A disc of mass M is connected with ideal spring of force constant k is released from unstreched position
of the spring, then the disc roll down the inclined plane. Friction is sufficient to prevent slipping.
11. What is the amplitude of and time period of oscillation respectively.

mg sin q m mg sin q 3m
(A) ,2p (B) ,2p
k k k 2k
2mg sin q 3m mg sin q m

(C) ,2p (D) ,2p
k 2k 2k k
12. Friction force at the mean position is
1 2
(A) mg cos q (B) mg cos q (C) Zero (D) mg sinq
3 3
SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question 2Q.[3(0)]
(upto second decimal place)
1. Find the natural angular frequency (in rad/s) of oscillation of the system as shown in figure. Pulleys are
massless and frictionless. Spring and string are also massless. Take spring constant as 100
N/m and mass m = 1 kg
2. A massless spring is suspended from a hook at the top. A small mass of 180 gm is suspended from the
bottom of the hook. At the equilibrium it is at 20 cm from ground. It is pulled down to distance 15 cm from
ground and released. Find the time (in sec) at which it is first at 25 cm from the ground. Take p2 = 10.
45cm
20cm
15cm

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. In the given figure, spring and pulleys are massless. Block A is performing SHM of amplitude 1m and
time period p sec. If block B remains at rest, then minimum value of coefficient of friction between
block B and surface will be µ. Fill 10µ in OMR sheet. (g = 10 m/s2)
B m A
2m
2. A solid sphere of mass m and radius R is resting on platform and sphere is free to rotate about it's axis.
Plate is given a displacement x = A sin(wt + f) along it's length as shown in figure. There is no slipping
2mw2 AR
between sphere and platform. If maximum torque acting on sphere is . Find b.
b
x=Asin(wt+ f)
3. A cart consists of a body of mass m and two wheels, each of mass m and radius R. The cart is attached
to a spring of constant k. The other end of the spring is fixed to a wall as shown in figure. If time period
m
of oscillation is b´ 2 p then find the value of b
k
m
k
R m
4. The axle of a uniform cylinder with mass m and radius R is connected to a spring with spring constant
k, as shown in the Fig. A horizontal board with mass m rests on top of the cylinder, and the board also
rests on top of a frictionless support near its left end.The system is slightly displaced from equilibrium.
There is no slipping between the cylinder and the board, or between the cylinder and the ground. The
11p2m
angular frequency of the oscillatory motion is p. The value of is .
k
m
frictionless m
k

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
5. A rod of mass m and length l is pivoted at a point O in a car whose acceleration towards left is a0. The
rod is free to oscillate in vertical plane. In the equilibrium state the rod remains horizontal when other
end is suspended by a spring of stiffness K. The time period of small oscillations of the rod is given by
2p
T= . Find the value of C and fill in OMR sheet. Given value : K = 20 N/m, a0= 10 m/s2, m = 1
C 3
kg, l = 1 m.
a0
K
O
SECTION-IV
1. The graph plotted between phase angle (f) and displacement of a particle from equilibrium position (y)
is a sinusoidal curve as shown below. Then the best matching is
Column A Column B
(A) K.E. versus phase angle curve (P)
(B) P.E. versus phase angle curve (Q)
(C) T.E. versus phase angle curve (R)
(D) Velocity versus phase angle curve (S)

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM TM JEE (Main + Advanced) 2021
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST
PHASECOURSE
: TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A man is walking under an inclined mirror at a constant velocity V m/s
along the X axis. If the mirror is inclined at an angle q with the horizontal y
then what is the velocity of the image?
(A) V sin qî + V cos qĵ (B) V cos qî + V sin qĵ
q
x
(C) V sin 2qî + V cos 2qˆj (D) V cos 2qî + V sin 2qˆj
r
2. A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror, along the direction given by, A = 2î - 3 ĵ + 4k̂ . Find the
r
unit vector along the reflected ray. Take normal to mirror along the direction of B = 3î - 6ˆj + 2k̂
- 94î + 237ˆj + 68k̂ - 94î + 68 ĵ - 237k̂ 3î + 6ˆj - 2k̂

(A) (B) (C) (D) None of these
49 29 49 29 7
3. Sunbeam makes an angle q = 40° with the surface of the Earth. At what angle to the horizontal should
we place a flat mirror so that a ray of sunlight after reflection falls on the bottom of a deep well?
(A) 40° (B) 50° (C) 80° (D) 65°
4. Two blocks each of mass m lie on a smooth table. They are attached to two
other masses as shown in the figure. The pulleys and strings are light. An
object O is kept at rest on the table. The sides AB & CD of the two blocks
are made reflecting. The acceleration of two images formed in those two
reflecting surfaces w.r.t. each other is:
(A) 5g / 6 (B) 5g / 3 (C) g / 3 (D) 17g / 6
5. A point source of light is placed in front of a plane mirror as shown in the S
figure. Determine the length of reflected patch of light on the screen S :- L
(A) L (B) 2L L L
3L L L
(C) (D)
2 2 S
Linked Comprehension Type (2 Para × 3Q.) (1 Para × 2Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 6 to 8
Whenever an object is placed on the bisector of two mirrors inclined at an angle q, it forms several
images which lies on a circle of radius equal to the distance between the vertex of mirror and the object

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
6. Draw graph between the area formed by joining all the images and object and the distance between the
vertex and object
Area
Area
Area
Area
(A) x (B) x
(C) x
(D) x
7. If the angle between the two mirror is 60°. Find the area of regular polygon bounded by the images
and the object
(A)
(
x2 4 3 + 1 ) (B) ç
æ 4 3 + 1ö
x (C)
3 3x2
(D)
5 3x2
4 è 4 ÷ø 2 4
8. If an object is placed between more than two mirror then the locus of a point going through all the
images and object will be
(A) Equation of sphere
(B) Family of concentric circle
(C) Family of a circle passing through one common point
(D) None of these
Paragraph for Questions no. 9 to 11
The figure shows time varying angle q which is given by equation q = (2 + 6t2). The mirror is rotating
about a horizontal axis in clockwise direction.
Object
(at rest)
5m
y
q
x
(-2,0) (0,0)
9. Locus of the image is :-

(A) x2 + y2 = 52 (B) (x + 2)2 + y2 = 52 (C) (x – 2)2 + y2 = 52 (D) x2 + (y – 2)2 = 52
10. Angular velocity of the image at t = 2 s :-
(A) 12 rad/s (B) 24 rad/s (C) 36 rad/s (D) 48 rad/s
11. Velocity of the image at t = 1 s :-
(A) 20 m/s (B) 40 m/s (C) 60 m/s (D) 120 m/s
Paragraph for Question no. 12 and 13
A mirror is mounted on a stand as shown. The mirror has negligible mass. On the other side, massless
arrow is mounted. The natural length of the spring is 1m. The whole system is on frictionless surface.
The two bodies are pulled out such that spring is extended by 10 cm and released.
k = 30 N/m
2kg 3kg

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
12. What is the minimum distance between arrow and its image during subsequent motion ?
(A) 1.6 m (B) 1.8 m (C) 2 m (D) 1.85 m
13. What is the maximum velocity of the image of the arrow as seen by a person on the ground ?
(A) 70 cm/s (B) 40 cm/s (C) 35 cm/s (D) 28 cm/s
SECTION-III
1. A plane mirror of semicircular shape (radius = 1m) is placed in y-z plane with its diameter along y-axis
and centre at origin. An object is placed on the axis of mirror at point (5, 0, 0). At a distance of 10 m
from plane mirror there is a wall also parallel to y-z plane. The ratio of area of spot of light on wall to
that of mirror is
r=1m
y
5m x
2. A plane mirror is placed such that it passes through points (0, 0, a), (0, a, 0) and (a, 0, 0). A light ray
æ1ö
traveling along negative x-axis is incident on it. After reflection, this ray makes an angle cos–1 ç ÷ with
ènø
x axis. Find n.
3. A point object is moving with a speed of 5 m/s infront of a mirror moving with a speed of 2.5 m/s as
shown in figure. The velocity of image of the object with respect to ground is 10 x m/s, then x is
2.5 m/s
37°
5 m/s
4. In figure shown AB is a plane mirror of length 40cm placed at a height 40cm from ground. There is a
light source S at a point on the ground. The minimum height and maximum height of a man (eye height)
required to see the image of the source if he is standing at a point P on ground shown in figure are x and
y respectively then find 3x + y (in meters).
A
40cm
B
40cm
S P
20cm 40cm

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
5. An elevator at rest which is at 10th floor of a building is having a plane mirror fixed to its floor. A
particle is projected with a speed 2 m/s and at 45° with the horizontal as shown in the figure. At the
very instant of projection, the cable of the elevator breaks and the elevator starts falling freely. What
will be the separation between the particle and its image 0.5 second after the instant of projection ?
SECTION-IV
1. Different arrangement of two mirror with incident light are shown in column-I and in column II
corresponding deviations are given.
Column I Column II
(A) (P) Total deviation after two reflection is 240° clockwise
(B) (Q) Total deviation after three reflection is 180°
(C) (R) Total deviation after two reflection is 60° anticlockwise
(D) (S) Total deviation after one reflection is 60° clockwise

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
JEE (Main
+ Advanced) 2021
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A light ray gets reflected from a pair of mutually perpendicular mirrors, not necessarily along axes. The
intersection point of mirrors is at origin. The incident light is along y = x + 2. If the light ray strikes both
mirrors in succession, then it may get reflected finally along the line:
(A) y = 2x – 2 (B) y = – x + 2 (C) y = – x – 2 (D) y = x – 4

2. Two plane mirrors of length L are separated by distance L and a man M2 is
standing at distance L from the connecting line of mirrors as shown in figure.
A man M1 is walking in a straight line at distance 2 L parallel to mirrors at
speed u, then man M2 at O will be able to see image of M1 for total time:
4L 3L
(A) (B)
u u
6L 9L
(C) (D)
u u
3. A student holds a hand plane mirror to observe the back of her head while standing in front of and
looking into a wall plane mirror. If she is standing 4 ft away from wall mirror in front of the wall mirror
and she holds the hand mirror vertically 1 ft behind her head, she will see the back of her head
approximately how far behind the wall mirror?
(A) 6 ft (B) 5 ft (C) 4 ft (D) 3 ft
4. A light ray is coming parallel to principal axis, the distance between ray and axis is equal to focal length
(as shown). Find the angle of deviation after reflection :-
\ \ \\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
N C
\
(A) 60° (B) 90° (C) 120° (D) small devitation

5. A converging beam of light having angle of convergence 4° is incident upon a convex mirror as shown.
Find the angle of convergence after reflection. Focal length of mirror is 10 cm.
f = 10
\\\\
\ \
\\\
\\\\
\\\\\
p cm
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
9 2°
2°
\\\
\\\
\\
\\\\
(A) 0.5° (B) 1° (C) 1.5° (D) 2°

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
6. A plane mirror and a spherical mirror of focal length f is arranged as given. A point object O is placed
between them, the value of x so that final image coincide the object (d > 2f) is :
\ \ \ \\
\\\\
\\\
\
\\\
\\\ \\ \\\\\\\\\
O
\\
x
\\ \\
\ \\
\
\\\\
\\\\\\\\
d
(A) (B) d ( d - 2f ) (C) 2d ( d - 2f ) (D) 3d ( d - 2f )
2
7. A linear object AB is placed along the axis of a concave mirror. The object is
moving towards the mirror with speed U. The speed of the image of the point A
is 4U and the speed of the image of B is also 4U. If the center of the line AB is
at a distance L from the mirror then find out the length of the object.
(A) 3L/2 (B) 5L/3 (C) L (D) None
8. Choose the CORRECT statement(s).
1/v 1/v
1/u 1/u
concave mirror convex mirror

(A) Concave mirror can not form erect magnified image of an object placed in front of it.
(B) Concave mirror can form inverted magnified image of an object placed in front of it.
(C) Convex mirror can not form real image of an object placed in front of it.
(D) Convex mirror can not form magnified image of an object placed in front of it.
9. For a concave mirror, graph of square of magnification and image distance from pole is given for real
object. Choose the correct statement(s).
m2
b a
c
v(in cm)
15 30 60
(A) This graph is hyperbola. (B) length a must be equal to length b.

(C) radius of concave mirror is 60 cm (D) the length c will be half of length a.

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
10. A spherical mirror forms image of a real object as shown, choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
Real object
3mm
30cm Principal axis of

spherical mirror
6mm
Image
(A) Mirror is concave of radius 40 cm

(B) Mirror of convex of radius 40 cm
(C) Mirror is 30 cm from object along principal axis
(D) Mirror is 60 cm from image along principal axis
11. An object & a concave mirror is moving with velocities uiˆ & 2uiˆ respectively 2u
as shown in figure. The image formed by the concave mirror :-
(A) will have speed greater than the speed of the object u
O x
(B) may have speed greater than the speed of the object
(C) will have speed greater than the speed of the mirror
(D) must move away from the mirror.
1
Sign convention is taken as +ve direction in the direction of light ray and the graph is drawn between
u
and v for a spherical mirror.
1
u
—1
(0.5m )
P ® v
12. What is the focal length of the mirror?

(A) –50cm (B) –200 cm (C) +200 cm (D) +50 cm
13. The coordinates of point P are
(A) (50cm, 0 cm) (B) (100cm, 0 cm) (C) (200cm,0cm) (D) data insufficient
14. Magnitude of slope of curve at point P
(A) 1 m–2 (B) 0.25 m–2 (C) 2 m–2 (D) data insufficient

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question 2Q. [3(0)]
1. A block of mass 'm' is attached to a spring. Block is released from rest,
k
when spring is in natural length. Block is along the principal axis of
concave mirror and size of block is very small. When spring is in m ROC = 20 cm
natural length then block is at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror,
distance (in cm) in which the image formed by mirror oscillates is
(mass of the block = 5 × 10–2 kg, spring constant k = 20 N/m.)
2. A plane mirror is placed 25 cm away from a concave spherical mirror perpendicularly to the principal
axis of the concave mirror. What should be the distance (in cm) in front of concave mirror, where we
place a candle if its images formed by the two mirror independently are at the same distances from the
candle? The radius of the concave mirror is 40 cm. (Consider images formed by single reflection only.)
SECTION-III
1. When an object is placed at a distance of 25 cm from a concave mirror the magnification is m. The
object is moved 15 cm further away from the mirror with respect to the earlier position, and the
magnification becomes m2. If m1/m2 = 4, then find the focal length (in dm) of the mirror (Assume image
is real and m1, m2 are numerical values of transverse magnification of the image).
2. The distance between object and its erect but diminished image formed due to a spherical mirror is 3
times the distance between image and the focus while distance between object and focus is 4 x. The
distance of object from mirror is nx. Find the value of n.
3. A handheld mirror contains a plane mirror on one of its side and a concave mirror of radius of curvature
of 30 cm on its other side. You hold the plane mirror 10 cm from your face and notice a spot. By what
factor will the image of the spot be enlarged if you turn the mirror, but still keep it at a distance of 10 cm
from your face?
SECTION-IV
1. Plane mirror are arranged parallel to each other as shown in column 'I and the number of images formed
by the combination is in column II.
Column I Column II
(A) (P) 3
(B) 3x
(Q) 2
x
(C) x
x
(R) ¥
30°
(D) 30°
(S) 0

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
JEE (Main
+ Advanced) 2021
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1 b
1. For a concave mirror, graph of 2 and u for real object is drawn. What is the value of
v a
2
1/v
(0,a)
(0,b)
u
(-R, 0 )
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 2 2 8
6
2. Radius of curvature of a concave mirror varies as R = cm .Initially the object was at a distance
t - 5t + 6
2
100 cm from the pole as shown. At t = 0 the object started moving with velocity v = 2tiˆ ( cm / s ) . Find
the speed of image at time t = 3 sec. Mirror is moving with constant velocity -3iˆ (cm/s). ( )
\ \ \\
\\\\\\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\
O V
\\\
(-3i)
100
(A) 12 cm/s (B) 20 cm/s (C) 5 cm/s (D) 24 cm/s
3. Refractive index of a transparent slab varies as m = kx where x is the distance from origin. Time taken
by the light to travel the slab of thickness t (as shown in the figure) :-
Light ray
t2k t2k tk 2tk

(A) (B) (C) (D)
2c c c 2c

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
4
4. A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive index of . It is surrounded by a medium of
3
refractive index 2. A light ray is incident at the mid-point of one end of the rod as shown in the figure.
The incident angle q for which the light ray grazes along the wall of the rod is :-
æ1ö æ 1 ö æ 2 ö æ 3ö
(A) sin–1 ç 2 ÷ (B) sin–1 ç ÷ (C) sin–1 ç(D) sin–1 çç 2 ÷÷ ÷
è ø è 3ø è ø è 3ø
5. A block of mass 1 kg is moving on a rough horizontal surface along the principal axis of a concave
mirror as shown. At t = 0, it is 15m away from the pole, moving with a velocity of 7m/s. At t = 1sec, it's
57
image is at m away from the pole on left hand side of the mirror. Where will the image be at t = 3sec.
13
////
/////
//////////////////////
/// ///
f=3m
123
(A) 5m to left of mirror (B) m to left of mirror
23
138
(C) m to left of mirror (D) 7.5m to left of mirror.
23
6. A hemispherical bowl of radius 10 cm is filled with liquid of refractive index m = 4/3. A glass plate of
refractive index 1.5 is placed on the top of bowl. If for the observer above the plate the shift in position
of a point P on the bottom is 3 cm find the thickness of glass plate.
(A) 1.5 cm (B) 1 cm (C) 7 cm (D) 10 cm

7. A point luminous object (O) is at a distance h from front face of a blass slab of width d and of refractive
index n. On the back face of slab is a reflecting plane mirror. An observer sees the image of object in
mirror as shown in figure. Distance of image from front face as seen by observer will be :-
Observer
O
h
2d d
(A) h + (B) 2h + 2d (C) h + d (D) h +
n n

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

8. A concave spherical mirror has a radius of curvature of 50 cm. Find two positions of an object for which
the image is four times as large as the object.
75
(A) cm from mirror (B) 125 cm from mirror
4
125
(C) cm from mirror (D) 32 cm from mirror
4
9. The image of an object kept at a distance 20 cm in front of a concave mirror is found to coincide with
itself. If a glass slab (m=1.5) of thickness 3 cm is introduced between the mirror and the object, then in
order that the final image again coincides with the object :
(A) the mirror should be displaced away from the object
(B) the mirror should be displaced towards the object
(C) the magnitude of displacement is 1 cm
(D) the magnitude of displacement is 0.5 cm
10. The angle of deviation (d) vs angle of incidence (i) is plotted for a prism. d
Choose the CORRECT statement(s).
(A) The angle of prism is 60° 65°
(B) The refractive index of the prism is n = Ö3 60°
(C) For deviation to be 65° the angle of incidence i1 = 55°
i
(D) for minimum deviation, the angle of emergence e = 60°. i1 60° 70°
Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 3Q.) (1 Para × 2Q.) [3 M (-1)]
In the diagram shown, principal axis of each concave mirror is inclined at 1° with respect to x-axis.
Object O is placed at the origin of x-y coordinate system. The distance of object from mirror M-1 is
10cm. Separation between the two mirrors M-1 & M-2 is 40 cm. Focal length of each mirror is 20 cm.
Then :-
y
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
f = 20 cm \\\\ f = 20 cm
\\\
\\\
\\\\
1°
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
x
10cm O 1°
\\ \
\\\
\\
\\\
\\
M-1 M-2
40cm
11. The coordinates of image due to reflection from mirror M-2 is :-
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö æ p ö
(A) ç -30cm, cm ÷ (B) ç -30cm, - cm ÷ (C) ç -30cm, cm ÷ (D) None of these
è 3 ø è 3 ø è 3 ø
12. The coordinates of image due to reflection from mirror M-1 is :-
æ p ö æ p ö æ 2p ö
(A) ç -20 cm, cm ÷ (B) ç -20 cm, - cm ÷ (C) ç -30 cm, - cm ÷ (D) None of these
è 9 ø è 9 ø è 9 ø
13. Taking first reflection at mirro M-2 and then at mirror M-1, the coordinate of image after two reflection
is :-
æ 2p ö æ 2p ö æ p ö
(A) ç 0, cm ÷ (B) ç 0, - cm ÷ (C) ç 0, cm ÷ (D) None of these
è 9 ø è 9 ø è 9 ø

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
Paragraph for Questions 14 and 15

Rear view mirrors
Rear view mirrors in automobiles are generally convex. Suppose a car A moves with a constant speed
of 40.0 kilometre per hour on a straight level road and is followed by another car B moving with the
constant speed 60.0 kilometer per hour. At a given instant of time, we denote : [INPhO-2012]
x : distance of the car B from the mirror of car A,
y : distance of the car B from A as seen by the driver of A in the mirror,
vx : speed of approach of B relative to A and
vy : speed of approach of B as seen in the mirror of A.
14. Obtain an expression for vy in terms of x, vx and the radius of curvature R of the convex mirror used as
the rear view mirrors in the car A.
3R2 R2 R2 R2
(A) v y = v x (B) v y = vx (C) v y = vx (D) v y = vx
(2x - 2R)2 (2x + R)2 (2x - R)2 (x - R)2
15. If R = 2.0 m, what is the speed of approach of B in kilometre per hour as seen by the driver of A in the
mirror for x = 2.0 m ?
(A) 2.22 km/h (B) 3 km/h (C) 4.62 km/h (D) 6.87 km/h
SECTION-III
1. A flat glass slab of thickness 6 cm and refractive index 1.5 is placed in front of a plane mirror. An
observer is standing behind the glass slab and looking at the mirror. The actual distance of the observer
from the mirror is 50 cm. The observer sees the image at a distance of d1 cm from himself. Now the slab
is removed and the observer sees his image in plane mirror at a distance of d2 cm from himself. What is
the value of d2 – d1?
1 1
2. Figure shows the variation of v versus u for a concave mirror for real object. The line y = 3x cuts the
graphs at an ordinate 1.5 m–1. The radius of the mirror is
1
|v|
1
O |u|
SECTION-IV
1. In column–I, figure shows the optical (or principal) axis XX', and position of real object O and image I.
Match this with relevant parameters of spherical mirror in column–II
Column–I Column–II
I
(A) X X' (P) concave mirror, virtual image
O
I
O
(B) X X' (Q) concave mirror, real image
O
I
(C) X X' (R) convex mirror, virtual image
O
(D) X X' (S) concave mirror, magnified image
I

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A pole 6m high stands amidst a lake having water to a depth of 2m. If the sun is at angle of inclination
370, what will be the length of the shadow in water?
(A) 4.5 m (B) 6.8 m (C) 5.3 m (D) 6m
2. A beam of light of width t is incident on an air-water boundary at an angle of incidence 45°. The width
of the beam in water is (Refractive index of water =m)
2m 2 - 1 2m 2 - 1 m2 - t
(A) ( m - 1) t (B) .t (C) .t (D) .t
2m m m
3. Consider a right angled prism, if the ray enters at grazing incidence and just fails to emerge on the facing
side. The value of refractive index of the prism is–
mair=1 mair=1
1 90°
(A) (B) 2
2
(D) sin -1 ( 2 )
æ 1 ö
(C) sin -1 ç ÷
è 2ø
4. The cross–section of a transparent prism having a refractive index of 2 is a right triangle with the
angle of refraction of 90° and the acute angles of 30° and 60°. Find the angle of deflection of a ray
incident normal to the steeper face of the prism.
(A) 45° (B) 90° (C) 180° (D) None of these
5. In a container, water level is rising with a constant rate of 2m/s. The velocity
(in m/s) of image as observed by eye is [ given m = 4/3]
2m
2m/s
1 1
(A) upward (B) down ward m
2 2 2m
object
(C) 2 upward (D) 2 down ward
6. A ray of light is incident at the glass-water interface at an angle i. It emerges finally parallel to the surface
of water, then the value of µg would be :-
µw = 4/3
Water
Glass
///
(A) (4/3) sin i (B) 1/sin i (C) 4/3 (D) 1 ///
///
///
7. A ray of light strikes a plane mirror at an angle of incidence 45° as shown in 45° ///
/
the figure. After reflection, the ray passes through a prism of refractive index
1.5, whose apex angle is 4°. The angle through which the mirror should be 2
88° ° 90°
rotated if the total deviation of the ray is to be 90° is :-
(A) 1° clockwise (B) 1° anticlockwise 4°
(C) 2° clockwise (D) 2°anticlockwise

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

8. For the system shown in the figure, the image formed by the 2u
concave mirror
n=3/2
(A) may have speed greater than the speed of the object u
x
(B) will have positive velocity. O
(C) may have speed greater than the speed of the mirror
(D) sign of velocity will depend upon thickness of slab.
9. A ray of light from a denser medium strikes a rarer medium at an
angle of incidence i. The reflected and refracted rays make an angle
of 90º with each other. The angles of reflection and refraction are i
and r. The critical angle is :- i r
(A) sin–1 (cot r)

r’
(B) sin–1 (tan i)
(C) sin–1 (tan r)
(D) tan–1(sin i)
10. A monochromatic light is incident on a prism as shown. Deviation suffered by ray varies with angle of
incidence as shown. Assuming refraction takes place at 1 & 2. Choose the correct alternative(s).
d(deviation)
A
i e
1 µ=2 2
i
i1 i0
(A) i1 can be equal to zero if A = 30°

(B) If angle of incidence is increased by 2°, then angle of emergence may decrease by less than 2°.
(C) If angle of incidence is increased by 2°, then angle of emergence may decrease by more than 2°.
(D) If angle of incidence is increased by 2°, then angle of emergence may increase by equal to 2°.
11. In the figure shown O, O1 and O2 are three observers respectively in
O2
three different medium. Choose the CORRECT option(s). m=1.8 1.5m
(A) According to O the apparent distance between
0.5 m
m=1.5
O1 & O2 is 3.5 m O1
0.5 m
(B) O observes O1 to be 4 m away
1.5m
(C) O observes O2 to be 4 m away m=3 O
(D) O2 observes O1 to be 2.1 m away

12. A ray of light strikes the surface AB of a rectangular prism at an angle of
incidence equal to critical angle of prism-air interface as shown then (neglect A B
normal reflections) :- 60° 90°
(A) Angle of deviation of emergent ray with respect to the incident µ= Ö2
ray will be 60° ACW. 30°

(B) Ray after refraction from surface AB will be parallel to the base AC. C
(C) Angle of incidence is same as angle of emergence.
(D) Total three refraction will take place.

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

(Single Correct Answer Type) observer
Shown below a system in which one mole of helium gas is filled in a vessel
1m
with a fixed piston made up of glass having refractive index 4/3 (constant).
The gas is supplied with heat at a constant rate of 1000 J/s. The refractive
T 8m
index of He varies with temperature as m = .
300
[Initially the gas is at room temperature of 300 K] Black spot
13. The magnitude of the velocity of the point black spot as seen by an observer outside the vessel when
T=400K is
(A) 1.2 m/s (B) 1.6 m/s (C) 2.4 m/s (D) 0.72 m/s
14. Maximum distance traversed by spot as seen by observer is
(A) 2m (B) 8m (C) 1m (D) 4m
15. If the gas is replaced by CO2, magnitude of velocity of black spot as observed by an observer outside the
vessel when T=400 K is
(A) 1.2 m/s (B) 1.6 m/s (C) 2.4 m/s (D) 0.72 m/s
Matching List Type (4 × 4) 1Q.[3 M (–1)]
16. Diagram shows a bird B and a fish F moving in two different medium of refractive index 1.5 and 2 with
speed 10 m/s and 5 m/s respectively. At the given instant bird is located at height 5m above the interface
while fish is located at depth of 10m. List-I indicates various parameters while list-II gives its values.
Match them correctly :-
5m/s
µ1 = 1.5 h = 5m
d = 10m
µ2 = 2
10m/s
List-I List-II
50
(P) Seperation of fish as observed by bird (1) unit
3
(Q) Seperation of bird as observed by fish (2) 12.5 unit
10
(R) Speed of fish as observed by bird (3) unit
3
(S) Speed of bird as observed by fish (4) 2.5 unit
Code :-
P Q R S
(A) 3 2 1 4
(B) 2 1 4 3
(C) 4 1 2 3
(D) 1 2 3 4

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
1. A convergent beam is incident on two slabs placed in contact as shown in figure. Where will the rays
finally converge from the interface of B and air ?
2. Figure shows two spherical surface of radii R and 2R separating three transparent media of refractive
index µ = 4, µ = 2 and µ = 1. A ray of light travelling in medium µ = 1 is incident on outer sphere
tangentially. If the net deviation suffered by light ray in clockwise direction is b (in degree) then find
value of b/30.
µ=1 µ=2
µ=4
R
2R
3. In the figure shown a thick plano convex lens is silvered at both the surfaces. A point source of light 'S'
is inside the lens. The radius of curvature of the curved surface is 8/3 cm and the distance of 'S' from the
curved surface is 2 cm. If the images formed due to direct reflections from the plane and curved surface
coincide then find the thickness (in cm) of the lens at the middle.
llll
l
llll
llllll
S
llllllllllllll
llll
llll
l

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
JEE (Main
+ Advanced) 2021
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A vessel with a silvered concave bottom is filled with water of refractive index 4/3. A parallel beam of
light is incident on the water surface as shown in figure. What is position of final image from water
surface:-
30 cm
\\\\\ \\\
\ \\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
R = 20 cm
(A) 15 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 10 cm (D) 7.5 cm
2. A ray of light passes through a rectangular slab of thickness t. The variation of lateral shift (d) with angle
of incidence (i) is
d d d d
t t t t
(A) (B) (C) (D)

o i o i o i o i
p/2 p/2 p/2 p/2
3. An object is moving with a constant velocity in a vessel containing layers of immiscilide liquids of
different refractive indices as shown in figure. Variation of velocity with time (until object comes out) is
best represented by :
\\\
\\\\\\
\ \ \\
\
\ \\
\\\
\\\\
\
\
\\\\
m=1
m=1.6
m=1.4
m=1.2
v
m=1 o0
v v
(A) (B)
t t
v v
(C) (D)
t t

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
4. A ray of lgiht ab passing through air, enters a liquid of refractive index µ1, at the boundary XY. In the
liquid, the ray is shown as bc. The angle between ab and bc is d (angle of deviation). The ray then
passes through a rectangular slab ABCD of refractive index µ2 (µ2 > µ1), and emerges from the slab as
ray de. The angle between XY and AB is q. The angle between ab and de is-
a
air
A b
X q Y
µ1
c
D B
µ2
d
C
e
æµ ö -1 æ µ1 ö
(A) d (B) d + q (C) d + sin -1 ç 1 ÷ (D) d + q - sin ç µ ÷
è µ2 ø è 2ø
5. A pendulum of length l is free to oscillate in vertical plane about point O in a medium of refractive index
m. An observer in air is viewing the bob of the pendulum directly from above. The pendulum is performing
small oscillations about its equilibrium position. The equation of trajectory of bob as seen by observer is
O x-axis
l
m
y-axis
2
x2 y2 x2 y2 æ lö
(A) x2 + y2 = l2 (B) + =1 (C) l 2 + =1 (D) x2 + y2 = ç ÷
(l / µ ) 2 l 2 ( l m) 2 è µø
6. A ray of light incident from air on a glass plate of refractive index n is partly reflected and partly
refracted at the two surfaces of the glass. The displacement y0 in the figure is
q
y0
2d sin q 2d sin q 2d n 2 - sin 2 q

n2 - sin 2 q 2 1 sin q
sin q - 2
n

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
7. In the figure ABC is the cross section of a right angled prism and BCDE is the cross section of a glass
slab. The value of q so that light incident normally on the face AB does not cross the face BC is
[Given sin–1 (3/5) = 37º]
(A) q £ 37º (B) q < 37º (C) q £ 53º (D) q < 53º
8. A ray of light is incident on a equilateral triangular prism parallel to its base as shown in the figure. The
ray just fails to emerge from the face AC. If m be the refractive index of the prism then the incorrect
relation(s) is/are :
A
-1 æ 1 ö p -1 æ 1 ö -1 æ 1 ö p
(A) 2 sin çç ÷÷ = (B) sin çç ÷÷ + sin çç ÷÷ =
èmø 3 èmø è 2m ø 6
-1 æ 1 ö -1 æ 1 ö p -1 æ m ö -1 æ m ö p B C
(C) sin ç
çm÷ ÷ + sin ç ÷ =
ç 2m ÷ 3 (D) sin ç ÷ + sin ç ÷ =
è ø è ø è2ø è4ø 3
9. A light ray is incident on lower medium boundary at an angle 30° with the m3=2
B
normal. Which of following statement is/are TRUE?
(A) If m2 > 2 then total deviation is 60° m2
(B) If m2 < 2 then total deviation is 60° A
m1=4
(C) If m2 > 2 then total deviation is 120° 30°
(D) If m2 < 2 then total deviation is 120°
10. The refractive index of the medium within a certain region x > 0, y > 0, changes continuously with y. A
thin light ray travelling in air in the x-direction strikes the medium at right angles and moves through the
medium along a circular arc of radius R.
y
Medium
Air
x
(A) Refractive index of medium varies with y as

y
(B) Refractive index of medium varies with y as

y
3R
(C) If refractive index of medium can increase upto a value n = 2.5, the maximum value of y is
5
(D) If refractive index of medium can increase upto a value n = 2.5, the maximum value of y is 5R

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
11. In the diagram shown, light is incident on the interface between media 1 (refractive index n1) and 2
(refractive index n2) at angle slightly greater than the critical angle, and is totally reflected. The light is
then also totally reflected at the interface between media 1 and 3 (refractive index n3), after which it
travels in a direction opposite to its initial direction. The media must have a refractive indices such that
media 1
media 2
n1 n2
media 3 n3
(A) n1 < n2 < n3 (B) n12 - n32 > n22 (C) n12 - n22 < n23 (D) n12 + n22 > n23
Paragraph for Question No. 12 to 14
Frustrated TIR (F-TIR) : In optics, when light rays traveling in a denser medium strike at medium
boundary at an angle greater than critical angle, TIR occurs and a surface wave which is called Evanescent
wave forms in rarer medium. An evanescent wave is a near-field standing wave (waves which do not
carry energy) with an intensity that exhibits exponential decay with distance (less than wavelength)
from the boundary at which the wave is formed.
Imagine that a beam of light traveling within a block of glass is internally reflected at a boundary.
Presumably if you pressed another piece of glass against the first, the air-glass interface would be made
to vanish and the beam would then propagate onward undisturbed. Furthermore, this transition from
total to no reflection occurs gradually as the air film between them thinned out as explained above, when
third medium with a higher refractive index (than the low-index second medium) is placed within less
than several wavelengths distance from the interface between the first medium and the second medium,
the evanescent wave will be different from the one under "ordinary conditions" and it will pass energy
across the second into the third medium (evanescent wave coupling). This process is called "frustrated"
total internal reflection (FTIR) and is very similar to quantum tunneling. An example of application of
this principle is automatic Wiper speed control found in high end cars like Skoda, Audi, BMW etc.
Figure shows an example of an optical system designed to detect the amount of water present on the
windshield of a car to adjust the wiper speed. As shown in this figure, we can use the windshield as a
waveguide to guide the light from a source located at one end (bottom of the windshield) to a detector
located in the opposite end. The light suffers total-internal reflection (TIR) at the glass-air interface.
However, when rain drops are present, some of the light will suffer frustrated TIR escaping outside the
waveguide. Since we know the power of the light source, a given drop in power can be correlated to the
amount of water present and used to adjust the wiper speed.
Frustrated
TIR
Detector
Rain drop
TIR
q
TIR
Wiper speed control system

Source

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
12. Choose the CORRECT statement.

(A) The energy carried by evanescent wave is zero in both TIR and FTIR.
(B) The energy carried by evanescent wave is non-zero in both TIR and FTIR.
(C) The energy carried by evanescent wave is zero in TIR and non-zero in FTIR.
(D) The energy carried by evanescent wave is non-zero in TIR and zero in FTIR.
13. In the following systems which should not be based on FTIR?
(A) Allen student card attendance system (B) Thumb attendance system
(C) Finger print scanner (D) Multi touch screen
14. For the wiper speed control system to work, the angle of incidence on the glass air interface is q, then
m m
(A) q < sin -1 æç water ö÷ (B) q > sin -1 æç water ö÷
è m glass ø è m glass ø
-1 æ m air ö -1 æ m water ö -1 æ m ö
(C) sin ç m ÷ < q < sin ç m ÷ (D) q > sin ç air ÷
è glass ø è glass ø è m glass ø
An object P is placed on the glass slab A, which is 90 cm thick with refractive index 3/2. A container B
of thickness 25 cm having water of refractive index 4/3 is sandwitched between glass slab A and a
concave mirror C of radius of curvature 70 cm.
15. As a result of first refraction, find the distance of image from glass-water interface
(A) 50 cm (B) 60 cm (C) 75 cm (D) 80 cm
16. Second image will be formed after reflection from the concave mirror, the distance of second image
from the mirror will be
(A) 57.50 cm (B) 52.50 cm (C) 27.5 cm (D) 32.5 cm
17. The distance of final image from the object P, is
(A) 70.2 cm (B) 68.25 cm (C) 62.25 cm (D) 39.37 cm
SECTION-III
1. An aquarium is bifurcated by a thin sheet of transparent material as shown in the figure. Each of the two
portions contains different kinds of liquid (refractive indices m1 = 4/3 and m2= 27/20 respectively). Two
fishes A and B swim along each other with their line of approach perpendicular to the interface. One of
the side walls is a plane mirror. The velocity of separation of the two images of the fish B that are being
observed by the fish ‘A’ in cm/s is:
Plain mirror
V V
A B
m1 m2
[V=4.05 cm/s]

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
2. A small mirror is placed in a bowl of water, making an angle f = 13.5° with the water surface as shown
æ2ö
in figure. A beam of light strikes the water at angle q = cos–1 ç ÷ from its surface and subsequently
è3ø
reflects from the mirror. At what angle (in degree) from the water surface does the ray emerge from the
water?
SECTION-IV
1. Match the following :-
Column-I Column-II
A
45°
(A) µ=1.5 (P) At surface AC TIR will take place
B q q
C
A
q
60°
(B) µ= 3 (Q) At surface AC light will be refracted
B q q
C
45°
45°
(C) µ= 2 (R) Ray refracted at AB will be parallel to base BC
B q q
C
i=60°
(D) µ= 2 (S) Ray refracted at AB will not be parallel to base BC
B 30° 30° C
(T) None of these

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. In the given figure ABC is a right angled isosceles prism kept in air. A ray of light is incident normally
as shown. Refractive index of prism is varying with time t as m = (1 + 0.4t), here t is in seconds. The
angular velocity of the emergent ray at t = 1 second is :-
A
B C
(A) 1.2 rad/second (B) 1 rad/second (C) 2 rad/second (D) 1.5 rad/second
2. A point object is placed at a distance of 3R from point P on glass hemisphere
of radius R. If refractive index of hemisphere is 1.5 then position of its image
from C is :
15 16
(A) R to the right (B) R to the right
2 3
8
(C) 7.5R to the left (D) R to the left
15
3. Which of these actions will move the real image point P' farther from the boundary ?
(1) Decrease the index of refraction n. (2) Increase the distance S.
(3) Decrease the radius of curvature R.
Air n
P'
R
P
S S'
(A) 1, 2, 3 (B) 1 only (C) 2 & 3 only (D) 2 only

4. A 20 cm thick planoconcave lens is placed on a paper on which flower is drawn. How far above its
actual position does the flower appear to an observer looking down normally from top ?
Observer
air
R=20cm
µ=3/2
t=20cm
(A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 50 cm (D) None of these
5. A double convex lens, made of a material of refractive index m3, is placed inside two liquids of refractive
indices m1 and m2, as shown m1 > m3 > m2. A wide, parallel beam of light is incident on the lens from the
left. The lens will give rise to :–
(A) a single convergent beam
(B) two different convergent beams
(C) two different divergent beams
(D) a convergent and a divergent beam

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
6. There is a small black dot at the centre C of a solid glass sphere of refractive index m, when seen from
outside, the dot will appear to be located
(A) away from the C for all values of m.
(B) at C for all values of m.
(C) at C for m=1.5, but away from C for m ¹ 1.5
(D) at C for 2 < m < 1.5
7. A point object O is placed at a distance of 20 cm in front of an equi-convex lens (amg = 1.5) of focal
length 10 cm . The lens is placed on a liquid of refractive index 2 as shown. Image will be formed at a
distance h from lens. The value of h is :-
20cm
m=2
(A) 5 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 40 cm

8. A right angled isosceles prism is used in air (µair = 1) for reflecting back a ray as shown. This is possible
if refractive index of prism (µ) :
(A) m = 1.25 (B) m = 1.35 (C) m = 1.50 (D) m = 1.65

9. A lens forms a blurred image of a point object on a screen as shown in figure.
Which of the following can lead to a sharp image on the screen?
(A) By moving the screen towards lens.
(B) By moving the object towards the lens. Object
(C) By using a lens of larger focal length.
(D) By using a lens of smaller focal length. Screen
10. An object of length 1 cm is placed on a principle axis of an equiconvex lens of radii 5 cm. Refractive
index of medium of the lens is 1.5. Distance between the lens and object is 20 cm. Space between the
lens and object is filled with medium of two different refractive index 2 and 1, lens being placed in the
medium of refractive index 1. Boundary of both medium is mid-way between the object and lens as
shown in figure.
1cm m=2 m=1 m=1

1.5
10cm 10cm
(A) The image will be formed at distance of 7.5 cm from the optical centre
(B) The image will be formed at distance of 20/3 cm from the optical centre
(C) The size of the image is 0.5 cm
(D) The size of the image is 0.4 cm

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
11. When light rays pass from an optically denser medium through an optically less denser medium as
shown below, which is/are possible?
(A) (B)
(C) (D)

If a ray is incident normally on a mirror, the ray retraces its former path and final image of the object
forms on the object itself.
12. Radius of curvature of spherical surface, for which image forms on the object itself will be
//////////
////
////
//
///
///
////
m=3/2
////////
O
/

13. If amount of liquid in curved part of the mirror is very small, focal length of mirror is 10 cm, the value of
x for which final image forms on the object itself

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
14. Radius of curvature of spherical surface is 20 cm. If image of the object forms on the object itself. The
value of x is

Paragraph for Question 15 and 16
Consider a right angled prism as shown. The light ray is incident on its left face at an angle i and emerges
at an angle e. When we successively apply snell's law at both faces, we get
sin2i + sin2e = µ2
If we plot sin i on x-axis and sin e on y-axis, this is a equation of circle with radius µ. Study of this circle
gives some interesting insight into behaviour of this prism. If we draw a square of side 2 × 2 as shown
the parts of circle that lie outside the square represent the case of total internal reflection because at the
point of intersection either sin i = 1 or sin e = 1. The negative values of sin i and sin e refer to the cases
where the incident or the emergent ray is above the normal.
sin e
e
i r2
r1
sin i
Situation Graph
15. Point on the circle which corresponds to minimum deviation is obtained at :-
(A) At an angle q = sin -1 æç 1 ö÷ with positive sin i axis

èmø
æ1ö
(B) At an angle q = cos -1 ç ÷ with positive sin i axis
èmø
(C) Intersection of circle with positive sin i axis
(D) At an angle q = 45° with positive sin i axis
16. For the given situation, which quadrant of graph is representing the situation which can be achieved.
(A) 1st qudrant (B) IIIrd quadrant (C) IVth quadrant (D) All of these

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
1. A curved thick glass surface is silvered at curved face & not silvered on plane surface. Object is placed
at A as shown in figure. Considering P (pole of the silvered surface) as origin. If x - co-ordinate of final
image is (2n) cm then find n.
y
x
P
A
4 cm 4 cm
m=2
R = 16 cm
-1 æ 1 ö
2. Light falls on a prism of angle cos ç ÷ . If the minimum value of refractive index of the prism-material,
è8ø
k
so that light entering one face may not exit through the other is , then k = ?
7
3. A point object O is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a mirror in a medium containing water (µw = 4/3).
In between the object and mirror a 3 cm vacuum is created by some means. The light ray undergoes two
refractions and then reflection at mirror and then again two refractions. Find the distance 'l' (in cm) of
final image from the mirror. Fill 'l/2' in OMR sheet.
3 cm µw = 4/3
/ / / // / / / / / // / / / / / // /
O
µ= 1
10 cm
SECTION-IV
1. A bird in air is diving vertically over a tank with speed 5 cm/s, base of tank is silvered. A fish in the
tank is rising upward along the same line with speed 2 cm/s. Water level is falling at rate of 2 cm/s.
[Take : mwater = 4/3]
Column I Column II
(cm/s)
(A) Speed of the image of fish as seen by the bird directly (P) 8
(B) Speed of the image of fish formed after reflection in (Q) 6
the mirror as seen by the bird
(C) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking upwards (R) 3
(D) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking (S) 4
downwards in the mirror

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. When a thin convergent glass lens (µg = 1.5) of power +5 D is immersed in a liquid of refractive index
µl it acts as a divergent lens of focal length 100 cm. Then µl is :
(A) 4/3 (B) 5/3 (C) 5/4 (D) 6/5
2. If final image formed after two refractions through the lens of refractive index 1.5 and one reflection
from the mirror is forming at same point ‘O’ then d is equal to :-
I II
80cm
O
d
10cm 20cm R=30cm
(A) 100 cm (B) 120 cm (C) 90 cm (D) 80 cm

3. Given set-up which is shown in figure, converges parallel beam of light at point P1. If the surrounding
medium of above set-up is replaced by transparent fluid of refractive index mm = 2, then same parallel
beam converge at point P2 then distance P1P2 is
f=10cm
air air
m=3/2
(A) 70 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 10 cm

4. In the diagram shown, the lens is moving towards the object with a velocity V m/s and the object is also
moving towards the lens with the same speed. What is speed of the image with respect to earth when the
object is at a distance 2f from the lens ? (f is the focal length) :-
v
v
object
(A) 2V (B) 4V (C) 3V (D) V

5. A plano-convex lens, when silvered at its plane surface is equivalent to a concave mirror of focal length
28 cm. When its curved surface is silvered and the plane surface not silvered, it is equivalent to a
concave mirror of focal length 10 cm, then the refractive index of the material of the lens is:-
(A) 9/14 (B) 14/9 (C) 17/9 (D) none

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

6. A candle of height h is being moved along the axis from u =3f towards a thin converging lens of focal
length f. The adjacent graph represents the height of image as a function of the position of image w.r.t.
lens as shown in figure.
|h1|
+ve
(Height h2
of image)
h1
3f
V1 V2
V (image position)
(A) The value of h2 is h. (B) The value of h2 is 2h.
(C) The value of h1 is h/2 (D)The ratio v1/v2 is 3/4
7. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) Laws of reflection are valid at each point on any reflecting surface whether plane or curved
(B) In normal situations the wavelength is several thousands times smaller than the usual obstacles or
openings hence light can then be treated as light rays.
(C) When sunlight falls on small water droplets suspended in air during or after a rain, it suffers refraction,
total internal reflection and dispersion.
(D) Dispersion takes place because the refractive index of medium for different wavelengths (colours) is
different.
8. An upright object is placed at a distance in front of a converging
lens equal to twice the focal length 20cm of the lens. On the other
\ \\\
\\ \\\\\
side there is a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm separated from
\
\\ \\ \\\\ \\ \\\\\ \\\\\
the lens by a distance of 70 cm. Then select the correct statements
fL fM
from the following
(A) Magnification for the system is –1/2
\\\\\
(B) Magnification for the system is –1
(C) Final image by the system will real and at distance of 80 cm from centre of curvature of spherical mirror
(D) Magnification for the system is +1/2
An object is approaching two pieces of a lens halves are placed according to diagram.
9. x coordinate of images
(A) – 120 (B) – 30 (C) – 40 (D) + 120
10. y coordinates of image formed by upper and lower half
(A) – 6 cm, 9 cm (B) – 8 cm, – 12 cm (C) 8 cm, – 12 cm (D) – 8 cm, + 12 cm
11. Component of relative velocities of images parallel to x–axis.
(A) zero (B) 1 cm/s (C) 2 cm/s (D) 3 cm/s

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

A plano convex lens has thickness 4 cm, when placed on a horizontal table with the curved surface in
contact with it, the apparent depth of the bottom most point of the lens is found to be 3 cm. If the lens is
inverted such that the plane face is in contact with the table, the apparent depth of the centre of the plane
face of the lens is found to be 25/8 cm.
12. Radius of curvature of curved surface is
(A) 25 cm (B) 50 cm (C) 79 cm (D) 100 cm
13. Focal length of the plano convex lens is
(A) 25 cm (B) 50 cm (C) 75 cm (D) 100 cm
14. Refractive index of the lens is
(A) 4/3 (B) 8/5 (C) 5/3 (D) 8/7
Matching List Type (4 × 4) 1Q. [3 M (–1)]
15. List-I gives different lens configurations. The radius of curvature of each curved surface is R. Parallel
paraxial rays of light parallel to the axis of lens traversing through the lens get focused at distance f from
the lens. List-II gives corresponding values of f. (m represent refractive index of medium)
List-I List-II
(P) (1) 13 R
13R
(Q) (2)
4
Lens is silvered
7R
(R) (3)
3
Plano concave lens
7R
(S) (4)
16
Codes
P Q R S P Q R S
(A) 4 1 3 2 (B) 2 3 4 1
(C) 1 2 4 3 (D) 3 4 1 2

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
æ 50x ö
1. In the shown figure the focal length (in cm) of equivalent system is in the form of çè ÷ . Find the value of x.
13 ø
2. The given lens is having radius of curvature 30 cm and 60 cm as shown in the figure respectively. The
power of lens is –5/a dipotre. Find the value of a.
3. Water (with refractive index = 4/3) in a tank is 18 cm deep. Oil of refractive index 7/4 lies on water
making a convex surface of radius of curvature ‘R = 6 cm’ as shown. Consider oil to act as a thin lens.
An object ‘S’ is placed 24 cm above water surface. The location of its image is at ‘x’ cm above the
bottom of the tank. Then ‘x’ is
S
m=1.0
R=6cm
m=7/4
m=4/3

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-IV
1. Column I shows incident ray, refracted ray associated with different lenses whereas column-II shows
refractive index, of the lens surrounding medium and nature of optical instruments. Match the entries of
column-I with column-II
Column I Column II
(A) (P) m2>m1
(B) (Q) m2<m1
(C) (R) diverging
(D) (S) converging
(T) None of these

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A thin plano-convex glass lens (µ = 1.5) has its plane surface reflecting and R is the radius of curvature
of curved part, then which of the following ray diagram is true for an object placed at O ?
R R
O O
(A) (B)
object is placed at distance object is placed at distance

2R from lens 2R from lens
R
R
O
O
(C) (D)
object is placed at distance

object is placed at distance 2R from lens
3R from lens
2. Two thin symmetrical lenses of different nature have equal radii of curvature R = 20 cm. The lenses are
put close together and immersed in water. The converging focal length of the system is 24 cm. Find the
4
difference between refractive indices of the two lenses. (refractive index for water = )
3
1 1 5 4
(A) ( m1 - m 2 ) = (B) ( m1 - m 2 ) = (C) ( m1 - m 2 ) = (D) ( m1 - m 2 ) =
24 20 9 3
3. A ray of light parallel to the axis of converging lens (having focal length f) strikes it at a small distance
'h' from its optical centre. A thin prism having angle q and refractive index µ is placed normal to the axis
of lens at a distance 'd' from it. What should be the value of µ so that the ray emerges parallel to the lens
axis?
h
O q
d
h h h h
(A) (B) +1 (B) (D) +1
fq fq (d + f)q (d + f)q

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
4. Three right-angled prisms of refractive indices µ1, µ2 and µ3 are joined together as shown in the figure. If
the ray passes through the whole system undeviated then :-
µ2
µ1 µ3
(A) m12 + m 22 + m 32 = 1 (B) m12 + m 23 = 1 + m 22 (C) m12 + m 22 = 1 + m 32 (D) m12 = m 22 + m 32 + 1

5. Radii of curvature of surfaces of a biconvex lens are 10 cm and 20 cm and refractive index of its material
is µ = 1.5. If the refractive indices of the medium on the two sides of the lens are µ1 and µ2, then the
parallel rays incident on the lens from left will focus at a distance of f 2 (distance being measured from the
optical centre of the lens) where f2 is equal to :-
20cm 10cm
µ1 µ µ2
20µ1 20µ 2 20µ 2 20µ1

(A) 4.5 – ( 2µ + m ) (B) 4.5 – ( µ + 2m ) (C) 4.5 – ( 2µ + m ) (D) 4.5 – ( µ + 2m )
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

6. A object is moving on the optical axis of a diverging lens from –¥ to O optical centre of the lens. Choose
the CORRECT statement(s) about the image of particle :
–¥ +¥
2F1 F1 O F2 2F2
(A) When object is moving between (–¥, 2F1) its image will be virtual & diminished.
(B) When object is moving between (2F1, F1) its image will be real and diminished.
(C) When object is moving between F1 to O its image will be virtual & enlarge.
(D) For complete motion of object, image will lie on same side of the lens.
7. A real object is kept in front of a lens in air. The object is a linear extended object with its length
perpendicular to the optical axis of lens. With reference to different cases of image formation by lens,
choose the correct options :
(A) If the image has a magnification –2.5 then image is real and power of lens is positive.
(B) If the magnification of the image is +0.5 then image is virtual and power of lens is negative
(C) If length of image is the same as that of object then image is real and power of lens is positive.
(D) If length of image is the same as that of object then image is virtual and power of lens is negative.

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

A
d
A semi cylinder made of a transparent plastic has a refraction index of n = Ö2 B
O R
and a radius of R. There is a narrow incident light ray perpendicular to the
flat side of the semi cylinder at d distance from the axis of symmetry.
8. What can the maximum value of d be so that the light ray can still leave the other side of the semi
cylinder?
R R R
(A) d = (B) d = (C) (D) None of these
2 2 2 2
9. When the value of d chosen is such that TIR just takes place then time for which light remains inside the
cylinder is
4 2R 2 2R
(A) 4R/c (B) (C) (D) 2R/c
c c
10. Distance d is now varied, so that the ray always emerges from the other side of the semi cylinder. What
is the range of OB?
(A) 2Ö2R > OB > RÖ2 (B) 5Ö2R > OB > R
(C) ¥ > OB > RÖ2 (D) ¥ > OB > 2RÖ2
Matching List Type (4 × 4) 1Q. [3 M (–1)]
11. Using the lens maker formula, relate the focal length of thin lens in List-I with value in List-II.
List-I List-II
air air
(P) µL = 1.5 (1) 4R

R
water water
µL = 3/2
(Q) (2) –2R
R
R µW = 4/3
water air water

R
(R) (3) –4R
µW = 4/3
µair = 1
water water
(S) R
R (4) 2R
µL = 3/2
µW = 4/3
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 1 3 4 2
(B) 4 2 1 3
(C) 3 2 1 4
(D) 4 1 2 3

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
1. For a right angled prism PQR immersed in water, the incident and emergent rays are parallel as shown
N 2
in figure. The minimum value of refractive index of the prism is . Then find the value of N.
3
y
P ra
dent
ci
In
ay
ent r
erg
Em
Q R
2. A thin convex lens having focal length 20 cm is cut into two parts 1 mm above the principle axis. The
lower portion is placed with optical centre at origin and upper portion at (90, 0) as shown in the figure.
A point object is placed at (–30, 0). Find the magnitude of y–coordinates (in mm) of the image. Assuming
paraxial ray approximation to remain valid.
1 mm
x
(–30,0) (0,0) (90,0)
30 cm 90 cm
3. In the figure shown, O is a point object placed above the lens L of focal length 10 cm. The distance
between the object O and its image formed in the plane mirror is n × 20 cm find n.
O
15cm
L
15cm
1m
Water n=4/3
Plane mirror

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
4. At the instant shown in the figure, find the magnitude of velocity ‘v’ (in m/s) of image of person as seen
9v
by himself. Fill in OMR sheet.
5
10m/s
f=50cm
P
150cm 100cm
5. A convex lens of focal length 12 cm and 4 mm aperture is cut in to two equal halves and are placed as
shown in the figure. A point source S is placed on the principal axis of the lens at a distance 20 cm from
the lens as shown in the figure. Find the separation (in mm) between the images formed.
20cm
6. A lens forms the image of sun on a screen 30 cm away. How far (in decimeter) from the first lens should
a second lens of focal length 30 cm be placed (between first lens and screen) so that the screen has to be
moved 8 cm towards the first lens for the new image to be in focus?
7. Figure shows an equiconvex lens of µ = 1.50, in contact with a liquid layer on the top of a plane mirror.
When a point object is placed at 45 cm from lens, it is found that image coincides with object. When
liquid is removed and experiment is repeated, the new distance for object and image to coincide is found
n
to be 30 cm. Then refractive index of liquid would be . Find the value of n.
3

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-IV
1. Match the entries of column-I with the entries of column-II, which describes the angle of deviation of
ray with angle of incidence.
Column-I Column-I
(A) A ray is falling on a plane smooth mirror (P)

i
(B) A ray is going from a rarer to denser medium (Q)

i
(C) A ray is going from a denser to rarer medium (R)

i
(D) A ray is falling parallel slab (S)

i
(T)
i

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. As shown, a narrow beam of light is incident onto a semi-circular glass cylinder
of radius R. Light can exit the cylinder when the beam is at the centre. When
the beam is moved parallarly to a distance d from the central line, no light can d
exit the cylinder from its lower surface. Find the refractive index of the glass.
R d R
(A) (B)
d R
R R2 - d2
(C) (D)
R2 - d2 R
2. A concave mirror of focal length 2 cm is placed on a glass slab as shown
in the figure. Then the image of object O formed due to reflection at
mirror and then refraction by the slab :
(A) will be virtual and will be at 2 cm from the pole of the concave
mirror
(B) will be virtual and formed on the pole of the mirror
(C) will be real and on the object itself
(D) none of these
3. An object was placed upright 25 cm in front of a converging lens with a focal length of 20 cm. A
concave mirror with a focal length of 15 cm was placed 120 cm behind the lens. Which of these describes
the final image?
(A) real, enlarged (B) virtual, upright (C) virtual, inverted (D) inverted, diminished
f
4. A particle is dropped along the axis from a height on a concave mirror of focal length f as shown in
2
figure. The maximum speed of image is :
t=0
h=f/2 g
//// //
//// ////
////// ////
/////////////////////////
3 3
(A) ¥ (B) 3fg (C) 3fg (D) None of these
4 2
5. An opaque sphere of radius R lies on a horizontal plane. A light source is placed above sphere as
shown. Then Light
(i) area of shadow on the plane is 2pR 2
(ii) area of shadow on the plane is 3pR2 R

(iii) if the sphere is just submerged in some liquid, area of the
shadow on plane decreases R
(iv) if the sphere is just submerged in some liquid, area of the
shadow on plane increases
(A) (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iii) (C) (i), (iii) (D) (ii), (iv)

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

6. A lens forms 3 times magnified image of an object on screen. When the distance between the screen and the lens
is increased by 10 cm and object is also moved to get 5 times magnified image again on the screen. Then :-
(A) Focal length of the lens is 5 cm
(B) Focal length of the lens is –5 cm
(C) The displacement of the object is 2/3 cm towards the lens
(D) The displacement of the object is 2/3 cm away the lens
7. An object is placed nearly at focus of a converging lens of focal length
10 cm as shown in figure. A diverging lens of focal length of 15 cm is f =10cm f =15cm
1 2
placed 5 cm behind the converging lens as shown in the figure.

(A) Final image forms at the object
10cm
(B) Image forms at a distance 30 cm from concave lens
(C) Magnification of image is 1.5 5cm
(D) Magnification can not be determined.

8. In figure, stick figure O stands in front of a thin, symmetric mirror that is mounted within the boxed
region; the central axis through the mirror is shown. The four stick figures I1 to I4 suggest general
locations and orientations for the images that might be produced by the mirror. (The figure are only
sketched in; their height and their distance from the mirror is not drawn to scale.)
(A) I4 cannot be a possible image O I1 I3
(B) I1 cannot be a possible image.
(C) If I2 is an image, mirror must be concave only. I2 I4
(D) If I3 is an image, mirror must be convex only.
9. Figure shows a transparent block of front sides ‘a’ and ‘a’. The third dimension of the block is negligible.
A point source S which can emit light in all directions can move inside the block. It is desired that no
direct light of ‘S’ should pass through AB. The region in which S should be present to satisfy this
condition shown by shaded region. Choose correct option.
a
A
a/4
B
a µ=2
A A A A
qC
qC
qC B qC B B B
qC qC
(A) (B) (C) (D)
S S S S

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

A point object O is placed at the origin of coordinate system. An y L1
air
equi–convex thin lens (m g = 1.5) of focal length f=20 cm in air is air
placed so that its principal axis is along x–axis. Now the lens is cut 2mm
O x
at the middle (along the principal axis) and upper half is shifted air L2 water
along x–axis and y–axis by 20 cm and 2 mm respectively and right
60cm 20cm
side of lower half is filled with water (m w = 4 / 3) as shown in figure.
10. Total number of images formed by the combination will be
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
11. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L1 will be
æ 320 4 ö æ 160 8 ö æ 320 8 ö æ 160 ö4
(A) çè 3 cm, 3 mm÷ø (B) çè 3 cm, 3 mm÷ø (C) çè 3 cm, 3 mm÷ø (D) çè 3 cm, 3 mm÷ø
12. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L2 will be
(A) 140cm, 0 (B) 140cm, 20 (C) 70cm, 0 (D) 140cm, 30
Matching list based comprehension Type (4 × 4 × 4) 1 Table × 3 Q. [3(–1)]
Single option correct (Three Columns and Four Rows)
Answer Q.13, Q.14 and Q.15 by appropriately matching the information given in the three columns
of the following table.
In the below question u and v represents distance of object and image from the lens/mirror. Both are
measured using usual conventional method i.e. distance in the direction of incident rays are positive and
opposite to incident rays are negative. Column 2 gives the nature of optical element and column 3 gives
the variation of image distance from lens/mirror as object distance changes. To answer the related questions
we have to consider the part of graph from 1 to 2 as shown in column 3.
Column-1 Column-2 Column-3
v
2
1
(I) u < 0 v > 0 (i) Convex mirror (P) u
(II) u > 0 v > 0 (ii) Convex lens (Q) u
2
Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
(III) u < 0 v < 0 (iii) Concave mirror (R) u

2
1
v
2
1
(IV) u > 0 v < 0 (iv) Concave lens (S) u
13. In which of the following case. Real image of virtual object is moving away from mirror/lens:-
(A) (I) (iii) (R) (B) (II) (iv) (P) (C) (II) (ii) (P) (D) (III) (i) (S)
14. Which of the following represents real image of real object going towards mirror/lens :-
(A) (IV) (ii) (S) (B) (II) (i) (R) (C) (III) (iii) (R) (D) (I) (iii) (P)
15. Which represents real image of real object going away from mirror/lens :-
(A) (I) (ii) (S) (B) (III) (i) (P) (C) (III) (iv) (R) (D) (II) (iii) (Q)
SECTION-III
1. When a bright source is placed 30 cm in front of a lens there is an erect image 7.5 cm from the lens.
There is also of faint inverted image 6 cm in front of the lens due to reflection from the front surface of
the lens. When the lens is turned around this faint inverted image is seen 10 cm in front of the lens.
x
Refractive index of the lens is 1 + . Find the value of x.
10
2. A thin plano-convex lens of focal length f is split into two halves, one of the halves is shifted along the
optical axis. The separation between object and image plane is 1.8 m. The magnification of the image
formed by one of the half lenses is 2. Find the focal length of the lens in decimetre. [ 1 decimeter = 10cm]

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
3. A convex lens is placed in such a way that the left side of lens has refractive index 2 and right of lens has
refractive index 3. If parallel ray coming from left side focus at 20 cm from lens, the distance from lens
20n
where rays will focus if they are coming from right side is cm. Find the value of n.
3
4. A biconvex thin lens of radius of curvature R is made up of variable

Y
æ yö R
refractive index µ = 2 ç 1 + ÷ . Assume very small aperture 2d << R.
è dø d
A point object O is placed at a disatnce R = 7.5 m on the principal axis x
O P
from the lens (as shown). Due to variable refractive index of lens, d
R R
there are infinite number of image on the principal axis. These image
are spreaded over the length l. Find the value of l (in m).
SECTION-IV
1. In column I, all the objects (x ³ 0) shown are real. In column II, nature of image is mentioned. Rays are
paraxial, consider all the possibilities of nature of images then match column-I with column-II.
Column-I Column-II
\\\\
object
\\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
(A) (P) Real

x
\\\\
concave mirror
\\ \\
object
\\\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
(B) x (Q) Virtual

\\\\
Convex mirror
object 2°
(C) x (R) Magnified (Large)

Prism
µ1 µ2
x
(D) (S) Diminished (Small)
object
Plane
refracting
surface
(T) Same size

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:) TM
TM
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-I
1. A concave mirror is placed on a horizontal surface and two thin uniform layers of different transparent
liquids (which do not mix or interact) are formed on the reflecting surface. The refractive indices of the
upper and lower liquids are m 1 and m2 respectively. The bright point source at a height ‘d’
(d is very large in comparison to the thickness of the film) above the mirror coincides with its own final
image. The radius of curvature of the reflecting surface therefore is :
m1 d
(A) m (B) m1m2d (C) m1d (D) m2d
2
2. An observer stands at the edge of a swimming pool, as sketched in the figure below. This observer will
perceive the pool as :-
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
3. Two identical isosceles thin prisms of prism angle A and refractive index µ are placed with their bases
touching each other. This system acts as a converging lens. What is the focal length of this system for
parallel rays at a distance h from the base of the prism ?
2h h h
(A) ( m - 1) A (B) ( m - 1) A (C) 2 ( m - 1) A (D) None of these

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
4. Figure shows a glass cube surrounded by four glass prisms in very close proximity to its sides. The path
that will be taken by the two rays incident normally on the sides of the prisms is:
5. Three point charge q, –2q and –2q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The
minimum work done by some external force to increases their separation to 2a will be
1 2q 2 1 3q 2
(A) (B) negative (C) zero (D) 4p Î a
4p Î0 a 0
6. A charge of 6µC is fixed at the origin. Another identical charge is placed at a distance of 2 m from the
fixed charge and is released. The charges have a mass of 0.1 kg each. Then choose the correct statement:-
(A) The maximum speed achieved by the 2nd charge will be 1.8 m/sec
(B) The maximum speed achieved by the 2nd charge will depend on the direction of its motion
(C) As time passes, potential energy of the system increases.
(D) The 2nd charge will achieve a maximum velocity of 0.9 2 m/s
7. Consider mercury (Hg) rotating about a vertical axis with uniform angular y
velocity w filled in a cylindrical container. The liquid surface is curved. w
The figure shows a cross sectional view of the curved surface. Ignore
q
surface tension and viscosity. [Hint : coordinates of focus for parabola x2
= 4ay is given by (0,a)] Mark the CORRECT statement(s) : V(0,y0)
h0 P(x,y)
(A) Steady state angle q made by tangent to the surface at P(x, y) with the q
x
æ w2x ö
-1
horizontal is given by tan ç ÷ R
è g ø
(B) Steady state angle q made by tangent to the surface at P(x, y) with the horizontal is given by
æ w2x ö
sin -1 ç ÷
è g ø
(C) If the focal length of the mirror formed by shiny liquid surface is 20 cm then w is 5 rad/s
(D) If the focal length of the mirror formed by shiny liquid surface is 20 cm then w is 10 rad/s

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
8. A small source of light is mounted inside a cylindrical container of height h. The bottom of the container
is covered with a mirror. Initially, the container is empty. Then a clear liquid with the index of refraction
n is slowly poured into the container. The level of liquid H rises steadily, reaching the top of the container
in time T. Let h1 be the distance of source of the light from the bottom of the container. Consider paraxial
ray approximation.
source of light
mirror
Consider two cases in which the observer is in the air observing the image of the source in the mirror.
(1) H £ h1 (2) h1 £ H £ h
2h æ 1ö
(A) The speed of the image of the source in case (1) during this process is ç 1 - ÷.
T è nø
hæ 1ö
(B) The speed of the image of the source in case (2) during this process is ç 1- ÷.
Tè nø
h æ 1ö
(C) The speed of the image of the source in case (1) during this process is ç 1- ÷.
2T è nø
h æ1ö
(D) The speed of the image of the source in case (2) during this process is .
2T çè n ÷ø
9. The refractive index of the medium with a certain region, x > 0, y > 0, changes with y. A thin light ray
travelling in the x-direction in medium having refractive index m0 = 1 strikes another medium of refractive
index m at right angles and moves through the medium along a circular arc of radius R as shown in the
figure. The material with the greatest known refractive index is diamond, but even the refractive index
of this material does not reach the value mmax = 2.5. It is this limit that sets the maximum angular size of
the arc the light ray can cover. Angular size of arc is the angle subtended by the arc at the centre.
R
(A) The variation of refractive index m with y is given as m =
R-y
R 1 3ˆ
(B) The unit vector in the direction of refracted light at y = is iˆ + j
2 2 2
(C) If the maximum angular size of the arc of light is qmax then sin qmax = 2/5
(D) If the maximum angular size of the arc of light is qmax then cos qmax = 2/5

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

A ray of light enters a spherical drop of water of refractive index m as shown in the figure.
10. Selct the correct statement

(A) Incident rays are partially reflected at point A
(B) Incident rays are totally reflected at point A
(C) Incident rays are totally transmitted through point A
(D) None of these
11. An expression of the angle between incident ray and emergent ray (angle of deviation) as shown in the
figure is
(A) 0° (B) f (C) a-f (D) p-4a+2f

12. The angle f for which minimum deviation is produced will be given by
m2 + 1 m2 - 1 m2 + 1 m2 - 1
(A) cos2 f = (B) cos2 f = (C) sin2 f = (D) sin2 f =
3 3 3 3
Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 2 Q.) [4 M (–1)]
(Multiple Correct Answer Type)
Two concave mirrors with equal forcal length f, are placed one above other at a seperation of d. Upper
mirror has a small hole at its centre as given. A small object is placed at centre of lower mirror. Take first
reflection at above mirror and second at lower and answer the given questions for these two
reflections only.
f
d
f
Object
For final image to be at the hole of the upper mirror
13. Value of d for given possitility
f
(A) f (B) 2f (C) 3f (D)
3
14. Nature of image
(A) Erect with equal size (B) Erect with uneual size
(C) inverted with equal size (D) inverted with unequal size

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-III
1. In the shown arrangement a point source of light S is placed 60 cm left to a convex lens of focal length
30 cm and 2 cm above the common principal axis of the convex lens and a convex mirror of focal length
10 cm. Consider optical centre of the lens to be the origin, the x-coordinate of the final image of the
source S for the viewer left of the lens, is equal to –10K cm. Calculate the value of K.
y
40 cm
|||||||
|||||
||||||||||||| ||||||||||||||||||
S
|||||
O x
||||||
60 cm R = 20cm
f = 30
2. A man of height 2 m stands on a straight road on a hot day. The vertical temperature in the air results in
a variation of refractive index with height y as m = m0 (1+ay) where m0 is the refractive index of air near
the road and a = 2 × 10–6/m. What is the actual length of the road (in km), man is able to see
3. A ray of light from a liquid (m = Ö3) is incident on a system of two right angled prism of refractive
indices Ö3 and Ö2 as shown. The ray suffers zero deviation when emerges into air from CD. The angle
of incidence i is p/n. Find the value of n.
Liquid A D
i m= 2
air
m= 3
B C
4. An infinite long uniformly charged wire is kept along axis of a uniformly charged semi circular ring of
radius R as shown. Linear charge density of ring and wire are respectively l1 and l2. Net electrostatic
4kl1l 2
force on wire due to ring is value of n is
R n -1
l1
Ä
R
l2

Yashpatil TGCLASS
~ @bohring_bot
TEST
:)
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-IV
1. Column I (optical system) Column II (focal length)
R1=R2=20cm
Incident ray
air m=1.5 air

(A) (m =1) glass (m =1) (P) 80 cm
Incident ray R1=R2=20cm
water m=1.5 water

(B) (m =4/3) glass (m =4/3) (Q) 40 cm
R1=R2=20cm
Incident ray
water m=1.5 air

(C) (m =4/3) glass (m =1) (R) 30 cm
Incident ray R1=R2=20cm
air m=1.5 water

(D) (m =1) glass (m =4/3) (S) 20 cm
2. The greatest thickness of a plano convex lens when viewed normally through the plane surface appears
to be 3 cm & when viewed normally through the curved surface it appears to be 3.6 cm. Actual thickness
of lens is 4.5 cm.
(A) The refractive index of the material of the lens in multiple of 10 is
–1
(P) 9
(B) The radius of curvature of lens in cm (Q) 3
(C) The focal length if its plane surface is silvered in cm (R) 16
(D) The focal length if its curved surface is silvered in cm (S) 15

Yashpatil TG ~ @bohring_bot :)
CLASS TEST
CLASS TEST ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. Three point charge q, –2q and –2q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The
minimum work done by some external force to increases their separation to 2a will be
1 2q 2 1 3q 2
(A) (B) negative (C) zero (D) 4p Î0 a
4p Î0 a
2. A charge of 6µC is fixed at the origin. Another identical charge is placed at a distance of 2 m from the
fixed charge and is released. The charges have a mass of 0.1 kg each. Then choose the correct statement:-
(A) The maximum speed achieved by the 2nd charge will be 1.8 m/sec
(B) The maximum speed achieved by the 2nd charge will depend on the direction of its motion
(C) As time passes, potential energy of the system increases.
(D) The 2nd charge will achieve a maximum velocity of 0.9 2 m/s
3. Charge distribution an a ring in x-y plane is shown in the figure. Then electric potential at origin is :
– – – + + + 2Q
–2Q – – +
– +
– +
– +
– r +
– +
+ O –
–
+ –
+ –
+ –
4Q + –
+ – –3Q
–
+ ++ – ––
Q Q 3Q
(A) 4p Î r (B) Zero (C) 2p Î r (D) 4p Î r
0 0 0
r0
4. A solid sphere of radius R1 and volume charge density r = is enclosed by a hollow sphere of radius
r
R2 with negative surface charge density s, such that the total charge in the system is zero, r0 is a positive
R2
constant and r is the distance from the centre of the sphere. The ratio R is
1
s r0
(A) r (B) 2s / r 0 (C) r0 / 2 s (D)
0 s
5. A thin dielectric rod of length l lies along the x -axis with one end at the origin and the other end at the
point ( l, 0). It is charged uniformly along its length with a total charge Q. The potential at a point (x,0)
when x > l is :
Q Q æxö Q æ x ö Q æ x -lö
(A) 4pe l (B) 4pe l log e ç l ÷ (C) 4pe l log e ç x - l ÷ (D) 4pe l log e ç x ÷
0 0 è ø 0 è ø 0 è ø
PHYSICS/Class Test # 13 E-1/4

CLASS TEST ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. A uniformly charged non-conducting sphere having charge Q and radius R is kept in gravity free
space. Two identical charge particles having charge q are released from rest from ‘A’ and ‘B’
simultaneously. The speed of one of the charge particle when separation between them is very large,
is (mass of one of the particle is m)
1
[C ® centre of sphere and A,B and C in same line. AC = BC = 2R, K = 4pe ]
0
+ + +
B + + + + A
+ +
q + + C+ + q
+
+ +
Kq æ q ö Kq æ q ö Kq 2 KqQ
(A) ç + 2Q ÷ (B) ç + Q÷ (C) (D)
2mR è 2 ø mR è 2 ø 2mR 2mR
7. Two point charges are located on the x-axis. The first is a charge +Q at x = –a. The second is an
unknown charge located at x = +3a. The net electric field these charges produce at the origin has a
2kQ
magnitude of . What are the possible value (s) of the unknown charge ?
a2
(A) –9Q (B) +9Q (C) +27Q (D) +8Q
8. A ring carries a linear charge density on one half and the linear charge density of same magnitude but
opposite sign on the other half.
(A) the component of electric field along the axis of ring at all points on the axis is zero.
(B) the component of electric field along the axis of ring at point on the axis is zero only at the centre.
(C) the resultant field at the centre is zero.
(D) the electric field at all points on the axis of ring is perpendicular to axis.
r
9. Electric field in a region is given as E = (10 - 5x ) î . A charge particle of mass 5kg and charge Q (= 1C)
is situated at origin and free to move in given electric field. Then choose the correct options (Neglect
gravity) :-
(A) Motion of charge particle is Oscillatory
(B) Maximum displacement of charge particle from origin is 4 SI units
(C) Maximum velocity gain by charge particle is 2 SI units
(D) The position of charge particle, when velocity gained by particle is maximum, is 2 SI units
10. Charges Q1 & Q2 lie inside and outside respectively of a closed surface S.
Let E be the field at any point on S and f be the flux of E over S.
(A) If Q1 changes, both E & f will change
(B) If Q2 changes, E will change but f will not change
(C) If Q1 = 0 and Q2 ¹ 0 then E ¹ 0 but f = 0
(D) If Q1 ¹ 0 and Q2 = 0 then E = 0 but f ¹ 0
E-2/4 PHYSICS/Class Test # 13

11. Two point charges are placed at a and b at a certain distance from each other. E
Assuming the field strength is positive in the direction coinciding with the
positive direction of the x axis (l1 > l2) :-
a
(A) Charge at a is positive and at b negative b X
(B) Magnitude of charge at a is greater than that of charge at b
(C) Both charges at a and b are negative l1 l2
(D) Magnitude of charge at b is greater than that of charge at a
Paragraph for Question no 12 and 13
Two small beads slide without friction, one on each of two long, horizontal, parallel, fixed rods set a
distance d apart. The masses of the beads are m and M, and they carry respective charges of q and Q.
Initially, the large mass M is at rest and the other one is far away approaching it at speed v0.
v0
m,q
v=0 d
M,Q
12. If the beads stop w.r.t. each other and at this time they are at minimum distance d, what is the velocity
v0?
qQ ( m + M ) qQ ( m + M ) qQ ( mM ) qQ ( mM )
(A) 4 pÎ0 d ( mM ) (B) 2 pÎ0 d ( mM ) (C) 2 p Î0 d ( m + M ) (D) 4 pÎ0 d ( m + M )
13. Consider system to be beads. Mark the INCORRECT statement :
(A) Acceleration of centre of mass of system is zero
(B) Momentum of system is conserved
(C) Angular momentum of system about centre of mass of system is conserved
(D) Mechanical energy of system is constant
SECTION-III
1. Consider three identical metal spheres A, B and C. Spheres A carries charge + 0.6C and sphere B carries
charge – 0.3C. Sphere C carries no charge. Spheres A and C are touched together and then separated.
Sphere B is then touched to sphere A and separated from it. Finally the sphere C is touched to sphere B
x
and separated from it. Final charge on sphere C is C . Find x.
20
2. Four balls, each with mass m, are connected by four nonconducting strings to form a square with side a
as shown in figure. The assembly is placed on a horizontal, nonconducting, frictionless surface. Balls 1
and 2 each have charge q, and balls 3 and 4 are uncharged. Find the maximum speed of balls 3 and 4
q2
after the string connecting balls 1 and 2 is cut. If your answer is . Fill the value of N
2NpÎ0 am
1 2
a
3 4

3. The ratio of magnitude of electric field due to +q and –4q at a point between them where net potential is
zero on x-axis is z : 1, then z will be
y
(6,0)
+ – x
O +q –4q
4. An infinite long uniformly charged wire is kept along axis of a uniformly charged semi circular ring of
radius R as shown. Linear charge density of ring and wire are respectively l1 and l2. Net electrostatic
4kl1l 2
force on wire due to ring is value of n is
R n -1
l1
Ä
R
l2
5. For a hypothetical electric field in x-direction, its potential is continuously decreasing and becoming half
after every 20 cm. The rate of decreasing of potential with distance is also directly proportional to the
potential itself. If the ratio of electric field and potential is xln2(m–1). Find the value of x.
SECTION-IV
1. A circular non-conducting ring has charge density l=l0 sinq as shown in figue.
y
B3
q
x
A1 A2
B4
Column I (Point) Column II (Direction of electric field)

(A) A1 (P) Positive x-direction
(B) A2 (Q) Negative x-direction
(C) B3 (R) Positive y-direction
(D) B4 (S) Negative y-direction
(T) Positive z-direction

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
r
1. Two short electric dipoles of dipole moment p each are placed at two p
corners of a square as shown in figure. What is ratio of magnitudes of
electric field at two point O and A :-
O
(A) 2 (B) 2 2 p
A
(C) 1 (D) 2
2. Three equal charges Q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. What should be the value of
a charge so that when placed at the centroid, self energy of the system becomes zero. (excluding the self
energies of point charges)
-Q -Q -Q -Q
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 3 2 3 3
3. A wire, of length L( = 20 cm), is bent into a semi-circular arc. If
+
the two equal halves, of the arc, were each to be uniformly charged Y
with charges ±Q, [|Q| =10 3 e0 Coulomb where e 0 is the
permittivity (in SI units) of free space] the net electric field at the
+
centre O of the semi-circular arc would be :- O X O
(A)(50×103 N/C) ĵ (B) (50×103 N/C) î (C) (25×103 N/C) î (D) (25×103 N/C) ĵ
4. Two planes of charge with no thickness, A and B, are parallel and vertical. The electric field in
3s
region–1 to the left of plane A has magnitude 2e and points to the left. The electric field in region–2
0
3s
to the right of B has magnitude 2e and points to the right. The electric field in region–3 between the
0
s
two planes has magnitude 2e and points to the right. The surface charge density on planes A and B
0
respectively is :-
s s s
(A) - , s (B) + , s (C) s, - (D) 2s, s
2 2 2
æRö
5. A point charge (+q) of mass m is released from a distance ç ÷ from the
è2ø +Q
R/2 R
centre of a solid sphere of radius R and charge Q (uniformly charged in
volume). The speed of the point charge when it reaches a distance R from R
the surface of the sphere (there is no interaction between sphere and point fixed solid sphere
1
charge other than electrostatic). k =
4p Î0
7kQq 7kQq 5kQq 3kQq

(A) (B) (C) (D)
16mR 4mR 16mR 4mR

6. A charge is kept fixed at point A as shown in the figure in a gravity free l

space. A semicircular ring of linear charge density l, mass m & radius R
is released from rest. Initially centre of semicircular ring coincides with Q
the fixed charge. The initial acceleration of the semicircular ring is :- A fix
2KlQ Kl Q Kl Q
(A) (B) (C) (D) 0
mR 2mR mR
7. If we move in the direction perpendicular to the electric field, work done by the electric field will be
zero and surface thus generated is called equipotential surface. Choose the correct matching :-
Electric field lines

Equipotential surface
(A) (B)

+ –
(C) (D)
8. Consider a non-conducting sphere of radius a carrying uniformly distributed charge q surrounded by a

C
spherical shell of radius 2a. The region between a £ r £ 2a is filled with charge density r = , where r
r
is the distance from the centre. If the magnitude of electric field in the region a £ r £ 2a is constant, then:
q
(A) C =
2pa 2
(B) Magnitude of charge in the volume a £ r £ 2a will be 3q.
(C) Electric field outside the spherical shell remains constant.
q
(D) C =
pa 2
9. A non-conducting solid sphere of radius 30 cm and relative permittivity 1 has the volume charge density
r = æç 5 m C / m 3 ö÷ æç 1 - r ö
÷ , where r (in cm) is the radial distance of any point in the space from the
è 2p øè 30cm ø
centre of the sphere. Then choose the correct statement(s).
(A) Density of electric field lines is maximum at r = 25 cm
(B) Density of electric field lines is maximum at r = 20 cm
(C) Electrical energy stored in the space r = 30 cm to r ® ¥, is same as that of a solid non-conducting
sphere carrying charge of 0.0225 mC and radii 30 cm having uniform volume charge density in the
same space r = 30 cm to r ® ¥.
(D) Variation of magnitude of electric field due to the sphere with respect to radial distance r is rectangular
hyperbola in the region r = 30 to r ® ¥.

10. In a solid sphere of radius R = 2m charge density varies as

A B
r= - 0<r£R
r2 r
where A = 1 C/m and B = 1 C/m2. For this sphere
(A) Flux of electric field linked with a sphere of radius r (0 < r £ R), increases as r increases
(B) Flux of electric field linked with a sphere of radius r (0 < r £ R), first increases and then decreases as
r increases
(C) Magnitude of electric field intensity continuously decreases as r increases from r > 0 to r = R.
(D) Forces experienced by two point charges placed at distance 3m and 4m from centre of sphere are
same.
11. The linear charge density on a non conducting ring of radius R is varying with q as l = l0cosq :-
(A) Electric field at the center of the ring is zero
(B) Electric field at center of ring is towards left
(C) Electric field on a line perpendicular to the plane of the ring and q
q = 0°
passing through the center of the ring is zero
(D) Electric field on a line perpendicular to the plane of the ring and
passing through the center of the ring is non-zero.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 12 to 14
Four charged particles (A, B, C, D), of mass m and charge q each
are connected by light silk threads of length d forming a tetrahedron B
floating in outer space. The thread connecting particles A and B
suddenly snaps.
A C
12. Mark the CORRECT statement :-
d
(A) Displacement of centre of mass of system of particles is
3 D
2
4Md
(B) Angular momentum of system about CM is w , where w is maximum angular velocity of
3
particles about centre of mass.
(C) When particles attain maximum speed direction of motion of particles C and D is opposite to that of A and B.
(D) When particles attain maximum speed direction of motion of all the particles is in same direction
13. The potential energy of particle A and B when the maximum speed is attained by charged particles :-
q2 q2
(A) U = (B) U =
(
4p Î0 d 2 ) (
4 p Î0 d 3 )
q2 æ 2 -1 ö q2 æ 3 -1 ö
(C) U = ç ÷ (D) U = ç ÷
4 pÎ0 d çè 2 ÷ø 4 p Î0 d çè 3 ÷ø
14. Maximum speed of particles is :-
q2 æ 2 -1 ö q2 æ 3 -1 ö
(A) v = ç ÷ (B) v = ç ÷
8p Î0 md çè 2 ÷ø 8p Î0 md çè 3 ÷ø
q2 æ 1 ö q2 æ 1 ö
(C) v = (D) v =
8p Î0 md çè 2 ÷ø ç ÷
8p Î0 md è 3 ø


15. List-I shows different configurations of charge distribution. List-II gives the corresponding expressions
of physical quantities mentioned in list-I :-
List-I List-II
6kq 2
(P) (1)
R
Four point charges are kept at the vertices of a regular tetrahedron

of side R.Total electrostatics energy of the configuration.
6kq 2 æ 9 ö
(Q) (2) ç ÷
R è 40 ø
Two thin spherical uniformly charged shells having charge q are

separated by distance 4R. Total electrostatics energy of the configuration.
6kq 2
(R) (3)
6R
A solid non-conducting sphere of radius R having uniform charge q

is kept inside a thin spherical non-conducting shell of radius 2R
having uniform charge q. Total electrostatics energy of the configuration.
6kq 2
(S) (4) (3)
40R
Work done in contracting the sphere having uniform charge

q from radius 4R to R

Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 1 3 4 2
(B) 4 2 3 1
(C) 3 2 1 4
(D) 1 3 2 4
SECTION-II
1. In a 2-D region of x-y space, a uniform electric field exists, given by : E = (2 V/m) (3i + 4j). A charged
particle of mass 10–2 g and charge 10–5 C is fired from the origin with initial velocity 20 m/s, directed
along the negative y-direction. Find the minimum speed (in m/s) of the particle during its subsequent
motion. Neglect gravity.
SECTION-III
1. Two point charges 2 mC and 8 mC are placed at position x = 0 and x = 4 m respectively. The distance of
the neutral point form the smaller charge is found to be at x= a/b. Find the value of (a+b).
r
2. A positive charged particle q0, when launched with some velocity v 0 in a uniform field is found to
deviate by 60º in a certain time, such that its speed is halved. If –ve charged particle –2q0, is launched
r
with the same velocity v 0 in the same field then after same time its speed is v2. Mass of both particles is
v 22
same then 2 would be :-
v0
3. Two uniformly charged co-axial, identical rings (Radius R) are fixed as shown. A point charge q0 is
projected with speed V0 along common axis of rings from large distance. Minimum value of V0 for
kqq 0
. Find n æç k =
1 ö
which the charge particle can just pass through both rings is given as V0 = .
nmR è 4 p Î0 ÷ø
+q –q
R R m, q0
V0
RÖ3

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A hemispherical bowl of inner radii R and outer radii 2R is charged z
r
with density r = ro . Find the electric field at point O.
R
R O 2R
2ro R 3ro R
(A) 3e (B) 8e
o o
P
ro R 3ro R
(C) 2e (D) 2e
o o
r r
2. Electric field at point P is given by E = E 0 r . The total flux through the given cylinder of radius R and
height h is :-
h P
O R
(A) E0pR2h (B) 2E0pR2h (C) 3E0pR2h (D) 4E0pR2h

3. A positive charge q is kept at the center of a thick shell of inner radius R1 and outer radius R2 which is
made up of conducting material. If f1 is flux through closed gaussian surface S1 whose radius is just less
than R1 and f2 is flux through closed gaussian surface S2 whose radius is just greater than R1 then:-
k
S2
S1
R1
q
R2
q kq
(A) f1 > f2 (B) f2 > f1 (C) f1 = f2 = (D) f1 = f2 =
eo eo
4. Consider a solid insulating sphere of radius R with charge density varying as r = r0r2 (r0 is a constant
and r is measure from centre). Consider two points A and B at distance x and y respectively (x < R, y >
R) from the centre. If magnitudes of electric fields at points A and B are equal, then :-
x4
(D) y = R
5
(A)x y = R
2 3
(B) x y = R
3 2 5
(C) x y = R
2 3 5

r
5. Consider a uniform electric field E = 3 ´ 103 î N / C . What is the flux of this field through a square of 10
3
cm side length and normal to the plane makes a, b, g from x-axis, y-axis and z-axis and sina = , sin
2
3 1
b= , sin g = :-
2 2
Nm 2 Nm 2 45 Nm 2 Nm 2
(A) 30 (B) 15 (C) (D) 20
C C 2 C C
6. Points A, B, C, D, P and Q are shown in a region of uniform electric field. The potentials at some of the
points are V(A) = 0 V & V(P) = V(B) = V(D) = 4 V. The potential at C is :
C
B
0.2 m
P Q
A D
0.2 m
(A) 10 V (B) – 10 V (C) 8 V (D) – 8 V
7. A cuboid of dimension [a × a × b]. Charge q is placed at the centre of edge having length ‘b’. If flux
q
through face ‘ABCD’ is 32 Î then select the correct statement(s) :-
0
q A b H
(A) Flux through the entire cuboid is 4 Î q
a B
0 E
a
(B) Flux through the face ‘ABEH is zero.
3q G
C
(C) Flux through the face ‘BEFD’ is 32 Î
0
D F
q
(D) Flux through the face ‘BEFD’ is 16 Î
0
8. Three charges are kept at the corners of a square as shown. A 4th charge q is brought slowly at the 4th
corner from infinity. Then choose the CORRECT statement(s) [Take reference potential energy at
1
infinity to be zero & k = ]
4p Î0 –q
kq 2 é1 - 2 2 ù a
(A) Work done by electrostatic field is a ê úJ
ëê 2 úû
q a –q
kq é 1 - 2 2 ù
2
(B) Work done by external agent is a ê úJ

êë 2 ûú
kq 2 é
(C) Total potential energy of the system after the charge is placed at the corner is 2 - 4 ùû
a ë
(D) For the system thus achieved centre of square will be a point of equilibrium.

9. A sphere of radius R1 has charge density r uniform with in its volume, except for a small spherical
hollow region of radius R2 located a distance "a" from centre (Take zero potential at infinity).
r
ra
(A ) Electric field at O' is
3 Î0 R 1
O' R2
ra 3 O
(B) Electric field at O' is â
3 Î0
r é
( )
a
2 2 2ù
(C) Electric potential at O' is 6 Î ëê3 R1 - R 2 - a ûú
0
(D) Electric potential at any point in hollow region is constant
10. In a region having electric field, when we move along x-axis from x = 2m to x = 3m, potential increases
by 5 Volt. Which of the following is/are possible for the electric field?
(A) It can be uniform with magnitude 7 V/m.
(B) It can be uniform with magnitude 3 V/m.
(C) From x = 2m to x = 3m it has positive x component at every point.
–V
(D) It can be non uniform. –V
–V 2
3
1
11. Consider three equipotential surfaces due to a charge –q. Another charge +q is C
taken slowly along two paths from A to B and A to C, then :- B
(A) Work done by electric field in moving it from A to B is +ve –q
(B) Work done by electric field in moving it from A to B is –ve
(C) Work done by an external agent in moving it from A to C = +ve A
(D) Work done by an external agent in moving it from A to C = –ve

A non conducting sphere having relative permittivity unity (er = 1) has radius R and have a non uniform
charge distribution. The volume charge density r(r) varies with radial distance r as per the following
graph. Here r0 is a constant.
r
r0
r
R
12. If a small dipole of dipole moment P is placed at point A which is at large distance x from centre of
sphere as shown in figure. The force exerted by dipole on sphere would be :
P
A 90°
r0 PR 3 r0 PR 3 r0 PR 3 r0 PR 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4e0 x 3 2e0 x 3 8e 0 x 3 e0 x 3
r
13. Consider an isolated sphere (as explained in paragraph). If E is electric field at any point because of
C
r r
sphere and if C is centre of sphere and S is surface of sphere find the value of ò E × dr .
S
-r0 R 2 +r0 R 2 -r0 R 2 +r0 R 2

(A) (B) (C) (D)
12e0 12e0 4e0 4e0
Three identical charge particles A, B and C are kept at three corners of cube of side length ‘a’. B and C
are also joined with massless rod. (Neglect gravitational force)
A
q,m
q,m
B
C q,m
z
14. The magnitude of electrostatic force on particle ‘A’ is :
q2 q2 q2 3 q2
(A) 3 (B) (C) (D)
8pe0 a 2 8pe 0 a 2 4pe0 a 2 4pe0 a 2
15. If system is released from rest, find kinetic energy of A, when A is very far from B and C :
q2 q2 q2 3q 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4pe0 a 2 12 pe0 a 2 3pe 0 a 2 7pe0 a 2
SECTION-III
1. A charge q is kept just outside a cube on extension of digonal GA. The magnitude of electric flux of side
aq
ABCD is f = . Find value of a.
168 Î0
B C
q
A D
G
F
E H

2. A uniformly charged hemisphere of radius b and charge density r has a hemispherical cavity of radius
æ bö nrb2
a ç a = ÷ cut from its centre. If the potential at the centre of the cavity is then n = ?
è 2ø 16 Î0
a
b
3. Figure shows the part of a hemisphere of radius (R) = 2m and surface charge density (s) = 2Î0 C/m2.
Calculate the electric potential (in volt) at centre O.
R
30°
O
4. Point charges –2q, – 2q and +q are put on the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. Find the work
done by some external force in increasing the side of triangle to 2a (in J)
5. A spherical distribution of charge consists of uniform charge density r 1 from r = 0 to r = a/2 and
Kpa 2
a uniform charge density r 2 from r = a/2 to r = a. If the electric potential at r = a is [7r2+r1].
n
Then find n.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A charge q1 & q2 are placed inside a spherical cavity made inside y-axis
uncharged conducting sphere of radius R. Electric field at P due
all induced charge on the sphere :- R
kq1 ˆ kq 2 ˆ kq1 ˆ kq 2 ˆ r2 P
(A) i+ 2 j (B) - i- 2 j q1 a
x-axis
a2 b a2 b b
r1 q2
kq1 ˆ kq 2 ˆ kq1 ˆ kq 2 ˆ
(C) r 2 i + r 2 j (D) - i- 2 j
1 2 r12 r2
2. Consider a metallic sphere of radius R concentric with another hollow metallic
+2Q
sphere of inner radius 2R and outer radius 3R as shown in the figure. The
inner sphere is given a charge –Q and outer +2Q. The electrostatic potential
energy of the system is :- –Q
Q2 3Q2 R
(A) 16pe R (B) 16pe R
0 0
2R
2 2
5Q 11Q 3R
(C) 48pe R (D) 48pe R
0 0
3. A small dipole P and a fixed point charge +q are kept in free space. Net electrostatic force on dipole due
to charge q is F and torque on dipole about point O is t then :-
(A) for every value of q ; F = 0 and t = 0 P q
O
(B) for every value of q ; F ¹ 0 and t = 0 q C
(C) for every value of q ; F ¹ 0 and t ¹ 0
(D) t is zero or nonzero, depends on value of q.
4. A bead of mass m and charge q is threaded on a smooth wire kept along x-axis. A second charge Q is
fixed at the point x = 0, y = -d. Now bead is moved with constant speed v so that it is initially near
x = -¥ and it ends up near x = +¥. Find the impulse exerted by the fixed charge on the bead. Neglect
gravity.
qQ qQ qQ 2qQ
(A) 2pe vd (B) 4 pe vd (C) pe vd (D) pe vd
0 0 0 0
5. Two particles having positive charges +Q and +2Q are fixed at equal distance x from centre of a conducting
solid sphere having zero net charge and radius r as shown. Initially the switch S is open. After the switch
S is closed, the net charge flowing out of sphere is
r
+Q +2Q
x x
Qr Qr 3Qr 3Qr
(A) (B) - (C) (D) -
x x x x

6. A rod containing charge +Q is brought near an initially uncharged isolated conducting rod as shown.
Regions with total surface charge +Q and –Q are induced in the conductor as shown in the figure. The
only regions where the net charge in this configuration is non–zero are indicated by the "+" and "–"
signs. Let us denote the total flux of electric field outward through closed surface S1 as f1, through S2 as
f2, etc. Which of the following is necessarily false.
S5
S2 S3
S1
Conductor
S4
(A) f1 > 0 (B) f2 = f1 (C) f3=f1 (D) f4=0

7. A positive point charge is kept in front of an infinite large uncharged conducting plate as shown in
figure. What must not be the direction of electric field at the point A on the surface of plate due to
charges appearing on plate:-
+Q
–¥
(A) (B) (C) (D)

8. There is a spherical conductor of radius a. A point charge is placed at a distance 4a from the centre of the
spherical conductor as shown in figure.
j
x p
q c
4a i
a
(A) The electric field at 'c' due to spherical conductor is

kq
16a 2
( )
- î
æ kq kq ö
(B) Potential at P due to induced charge on spherical conductor is ç - ÷
è 4a x ø
(C) Net electric field at 'P' is ZERO.
æ qö
(D) Now the conductor is earthed then charge on the spherical conductor is ç - ÷
è 4ø


In physics, Gauss’s law, also known as Gauss’s flux theorem, is a law relating the distribution of electric
charge to the resulting electric field. It states that,
1
“The net electric flux through any closed surface is equal to time the net electric charge enclosed
Î0
within that closed surface”.
Mathematically it states that,
r uur Q enclosed
Ñò = Î ® Integral form of Gauss’s law
E.ds
0
In differential form the law can be stated mathematically as,

r r r
Ñ.E = ( r is charge density in the enclosed area)
Î0
r ¶
where Ñ = î + ¶ ˆj + ¶ kˆ (in cartesian coordinate)
dx dy dz
r
and in spherical coordinate system, Ñ is written as,
r d
Ñ = $r for radial dependence only.
dr
9. Consider a cube of side "a" placed such that it faces are parallel to x-y; y-z & z-x plane. (see figure) An
r
electric field exists in the region as yiˆ + xjˆ = E . The net charge enclosed in the cube will be :-
a x
a
d a
z
(A) 2a3Î0 (B) zero (C) a3Î0 (D) Information insufficient

10. In a region it was found that electric field varies radially as E = a r , a is constant. Then in the region
3
charge density linked with the field will be :

(A) 5 a r4Î0 (B) arÎ0 (C) 3 ar2Î0 (D) 0
11. Considering area vector to be positive along inward normal for a closed surface, flux linked to a charge
Q enclosed in a sphere of same radius will be (assume flux to be defined in the same way as is defined
in normal system)
Q Q
(A) (B) –
Î0 Î0
(C) zero (D) depends on radius of sphere


A solid sphere is made by 3 materials taken as shown. Total charge on system is Q. If magnitude of it
electric field at every boundary point is same then
12. Ratio of charges in material 1, material 2 and material 3.

(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B) 1 : 3 : 5 (C) 1 : 4 : 9 (D) 1 : 1 : 1
13. Charge density of material 1 will be
Q 3Q Q Q
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12pr 3 4 pr 3 4 pr 3 8 pr 3
14. Electric field at distance r/2 from centre will be
1 Q 1 Q 1 Q Q
(A) 56pe r 2 (B) 72pe r 2 (C) 36pe r 2 (D)
0 0 0 r2

Paragraph for Questions 15 & 16
Figure shows a schematic view of an electrostatic analyzer. It can
y Analyzer Exit
sort out charged particles by speed and charge to mass ratio.
x
Spacecraft uses such analyzers to characterize charged particles in
interplanetary space. Two curved metal plates establish an electric Electric field b
field given by E=E0(b/r) where E0 and b are positive constants. The
a
field points towards the centre of curvature and r is distance from r
centre. There is no influence of gravity. Proton (charge + e; mass
‘m’) enters along y-axis and exits along x-axis while moving along Proton beam
a circular path.
15. Mark the CORRECT option (s) :-
eE0 b
(A) Speed with which proton is to be projected is given by v =
m
e æ bö
(B) centripetal acceleration of electron is ac is given by ac = E0 ç ÷
m èrø
e æbö
(C) Electric force on proton is given by E0 ç ÷
2 èr ø
æbö
(D) Electric force on proton is given by 2eE0 ç ÷
èr ø

16. Mark the CORRECT option(s)

(A) Work done by electric field on proton is zero.
2eE0 b
(B) If v = proton may strike outer surface of analyzer.
m
2eE0 b
(C) If v = proton may strike inner surface of analyzer.
m
(D) If an electron is released with zero initial velocity from inner surface of analyzer, it will strike outer
2eE0 b æ b ö
surface with velocity v = ln ç ÷ , where m is mass of electron.
me è aø e
SECTION-III
1. Charge Q = 2µC is distributed on a small conducting sphere
(radius r1 = 0.1 m) as shown inside a spherical cavity of radius k
r2 = 0.5 m made inside a neutral solid conducting sphere of r2 r1 Q
radius r3 = 2m as shown in the figure. The outer surface is
4W
grounded using a resistance of 4W by closing key k. The heat r3
dissipated on switching on the key is given by a mJ. Fill the
value of a.
2. Electric dipole of moment P = P î is kept at a point (x,y) in an electric field, E = 4 xy2 î + 4 x2y jˆ. Find
the forces on the dipole. If your answer is n py (y2 + 4 x2)1/2 Then find n.
3. Two charges q and –2q are placed at (–3,0) and (3,0) in x–y plane. The locus of the point in the plane of
the charges, where the field potential is zero is (x + a)2 + y2 = 4b2. Find the value of (a+b).
SECTION-IV
1. A dipole with an electric dipole moment pr is located at distance r from a long thread charged uniformly
with a linear density l. Orientation of dipole is given in column-I & electric force on the dipole is given
incolumn-II.
Column-I Column -II
y lp
(A) Along the thread (P) - î
l 2p Î0 r 2
p x
y lp
(B) Along the radius vector (Q) - î
l 4p Î0 r 2
p x
y
(C) At right angles to the thread and radius vector r (R) Zero
l
p x
r
y lp
(D) p
60°
At angle 60° from the radius vector in the plane (S) 2p Î0 r 2
l
x
carrying wire & radius vector

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Charge Q is distributed on a small hollow conducting sphere (radius r) as shown inside a spherical
cavity of radius r1 made inside a solid conducting sphere of radius r2 as shown in the figure. The total
energy of the system is :-
2æ 1 1 1 ö 2æ 1 1 1ö
(A) kQ ç - + ÷ (B) kQ ç r + r + 2r ÷ r1
Q
è 2r2 2r1 2r ø è 1 2 ø r
r2
2æ 1 1 1 ö 2æ 1 1 1 ö
(C) kQ ç + + ÷ (D) kQ ç 4r + 2r + 2r ÷
è 2r1 4r2 2r ø è 1 2 ø
2. The figure shows a charge q placed inside a cavity in an uncharged conductor.
Now if an external electric field is switched on then :
C
(A) only induced charge on outer surface will redistribute
(B) only induced charge on inner surface will redistribute q
(C) Both induced charge on outer and inner surface will redistribute
(D) force on charge q placed inside the cavity will change
3. There are two conducting concentric spherical thin shells of radius
3R
and R. Thin shell of radius R is given a charge 4 Q. A point
4 3R/4
P
charge –Q is also placed in the cavity at a distance R/2 from the –Q
R/2
centre as shown in figure. Find the electric potential at a distance R R
2R from the centre of concentric spherical shells along the line
joining point charge :
1 5Q 1 5Q 1 3Q 1 Q
(A) 8pe R (B) - 8pe R (C) 8pe R (D) 2 p Î 3R
0 0 0 0
4. A solid uncharged conducting sphere has radius 3a contains a hollowed a a a a

spherical region of radius 2a. A point charge +Q is placed at a position a
distance a from the common center of the spheres. What is the magnitude
of the electric field at the position r = 4a from the center of the spheres as
Q P
æ 1 ö
marked in the figure by P? ç k = ÷
è 4p Î0 ø :-
kQ 3kQ kQ
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
16a 16a 9a
5. An isolated and charged spherical soap bubble has a radius 'r' and the pressure inside is 1 atmosphere.
If 'T' is the surface tension of soap solution, then charge on the soap bubble is :-
2rT 2rT
(A) 2 (B) 8pr 2rT Î0 (C) 8pr rT Î0 (D) 8pr
Î0 Î0


6. In which of the cases we will get uniform charge distribution of (+q) on external spherical surface.
Given every object is a conductor :
(A) r thin shell having net charge +q
(B) –q thick shell having net charge zero

centre
(C) +q thick shell having net charge zero
(D) +q
solid sphere having net charge +q
7. A long thin straight wire with linear charge density l runs along axis of a thin hollow metal cylinder of
radius R. The cylinder has a net linear charge density 2l. Assume l is positive. Mark correct options:-
r
(A) E(r > R) = 3l r
ˆ
2 pÎ0 r
r 3l rˆ
(B) E(r < R) =
2 pÎ0 r
(C) Linear charge density on inner surface of cylinder is –l
(D) Linear charge density on outer surface of cylinder is 3l
8. A point charge q is placed at P(0, 0, a). Then :-
(A) Flux through surface formed by joining points (0, 0, 0) ; (0, a, 0) ; (a, 0, 0) is greater than q
48e 0
q
(B) Flux through surface formed by joining points (0, a, 0) ; (a, 0, 0) ; (a, a, 0) is greater than 24e
0
q
(C) Flux through surface formed by joining points (0, a, 0); (0, –a, 0); (–a, –a, 0); (–a, a, 0) is equal to 12e
0
q
(D) Flux through surface formed by joining points (0, 0, 0) ; (0, 0, a) ; (0, a, a) ; (0, a, 0) is equal to 48e
0

A spherical insulator of radius a is concentric with a conducting spherical shell
having inner radius 3a and outer radius 5a as shown in the figure. The charge
+Q1 is uniformly distributed throughout the volume of the insulator, and the net
charge on the conductor is +Q2.
9. What is the magnitude of the electric field a distance of 2a from the center of the insulator?
(A) (Q1 + Q 2 ) / 4pe0a 2 (B) Q1 / 16pe0a 2 (C) Q1 / 4pe0a 2 (D) None of these
10. What is the flux of the electric field through a Gaussian sphere of radius 4a that is concentric with both
the insulator and conducting shell?
(A) 0 (B) Q1 / e 0 (C) (Q1 + Q 2 ) / e 0 (D) None of these
11. What is the surface charge density on the outer surface of the conductor?
(A ) Q2/100pa2 (B) (Q1 + Q2)/100pa2
(C) 3(Q1 + Q2)/100pa 2
(D) None of these
Column-I & II represents the magnitude of electric field at points A & B respectively. Column-III
represents the magnitude of potential difference between the two points. (Take potential at infinity to be
æ 1 ö
zero) ç k = 4pe ÷
è 0 ø
Column–I Column-II Column-III
Electric field at Electric field at Potential difference
point A point B between two points
rr1 rR 2 kQ æ r12 ö kQ
(I) (i) (P) ç
|VA – VB| = 2R ç 3 - ÷-
2e0 4e0 r2 è R 2 ÷ø r2
kQr1 rR2 3kQ kQ

(II) (ii) (Q) |VA – VB| = 2R - r
R3 2e0 r2 2
kQ rR2 æ r3 ö
(III) 0 (iii) r22
(R) |VC – VB| = 2e ln ç r ÷
0 è 2ø
rr1 kQr2 kQ kQ
(IV) 4e (iv) 3 (S) |VA – VB|= R - r
0 R 2
12. Which of the following combination represents the situation due to a uniformly charged non-conducting
solid sphere having total charge Q & radius R :-
r1
A
B r2 R
Q
(A) (II) (iii) (Q) (B) (III) (iii) (S) (C) (II) (iii) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (P)
13. Which of the following combination represents the situation due to a uniformly charged non-conducting
hollow thin sphere having total charge Q & radius R.
r1
B A
r2 R
Q
(A) (III) (iii) (S) (B) (II) (iii) (P) (C) (III) (iv) (Q) (D) (II) (iv) (S)

14. Which of the following combination represents the situation due to a uniformly charged infinite solid
cylinder of radius R and charge density r.
r1
r2 A
B
C r3
(A) (III) (i) (P) (B) (I) (i) (R) (C) (IV) (ii) (P) (D) (I) (ii) (R)
SECTION-III
1. An arrangement of source charges produces the electric potential V = 5000 x2 along the x-axis, where V
is in volts and x is in meters. If a charge particle of mass 1g and charge 1nC is present in this field and its
turning points are at ± 8.0 cm? What is the particle’s maximum speed (in mm/s).
2. Figure shows two concentric spherical shell having radii 1 m and 2 m respectively. Outer spherical
surface has charge –3.2 × 10–15 Coulomb. If inner surface is now earthed by closing the switch then
x × 10+y number of electron move towards earth, then x + y will be (x, y Î I, 0 £ x,y £ 9).
1m
S
2m
3. Figure shows a cylindrical conducting rod of diameter d and length

l
l >> d uniformly charged in vacuum such that electric field near
its surface and far from its ends is E 0. Electric field at r >> l on the d
3E0 ld
axis of the cylinder is . Then find the value of N. r
2Nr 2
10
4. A spherical conductor of radius 4cm carries a charge of ´ 10-10 C . At what distance (in cm) from of
9
40
sphere should a point charge of ´ 10-10 C should be placed so that the potential of the conductor
9
becomes 75 V. Assume potential is zero at infinity.
5. Two metal balls of radii R and 2R are connected to a long thin conducting wire and has total charge
Q = 21 µC. Then the ball of radius R is placed inside a grounded metal sphere of radius 3R as shown.
What charge (in µC) will flow through the thin wire in this process ?
3R
R 2R

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. Consider a thin conducting spherical shell of radius R having charge Q. A point charge q is placed at a
distance R/3 from the center of the shell and another point charge 2q is placed at a distance 3R from the
center of the shell. If the shell is grounded, find the charge flown through the grounding wire.
2 5
(A) Q + q (B) Q + 3q (C) Q + q (D) Q + q
3 3
2. Three concentric spherical shells have radii a, b and c (a < b < c) and have surface charge densities s, –
s and s respectively. If VA, VB and VC denote the potentials of the three shells, then for c = a + b, we
have :-
(A) VC = VB = VA (B) VC = VA ¹ VB (C) VC = VB ¹ VA (D) VC ¹ VB ¹ VA
3. The metal plate on the left carries charge + Q, and on the right has Q 5Q 4Q
d 2d
charge 4Q respectively as shown, The central plate has initially
charge equal to 5Q. When both S1 and S2 switches are closed
simultaneously then the charge flowed through S1 upto steady state
is :-
5Q
(A)Q (B)
2
3Q S S
(C) (D) None of these 1 2
2
4. Consider a solid metallic sphere which is grounded. Consider a charge +q which is moved towards the
sphere with a constant velocity by an external agent as shown. Then
r
¬¾v
+q
¾
(A) The charge distribution on the surface of the sphere will not change with time.
(B) The surface charge density of the sphere will increase with time.
(C) The surface charge density of the sphere will decrease with time.
(D) The potential of the sphere will decrease as the charge moves towards the sphere.
5. Three large conducting plates A, B & C are placed parallel to each
other as shown in figure & having charges –Q, +Q & 0 respectively. A B C
Long time after closing the switch s two particles having charge –q –Q Q 0
mass m are projected normally with velocity vA & vC from plate B
but in opposite direction towards A & C respectively. Then find
the ratio of velocity (VA/VC) needed so that these two charge particles
can reach plates A & C respectively.
1 2 d 2d
(A) (B)
1 1
2 3 S
(C) (D)
1 1

6. Five identical small electric dipoles are placed at a distance r

from an infinitely long straight wire carrying a uniform charge l + p5
density l.If they experience force of magnitude F1, F2, F3, F4 +
+ p4
and F5 respectively then + 45°
+ p3
(A) F1 = F2=F3 = F4=F5 + 45°
+ p2
(B) F3 < F2 = F4 < F1 = F5
+
(C) F3 > F2 = F4 > F1 = F5 + p1
(D) Can't be determined the relation between F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5
7. A dipole is kept in circular plane of a uniformly charged
+ + ++
hemispherical shell. Center of dipole coincide with center of ++ +
+ +
hemispherical shell and dipole is restricted to move in given + +
+ +
circular plane. Identify it’s type of equilibrium if dipole is slightly + +
+ P +
rotate in this plane :-
(A) Neutral (B) Unstable
(C) Stable (D) Depends upon the direction of rotation
8. Imagine that a dipole is at the centre of a spherical non conducting surface. If magnitude of electric field
at a certain point on the surface of sphere is 10 N/C, then which of the following cannot be the magnitude
of electric field anywhere on the surface of sphere :-
(A) 4N/C (B) 8N/C (C) 16 N/C (D) 32 N/C
r
9. An ideal dipole of dipole moment P is placed in front of an uncharged conducting sphere of radius R
as shown.
KP
(A) The potential at point A is
(r - R)2 R
P A
O B
KP r
(B) The potential at point A is 2
r
KP
(C) The potential due to dipole at point B is
(r + R)2
KP
(D) The potential due to dipole at point B is
r2
10. Three thin concentric conducting spherical shells A, B, C of radius R, 2R 3Q
and 3R are given charges Q, 2Q, 3Q respectively as shown. The inner most C
2Q B
and outermost can be joined through switch 'S' which is initially opened.
Q
Choose the INCORRECT options :- 3R A
RS r
(A) After closing switch S, potential of shell C does not change.
2R
(B) After closing switch S, charge on shell A becomes zero.
(C) After closing switch S, potential of shell B does not change.
(D) After closing switch S, charge on shell C does not change.

11. Figure shows a neutral metallic sphere with a point charge +Q placed near its surface. Electrostatic
equilibrium conditions exist on metallic sphere. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :
Plane that divides

Gausian surface Spherical Gaussian surface
in two halves
+Q
Neutral metallic sphere
(A) Net flux through Gaussian surface due to charge Q is zero

(B) Net flux through Gaussian surface due to charges appearing on the outer surface of metallic sphere
must be zero
(C) If point charge Q is displaced towards metallic sphere, magnitude of flux through right
hemispherical part of Gaussian surface due to this charge increases.
(D) If point charge Q is displaced towards metallic sphere, charge distribution on outer surface of
sphere will change
12. A spherical soap bubble of radius R has uniformly distributed charge over its surface with surface
charge density s then [T = surface tension of the soap solution]
4T s 2 4T s 2
(A) excess pressure inside the bubble is - (B) excess pressure inside the bubble is +
R 2e 0 R 2e 0
4T s2
(C) excess pressure inside the bubble is (D) electrostatic pressure is
R 2e 0
13. Figure shows an arrangement of four identical rectangular plates a b c
A, B, C and D each of area S. Ignore the separation between the
+Q1 +Q2
plates in comparison to the plate dimensions.
(A ) Potential dif f erence between plates A & B is independent of Q 1.
(B) Potential difference between plates C & D is independent of Q1.
(C) Potential difference between plates A & B is independent of Q2.
A B C D
(D) Potential difference between plates C & D is independent of Q2.
3V
14. Two concentric conducting shells have radii R and 2R; charges qA and qB and potentials 2V and
2
respectively if reference for electric potential is taken at infinity. Now shell B is earthed and let charges
on them become q'A and q'B. Then:
qA 1
(A) =
qB 2
q'
(B) A = 1
q 'B
3V
(C) Potential of A after earthing becomes
2
(D) Potential difference (VA – VB) between A and B after earthing becomes V/2


Figure shows an arbitrary body through which electric charge is distributed in an arbitrary way. The
body is divided in two region A and B. Using the result,
The electric force that the charge in region A exerts on the
charge in region B is equal to the force that the charge on A B
the entire body exerts on the charge in region B or otherwise
solve next two problems.
r
15. Consider a uniformly charged spherical shell of radius R having total charge Q. Find electric force F
exerted on each hemisphere by the charge on the other hemisphere.
Q2 Q2 Q2 Q2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4p Î0 R 2 16 pÎ0 R 2 8p Î0 R 2 32p Î0 R 2
16. Consider a uniformly charged solid dielectric sphere of total charge Q and radius R. The force exerted
by one hemisphere on other hemisphere is :
3Q 2 3Q 2 Q2 Q2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
16 pÎ0 R 2 64p Î0 R 2 9pÎ0 R 2 36p Î0 R 2
17. List-I represents certain charge configurations & list-II comments on their electric field at point C :
List-I List-II
(P) An electric dipole and point C is on the (1) Electric field at C will be zero
perpendicular bisector
–q O +q
(Q) A uniform hollow neutral conducting sphere & (2) Electric field at C is towards right
positive charge is placed at centre of cavity.
C is a point outside the sphere
C
+q
(R) A regular hexagon with 5 charges as shown. (3) Electric field at C is towards left
C is centre of hexagon.
–q +q
C
+q
+q –q
(S) A uniformly positively charged disc with a (4) Electric field at C is towards upward
cavity inside the disc. C is a point on its axis.
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 3 2 4 1
(B) 1 2 4 3
(C) 1 4 2 3
(D) 3 2 2 4
SECTION-III
1. Four very large metal plates are given charges as shown. The middle two are then connected through a
conducting wire. The charge that will flow through the wire is nQ. Find the value of n.
2. The graph shows the potential energy of an electric dipole that oscillates between ± 60°. What is dipoles
kinetic energy (in µJ) when it is aligned with the field.
U (µJ)
+2
f
–180° –90° 0° 90° 180°
–2
3. A dipole of dipole moment P, is kept at the centre, along the axis of the hemispherical shell as shown in
the figure. The electric flux through the surface of the shell, if radius of the shell is R is given by
p
N Î0 R . Find N.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. Two identical spheres each of radius R are kept at center–to–center spacing 4R as shown in the figure.
They are charged and the electrostatic force of interaction between them is first calculated assuming
them point like charges at their centers and the force is also measured experimentally. The calculated
and measured forces are denoted by Fc and Fm respectively.
(Fc and Fm denote magnitude of force)
4R
(A) When they carry charges of the same sign Fc > Fm and when they carry charges of opposite signs
Fc < Fm only when they are insulator.
(B) When they carry charges of the same sign Fc > Fm and when they carry charges of opposite signs
Fc < Fm only when they are conductor.
(C) When they carry charges of the same sign Fc < Fm and when they carry charges of opposite signs
Fc > Fm irrespective of their material.
(D)When they carry charges of the same sign Fc > Fm and when they carry charges of opposite signs
Fc < Fm irrespective of their material.
2. A conducting sphere A of radius rA carries a charge Q. Another conducting sphere B of radius rB is
uncharged initially. Both the spheres are separated by a very large distance. Sphere A is connected with
sphere B through a long conducting wire of zero resistance through a switch S as shown. As the current
flow through the wire vanishes, switch S is opened, sphere A is again charged to a total charge Q and
then switch S is again closed and the process is continued for infinite times. If q is the charge transferred
to sphere B when the switch S is closed for the first time, then total charge on the sphere B after large
number of such processes is :
Q
rB
rA S
A B
qQ rA
(A) Q (B) (C) Q r (D) None of these
Q -q B
3. P is a point at the centre of a tiny hole present on the surface of a conducting shell
s Q
having charge density s and Q is a point just outside the shell as shown in figure.
Two charge particles A (q, m) and B æç q, m ö÷ are released at t = 0 from Q & P

2 è ø
P
æ aA ö
respectively. Find the ratio of magnitudes of their accelerations ç a ÷ .
è Bø
1
(A) 2 (B) (C) 1 (D) 4
2
4. Three identical small electric dipoles are arranged parallel to each other at separation a as shown in
figure. Their total interaction energy is U. Now one of the end dipole is gradually reversed. Work done
by electric forces is :
Å Å Å
a a
17U 16U 16U 18U

(A) (B) (C) (D)
8 17 7 17
5. Figure shows a ball having a charge q fixed at a point A. Two identical balls of mass m having charge
+ q & –q are attached to the end of a light rod of length 2a. The system is released from the situation
shown in figure. Find the angular velocity of the rod when the rod turns through 90°.
+q
2a Pivot
+q
A 2a
–q
2q q q 2q
(A) (B) 3 (C) 3 (D)
3pÎ0 ma 3 3pÎ0 ma 6pÎ0 ma 4pÎ0 ma 3
6. A point negative charge – Q is placed at a distance r from a dipole with dipole moment P as shown in
figure. The x component of force acting on the charge – Q is -
PKQ PKQ 2PKQ 2PKQ

(A) – cos qî (B) cos qî (C) – 3
cos qî (D) cos qî
r r r r3
7. Consider a thick conducting shell of inner radius R1 & outer radius R2 as shown in the figure. Shell is
neutral and a point charge Q is kept at point A i.e. centre of shell. Point B and D lie at distance r1 and r2
respectively from centre. Choose CORRECT option(s) :
kQ kQ
(A) Potential at point D is + R2
R2 r2 B
r2 r1
R1
D C A
kQ kQ kQ
(B) Potential at point B is + -
R2 r1 R1
(C) Potential at D will change if point charge shifted to position C
(D) Potential at B will change if point charge is shifted to position C.
8. Two fixed, identical conducting plates (a & b ), each of surface area S on one side are charged to –Q
and q, respectively, where Q > q > 0. A third identical plate (g) with charge Q, free to move is located
on the right side of the plates at a distance d (figure). The third plate is released and collides with the
plate b. Assume the collision is elastic and the time of collision is sufficient to redistribute charge amongest
b & g.
a b g
y
x
d
–Q q Q
q-Q
(A) The electric field acting on the plate g before collision is S ( 2e ) , to the right
0
(B) The charges on b after the collision is q1 = (Q + q/2)

(C) The charges on g after the collision is q2 = (q/2)
(D) The velocity of the plate g after the collision and at a distance d from the plate b is
1/ 2
æ d ö
v = (Q - q / 2) ç ÷
è me 0S ø
9. Initially two plates (A and B) are given charges as shown. Find the final charges on the plates after the
key k is closed. All plates are conducting, parallel and of infinite length and breadth.
Q 2Q
A B C D
(A)Final charges on plate A is Q (B) Final charge on plate B is 0
(C) Final charge on plate C is 3Q/2 (D) Final charge on plate D is 0
10. In the given figure to concentric conducting spherical shells of radii a and 2a have charge zero and Q
respectively. When the key K is closed :-
The V = f(r) & E = f(r) graph is (r is the distance from the centre) :-
V V E E
a r a r
(A) (B) (C) 2a (D) 2a
r r
2a a 2a


r r
r K ( r - r0 ) r r
Electric field in a region is given by following equation E = r r 2 where r = xiˆ + yjˆ and r0 = î + ˆj
r - r0
and an imaginary cube is made as shown in the diagram.
z
y
(0,2,0)
11. Find total flux through this cube due to the given electric field.
(A) 4pK (B) 6pK (C) 16K (D) 8K
12. Find total charge encloses in this imaginary shown cube.
(A) 4Kpe0 (B) 8Kpe0 (C) 6Kpe0 (D) 2Kpe0
r
13. If r0 = ( 2iˆ + 2ˆj ) then find the value of total flux through the walls of the shown cube
(A) 2Kp (B) Kp (C) 4Kp (D) 4K
Matching List Type (4 × 4) 2 Q. [3 M (–1)]
14. List-I shows different charge distributions and short electric dipole at a distance x from the charge
distributions. List-II gives the dependence of force acting on the dipole as of function of x.
List-I List-II
(P) x dipole (1) x–2
Uniformly charged thin infinite disc.
x
dipole
(Q) (2) x–3
Uniformly charged thick infinite sheet.

Dipole is placed inside the sheet.
(R) x dipole (3) x0
Uniform infinite line of charge.

(S) x dipole (4) x–¥
Uniformly charged sphere.

Dipole is placed outside the sphere.
Code
P Q R S
(A) 4 1 3 2
(B) 4 3 1 2
(C) 1 2 4 3
(D) 3 4 1 2
15. If the given two identical charged rings lie in xy plane both having linear charge density l varies as per
l = l0 cos q (l0 = constant) where q is measured from +x-axis. Radius for both the rings is R
l=l0 cos q l=l0 cos q

A B
q q
c1 c2 x
c1 c2 = d>>R (C1 and C2 are centres)
List-I List-II
(P) Dipole moment of each ring is xl0pR2 then (1) 0
x is
(Q) Magnitude of work done by electric fied in (2) 1
rotating ring B by 90° about x-axis is
xKl 20 p2 R 4
then x is
2d 3
(R) Magnitude of work done by electric field in (3) 6
rotating ring B by 90° about z-axis is
xKl 20 p2 R 4
then x is
2d 3
xKl 20 p2 R 4
(S) Electric force between the two rings is (4) 4
d4
then x is
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 1 2 3 4
(B) 2 1 4 3
(C) 2 3 1 4
(D) 3 4 2 1

SECTION-III
1. A solid conducting sphere of radius 'a' having charge q is surrounded by a concentric conducting spherical
shell of inner radius 2a and outer radius 3a as shown in figure. If the amount of heat produced when
æ kq 2 ö
switch is closed is x ç ÷ . Fill the value of x.
è 24a ø
a 2a
S 3a
2. The centres of two small metal balls, whose radii are equal, are initially at a distance of r. If both balls are
given different magnitude and opposite charges, and then they are released, they begin to move towards
each other. They touch each other and then they move away from each other again. When the distance
between their centres is 4r, then the force exerted between them is one-twentieth of the initial force
exerted between them. The initial charge of one of the balls was 2 × 10–7 C. If the initial charge of the
other ball is –x × 10–8 C, find the value of x. (x is an integer, the sum of charges is positive)
3. A point charge particle kept at the center of two concentric hollow conducting sphere of inner radii R
and 3R, outer radii 2R and 4R respectively. Amount of energy stored in electric field in the absence of
nq 2
conducting spheres is U1 and in the presence of conducting spheres is U2. If U1 - U 2 = . Then
96 pe0 R
fill the value of n.
4R
2R
R
q
3R
3KP
4. Potential at point A due to dipoles is br g then find the value of b + g ?
60° r
60° 60°
P P

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A insulating sphere of radius 'a' carries a net positive charge 3Q, uniformly distributed throughout its
volume. Concentric with this sphere is a conducting spherical shell with inner radius 'b' and outer radius
'c', and having a net charge –Q, as shown in figure. Electric field varies with distance r from the centre
æ 1 ö
as ç K = 4 ÷
è p Î0 ø
–Q
3Q
a c
E
E E E
3kQ
3kQ 3kQ 3kQ a2
a2 a2 a2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
a bc r
a b c r a r a b c r
2. A short electric dipole is oriented along x-direction at origin. At which of following point the electric
field have no x component.
x
P
(A) (1, 1, 0) (B) ( 2 , 1, 0) (C) (1, 2 , 0) (D) (1, 0, 0)
3. An infinetely small electric dipole is kept on the axis of a uniformaly charged ring at distance R / 2
from the centre of the ring. The direction of the dipole moment is along the axis. The dipole moment is
P, charge of the ring is Q and radius of the ring is R. The force on the dipole is nearly.
4 kPQ 4 kPQ 2kPQ

(A) (B) (C) (D) zero
3 3 R2 3 3R3 3 3 R3

4. Consider a gravity free container as shown. System is initially at rest y

and electric potential in the regon is V = (y +2) J/C. A ball of charge
3
q and mass m is released from rest from base starts to move up due
to electric field and collides with the shaded face as shown.
If its speed just after collision is 1.5 m/s and time for which ball is in
contact with shaded face is 0.1sec, find external force required to 2m
hold the container fixed in its position during collision assuming x
ball exerts constant force on wall during entire span of collision.
(A) 70 N -1
q = C , m = 2kg
(B) 72 N z 2
(C) 74 N
(D) 76 N
5. A hemispherical bowl of mass m is uniformly charged with charge density 's'. Electric potential due to
charge distribution at a point 'A' is (which lies at centre of radius as shown).
+++++
++ +
+ +
+
++
+
+++
++
O R/2 A
sR sR sR sR
(A) 4e (B) 3e (C) 2e (D) e
0 0 0 0

6. A non conducting sphere of radius R is given a volume charge density r = kr, where r is the distance of
a point in the spherical volume from its centre and k is a positive constant. Then mark the CORRECT
options :
(A) Self energy of the sphere is given by dR7, where d is some constant.
k2 pR 6
(B) Electrostatic force of interaction between the left and right hemispheres is 12. Î .
0
kr 2
(C) Electric field at distance r from centre is 4 Î (r £ R) .
0
(D) Electrostatic pressure at a distance r (r £ R) , from the centre is P(r) = a(b–r4), where a & b are some
constants.
7. A cavity is taken out from a uniform conducting sphere. Inside P
d
the cavity a dipole is placed as shown in the figure. Find which
+q R
of the following is/are true (Given : q = 10–1C, l = 0.1 mm, l 30° A
–q
q = 30°, d = 10 cm, R = 12 cm)
O
(A) Potential at points A & B are same
(B) Potential at points A & B are different
(C) Potential at point P is 0 volt
B
(D) Potential at point P is 2 volt

8. Consider a conductor of arbitrary shape with a spherical cavity inside it. A charge q0 is placed inside
cavity, a charge Q is given to conductor and a charge q is placed outside conductor. Mark the CORRECT
statement (s) :-
q q0
(A) If cavity is spherical and charge q0 is placed asymmetrically inside it, it experiences a resultant force
(B) Force due to charges on outer surface of conductor on q0 is non zero.
(C) Field of external charge q is cancelled off for all inside points by charges appearing on outer surface
of conductor
(D) Charges on inner surface of cavity cancel off field of charge q0 for all points outside cavity
9. A thick shell with radius 2R has uniform density r c/m3. It has a spherical
cavity of radius R as shown in the figure. A charge particle of mass m and
charge Q is projected along the line AB at an angle q in the cavity as shown.
Select the correct statement (Assume particle doesn't comes out of cavity) :
u
é u sin 2q ù
2
q
(A) Particle crosses line AB at a distance of ê QrR ú 3m Î0 from point A. A B
ë û
(B) Average velocity of particle during the time it crosses line AB is greater
than u cos q.
(C) Final speed when it crosses line AB is equal to initial speed.
(D) It will move in a parabolic path in the cavity.
10. An insulating ring of charge 2plb and radius b is concentric with a charged conducting solid sphere of
charge Q and radius a (b >a ) as shown in the figure. Then
Q l
(A) Potential of the sphere is 4p Î a + 2 Î
0 0 a
-al b
(B) If sphere is grounded then charge on the sphere will be 8p2 Î
0
(C) Electric field inside the sphere is non-zero

(D) The sphere is equipotential body.
11. A point charge +Q is fixed at a point O. Another point charge +q & mass m is projected from infinity
towards +Q with speed v0. Minimum distance of approach is r. If it is now given speed 2v0 at infinity
then
r
(A) Minimum distance of approach becomes
2
r
(B) Minimum distance of approach becomes
4
(C) Angular momentum conservation will hold true about O.
(D) Mechanical energy will remain conserved throughout the motion.

12. The diagram below shows some equipotential lines in the region of an electric field.
X Y
-60V
-50V
-40V -30V -20V -10V 0V
(A) Graph which shows the magnitude E of the electric field strength along the line XY is
E
X Y
position
(B) Graph which shows the magnitude E of the electric field strength along the line XY is
E
X Y
position
(C) If an electron is released from rest (from point x) then its velocity increases & its acceleration first
remains constant and then decreases
(D)If a electron is released from rest (from point x) then its velocity increases & its acceleration first
remains constant and then increases
Figure shows a very long smooth non conducting rod of radius r, charged with uniform charge density
l, fixed horizontally.
A neutral and smooth ring B of mass M can slide freely on the rod which happens to just fit in it. A is a
nonconducting particle having mass m and charge q, attached to the ring by means of a non-conducting
and inextensible string of length R. If P is released from the position shown in figure then answer the
following questions.
B
++++++ ++++++++++++
A
13. The loss in electrostatic potential energy when string becomes vertical, is:–
ql æ Rö ql æ Rö ql æ rö ql æ rö
(A) 4p Î ln çè 1 + r ÷ø (B) 2p Î ln çè 1 + r ÷ø (C) 2p Î ln çè 1 - R ÷ø (D) 2p Î ln çè 1 + R ÷ø
0 0 0 0
14. If M = 2m and R = 2r then the speed of particle when string becomes vertical, is:–
2æ ql ö 2 ql
(A) 3 ç 2gR + p Î m ln3÷ (B) 3 2gR + p Î m ln3
è 0 ø 0
ql
(C) 2gR + 2p Î m ln3 (D) None of these
0

15. If M = 2m and R = 2r then the tension in the string when the string is vertical, is:–
ql ql
(A) 3mg + 6p Î r [ 2 + 3ln3] (B) mg + 12p Î r [ 2 + 3ln3]
0 0
ql
(C) 4mg + [ 2 + 9ln3] (D) None of these
12p Î0 r
16. A point charge is placed inside a spherical cavity of a neutral conductor. Another point charge Q is
placed outside the conductor as shown.
List – I gives assertion statements and List- II gives its reason statements. Match the assertions with
proper reason
q0
A B .Q
List -I List -II

(P) Total charge induced on cavity (1) If cavity is surrounded by a Gaussian
wall is equal & opposite to q0 surface, where, all parts of Gaussian surface
® ®
are located inside conductor then, ò E.dA = 0
hence, total charge enclosed by Gaussian
surface must be zero
(Q) As the point charge Q placed (2) The resultant electric field due to charges
outside is pushed away from on outer surface of conductor & outside the
conductor, the potential conductor is zero at all points inside the
difference (VA – VB) between conductor
two points A and B within
the cavity of sphere
remains constant.
(R) Electric field due to induced (3) The resultant electric field due to charge
charge on the inner surface induced on inner surface of conductor cavity
of cavity at a point outside the and charge q0 placed inside cavity is zero at
conductor is non zero all points outisde cavity.
(S) Electric potential at a point (4) Net electric potential due to charge induced
outside the conductor due to on the inner surface of cavity and the charge q0
induced charges on the inner placed inside cavity is zero at all pointsoutside
surface of cavity is nonzero cavity.
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 2 3 1 4
(B) 1 3 4 3
(C) 4 2 3 1
(D) 1 2 3 4

SECTION-III
1. For a hypothetical electric field in x-direction, its potential is continuously decreasing and becoming half
after every 20 cm. The rate of decreasing of potential with distance is also directly proportional to the
potential itself. If the ratio of electric field and potential is xln2(m–1). Find the value of x.
2. The electric potential varies in space according to the relation V = 3x + 4y. A particle of mass 10 kg and
charge +1 mC starts from rest from point (2, 3.2) under the influence of this field. Find the velocity
(in mm/s) of the particle when it crosses the x–axis. Assume V and (x, y) are in S.I. units.
3. Consider the E versus x graph. What is the minimum velocity that should be given to a point charge
–Q of mass M at x = 3L so that it can reach the origin? Take Q = 1 mC, mass of the charge as 1g,
E0 = 5 N/C and L = 5m.
E0
3L x
L 2L
–E0
SECTION-IV
1. The electric potential in a region of space is varies as V = 4x + 3y – 5z2. All physical quantities are in SI
units. Match the entries of column I with entries of column II.
Column I Column II
(A) Magnitude of electric field at (–34,63,1) (P) 4x + 3y = 5z2 + 59
(B) Equation of equipotential surface (Q) 7 = 10z
(C) Magnitude of force experienced by 5C charge located at origin. (R) 0
(D) The potential difference between the point (3,4,0) and (6,0,0) (S) 5 5
(T) 5z2 – 4x – 3y = 59

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A spherical conductor have a cavity of radius ‘a’. If radius of conductor have
radius ‘c’ and the distance between centre of conductor and center of cavity is a
‘b’. Charge given to conductor is Q. Then select the correct statement :- c
b
(A) Electric field in the cavity is non zero and uniform
(B) Electric field in the cavity is zero through out the volume
(C) Electric field intensity in the cavity depends on b
(D) Electric field intensity depends on radius of cavity ‘a’
2. The potential (in volts) of a charge distribution is given by
V(z) = 30–5z2 for |z| £ 1m
V(z) = 35–10|z| for |z| ³ 1m.
V(z) does not depend on x and y. If this potential is generated by a uniform charge per unit volume r0 (in
units of Î0) which is spread over a certain region, then choose the correct statement.
(A) r0=20 Î0 in the entire region (B) r0=10 Î0 for |z| £ 1m and r0=0 elsewhere
(C) r0=40 Î0 in the entire region (D) r0=20 Î0 for |z| £ 1m and r0=0 elsewhere
3. A charge +Q is located somewhere inside a vertical cone such that the depth of
the charge from the free surface of the cone is H. It is found that the flux
H
3Q +Q
associated with the cone with the curved surface is 5e . If the charge is raised
0
vertically through a height 2H, then the flux through the curved surface is
3Q 2Q 4Q
(A) 5Î (B) 5Î (C) 5Î (D) Zero
0 0 0
4. Consider an imaginary hemispherical surface. A semi-infinite wire of charge density l is kept with one
of its end conciding with centre of hemisphere and wire is kept along the symmetric axis of the hemisphere
as shown in the figure. The electric flux passing through the spherical surface of the hemisphere is :-
+++ +++++++++++ ¥
l
R
lR lR 3 lR lR
(A) 3 Î (B) 4 Î (C) 4 Î (D) 2 Î
0 0 0 0
5. A sphere of radius 10 cm has a total charge Q distributed over its surface. Imagine this sphere to be
resting on the open end of a cylinder of radius 8 cm and height 10cm. Find the electric flux through the
curved cylindrical surface.
Q
0
(
(A) 10 Î 2 5 - 3 ) Q
(B) 5 Î
0
Q æ
(C) 2 Î ç1 -
0 è
÷
5ø
2 ö
(D) None of these

6. Two infinite wires are charged uniformly with same charge density and
kept parallel to each other at a distance of 2a to each other. In the symmetry
plane passing through the mid point of line joining both the wire; there is
a point at a distance x from the central point where electric field is a
maximum. Find x. x
a a
(A) x = a (B) x =
2
a
(C) x = (D) 2a
2
r
7. In the given hypothetical electric field E = é( d + x ) î - E 0 ˆjù N / C , a hypothetical closed surface is
ë û
taken as shown in figure :-
y
B
c
A
a F
C x
D
z b E
(A) Net flux through plane ABCD is –acd unit.

(B) Net flux through plane CDEF is bcE0 unit.
é acb ù
(C) Net flux through plane ABEF is ê - bcE 0 + acd + unit.
ë 2 úû
(D) Net charge enclosed by the closed surface is abcÎ0 unit.
8. A particle with charge Q is located immediately above the centre of the flat face of a hemisphere of
radius R as shown in figure. Choose CORRECT statement(s) :- (Outward area is to be taken positive)
d®0 Q
R
Q
(A) Flux through the flat surface is – .
2 Î0
Q
(B) Flux through the curved surface is .
2 Î0
Q
(C) If charge Q is displaced up flux through flat surface is less than in magnitude
2 Î0
Q
(D) If charge Q is displaced up flux through curved surface is less than in magnitude.
2 Î0

9. Figure shows two spheres, each of radius R and carrying uniform volume charge densities +r and –r,
respectively, are placed so that they partially overlap. Let the vector from the positive centre to the
r
negative centre is d . Then choose the CORRECT statement(s) :-
d –r
+r
(A) Electric field inside the overlaped region will be uniform
r r
(B) Electric field inside the overlaped region is d
3 Î0
(C) Electric field inside the overlaped region is zero
(D) Gauss's law can not be applied if only one of the spheres is taken as Gaussian surface.
10. An ellipsoidal gaussion surface with semi major axis a and minor axis b is shown in figure. An electric
r C(xiˆ + yjˆ + zk)ˆ
field E = 2 exist in space.
(x + y 2 + z 2 )3/ 2
y
b
O x
z
a
(A) Net flux through constant gaussion surface is 4pC

(B) Net charge enclosed by gaussion surface is 4pCe0
(C) If given surface is a conductor electric potential at all its inside points may be constant for given field
function
(D) If given surface is a conductor electric field at all its inside points may be constant for given field
function
11. The following figure shows a charge Q kept at the centre of a cube. Let f represent the flux of field due
to the charge Q, the correct options are :
b C
B
e p
f
A a D
Q
F G
c
h q g
d
E H
Q Q Q
(A) fABCD = 6e (B) fCbpf = 24e (C) fabcd = 0 (D) fabcd = 2e
0 0 0


Paragraph for Question nos. 12 to 14
While dealing with a system of point charges, the principle of superposition is helpful in obtaining the
electric field vector at any point. However, evaluating electric field at a point for continuous charge
distribution in space often becomes a mathematically challenging job. The application of Gauss' law is
sometimes useful in such cases. Gauss' law states that the total electric flux through a closed surface is
æ 1 ö
proportional to total electric charge enclosed within the surface with çç ÷÷ as constant of proportionality.
è Î0 ø
One such application is in finding electric field for an infinite linear distribution of charge, having l as
linear charge density.
r r l
Taking S1 as the gaussian surface, fE = ò E ·d s = E ( 2prl ), q enclosed = ll. Hence, E = .
2pe0 r
Mr. Becker rather decides to take an upright cylinder shown as surface S2. He applies Gauss' law on
r r l
surface S2 as ; fE = ò E · d s = E ( 2pr 2 ) , qenclosed = (2rl). It gives E = . The difference in values of
pre 0
electric field calculated by using surfaces S1 and S2 is debatable.
S2
l
l
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
S1
S2
12. Which of the following correctly points out the error in Mr. Beckers analysis ?
(A) Gaussian surface cannot cut the continuous distribution of charge
(B) The area vectors at the two ends of S2 must be in the same direction
r r
(C) ò E ·d s ¹ E ( 2pr 2 )
(D) qenclosed ¹ 2rl
13. To calculate the electric field due to an infinite plane sheet of uniform charge density s, We choose two
different gaussian cylinders as shown in figure (I) & figure (II). The appropriate choice is figure (I)
because
Infinite plane
sheet of charge
S1
P
S2 P r
l s s
r
l
Figure (I) Figure (II)
(A) Gaussian surface cannot cut the continuous distribution of charge

(B) The area vectors at the two ends of S2 must be in the same direction
r r
(C) for S2, ò E ·d s ¹ E ( 2prl )
(D) qenclosed ¹ 2rls

14. Consider a finite wire having a uniform charge distribution over its length. It is symmetrically enclosed
by coaxial cylindrical Gaussian surface as shown in figure. We apply Gauss's law to find electric field
r r
and for that purpose, we wish to evaluate ò E ·ds . Which of the following is incorrect reason for our
inability to evaluate the integeral.
h
r
(A) The flux will be due to the components of electric field normal to the wire only.
(B) Electric field is varying in magnitude over the surface
(C) The angle between electric field and area vector is not constant at all the points on the gaussian
surface
(D) The flux through the circular faces will be non zero
Figure shows a massless wheel of radius R and massless spokes with five charges each of charge Q and
mass m. System is placed in a field created by two large fixed plates having charges +Q0 and –Q0
respectively. Entire assembly lies in a smooth horizontal plane. Wheel is placed in horizontal plane and
constrained to move in horizontal plane. Initally spokes are released along x & y axis as shown in figure.
(A = surface area of plate)
+Q0 –Q0
y +Q
B
A C
–Q +Q
x +Q
D
–Q
15. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :

QQ 0
(A) Acceleration of centre of mass is 5 Î mA
0
QQ 0
(B) Acceleration of centre of mass is 10 Î mA
0
QQ 0
(C) Instantaneous angular acceleration of system is 2 Î AmR
0
QQ 0
(D) Instantaneous angular acceleration of system is 5 Î AmR
0


(A) When released from rest system executes periodic motion in the reference frame-fixed to centre of
mass.
(B) When released from rest system executes simple harmonic motion in the reference frame-fixed to
centre of mass.
QQ 0 ˆ QQ 0 ˆ
(C) Acceleration of point A immediately after release is i+ j.
5 Î0 mA 2 Î0 Am
QQ 0 ˆ QQ 0 ˆ
(D) Acceleration of point A immediately after release is i- j.
5 Î0 mA 5 Î0 Am
17. List-I List-II
Ö3R
q
R
(P) (1) O
Flux through given circle
A–q
+2q +2q
B
–q
–q q
(Q) –q
C +2q (2) 2 Î0
D +2q
Cube
Net flux through surface ABCD
q q
q
(R) 2a (3) 3 Î0
Net flux through given hemispherical surface
B
A
+q +q
a a
C q
(S) (4) 4 Î0
D
Net flux through surface ABCD

Code :-
P Q R S
(A) 4 3 2 1
(B) 3 2 1 4
(C) 2 3 4 1
(D) 1 4 2 3

SECTION-III
1. A long uniformly charged wire with linear charge density l = Î0 coulomb/m is placed in the form of a
spiral of outer radius R = 1m and having a total N = 160 turns as shown in figure. A dipole of dipole
r
moment p = 0.1 Cm is placed along x-axis at a = 3 m point (a, 0, 0). Find the magnitude of force
(in N) experienced by dipole.
y
z
x
2. A uniformly charged sphere is placed inside a charged hollow sphere as shown in figure. O is the centre
of hollow sphere and C is the centre of solid sphere. The magnitude of charge on both the spheres is
æ 3ö
4ç µC . The electric field at point ‘P’ which lie just outside the hollow sphere is given by 3a kN/C .
ç 7 ÷÷
è ø
Find the value of a.
O
Ö3 m
C 1m P
3. A point charge q(= 4C) is placed at a distance 2 2 cm from the centre of sphere having radius 2 cm as
shown in figure. Flux through the surface of sphere enclosed by all the tangents to the sphere passing
through the charge as shown in figure is

a ( 2 -1 ) . Find the value of a.
Î0
2c
m

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A planet of core density 3r and outer crust of density r has small tunnel in core.
A small particle of mass m is released from end A then time required to
reach end B : r
3r
p 1 p A B
(A) (B)
rG 2 rG
1 1
(C) p (D) 2p
rG rG
2. The two sticks shown in diagram have same linear mass density l, and they subtend P
same angle at point P. Their distances from point P are l and 2l. Which stick creates
a larger force on a point mass placed at point P?
(A) The top stick l
(B) The bottom stick
(C) They produce equal forces l
(D) The relative magnitude of forces depends on l
3. A small ball of mass ‘m’ is released at a height ‘R’ above the earth surface, as shown in the figure above.
If the maximum depth of the ball to which it goes is R/2 inside the earth through a narrow grove before
coming to rest momentarily. The grove, contain an ideal spring of spring constant K and natural length
R, find the value of K if R is radius of earth and M mass of earth
3GMm 6GMm 9GMm 7GMm

(A) 3 (B) 3 (C) 3 (D)
R R R R3
4. Two stars, each of mass M and separated by a distance, orbit about their centre z
of mass. A planetoid of mass m(m << M) moves along the axis of this system
perpendicular to the orbital plane. Let TP be the period of simple harmonic
m
motion for the planetoid for small displacement from the center of mass along
the z-axis and let TS be the period of motion for the two stars. Determine the
TP
ratio :-
TS
TP TP 1
(A) The ratio of =2 (B) The ratio of =
TS TS 2
TP 1 TP 1
(C) The ratio of = (D) The ratio of =
TS 2 2 TS 3

r
5. An electric field E = E0 iˆ + E 0ˆj exists in a space. Find the flux through a triangular loop with vertices at
æa ö æa ö æa aö
ç , 0, 0 ÷ , ç , 0, a ÷ and ç , a, ÷
è2 ø è2 ø è2 2ø
E 0a 2 3 3
(A) 2 E0a 2 (B) (C) E0a 2 (D) E0a 2
2 2 4
6. The figure shows a hollow hemisphere of radius R in which two charges 3q and 5q are placed
symmetrically about the centre O on the planar surface. The electric flux over the curved surface is :
O
+3q +5q
15 q 4q q 2q
(A) 2 e (B) e (C) e (D) e
0 0 0 0

7. Two point masses, each of mass M are fixed at points A and B respectively. A third point m is released
from infinity, so that it can move along y-axis under the influence of mutual gravitational attraction on it
due to point masses kept at A and B respectively as shown in the figure -1. Figure -2 represents the
potential energy of system (includes m, M at A and M at B) with position of m at y-axis. (Neglect any
forces other than gravity on paritcle C) (Given: Gm2/d = 12 Joule, m = 6 kg). Choose the correct
option(s) :-
y U
C m
A B
M = 2m M=2m x y
d U1
d
U0
(i) (ii)
(A) Point mass m will perform periodic motion

(B) Value of U1 must be equal to –24 Joule if gravitational potential energy of two point mass system is
taken to be zero when seperation between them is infinite.
(C) Maximum speed of particle is 24 m/s
(D) Maximum speed of particle is 4 m/s

R
8. A smooth tunnel is dug along the chord of earth at a perpendicular distance from the centre of earth.
2
The pressing force by the particle on the wall and the acceleration of the particle varies with x (distance
of particle from centre of earth) as :
Pressing Pressing
force force
(A) (B)
x x
R/2 R R/2 R
Acceleration Acceleration
(C) (D)
x x
R/2 R R/2 R
9. A spherical planet of radius R has spherically symmetrical distribution of mass density, varying as
square of the distance from the centre, from zero at centre to maximum value r0 at its surface.
4 pGr0R 2
(A) The value of escape velocity of a mass m at the surface of planet is .
5
(B) The value of acceleration due to gravity 'g' varies inside the planet as cube of the distance from
centre.
(C) The value of escape velocity is same as the escape velocity from another planet of same total mass
& radius but having uniform mass density.
(D) The energy required to impart escape velocity to particles of masses 'm' & '2m', at the surface of
planet, will be in ratio 1:2.
10. The electric quadrupole consists of two positive and two negative point charges of equal magnitude, q,
located at the vertices of a square. Find electric field at A and B in terms of polar coordinates at
A (1000 a, 0°) and B (1000 a, 45°),
+q
+q
O q A
a r
a
–q –q
2kqa
ˆ
(A) EA » (1000a )3 -q ( ) kq 2a é ˆù
(B) EB » 1000a 3 ë2rˆ - qû
( )
2kqa kq 2 a
(C) EA » (1000a )3 ( rˆ ) (D) EB »
(1000a )
3 ( rˆ + qˆ )


(A) The electric field at a height z above the center of a square sheet of side a carrying a uniform surface
s é2 a2 ù
charge s is given by 2 Î ê tan -1 1 + 2 - 1ú
0 ëê p 2z úû
(B) Potential difference between the top and the center of an inverted hemispherical bowl of radius R
carrying a uniform surface charge density s is

Rs
2 Î0
( 2 -1 )
(C) A sphere of radius R carries a charge density r(r) = kr, k is some +ve constant, then energy of
pk 2 R7
configuration is 7 Î
0
(D) A point charge q is inside a cavity in an uncharged conductor, then the force on q will be necessarily
zero.
A hollow spherical planet has mass M & radius 'R'. A small particle of mass m is released from rest from
a height h above a small hole in the planet. Assume that the mass density of planet is constant.
m
h
A
B
R
12. What time will the particle take to move from A to B?

R (R + h) 2R ( R + h ) R (R + h) R ( R + h)
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) 2R
GMh GMh 2GMh GMh
13. With what approximate speed will the particle reach B?
GMh GMh GMh 2GMh
(A) 2 R(R + h) (B) 2R(R + h) (C) R(R + h)
(D) R(R + h)
SECTION-III
1. A particle is projected from point A, that is at a distance 4R from the centre of the Earth, with speed v1
in a direction making 30° with the line joining the centre of the Earth and point A, as shown. Find the
speed v1 if particle passes grazing the surface of the earth. Consider gravitational interaction only between
GM
these two. (use = 6.4 × 107 m2/s2) Express you answer in the form ( 500 2 X ) m/s and write the
R
value of X.
30° v1
4R
R
v2

2. A ring of mass m and radius 3R is rotating with constant angular speed w around a planet of mass M and
radius R. Center of ring and planet concide with each other. Tension in the ring is given as
GMm æ GM ö
T= 2 . Find value of n ç w = ÷
3npR è 9R 3 ø
3. Find the gravitational force of interaction between the mass m and infinite rod of varying mass density
k
l such that l ( x ) = , where x is the distance from mass m. Given that mass m is placed at a distance d
x
Gmk
from the end of the rod on its axis as shown in the figure. If force is , then find the value of n.
nd 2
x
m d
4. Nowadays ISRO is working on a space research program. In this program they discover spherical
Asteroid made up titanium, a precious metal. They dig a tunnel from surface to centre to find depth of
titanium. Titanium was uniformly distributed in the sphere. Now they want to mine this precious material
out of the asteroid due to which cavity is formed as shown in figure B. If a piece of metal falls in the
tunnel it takes time t1 and when it falls in cavity it takes time t2 to reach at the bottom. Ratio of time
t1 æ p ö
=
t 2 çè n ÷ø . Find the value of 'n'.
A B
5. A planet is made of two materials of density r1 and r2 as shown in figure. The acceleration due to
r1 a ab + 1
gravity at surface of planet is same as a depth ‘R’. The ratio of r is . Find value of (a and b
2 b 86
are lowest possible integers)
Surface
R
r1
2R
r2

SECTION-IV
1. Column-I Column-II
(A) Magnitude of angular momentum of (P) A dipole is hinged on a
system about O increases after the long smooth fixed horizontal wire.
instant shown. A charge Q (A) is threaded on
wire and is free to move on the wire.
The system comprises of the dipole and
point charge. Gravity is absent.
q
O Q
–q
(B) The net torque on body A is zero about (Q) A system of two charges –Q and
O at the instant shown. 2Q (A) of mass m each are connected
by a light rod and kept on smooth level
ground. An external uniform electric
field E0 = mg/Q is applied as shown.
Gravity is present.
–Q 2Q E0
O
(C) The net force on negative charge (R) An electron (A) is revolving about a
increases in magnitude after the fixed proton in anticlockwise direction
instant shown. The system comprises of the electron
and proton. Gravity is absent.
–
O e
(D) Mechanical energy of the system (S) System consists of a particle (A) of
increases after the instant shown. mass m and charge –Q. It is projected
from level ground in presence of
constant electric field E = mg/Q
in vertically upward direction.
Gravity is present.
–Q
q
O
(T) System consists of a uniform ring
and particle (A) of mass m and charge
–Q on its circumference as shown.
The ring is in pure rolling on a
sufficiently rough horizontal surface.
Gravity is present.
–Q
E0

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A space station consists of two living modules attached to a central hub on opposite sides of the hub by
long corridors of equal length. Each living module contains N astronauts of equal mass. The mass of the
space station is negligible compared to the mass of the astronauts, and the size of the central hub and
living modules is negligible compared to the length of the corridors. At the beginning of the day, the
space station is rotating so that the astronauts feel as if they are in gravitational field of strength g. Two
astronauts, one from each module, climb into the central hub, and the remaining astronauts now feel a
gravitational of strength g'. What is the ratio g'/g in terms of N?
N ( N - 1)
2
N æ N ö
(A) ( N - 1) (B) (C) (D) ç ÷
( N - 1) N è N -1 ø
2. Consider a very long stick of length 2R, which extends from just above the surface of the earth, to a
radius 3R. If initial conditions have been set up so that this stick moves in a circular orbit while always
pointing radially. What is the period of this orbit. g represents acceleration due to gravity on surface of
earth.
R R R
(A) 6p (B) 2p 6 (C) p 6 (D) none of these
2g g g
3. Two identical thin uniform rods of mass M and length L are placed in a line at separation of L. Find the
gravitational force acting between them
M,L M,L
L
2 2
GM æ 3 ö GM æ5ö GM2 GM2
(A) ln ç ÷ (B) ln ç ÷ (C) ln 2 (D) ln 3
L2 è 4ø L2
è3ø L2 L2
4. A smooth tunnel is dug along the radius of the earth that ends at the centre and a ball is released from the
surface of earth along the tunnel. If the coefficient of restitution is 0.2 between the surface and ball then
the distance travelled by the ball before second collision at the centre is :
6 7 9 3
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) R
5 5 5 2
5. An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the earth with a speed equal to half the magnitude
of the escape velocity from the surface of earth. If the satellite is stopped suddently in its orbit and
allowed to fall freely, onto the earth, find the speed (in km/sec) with which it hits the surface of the earth
(g = 10 m/s2 and R = 6400 km) :-
(A) 8 km/sec (B) 2 6 km/sec (C) 2 km/sec (D) 4 km/sec

6. A planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit as shown. B

1 V2
. Time taken by planet to move from
Ecentricity of ellipse is C Sun
2
r1 r2 A
D to B (D ® A ® B) and B to D (B ® C ® D) are respectively
V1
TDAB and TBCD
D
TDAB p + 2 TDAB 2p + 1
(A) T = (B) T =
BCD p-2 BCD 2p - 1
(C) Velocity of planet of point B is 3V2 (D) Velocity of planet of point B is 2V2
7. A ring carries a linear charge density on one half and the linear charge density of same magnitude but
opposite sign on the other half.
(A) the component of electric field along the axis of ring at all points on the axis is zero.
(B) the component of electric field along the axis of ring at point on the axis is zero only at the centre.
(C) the resultant field at the centre is zero.
(D) the electric field at all points on the axis of ring is perpendicular to axis.
8. An infinite plane in the xz plane carries a uniform surface y
charge density s1 = 8.85 nC/m2. A second infinite plane
carrying a uniform charge density s2 = 17.7 nC/m2
s2
intersects the xz plane at the z axis and makes an angle of
60° with the xz plane as shown in figure. The electric field x
in the xy plane. s1
60°
(A) at x = 6m, y = 2m is 500 3 N/C
(B) at x = –5m, y = 0 is 500 3 N/C z
(C) at x = 2m, y = 6 m is 500 7 N/C

(D) at x = –1m, y = –1m is 500 7 N/C
9. Two very thin, long, insulating rods, each carrying uniform linear charge density l, lie in perpendicular
directions at a distance d from each other. The force of repulsion between them is F. Which of the
following statements is/are correct ?
1 1
(A) F µ l2 (B) F µ (C) F µ (D) F is independent of d.
d2 d
10. In a system of two dipoles placed in the way as shown in figure:
(A) It is possible to consider a spherical surface of radius a and whose centre lies within the square
shown, through which total flux is +ve.
(B) It is possible to consider a spherical surface of radius a and whose centre lies within the square
shown through which total flux is –ve
(C) There are two points within the square at which EF is zero.
(D) It is possible to consider a spherical surface of radius a and whose centre lies within the square
shown, through which total flux is zero.


Paragraph for Questions 11 & 12
Consider a situation in which a negatively charged particle of mass M and charge –q revolves in elliptical
path around a fixed charge Q. The closest and farthest distance of the moving particle from fixed charge
is a and 4a respectively. Point A and B are the two extreme points of the major axis of ellipse as shown
in the figure. Charge Q is present at one of the Foci of the ellipse.
æ 1 ö
11. The speed (in SI units) of revolving particle when it reaches point A, will be? Use ç K = 4 pe ÷ and
è 0 ø
æ KQq ö
ç Ma = 1000S.I units ÷
è ø
(A) 10 (B) 20 (C) 30 (D) 40
12. The radius of curvature of path (in SI units) of revolving particle at point B, will be ?
Use [a = 25(S.I units)]
(A) 40 (B) 30 (C) 20 (D) 10
In the picture below, the planet orbits around the sun with a period of 40 months and takes 12 months to
translate from the point D to point E and 1 month from point B to C. The area of the ellipse is A. Mass
of the satellite is m.
13. The area of the shaded region

(A) A/20 (B) A/8 (C) A/40 (D) A/4
14. The angular momentum of planet per unit mass per unit area is :-
(A) 5 × 10–8 /s (B) 16 × 10–8 /s (C) 2 × 10–8 /s (D) 0

15. Assuming reference position for gravitational potential is at ¥. Consider the situation of List-I and
match them with the conditions in List-II.
List-I List-II
(P) (1) m (1) Gravitational potential at position (1) & (2)

(2) is same
uniform hollow sphere
M M
(Q) (1) (2) (2) Gravitational potential at position (1) is

R R less than at position (2)
(1)
(R) M
(2) (3) magnitude of gravitational field at
position (1) is less than at position (2)
(1)
(S) m m
(4) magnitude of gravitational field at
(2)
point masses position (1) is more than at position (2)
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 3 1 2 4
(B) 3 2 4 4
(C) 3 1 4 4
(D) 2 1 3 4

16. In List-I certain situations are indicated where graph can be plotted. List-II lists the comments on the
modulus of physical quantity on y-axis. If the modulus of physical quantity on x-axis is increasing, then
match with List-II.
List-I List-II
(P) y-axis ® Speed (1) Graph first increase & then decrease
x-axis ® Distance from centre of earth
Situation : A particle projected with a speed
3 GM earth
of
2 R earth from earth vertically
(Q) y-axis ® Electric field (2) Continuously decreasing graph

x-axis ® Distance from centre
Situation : A uniformly charged solid sphere
(R) y-axis ® Temperature (3) Graph will be parallel to x-axis
x-axis ® Pressure
Situation : Isochoric process
(S) y-axis ® Time period (4) Continuously increasing graph
x-axis ® Mass
Situation : Simple pendulum
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 2 4 3 1
(B) 3 1 2 4
(C) 2 1 4 3
(D) 2 3 4 1
SECTION-III
1. Binary stars of comparable masses m1 and m2 rotate under the influence of each other’s gravity with
angular velocity w. If they are stopped suddenly in their motions, their relative velocity when they
é 2G ( m1 + m2 )
b
ù
( )
a
- 2 G 2 ( m1 + m2 ) w2
2
collide with each otheris ê ú where R1 and R2 are radii of stars and
ë ( R1 + R 2 ) û
æ1 1ö
G is the universal gravitational constant. Write down the value of ç a + b ÷
è ø
r r
2. In some hypothetical space the gravitational field intensity is given by g = -2r , where rr is position
vector. If x–z plane is a rigid elastic plane and a particle of 1 kg mass is released from (1, 1, 0) position,
the magnitude of change in momentum of the particle during its first eventual elastic collision with
plane, is n 2 Nm . Find n.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A crew of scientists has built a new space station. The space station is shaped like a wheel of radius R,
with essentially all its mass M at the rim. When the crew arrives, the station will be set rotating at a rate
that causes an object at the rim to have radial acceleration g, thereby simulating Earth's surface gravity.
This is accomplished by two small rockets, each with thrust T newtons, mounted on the station's rim.
How long a time t does one need to fire the rockets to achieve the desired condition?
gR3 M gRM gR M gRM
(A) t = (B) t = (C) t = (D) t =
( 2T ) ( 2T ) p T ( pT )
2. A satellite is launched in the equatorial plane in such a way that it can transmit signals upto 600 latitude
on the earth. Then the angular velocity of the satellite is :
GM GM GM 3 3GM
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8R 3 2R 3 4R 3 8R 3
3. The orbital properties of a geostationary satellite include (i) its orbit is directly over the Earth equator,
and (ii) its orbital period is the same as the Earth's rotation period. Suppose a lunar stationary satellite (its
orbital period is the same as the Moon's rotation period) is placed over the Moon equator, what is the
value of the ratio (REarth + HEarth)/(RMoon + HMoon)? REarth and RMoon are the Earth and the Moon radii,
HEarth and HMoon are the satellite heights from the Earth and from the Moon surfaces, respectively. You
may assume (Earth mass)/(Moon mass) = 81 and rotation period of the Moon = 27 days.
(A) (1/9)1/3 (B) (81 × 27)2 (C) (81/27)3 (D) (1/9)3
4. Q charge given to a uniform hemispherical charged distribution of radius 'R'. Then sum of potential at
two diametrically opposite points (VA + VB) is equal to :-
A
R
Q
KQ KQ 2KQ KQ
(A) (B) (C) (D)
R 2R R 3R
5. A charge q is uniformly distributed on the surface of a disc of radius R. Then a circular hole of radius R/
2 is punched taking one of the radii as the diameter of the hole. Calculate the potential V due to remaining
é q æ 1 öù
portion of the disc at the center of the disc. ê V0 = 2 pe R ç 1 - p ÷ ú
ë 0 è øû
V0
(A) V = 2V0 (B) V = V0 (C) V = 3V0 (D) V =
2
6. A spherical shell of radius R carries a uniformly distributed charge q. The electrical forces arising cause
the expansion of the shell. The mechanical stress in the shell is
q2 q2 q2 q2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
32p2 e0 R4 16p2 e0 R4 4 p2 e0 R4 2p2 e0 R4


7. At the equator on a spherical planet a body weighs one third of that at the pole. Radius of planet is R.
The time period of revolution of the planet around its axis is equal to T = 60 min.
20
(Take : G = ´ 10-11 Nm2/kg2)
3
p
(A) The average density r of the planet is ´ 106 kg/m3
192
æ 3 ö
(B) The height of geostationary satellite from the surface of planet is çç 3 2 - 1 ÷÷ R
è ø
(C) At a latitude of 60°, the weight of the body is half the weight at pole
(D) The geostationary satellite can be in a plane passing through the poles.
8. Two Earth's satellites move in a common plane along circular obrits. The orbital radius of one satellite is
r while that of the other satellite is r – Dr (Here Dr << r).
(A) Time interval separating the periodic approaches of the satellites to each other over the minimum
4pr5/2
distance is .
3(GM)1/2 Dr
(B) Time interval separating the periodic approaches of the satellites to each other over the minimum
2pr5/2
distance is .
3(GM)1/2 Dr
3(GM)1 / 2 Dr
(C) Angular velocity of approach between two setellites is .
r5 / 2
3(GM)1 / 2 Dr
(D)Angular velocity of approach between two setellites is .
2 r5 / 2
9. Given figure is a graph of the electric potential in a region of gravity free space where electric field is
parallel to the x-axis. A charge q of mass m is projected from origin along positive x-axis with speed v0
æq ö
then ç = 2 ÷
èm ø
V
14V
10V
5V
1V
x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
–4V
(A) minimum velocity for which charge can pass through x = 8 is 6 m/s
(B) minimum velocity for which charge can pass through x = 8 is 4 m/s
(C) if v 0 > 40 m/s particle pass through x = 4
(D) if v0 = 8 m/s then maximum speed of particle during its forward motion is equal to 10 m/s


Paragraph for question nos. 10 to 12
A triple star system consists of two stars, each of mass m, in the same circular
orbit about central star with mass M = 2 × 1030 kg. The two outer stars
always lie at opposite ends of a diameter of their common circular orbit. The
radius of the circular orbit is r = 1011 m and the orbital period of each star is
20
1.6 × 107 s. [Take p2 = 10 and G = × 10–11 Nm2kg–2]
3
10. The mass m of the outer star is
16 11 15 8
(A) × 1030 kg (B) × 1030 kg (C) × 1030 kg (D) × 1030 kg
15 8 16 11
11. The orbital velocity of each star is
5 5 5 5
(A) 10 × 103 m/s (B) 10 × 105 m/s (C) 10 × 102 m/s (D) 10 × 104 m/s
4 4 4 4
12. The total mechanical energy of the system is
1375 1375 1375 1375
(A) – × 1035 J (B) – × 1038 J (C) – × 1034 J (D) – × 1037 J
64 64 64 64
13. A satellite is to be launched and established in its orbit around the earth. For this purpose it is raised to a
certain height (equal to its orbit distance) with a rocket & held stationary by some mechanism and a
explosion is carried out instantly to provide the required velocity to the satellite. Let the original mass of
satellite is MS, mass of the earth Me, radius of the required orbit R and universal gravitational constant G.
As a result of explosion the satellite breaks into two parts of masses m1 & m2 and energy released is
given by E. List-I gives certain combination of m1, m2 & E while list-II gives the nature of orbit followed
by m2. Match them suitably (If v > ve; orbit is hyperbolic, v = ve; orbit is parabolic and v < ve; orbit is
eliptical where ve is escape velocity and v is velocity of the part) :-
List-I List-II
GM e M s
(P) m1 = m 2 ; E = (1) Parabolic orbit
R
GM e M s
(Q) m1 = 2 m2 ; E = (2) Hyperbolic orbit
4R
GM e M s
(R) m1 = 3.5 m2 ; E = (3) Circular orbit
4R
1 2GM e M s
(S) m1 = m2 ; E = (4) Elliptical orbit
3 R
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 1 3 2 4
(B) 3 2 4 1
(C) 4 1 3 2
(D) 2 4 1 3

SECTION-III
1. On a planet which has the same density as that of earth, we construct a frictionless inclined plane of
inclination 53° with the horizontal. When a block is released on the inclined plane, it is seen to accelerate
at 1 m/s2. What is the radius of planet (in 105 m) ? (Take radius of Earth = 6400 km)
2. An artificial satellite of mass m orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of radius twice the earth's radius R.
It is to be taken in another circular orbit of radius 4R. The transfer is accomplished through an elliptical
1 GMm
orbit as shown in the figure. The energy needed to complete the job is calculated to be equal to
k R
where M is the mass of the earth. Find the value of k.
2R
Transfer
orbit
3. A spaceship is sent to investigate a planet of mass M and radius R. While hanging motionless in space
at a distance 5R from the centre of the planet, the spaceship fires an instrument package with speed v0 as
shown in the figure. The package has mass m, which is much smaller than the mass of the spaceship.
xGM
The package just grazes the surface of the planet and at that moment it's speed is v. v 0 = . Fill x
75R
in OMR sheet.
v0
m q =53° R
M
5R
4. Two conducting spherical shell of radii R & 2R given charges Q and 2Q respectively. Inner shell is
provided with a switch which can ground the inner shell, as shown. Switch is initially open and energy
stored in the system is U1. After the switch is closed, energy stored in the system is found to be U2. Find
U1
U2 .
2R
S
2Q Q
R

SECTION-IV
1. Some situations are given in column-I while column II describes effect on different parameters.
Column I Column II
(A) One end of an ideal spring is attached to a particle of mass (P) Mechanical energy
‘m’ and the other end is attached to a string as shown in is constant.
fig. The mass m is kept on a smooth horizontal table
and is provided velocity ‘v’ perpendicular to the spring.
The string passes through a hole a point P and is being
pulled vertically down. In this process
k
P
m
F
(B) Identical and oppositely charged particles attached (Q) Mechanical energy
with a non-conducting spring are placed on a is variable.
smooth horizontal surface. They are given an initial
velocity as shown in figure. In this process
m
u +q
P
-q u
m
(C) A disc is rotating in horizontal plane. An insect having (R) Kinetic energy is variable.
some mass moves from centre to the circumference
as shown in figure. In this process
w
Disc
(D) A satellite is revolving around planet in an elliptical orbit. (S) Angular momentum
In this process about point P is conserved.
Satellite
Elliptical
orbit
P Planet (T) Kinetic energy is constant

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A satellite of mass m is orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of radius r. It starts losing energy slowly at a
constant rate k due to friction. Me and Re denote the mass and radius of the earth respectively, the
satellite takes a limit time t to fall on the earth. The radius r is :-
GmM e R e GmM e R e GmM e R e GmM e R e
(A) Gm M - 4kR t (B) 2GmM + 2kR t (C) GmM + 2kR t (D) Gm M - 2kR t
e e e e e e e e
2. A small satellite of mass 'm' is revolving around earth in a circular orbit of radius r0 with speed v0. At
certain point of its orbit, the direction of motion of satellite is suddenly changed by angle
q = cos–1(3/5) by turning its velocity vector in the same plane of motion, such that speed remains constant.
The satellite, consequently goes to elliptical orbit around earth. The ratio of speed at perigee to speed at
apogee is :-
(A) 3 (B) 9 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/9
3. A satellite of mass m is at a distance of 'a' from a star of mass M. The speed of the satellite is u. Suppose
Mm
the law of universal gravity is F = -G Mm instead of F = -G 2 , find the speed of the satellite when
r 2.1 r
it is at a distance b from the star.
æ 1 1 ö 2 æ 1 1 ö
(A) u 2 + 2GM ç 1.1 - 1.1 ÷ (B) u2 + GM ç 1.1 - 1.1 ÷
èb a ø 1.1 èb a ø
2 æ 1 1 ö 2 æ1 1ö
(C) u2 + GM ç 1.1 - 1.1 ÷ (D) u +
2
GM ç - ÷
2.1 èb a ø 1.1 èb aø
4. A planet of small mass m moves around sun of mass M along an elliptical orbit such that its minimum
and maximum distance from sun are r and R respectively. Its period of revolution will be
(r + R)2 (r + R)3 (r + R)3 (r + R)3

(A) 2p (B) 2p (C) p (D) 2p
6GM 3GM 2GM GM
5. A point charge q1 = + 6e is fixed at origin. Another point charge q2 = – 10e is
fixed at x = 8 nm, y = 0. The locus of all points in xy plane for which
potential V = 0 is a circle centered on X axis as shown, find x coordinate of
C q1 q2
center of circle.
(A) – 2nm (B) – 3 nm V= 0
(C) – 4.5 nm (D) – 7.5 nm
6. A body of mass M and a body of mass m << M are in circular orbits about their center of mass under the
influence of their mutual gravitational attraction. The distance between the bodies is R, which is much
larger than the size of either body.
A small amount of matter dm ( << m ) is removed from the body of mass m and transferred to the body of
mass M. The transfer is done in such a way so that the orbits of the two bodies remain circular, and
remain separated by a distance R. Which of the following statements is correct?
(A) The gravitational force between the two bodies increases.
(B) The gravitational force between the two bodies remains constant.
(C) The total angular momentum of the system increases.
(D) The period of the orbit of two bodies remains constant.
7. Consider a planet of mass M and radius R as shown in the figure. A particle is projected from the surface
of the planet at an angle q from radial direction and with velocity equal to the orbital velocity of circular
orbit at that point then choose the CORRECT statement(s) :
P
(A) Maximum distance of particle from centre of the planet is (R + R cosq) q
M v 0
(B) Path of the particle is parabola R
R3
(C) Time taken by the particle to return to the surface of planet is
GM
R3
(D) Time taken by the particle to reach the surface of planet is equal to p
GM
r
8. The electric field in x-y plane is given by E = x 2 î + y 2 ˆj . Potential at point (3, 3) is taken as zero. Then :-
(A) Work done in moving a test charge q slowly from a point (a, b) to a point (b, a) is zero.
(B) Potential at any point on x-y plane can't exceed 18 unit for x & y in 1st quadrant.
(C) Potential can't be defined as field is non- conservative in nature.
(D) Equipotential curve are concentric circles with centre (3, 3)
9. In free space, two particles, first of mass 3 × 10–11 kg and of charge 10–10 C and second of mass
6 × 10–11 kg and charge 3 × 10–10 C move at speeds such that distance d = 1.5 cm between them remains
constant. Consider only electric interaction between particles :
v1 1
(A) Ratio of speeds of first particle to that of second particle is v =
2 2
v1
(B) Ratio of speeds of first particle to that of second particle is v = 2
2
(C) Speed of first particle is 20 m/s

(D) Speed of second particle is 0.2 m/s
10. Two spherical bodies of masses M and 2M and radii R and 2R, respectively, start approaching each
other at time t = 0 from rest, due to mutual gravitational attraction. They were initially very far away
from each other. They collide at time t = T.
(A) Distance travelled by their COM till time t = T is zero (COM–centre of mass)
1 2GM
(B) There relative velocity at time t = T is
3 R
(C) PE of the system decreases as the bodies approach each other
(D) In COM frame, speeds of the bodies are always equal
Paragraph for Question No. 11 and 12
A canon of mass m is revolving around earth in circular orbit of radius 4R.
A shell of mass m is also equipped in canon and moving with in same orbit. 4R
At a particular instant, shell is fired from cannon in radial direction (direction
R
directly away from the center of earth) w.r.t. canon. Kinetic energy of shell O
3
just after firing is times of kinetic energy of shell before firing. Earth
2
11. What is maximum distance of shell from center of earth :-
(A)4R + 2 2 R (B) 8R + 4 2R (C) 8R + 2 2 R (D) 6R + 3 2 R

2
æ 4r1 ö
12. Minimum distances of shell and canon from center of earth are r1 and r2 then value of çç ÷÷ :-
è 2r2 ø
(A) 4 (B) 16 (C) 8 (D) 12
Paragraph for Question nos. 13 & 14
There is a fixed semicircular ring of radius R lying in z y
y-z plane, with centre of arc at origin and it is uniformly
charged with charge +Q. There is an insulated long
hollow smooth pipe of very small radius fixed along O
x
x-axis from origin O as shown in figure. A small ball R
with charge +q and mass m is projected from O in
pipe with negligible velocity, ball can smoothly move
in pipe. Whole arrangement lies in gravity free space.
13. The maximum acceleration of ball in pipe is :
1 Qq 1 Qq 1 Qq
(A) 4 pe mR 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) None of these
0 12 3pe0 mR 6 3pe 0 mR
14. The kinetic energy of particle when its acceleration is maximum is
1 Qq æ 2ö 1 Qq æ 1 ö 1 Qq æ 1 ö
(A) 4pe R çç 1 - 3 ÷÷ (B)
0 è ø 4 pe 0 R çè 2 ÷ø (C)
4 pe0 R çè 2 ÷ø
(D) None of these
SECTION-III
1. A meteorite of mass ‘m’ strikes the satellite of mass 10 m moving in circular path of radius ‘R’ around
planet of mass ‘M’ (>>m). Meteorite strikes perpendicular to the orbital velocity of satellite. The combined
satellite and meteorite has minimum distance R/2 from planet’s centre during subsequent motion. Velocity
GM
u of meteorite just before the collision is k ´ 29 . Find the value of k.
R
m
u
v0
10 m
2. A trinary star system which is a system of three stars orbiting around centre of mass of system has time
period of 3 years, while the distance between any two stars of the system is 2 astronomical unit. All the
a
three stars are identical, mass of the sun is M and total mass of this multiple star system is ´ M . Then
b
b
find ? (a and b are lowest possible integers) (1 astronomical unit is equal to distance between sun and
3
earth, time period of rotation of earth around sun is 1year)

3. A small ball of mass 1kg and charge 2 mC is placed at the centre of a uniformly w
3
Q
1
charged sphere of radius 1m and charge mC . A narrow smooth groove is made
3 +q
in the sphere from centre to surface as shown in figure. The sphere is made to
1
rotate about its vertical diamter at a constant rate of revolutions per second. R
2p
Find the speed w.r.t. ground (in m/s) with which the ball slides out from the groove.
Neglect any magnetic force acting on ball.
4. A charge Q1 is placed at O, inside a hollow conducting sphere having inner and outer radii as 10 m and
11 m as shown. The force experienced by Q2 at P is F1 and force experienced by Q2 when Q1 is placed
at O1 is F2. Then F1/F2 is equal to
O1
5m Q1 Q2
O 12m P
10m
11m
5. Three concentric, thin, spherical, metallic shells have radii 1 cm, 2 cm and 4 cm and they are held at
potentials 10 V, 0 V and 40 V respectively. Taking the origin at the common centre, calculate the
potential (in V) at r = 1.25 cm.
SECTION-IV
1. A particle is projected vertically up from the surface of the earth with an speed gR .
Column-I Column-II
(A) Maximum height attained by the particle is aR then a is (P) 2
(B) Time taken by the particle to reach the maximum height
R3 p
is b then b is (Q) +1
GM 4
(C) Value of acceleration due to gravity at maximum height
GM p
is g then g is (R) +1
4R 2 2
(D) Orbital velocity of a satellite revolving at maximum height
GM
is d then d is (S) 1
2R
(T) None of these

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A planet moving around sun sweeps area A1 in 2 days, A2 in 3 days and A3 in 6 days. Then the relation
between A1, A2 and A3 is :-
A3
sun A2
A1
(A) 3A1 = 2A2 = A3 (B) 2A1 = 3A2 = 6A3 (C) 3A1 = 2A2 = 6A3 (D) 6A1 = 3A2 = 2A3
2. A system consists of two stars of equal masses that revolve in a circular orbit about centre of mass
midway between them. Orbital speed of each star is v & period is T. Find the mass M of each star (G is
gravitational constant)
2Gv 3 v3T v3T 2Tv 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
pT pG 2pG pG
3. A small air bubble is inside a drop of water residing in a space station on an v
orbit around Earth. The direction to Earth is downwards and the space station
is moving to the left relative to Earth, as shown. The air bubble will_______
relative to the water drop.
(A) move to the left
(B) move to the right
(C) move up
(D) not move Earth
4. Two satellites are launched at a distance R from a planet of negligible radius. Both satellites are launched
in the tangential direction. The first satellite launches correctly at a speed v0 and enters a circular orbit.
The second satellite, however, is launched at a speed 1 v 0 . What is the minimum distance between the
2
second satellite and the planet over the course of its orbit?
1 1 1 1
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) R
2 3 4 7
5. An insulating rod of uniform linear charge density l and uniform linear mass density m lies on a smooth
table whose surface is xy-plane. A uniform electric field E is switched on.
(A) If electric field is along x-axis, the speed of the rod when it has travelled
+ y
2lEd +
+
a distance d is
m + x
+
(B) If electric field E is at an angle q (< 90°) with x-axis, the speed of the rod +
+
2lEd cos q +
when it has travelled a distance d is
m
(C) Torque on the rod due to the field about centre of mass in case B is into the plane of paper.
(D) Torque on the rod due to the field about centre of mass in case B is zero.

6. 'A' is a huge planet with uniform mass distribution, mass M, radius R. A

R
B is a circular tunnel made in it, concentric with planet. Radius of B
R
tunnel is r,(r = ) cross sectional diameter is d (d << r). C is a small r d
2
ball of mass m (m << M) which is moving freely inside the tunnel C
without friction in a uniform circular motion, take acceleration due to
gravity on surface of A as g :-
R
(A) If contact force on C is double the gravitational force, its time period = 2p
3g
R
(B) If contact force on C is double the gravitational force, its time period = 2p
g
(C) If contact force is zero, time period T, radius of tunnel r, than T µ r
(D) If contact force is zero, time period T, radius of tunnel r, than T would be independent of r.
7. Because of the effects of air drag, abandoned satellites, at the end of their usual lives lose energy in the
upper layers of atmosphere, before finally burning up when they reach the denser lower layers. It can be
shown that satellites originally moving along circular trajectories will continue to travel in approximately
circular orbits, with their orbital radii slowly decreasing. Drag force acting an satellite can be expressed
as Fdrag = Crv2 where r is density of air at the altitude of satellite and v is the speed of satellite, C is a
constant. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) During slow decrease in radius of orbit, gravitational force is not perpendicular to velocity of satellite
(B) Speed of satellite decreases as it approaches earth due to tangential drag force.
(C) If change in orbital radius is Dr during a single revolution then expression for density of
1 m
air is r = Dr
4pC r 2
(D) If change in orbital radius is Dr during a single revolution then expression for density of
1 m
air is r = Dr
2pc r 2
8. An artificial satellite is in a circular orbit around the earth. The universal gravitational constant starts
decreasing at time t = 0 at a constant rate with respect to time t. Then the satellite has its
(A) Path gradually spiraling out away from the centre of the earth.
(B) Path gradually spiraling in towards from the centre of the earth.
(C) Angular momentum about the centre of the earth remains constant
(D) Potential energy increases.
9. A planet moves round the Sun in an elliptical orbit such that its K.E. is k1 and k2 when it is nearest to the
Sun and farthest from the Sun respectively.
(A) If total energy of the planet is u, then ratio of largest distance (r2) and smallest distance (r1) between
u - k1
planet and the Sun is u - k .
2
(B) If total energy of the planet is u, then ratio of largest distance (r2) and smallest distance (r1) between
u - k2
planet and the Sun is u - k .
1
(C) if r2 = 2r1 , the total energy of planet in terms of k1 and k2 is 2k1 – k2

(D) if r2 = 2r1 , the total energy of planet in terms of k1 and k2 is 2k2 – k1
10. The earth is moving around the sun in an elliptical orbit. Point A is the closest and point B is the farthest
point in the orbit, as shown. In comparison to the situation when the earth passes through point B :
Earth
A B
Sun
(A)total energy of the earth-sun system is greater when the earth passes through point A.
(B) gravitational potential energy of the earth-sun system is greater when the earth passes through pointA.
(C) kinetic enrgy of the earth due to the motion around the sun is greater when it passes through the
point A.
(D) magnitude of angular momentum of the earth about the sun is greater when the earth passes through
point A.
Changing from a circular to an elliptical orbit
Let us identify the system as the spacecraft and the Earth but not the portion of the fuel in the spacecraft
that we use to change the orbit. In a given orbit, the mechanical energy of the spacecraft – Earth system
is given by
E = – GMm .
2r
This energy includes the kinetic energy of the spacecraft and the potential energy associated with the
gravitational force between the spacecraft and the Earth. If the rocket engines are fired, the thrust force
moves the spacecraft through a displacement. As a result, the mechanical energy of the spacecraft –
Earth system increases.
The spacecraft has a new higher energy but is constrained to be in an orbit that includes the original
starting point. It can not be in a higher energy circular orbit having a larger radius because this orbit
would not contain the starting point. The only possibility is that the orbit is elliptical as shown in the
figure.
Elliptical
orbit
Circular
orbit
Earth
Rocket engine
is fired here
GMm
E=–
2a
Above equation gives the energy of the spacecraft – Earth system for an elliptical orbit where a is
semimajor axis. Thus if we know the new energy of the orbit, we can find the semi-major axis of the
elliptical orbit. Conversely, if we know the semi-major axis of an elliptical orbit we would like to achieve,
we can calculate how much additional energy is required from the rocket engines.
A spacecraft is moving in a circular orbit around the Earth (Radius 6400 km), at a height of 300 km from
the surface. To place the spacecraft in an elliptical orbit, the magnitude of the mechanical energy of the
spacecraft- Earth system is decreased by 10.0%.

11. If the spacecraft-earth system had initial energy (– E0), then the total mechanical energy of the system
after firing the rocket will be :
(A) – 1.1 E0 (B) – 0.9 E0 (C) – E0 (D) None of these
12. Minimum distance of the spacecraft from the surface of the Earth is :
(A) 900 km (B) 1474 km (C) 300 km (D) 1774 km
A rocket is launched from point A on earth. It reaches point B on earth with its velocity antiparallel to its
initial velocity. The angle subtended by straight line joining AB at the center is 2q. The satellite moving
close to surface of earth has time period of revolution T0. Radius of earth is R.
13. The time of flight of the rocket is :-
T0 æ1 3ö æ1 1 ö æ1 3ö
(A) (B) T0 çç 2 + 2 ÷÷ (C) T0 ç + ÷ (D) T0 çç 2 + 2p ÷÷
2 è ø è 2 2p ø è ø
14. Maximum height attained by the rocket is :-
R R 3
(A) R (B) (C) (D) 3R
2 2
SECTION-III
1. You are at a distance of R = 1.5 × 10 m from the centre of an unknown planet. You notice that if you
6
throw a ball horizontally it goes completely around the planet hitting you in the back 90,000 seconds
later with exactly the same speed that you originally threw it. If the length of semi major axis of ball is
2R, what is the mass of the planet. Express in scientific notation (a × 10b) kg and fill ‘a’ in OMR sheet.
20
[Take G = × 10–11 Nm2/kg2, p2 = 10]
3
2. Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve around a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the opposite sense. The
periods of revolutions are T=p/3 seconds and hT, where h is equal to 8 respectively. Find the angular
speed of S2 (in rad/s) as observed by an astronaut in S1, when they are closest to each other.
R1 O S2
S1
R2
3. A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit around an airless spherical planet of radius R. An asteroid of
equal mass m falls radially towards the planet, starting at zero velocity from a very large distance. The
satellite and the asteroid collide inelastically and stick together, moving in a new orbit such that it just
misses the planet's surface. The radius of the satellite's original circular orbit is (a + 11 ) R. Find the value
of a.
R
4. A composite solid sphere S of radius R has density 2r in spherical region S' of radiuswhile remaining
2
region has density r. Gravitational force exerted by this composite body on a point mass (m) placed as
æKö
shown in the figure is pRrGm ç ÷ . Find K.
è 25 ø
m
P
R
r
R
C1
S
2r R/2
C2
R/2
S'
SECTION-IV
1. Match the following :
For planet orbiting about sun in elliptical orbit, some incomplete statements regarding physical quantities
are given in column-I, Which can be completed by using entries of column-II.
Column–I Column-II
(A) Maximum potential energy of sun planet system (P) Is independent of semimajor axis of orbit
(B) Maximum speed of planet (Q) Is at apogee
(C) Minimum potential energy of sun planet system (R) Is dependent on mass of planet
(D) Minimum KE of planet (S) Is at perigee
(T) depends upon mass of sun

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. Three point masses A, B, C each having mass m are kept on the x-axis at the points (0, 0), (a, 0) and
(2a, 0) respectively. Initially, they are all at rest. They start moving due to the gravitational force between
themselves. Then the instantaneous acceleration of the centre of mass of the system consisting of
(B + C) will be
Gm 4 Gm 8 Gm 5
(A) 2
´ (B) 2 ´ (C) 2 ´ (D) zero
a 9 a 9 a 8
2. A small area is removed from a uniform spherical shell of mass M and radius R. Then the gravitational
field intensity near the hollow portion is :-
GM GM 3GM
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) (D) 0
R 2R 2R 2
3. Imagine a planet whose diameter and mass are one half of those of the earth. The day’s temperature of
this planet reaches up to 800K. (Escape velocity on the surface of the earth is 11.2 km/sec,
k = 1.38 ´ 10-23 J / K . Consider that the molecules possess average kinetic energy. Among the following,
choose the wrong statement
(A) Oxygen molecules escape from the planet
(B) Oxygen molecules cannot escape from the planet
(C) Nitrogen molecules cannot escape from the planet
(D)Argon molecules cannot escape from planet.
4. In figure A, a stationary spacecraft of mass M is passed by asteroid A of mass m, asteroid B of the same
mass m, and asteroid C of mass 2m. The asteroids move along the indicated straight paths at the same
speed; the perpendicular distances between the spacecraft and the paths are given as multiples of R.
Figure B gives the gravitational potential energy U(t) of the spacecraft-asteroid system during the passage
of each asteroid treating time t = 0 as the moment when separation is minimum. Which asteroid corresponds
to which plot of U(t) ?
(A) A-1, B-2, C-3 (B) B-1, A-3, C-2 (C) B-1, A-2, C-3 (D) None
5. A satellite of mass m orbits the earth in an elliptical orbit having aphelion distance ra and perihelion
ra + rp
distance rp. The period of the orbit is T. The semi-major and semi-minor axes of the ellipse are
2
and rp ra respectively. The angular momentum of the satellite is
mp (ra + rp ) ra rp 2mp (ra + rp ) ra rp mp (ra + rp ) ra rp mp (ra + rp ) ra rp

(A) (B) (C) (D)
T T 2T 4T
6. If satellite is in an elliptical orbit around the earth.(The nearest position of satellite from earth is referred
as perigee and farthest as apogee). Mark the correct statement
(A) If satellite is to escape from the earth completely and if the satellite’s rocket is fired at perigee it will
require less kinetic energy
(B) If satellite is to escape from the earth completely and if the satellite’s rocket is fired at apogee then it
will require less kinetic energy
(C) Radius of curvature of orbit at apogee is more than at perigee
(D) Instantaneous centripetal acceleration at apogee is more than at perigee
7. Four points W, X, Y and Z are on the surface of a hollow mass m
sphere. Four point masses each of mass m are located. Choose correct R
M
option(s) : W
(A) At centre C, field intensity is non zero. m X Z m

C
R R
(B) At all four points W, X, Y and Z, field intensity vector are not equal R
y
(C) Potential is same for W, X, Y and Z. R
m
(D) Due to point mass, field can not exist inside the hollow mass sphere.
p0 r
8. Mass density of a planet varies as p(r) = ; where R is radius of planete and r is distance from center
R
of planet : -
(A) A particle of mass m is to be projected from surface so as to escape the planet, its velocity of
projection relative to surface is 2pGp 0 R 2 .
(B) A particle of mass m is to be projected from surface so as to escape the planet, its velocity of
projection relative to surface is 2 2pGp 0 R 2 .
(C) Gravitational intensity on surface of planet is pGp0R.
R
(D) Time period of a satellite in circular orbit very close to planet is 2p .
pGp0
9. Two equal masses m are at a distance l apart and interact via gravity. They are given proper tangential
l
speed v0, so that they both travel in a circular of radius around their CM. If one of the masses is
2
grabbed and held at rest, then the closest distance the other mass comes to it is r. Then :
Gm Gm l
(A) v0 = (B) v0 = (C) r = (D) r = 3l
2l l 3
10. In figure (a) and (b) shown the mass M is very large and exerts a gravitational force on m1 and m2. Gravitational
r
force between m1 and m2 is very small as compared to that of M. Net force Fnet on m1 in accelerating
reference frame of m2 is called tidal force. If m1 is to be at rest in reference frame of m2 an additional force
equal to tidal force is to be applied on m1. Mark the correct statement(s) using appropriate approximation :
m1
m2 m1 M
x x<<R
x R M
q cosq 1
x << R m2 x
R sinq
Figure (a) R
Figure (b)

GMm1x
(A) Tidal force on m1 in figure (a) is given by
R3
2GMm1x
(B) Tidal force on m1 in figure (a) is given by
R3
GMm1x
(C) Tidal force on m1 in figure (b) is given by
R3
2GMm1x
(D) Tidal force on m1 in figure (b) is given by
R3
According to Newton's universal law of gravity, the gravitational field due to an object of mass M at a
distance R is given by,
r GM r
F=- 3 R
R
Now the force hold an inverse square relation with the distance. This results in the gradient in the force
field as we move away from the object. This means that your foot experiences a different force of
gravity as compared to your head, however the effect is much smaller for the pair of object like earth and
us but when compared for the moon and water in the ocean, effect of differential gravity becomes quite
apparent and results in the occurrence of tides in the oceans. This can be illustrated in diagram as shown.
C B A
Moon
Earth
And for some of the massive objects, this differential gravity is much higher that it breaks the larger
particle into smaller one. The distance at which the gravity alone can't hold the large object intact is
called Roche's limit and any object within this radius can't be hold together only due to mutual gravitational
attraction.
11. Based on the above comprehension choose the statement that doesn't result due to differential gravity:-
(A) Ring of Saturn are composed of many small particles.
(B) Spaghettification (elongation of object along its length) of chemically bonded object falling in black
holes.
(C) Flying off objects from the surface of very fast rotating stars.
(D) Occurrence of low & high tides in the oceans on earth.
12. Which of the following star will have greatest tidal effect due to its own mass on its surface?
R
(A) A star having mass M & radius R. (B) A star having mass 5 M & radius
2
(C) A star having mass 5 M and radius 2R (D) A star having mass 5 M and radius 10 R


A problem that has fascinated philosophers & scientists is how the universe began, if it had a beginning,
and how long ago it happened. Much has been learned in the last few decades about the conditions of
the early universe. Current thinking assumes that the universe began as a big–bang, at which time
everything was condensed into a very small space, where there were both extremely high densities &
exceptionally high temperatures (actually, it was beginning of space and time as we know them). Since
that time the universe has been in continuous expansion, so that the average density & temperature have
been decreasing continuously. The rate of expansion of the universe (that is, the rate at which galaxies
are receding from each other) is given by Hubble's Law, discovered in 1929 by the astronomer Edwin
Hubble, it states that the rate of separation of any two galaxies in the universe is directly proportional to
their separation. Thus, if we have two galaxies a distance R apart, their receding relative speed is given
by v = HR where, H is a proportionality factor called as Hubble's parameter. The currently accepted
value for H is : 22 kms–1 MLyr–1 = 2.32 × 10–18 s–1 where one MLyr (mega light - year) is 9.46 × 1021 m.
13. If we define a time tH, which corresponds to the time when two galaxies have reached a separation of 2R
from R, using Hubble's Law, then tH is
1 ln ( 2) R H
(A) tH = (B) tH = (C) tH = (D) tH = ln (2)
H H H R
14. Some recent observations by Hubble Space Telescope has fascinated astronomers and baffled the scientists
that even with the presence of gravitational attraction to retard the separation between the galaxies, it
seems that they are accelerating which according to some scientists proves the existence of dark energy
which is supplying the increasing kinetic energy to accelerate the expansion. To measure the amount of
dark energy supply we need to calculate the rate at which separation velocity is increasing at different
levels of separation, find the ratio of relative acceleration at separation of R and 2R respectively.
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 1 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 1 : 4
15. There is a distance called as the horizon of the universe, which is equal to the farthest distance that can
be observed from earth, it corresponds to the time taken by light to reach earth almost very close to the
age of universe. The oldest & farthest objected observed from earth is near the constellation of ursa
major. It is a star like object called a quasar and is estimated to be at a distance of 1.3 × 1026 m, therefore
we see it as it was about how much years ago :
(A) 1.36 × 1010 years (B) 4.3 × 1017 years (C) 2.32 × 1018 years (D) 9.46 × 1021 years
Matching list Type (4 × 4 × 4) single option correct
(Three Columns and Four Rows) 1 Table × 3 Q. [4(–1)]
Column-I represents the charges kept in gravity free space. Column-II represents the total interaction
potential energy of the system and column-III represents the electric potential at point A. (Take potential
at infinity to be zero).

Point charge Total interaction potential Electric potential
of system energy of the system at point A
r r
(I) (i) 0 (P) 0
+q +q
+q
a r a
A kq2 kq
(II) (ii) (Q)
+q +q a r
a
A : centroid of triangle
+q
a –q
r
a a - 2kq2 2kq
(III) A (iii) (R)
a r
+q +q
a
A : centre of square
–q
a –q
r
a a -kq2 3kq
(IV) A (iv) (S)
a r
+q +q
a
A : centre of square
16. Which of the options are correctly matched :-
(A) (I) (ii) (P) (B) (I) (ii) (R) (C) (I) (iii) (Q) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)
(A) (II) (iii) (R) (B) (II) (i) (Q) (C) (II) (iv) (P) (D) (IV) (iii) (P)
(A) (III) (iii) (Q) (B) (III) (ii) (R) (C) (III) (i) (R) (D) (IV) (iv) (Q)
SECTION-III
1. Six point masses of mass m each are at the vertices of a regular hexagon of side l. The force on any one
Gm2 æ1 1 1ö
of the masses is given by F = çç + + ÷ , then find x + y –z. (Take : x < y < z)
l2 èx y z ÷ø

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. The electric field ‘E’ is uniform in the shaded area and makes an angle q with the normal. The conductivity
of the material in which the area ‘S’ lies is s. The electric current flowing out of the shaded area is
(A) s E S cosq (B) s E S cos2q (C) s E S sinq (D) s E S sin2q

2. A hollow conducting sphere of inner radius R and outer radius 2R has resistivity 'r' as a function of the
distance 'r' from the centre of the sphere: r = kr2/R. The inner and outer surfaces are painted with a
perfectly conducting 'paint' and a potential difference DV is applied between the two surfaces. Then, as
'r' increases from R to 2R, the electric field inside the sphere :-
(A) increases (B) decreases (C) remains constant (D) passes through a maxima
3. Salt water contains n sodium ions (Na+) per cubic meter and n chloride ions (Cl–) per cubic meter. A
battery is connected to metal rods that dip into a narrow pipe full of salt water. The cross sectional area
of the pipe is A. The magnitude of the drift velocity of the sodium ions is VNa and the magnitude of the
drift velocity of the chloride ions is VCl. Assume that VNa > VCl (+e is the charge of a proton). What is the
magnitude of the ammeter reading?
Battery
Ammeter
– +
Pipe full of salt water Cross-sectional

area A
(A) enAVNa – enAVCl (B) enAVNa + enAVCl (C) enAVNa (D) Zero
4. Length of a rod is l and cross-section area A as shown in the figure. A steady
current i flows through the rod. Number of free electrons (carrying current) i A
per unit volume changes linearly from n0 to 2n0 with distance x from left end
to right end. Then average drift veloctity of electrons (averaged over the l
distace travelled in the rod) will be
2i 3i iln 2 i
(A) 3n eA (B) 2n eA (C) n eA (D) n eAln2
0 0 0 0
5. Two substances are identical except that the electron mean free time for substance A is twice the electron
mean free time for substance B. If the same electric field exists in both substances the electron drift speed
in A is:
(A) the same as in B (B) twice that in B (C) half that in B (D) four times that in B
(E) one-fourth that in B
6. Assuming nothing else blocks their view, approximately how far can two people stand from each other
in clear atmosphere until they can not longer see each other due to the curvature of the Earth ?
[Take : radius of earth = 6400 km]
(A) 10 m (B) 100 m (C) 1 km (D) 10 km

7. Figure shows a copper wire of non-uniform cross section carrying current toward right. For sectors A,
B and C.
(C)
(A) (B)
(A) iB > iA > iC (i = current) (B) EB > EA > EC (E = electric field)

(C) VB > VA > VC (V = drift velocity) (D) JB > JA > JC (J = current density)
8. Figure shows a battery, a conductor and a switch. After the switch is closed
L
A B
(A)The electric field is set up inside the conductor.

L
(B) The time taken by the current to travel from A to B is .
vd
[vd is drift speed of electrons]
(C) The random motion of the electron stops and they start drifting to the left.
(D)The random motion of the electron continues along with the drifting.
9. Two small spherical bodies ‘a’ & ‘b’ of mass m and radius ‘r’ kept in contact. Both spherical body move
along a circular orbit around the planet of mass M. They are kept in contact in such a way that the
centers of the two bodies and the center of planet M always lies on the same line. Also, the point of
contact of the two bodies is at a distance R from the center of the planet. The density of the blocks is
assumed to be equal to the mean density of the planet. Assume Ro >> r :-
b
(
2GM R 2 + r 2 ) 4r
(A) The angular velocity of ‘a’ is a
( )
2
R R2 - r 2
R M
R0
3GmMr
(B) The contact force exerted by ‘a’ on ‘b’ is
R3
é
ê
2
Gm2 GmM 3R r + r
3
( ) ùú
(C) The contact force exerted by ‘a’ on ‘b’ is ê 2 -
( ) ú
2
4r R R2 - r 2
ë û
(D) The value of ‘R’ at which ‘a’ stops exerting force on ‘b’ is nearly 3 12R0

10. Two masses m separated by a distance l are given initial velocities V0, as shown in the diagram. The
masses interact only through mutual universal gravitation. Choose CORRECT statement(s)
V0
V0
(A) For non zero value of V0 , particles will never collide
(B) Minimum distance between particles can be l for a specific value of V0
Gm l
(C) If 2 >2, then minimum distance between particles is
d=
V0 l Gm
-1
V02l
Gm l
(D) If < 2 , then minimum distance between particles is d =
2
V0 l Gm
-2
V02l
11. A satellite is moving in circular orbit of r with speed v0 and time period T1. A particle of small mass is
æ 2 ö
projected from satellite in direction of its motion with relative speed ç - 1÷ v0 :-
è 3 ø
(A) Maximum distance of particle from center of earth is 2r
(B) Maximum distance of particle from center of earth is ( )
5 -1 r
(C) Time period of particle around earth > T1
(D) Time period of particle around earth < T1
12. A near earth orbit satellite of earth experiences very small air resistance. It's period of revolution decreases
by 1.08 sec/day.
160 160
(A) Its radius decreases by m in 1 day. (B) Its radius decreases by m in 1 revolution.
3 3
(C) Its angular momentum decreases (D) Its mechanical energy increases.
Paragraph for Question nos. 13 to 15
A small insect crawls in the direction of electron dirft along bare copper wire that carries a current of
2.56 A. It travels with the drift speed of the electron in the wire of uniform cross section area 1mm2.
Number of free electrons for copper = 8 × 1022/cc & resistivity of copper = 1.6 × 10–8 Wm.
13. How much time would the insect take to crawl 1.0 cm if it crawls at the drift speed of the electrons in the
wire?
(A) 50 sec (B) 5 sec (C) 5000 sec (D) None of these
14. What is order of the average time of collision for free electrons of copper?
(A) 10–14 sec (B) 10–17 sec (C) 10–11 sec (D) 10–8 sec
15. If the insect starts from the point of zero potential at t = 0, it reaches a point of ____ potential after 10 sec.
(A) 80 mV (B) – 80 mV (C) 160 mV (D) –160mV

SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question 1 Q. [3(0)]
1. A 10-km-long underground cable extends east to west and consists of two parallel wires, each of which
has resistance 13W/km. A short develops at distance x from the west end when a conducting path of
resistance R connects the wires (figure). The resistance of the wires and the short is then 100W when the
measurement is made from the east end, 200W when it is made from the west end. What is value of
R (in ohm).
Conducting path
West East
x
SECTION-III
1. A beam of fast moving electrons having cross-sectional area A = 1 cm falls normally on a flat surface.
2
The electrons are absorbed by the surface and the average pressure exerted by the electrons on this
surface is found to be P = 9.1 Pa. If the electrons are moving with a speed v = 8 × 107 m/s, then find the
effective current (in A) through any cross-section of the electron beam.
(mass of electron = 9.1 ×10–31 kg)
SECTION-IV
1. In column-I, certain situations are indicated whose graph can be plotted. Column-II lists the comments
on the modulus of physical quantity on y-axis. If the modulus of physical quantity on x-axis is increasing
then match with column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) y-axis ® Temperature (P) Graph passes through origin.
x-axis ® Pressure
Situation : Adiabatic process on an ideal gas.
(B) y-axis ® Electric field (Q) Continously increasing graph.

x-axis ® Distance from centre along axis.
Situation: A uniformly charged ring.
(C) y-axis ® position of image w.r.t. lens (R) Continously decreasing graph.
x-axis ® position of real object w.r.t. lens
Situation : A point object kept on the optic
axis of a converging lens.
(D) y-axis ® Speed (S) First increase and then decrease.

x-axis ® distance from centre of earth
Situation : A particle projected with a
GM earth
speed of 2 from earth vertically
R earth
upwards. (T) Decreases and then increasing.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A conducting sphere with inner radius R and outer radius 3R has
some alloys mixed in it due to which its resistivity changes with
radial distance r according to the function rr = Kr, where K is a
+ve constant. Inner surface of the sphere is grounded while outer
surface of sphere is maintained at potential V0 with the help of a
battery of emf V0. Battery is ideal. What will be the potential of
the sphere at radial distance of 2R
æ ln 2 ö æ ln 3 - ln 2 ö æ ln 3 - ln 2 ö æ ln 2 ö
(A) V0 ç ÷ (B) V0 ç ÷ (C) V0 ç ÷ (D) V0 ç ÷
è ln 3 ø è ln 3 ø è ln 2 ø è ln 9 ø
2. A copper wire carries a current of 10 A. It has cross-sectional area of 0.05 cm2. Density of copper is
8.9 g/cm3. Molar mass of copper is 63.5 × 10–3 kg/mol. The drift speed of the electrons is closest to
(Assume one free electron per copper atom.)
(A) 1.5 × 10–4 m/s (B) 1.5 × 104 m/s (C) 3.5 × 10–4 m/s (D) 1.5 m/s
3. Two wires of same material and identical lengths are joined in parallel to a battery of constant voltage.
If the radius of cross section of both the wires are in the ratio of 3:5 then the ratio of drift speed of
electrons in the wire is given by :
(A) 9:25 (B) 5:3 (C) 3 : 5 (D) None of these
4. Which of the following electric field pattern is correct inside the conductor having three materials of
resistivity?
i 4r 2r 6r i
(A) – + (B) – +
+ – – +
+ – – +
(C) + – (D) –
+ – +
5. Figure shows a thick shell made of electrical conductivity s and has inner & outer radii of 10 cm & 20cm
respectively and is filled with ice inside it. Its inside and outside surface are kept at different potentials by
2
a battery of internal resistance W & e = 5V. Find value of s for which ice melts at maximum
p
possible rate if 25% of heat generated by shell due to joule heating is used to melt ice.
s
ice
5 1 5
(A) siemen / m (B) 2 siemen / m (C) siemen / m (D) siemen / m
3 2 8
6. What is the equivalent resistance between points A & B ?

2W
1W
5 1 4W
(A) W (B) W A B
6 2 3W
4W
4 7 1W 2W
(C) W (D) W
3 6
7. Figure shows the variation of the gravitatioal acceleration ag of
four planets with the radial distance r from the centre of the
1
planet for r ³ radius of the planet. Plots 1 and 2 coincide for 2
r ³ R2 and plots 3 and 4 coincide for r ³ R4. The sequence of ag
3
the planets in the descending order of their densities is :
4
(A) 1, 2, 3, 4
(B) 4, 3, 2, 1
O R1 R2 R4 r
(C) 2, 1, 4, 3
R3
(D) 1, 2, 4, 3
8. In the figure shown
R1
3W
R3
2W
R2
3W
R4 R5
2W 2W
(A) currents in R4 and R5 are equal

(B) currents in R2 and R3 are equal
(C) current in R1 is equal to the sum of currents in R3, R4 and R5
(D) current in R1 is equal to the sum of currents in R2, R4 and R5
9. For the circuit shown in figure
i1 8W 6W
i3 i4
24V 4W 6W 12W
i2
12W 8W
(A) i1 = 24 A (B) i2 = 2A (C) i3 = 15A (D) i4 = 6A

10. The figure shows the network of resistances connected
across the cell of unknown emf e.
Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :
(A) The value of unknown resistance R = 9 W
(B) I1 = 2A, I3 = 10A, I4 = 10A
(C) The emf e of the source is 117 V
(D) I1 = 5A, I3 = 0, I4 = 0

V4
11. The rectangular box is a non ohmic resistance following I = where I is current through it (in A) &
125
V voltage across it (in V). At the balanced condition of wheatstone bridge.
1W
G
i
1W 1W
(A) i = 10 A (B) V = 5 Volt (C) I = 5 A (D) V Source = 10 Volt

Twelve wires of equal resistance R are placed in a given arrangement as shown in figure. Then find
A
F B
O
E C
12. Equivalent resistance between A & B is

11R 10R R 3R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
20 20 20 2
13. Equivalent resistance between A & C is
3R R 5R 3R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 4 6 5
14. Equivalent resistance between A & O is
19R 20R 18R 9R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
41 41 23 20
SECTION-III
1. In the given circuit all resistors are identical. Each resistance is equal to 20W. Find the equivalent resistance
between A & B in W.

2. Calculate the resistance (in W) of the conducting strip xyzw having uniform conductivity
p 1
s= mho/met, thickness t = m., current flows along the strip as shown in figure :
6 ln2
y z
x w
2a
a
p/6
O
3. In the circuit shown find the value of current I in amp?
20V
3W
20V
20V
4W 5W
4V
4W
5W 2W 4W
I
5W
10V
5W
SECTION-IV
1. A network consisting of three resistors, three batteries, and a capacitor is shown in figure.
A B C
3W
5W 10V 4W
5mF
8V
F E D
12V
Column-I Column-II
(A) Current in branch EB is (P) 10 mC
(B) Current in branch CB is (Q) 0.5 A
(C) Current in branch ED is (R) 1.5 A
(D) Charge on capacitor is (S) 5 mC
(T) None of these

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. From a sphere of electrical conductivity K two planes cut a piece such that first
plane passes through the centre of sphere and second parallel to first one at
distance R/2 from centre then resistance between A and B.
1 3 R/2
(A) (B)
pKR pKR
ln3 A B
(C) (D) None
2pKR
2. Consider the circuit as shown in figure. The equivalent resistance between A and B is
A
1W
4W 4W
2W B 2W
1W
2W
1W
4W
9 1 7
(A) W (B) W (C) W (D) None
7 9 9
3. In the shown circuit all batteries have equal emf E. Current through the 2R resistance is
R 3R
R R R
R R
R
R
2R
R
3E 2E E
2R 3R 3R
4. A prism is made of wire mesh with each side having equal resistance R. A battery
of 6 volt and zero resistance is connected across E and F as shown in the figure.
The current in the branch AB, if R is equal to 5W, is :-
(A) 0.6 A (B) 0.8 A
(C) 0.4 A (D) 2A
5. Find equivalent resistance between A & B.
2R
R R R
R
3R 3R
2R 3R 2R
A R R B
2R 2R
2R
2R 2R
R 12R
(A) (B) (C) R (D) 4R
11 11
6. A metal sphere of radius a is surrounded by a concentric metal sphere of inner radius of b, where b > a.
The space between the spheres is filled with a material whose electrical conductivity s varies with the
electric field strength E as s = kE where k is a constant. A potential difference V is maintained between
spheres.
(A) For a < r < b, current is 4pr2 kE2
(B) For a < r < b, current is 2pr2 kE2
I æbö
(C) Potential difference between spheres is V = ln ç ÷ where I is total current
4 pk è a ø
I æ bö
(D) Potential difference between spheres is V = ln ç ÷ where I is total current
2pk è a ø
7. Consider the circuit shown. Resistance connected between terminal 'A' and 'B' is 20W and ammeter is
ideal. Then select the CORRECT statement :-
A
S2
S1
W 20W
10
20W
20W
A 20W
20
W
S4
S3
B
60V
(A) When switch 'S1' and 'S4' are closed, current reading of ammeter is 3 amp.
6
(B) When switch 'S3' and 'S2' are closed, current reading of ammeter is amp.
5
(C) When only 'S2' is closed, reading of ammeter is zero.
(D) When all the switch are close, reading of ammeter is 0 amp.

8. In given figure AB and CD are diameter of rings such that AB = 10 cm,

O
CD = 20 cm and OA = 10 cm. The resistance per unit length of straight
4
segment is 1W/cm and that of rings is W/cm. A battery of emf 60 V is
p A B
connected across AB. Select correct alternatives :
(A) Current through AO is 4A
(B) Current through BD is 1.5 A C D
(C) Potential difference across CD is 30 V
(D) Potential difference across AD is 40 V
9. All ammeter/voltmeter are ideal. Which of the statements are CORRECT.
S3
A2
R
V1
S2
A3
S1
E R R V2
A1
(A) when all switch are closed, reading of A1 and A3 are same.
(B) When only S2 is closed than reading of V2 is E.
2E
(C) When only S2, S3 closed then a reading of A1 is
3R
(D) Reading of A1 is independent of the function of switch S2.
The figure shows a tetrahedron, each side of which has a resistance r
10. Choose the correct statement(s) related to the resistance between any two points.
(A) RAB = RBD = RBC = RCD = RCA = RAD
(B) RAB = RAC = RAD = RBD = RBC ¹ RCD
(C) RCD is the least
(D) RAB = RAC = RBC and RCD = RAD = RBD
11. Choose the correct diagram(s), which show two-dimensional equivalent of the tetrahedron.
(A) (B) (C) (D)

12. If a battery is connected between any two points of the tetrahedron, then identify the correct statement(s).
(A) The potentials of the other two points are always equal.
(B) There always exists a branch through which no current flows.
(C) The current coming out of the battery in each case is same.
(D) None of these
13. List-I shows electric circuits and List-II shows equivalent resistance between A and B.
List-I List-II
2R 2R
R R
(P) A B (1) R/2
R R
2R 2R
R/2
2R R
2R
(Q) R/2 (2) R/3
R R
R
A B
R
R R
(R) (3) 2R/3
R
R
B
A
R
R C
R R R R
(S) (4) 2R
A R B
Code
P Q R S
(A) 3 1 4 2
(B) 2 1 4 2
(C) 3 1 4 1
(D) 2 1 4 3

14. Match the list-I with list-II.

List-I List-II
1
(P) (1)
2
Numerical value of maximum power

(in watt) delivered to Rext is
3
(Q) (2)
2
Numerical value of potential difference

(in volt) between points A & B is
(R) (3) 6
Wire AB has negligible resistance.

Numerical value of current (in ampere)
through AB is
(S) (4) 4
Resistances are arranged in tetrahedron

configuration. All resistance are equal.
Numerical value of equivalent resistance
(in W) between A & B is
Code
P Q R S
(A) 4 3 2 1
(B) 3 2 4 1
(C) 1 2 3 4
(D) 2 3 1 4
SECTION-III
1. Figure shows a cell in which unit positive charge experiences a constant non electric force of 10N and
a constant electric force of 8N in directions shown in the figure. The internal resistance of the cell is r W.
Fill 10r in OMR sheet.
0.1m
– +
1A – + 1A
– + +
– +
– 8N 10N +
Cell
2. A regular pyramid of square is made of eight identical wires each resistance 12 W shown in the figure.
The terminals A and B are the mid-points of the corresponding sides. Find equivalent resistance between
the terminals A and B in ohms.
B
A
3. Find the equivalent resistance between the terminals A and B as shown on the diagram below. Put
R = 12W, r = 6W and neglect the resistance of leads.
r r r
A ¥
R R R R
¥
B
4. All the wires on the front and the back hexagonal face (of the Skelton hexagonal prism) have resistance
20
R. All the wires along the lines joining the vertices of two hexagons have resistance R. Take R = W.
3
The equivalent resistance between P and Q as shown in the figure is ... W.
Q
5. Find n if the total power dissipated by the circuit is 6n watts.
3W
R
1W
4W
6W Q 3W
12V
8W
P
5W
4W

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. In the circuit shown in the figure, I1, I2, I3, I4 denote current in the branches. Choose the correct option.
2E
I1 2R
R
E R E
I2 4R
R
I3 4E
3R I4
13E
(A) I1 > I2 > I3 > I4 (B) I1 = I2 > I3 > I4 (C) I1 < I3 < I2 < I4 (D) I2 < I1 < I3 < I4
2. In the diagram shown, all the wires have resistance R. The equivalent resistance between the upper and
lower dots shown in the diagram is–
1 2
3
(A) R/8 (B) R (C) 2R/5 (D) 3R/8

3. For the arrangement of the potentiometer shown in the figure, the balance point is obtained at a distance
75 cm from A when the key k is open. The second balance point is obtained at 60 cm from A when the
key k is closed. Find the internal resistance (in W) of the battery E1.
E0=2V
A . B
®
E1=1.5V G
r
k
24W
(A) 3 (B) 6 (C) 9 (D) 12

4. A galvanometer, having a resistance of 50 W, gives a full scale deflection for a current of 0.05 A. The
length in meter of a resistance wire of area of cross-section 2.97 × 10–2 cm2 that can be used to convert
the galvanometer into an ammeter which can read a maximum of 5 A current is (Specific resistance of
the wire = 5 × 10–7 Wm)
(A) 9 (B) 6 (C) 3 (D) 1.5

5. Capacity of an isolated sphere of radius R1 is increased n times when it is enclosed by an earthed
concentric sphere of radius R2 (R2 > R1). The ratio R 2 is

R1
n2 n 2n 2n + 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
n -1 n -1 n +1 n +1
6. Four capacitors and two sources of e.m.f. are connected as shown in the figure. The p.d. in volts between
the points a and b is :
(A) zero (B) 13 (C) 17 (D) 27

7. The circuit diagram shows a source of emf 10 V having an internal resistance of 2.5W connected to an
ideal ammeter. The jockey can be slided to different points on the Rheostat whose total resistance is
10W. What can be the reading of the ammeter.
A
A B
(A) 1A (B) 2A (C) 3A (D) 4A

8. In a meter bridge experiment with the resistance R1 in the left gap and a resistance X in the right
gap, the null point obtained at 40 cm from left end. Now with the resistance R2 in the left gap and
the same resistance X in the right gap, null point is obtained at 50 cm from left end.
(A) If R1 and R2 are put in series in the left gap and the right gap contains resistance X, the null point is
obtained at a distance 75 cm from the left end.
(B) If R1 and R2 are put in series in the left gap and the right gap contains resistance X, the null point is
125
obtained at a distance cm from the left end.
2
(C) If R1 and R2 are put in parallel in the right gap and the left gap contains resistance X, the null point
500
is obtained at a distance cm from the left end.
7
(D) If R1 and R2 are put in parallel in the left gap and the right gap contains resistance X, the null point
200
is obtained at a distance cm from the left end.
7

9. In the figure shown, area of each plate is A. 1 2 3 4 5 6
æ Î0 A ö 2d d
(A) Charge on plate 5 is ç ÷V
è d ø
(B) Potential difference between plates 2 and 3 is V
V
(C) Potential difference between plates 2 and 5 is zero
(D) Charge on the plate 3 is zero.
10. A part of circuit is as shown int he diagram (R = 8W)
R C 2R
R R
A B
R
R
D 2R
(A) Equivalent resistance between A and B is 11 W.

(B) Equivalent resistance between A and B is 8 W.
(C) Equivalent resistance between C and D is 6.2 W.
(D) Equivalent resistance between A and B is 10 W.
Four large conducting plates each of area A having charge 4Q, 3Q, 2Q and Q respectively are kept
Qd
parallel to each other. If switch S1 and S2 both are closed simultaneously. (Emf of battery E = Ae )
0
Ist IInd IIIrd IVth
d d d
S2
S1
11. Final charge on plate Ist is :

(A) 2Q (B) –3Q (C) 5Q (D) 4Q
12. Total work done by battery is :
5Q 2d Q 2d 2Q 2 d -Q 2 d
(A) (B) (C) (D)
Ae0 Ae0 Ae0 Ae 0
SECTION-III
1. The current supplied to the circuit by 10 V cell is I ampere. Assume both cells as ideal find 4I.
I
8W 10V
2W
5V
6W
4W
2. A prism is made of wire mesh with each side having equal resistance R. A battery of 6V and zero
resistance is connected across E and F as shown in the figure. The current in the branch AD (in Ampere)
if R is equal to 5W is a , then find 10 a.
A B
D C
3. If a galvanometer is converted into voltmeter with help of 32W resistance then voltage range becomes n
times of initial. If same galvanometer is converted into ammeter with help of 2W resistance (as a shunt)
then current range become n times of initial. Find resistance (in W) of original galvanometer.
4. For the network having capacitances as shown in figure, the charge on 200 pF capacitor is given by
a × 102 pC. Fill the value of a in OMR sheet.
100 pF
C1
200 pF 200 pF
+
C2 100 pF C3 3V
–
C4
5. In a circuit, a branch carrying only capacitor has variable current i = I0 sin 2pt and capacitor was
2I 0
uncharged at t = 0. The maximum magnitude of potential difference across capacitor is . Then
kpC
value of k will be :
C
A B
i

SECTION-IV
1. Match the column.
Column-I Column-II
V
(A) (P) Set-up can be used to find
A
X
unknown resistance X.
e Rh2
R X
G J
Rh1
(B) Rh2 (Q) Set-up is used

to verify Ohm’s law.
e
X R
(C) (R) Wheatstone bridge
G
Rh1
J
Rh2
(D) R1 B R2 C (S) Rheostat (Rh2) is a

A
potential divider.
1000 100 10 10 100 1000
1 2 2 5 10 20 20 50
E
Rh2
(T) Rheostat (Rh1) should be kept low

for higher sensitivity to measure X.
Rh1

2. All capacitors have capacitance of 1mF. Find equivalent capacitance between points A & B.
Column-I (Circuit ) Column-II (Capacitance )
B 4
(A) (P) mF
3
3
(B) (Q) mF
2
A B
A
15
(C) B (R) mF
8
A
5
(D) B (S) mF
3
(T) None of these

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. The current through the battery E in the network shown is
R1 = 4kW R6 = 7.5kW
E = 72 V R8 = 3kW
W
R2 = 8kW R4 = 24kW
9k
I
=
7
R
R3 = 12kW R5 = 12kW R9 = 6kW
(A) Zero (B) 9 A (C) 6 mA (D) 9 mA

2. The diagram shows a modified meter bridge, which is used for measuring two unknown resistances at
the same time. When only the first galvanometer is used, for obtaining the balance point, it is found at
point C. Now the first galvanometer is removed and the second galvanometer is used, which gives
balance point at D. Using the details given in the diagram, find out the value of R1 and R2 :-
R R1 R2
G G
A B
C D
AB = L; AC = L/4 and AD = 2L/3
(A) R1 = 5R/3, R2 = 4R/3 (B) R1 = 4R/3, R2 = R

(C) R1 = 4R/3, R2 = 5R/3 (D) R1 = R, R2 = R/3
3. Choose the correct statement for the given capacitor arrangement. (All the 6 capacitor are of same
capacitance).
B
D
C
(A) If a battery is connected across AB, all 6 capacitors get charged.

(B) If a battery is connected across AC, all 6 capacitors get charged.
(C) If a battery is connected across AD, all 6 capacitors get charged.
(D) It is not possible to charge all the 6 capacitors using single source.

4. A meter bridge set up as shown to determine end correction at A and B. When a resistance of 15W is
used in left gap and of 20W in right gap, then null point comes at a distance 42cm from A. When these
resistances are interchanged null point comes at a distance 57cm from A. Values of end corrections
are :-
A B
(A) 1 cm, 2 cm (B) 2 cm, 3 cm (C) 3 cm, 4 cm (D) 3 cm, 2 cm
5. In figure an arrangement of three identical capcitors is shown along with a switch S and a battery B. If
the switch S is closed, then the ratio of the energy of the capacitors system in the final steady state to the
initial state is :
S
+ –
B
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 4 : 3 (C) 3 : 2 (D) 3 : 4

6. Circuit shown is in steady state, now when switch is closed, galvanometer shows no deflection, then
correct relation is :-
R1 R2
G
C1 C2
R1 C 2 R1 C1
(A) R = C (B) R = C
2 1 2 2
(C) R1R2 = C1C2 (D) R1 C1 = R 2 C2

Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 3Q. & 1 Para × 2Q.) [3 M (-1)]
Figure shows a potentiometer with a cell of 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.40 W maintaining a potential
drop across the resistor wire AB. A standard cell which maintains a constant emf of 1.02 V (for very
moderate currents upto a few mA) gives a balance point at 60 cm length of the wire. To ensure very low
currents drawn from the standard cell, a very high resistance of 600 kW is put in series with it, which is
shorted close to the balance point. The standard cell is then replaced by a cell of unknown emf e and the
balance point found similarly, turns out to be at 80 cm length of the wire.

2V 0.4 W
A B
600 kW
7. The value of emf of the unknown cell e is

(A) 1.2 V (B) 1.36V (C) 1.5V (D) 2V
8. Would the method work in the above situation if the driver cell of the potentiometer had an emf of 1.0 V
instead of 2.0 V ?
(A) Yes but the value of high resistance (600 kW) must be lowered.
(B) Yes it will work perfectly and no modification is needed to be done in the circuit.
(C) Yes only if the driver cell is ideal in nature.
(D) No as the driver cell has lower emf as compared to the unknown cell.
9. Would the circuit work well for determining an extremely small emf, say of the order of a few mV (such
as the typical emf of a thermo-couple) ?
(A) Yes, with the same accuracy and with no further modification.
(B) Yes ,but with reducing the high resistance (600 kW ) to a lower value.
(C) Yes, but by connecting using suitable resistance in series with the driver cell.
(D) No, as the balanced wheat stone bridge will not form with the lower emf of unknown cell.
Four batteries of emf E1 = 4V, E2 = 8V, E3 = 12 V and E4 = 16 V and four identical capacitors each of
1 µF and four identical resistance are connected in circuit as in figure. Batteries do not have any internal
resistances
C1
D
C
E1
E2
A B
R C2
R R
C3 H
E3 G
R
E4
E C4 F
10. At steady state potential difference across C2 is :

(A) 1V (B) 5V (C) 4V (D) 6V
11. If points H and B are shorted, the new charge on C2 at steady state will be :
(A) Zero (B) 5 µC (C) 4 µC (D) 1µC


12. Consider the electric circuits given in List-I and List-II gives values of some quantities from electric
circuits. Match the corresponding quantities with correct circuit.
List-I List-II
6W 12V
a
10V
I1 3W 1
I3 1W I2 3W
I1 = A
(P) (1)
5W 55
b
6V 5W
c
I3 6V
10V I1 a 20W -1
(Q) b 30W (2) I2 = A
10W 121
I2 15V
d
I2 b I3
4W 2W
10V 1W 5V
a c 15
(R) I1
2W (3) I3 = A
4W 8
d
2V,1W
5W I1 2W
10W
a b
(S) 5W I2 I3 2W (4) Va – Vb = 4V
1V, 2W
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 4 1 3 2
(B) 4 1 2 4
(C) 3 4 3 4
(D) 4 1 1 2
SECTION-III
1. Initially switch S is open. Charge flows through switch S when it is closed is 6 × Q µC. Then find the
value of Q ?
V = 18.0 V
6.00 W 6.00 µF
a S b
3.00 W 3.00 µF

2. The figure shows two circuits with a charged capacitor that is to be discharged through a resistor as
q2
shown. The initial charge on capacitors is q = 2. If both switches are closed at t = 0, the charges
1
become equal at 10–4 ln2 sec. Find the resistance R (in W).
q1 q2
5W R
–q1 5µF –q2
10/3µF
3. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 0.1 µF is shown in the figure. Its two plates are given charges
2 µC and 1 µC. Find the value of heat disipated (in µJ) after switch is closed.
2µC 1µC
5V
4. The circuit shown in the figure contains three resistors R1 = 100 W, R2 = 50W & R3 = 20W and cells of
emf's E1 = 2V & E2. The ammeter indicates a current of 50mA. Find the emf (in V) of the second cell.
(The internal resistance of the ammeter and of the cell should be neglected.)
E1
R1 R2
R3 mA
E2
5. Figure shows three bulbs connected in series. Their voltage rating shows that they will fuse if potential
drop across them is greater than 100 Volt.Voltage of the cell can be varied. In each step voltage of the
cell increases by 20 Volt. Initially the voltage of the cell is 100 V. If voltage of the cell is gradually
increased and it is found that after Nth step current in the circuit becomes zero. Find the value of N.

6. In Fig., the uniform-resistance wire between A and B has a total resistance R0. The contact at C can
divide the wire into resistors fR0 and (1 – f)R0. Consider the ideal ammeter for any 0 < f < 1. Assume that
the batteries are identical and have negligible internal resistance. For what value of f is the ammeter
reading is minimum. Fill value of 12f.
r
E E
A
fR0 (1 – f)R0
A B
C
SECTION-IV
1. Figure shows two cylindrical uniform specimen of electrical resistances with their characteristics.
R1 R2
Resistivity : r1 = r r2 = 2r
Length : l1 = l l2 = 2l
Area of cross-section : A1 = A A2 = A/2
R1 and R2 are connected in circuit as shown in figure. Voltmeter and ammeter connected in the circuit
are ideal. Comparison of electric field, drift speed and power dissipated per unit volume should be done
only if R1 carries current (both the materials have same electron density).
R1 R2 S2 A
S1
R2
V
Column-I Column-II
(A) S1 is open S2 is closed (P) Reading of voltmeter is maximum
(B) S1 is closed S2 is open (Q) Reading of ammeter is maximum
(C) S1 and S2 both are closed (R) Magnitude of electric field in R2 is greater than in R1
(D) S1 and S2 both are open (S) Drift speed of electrons is greater in R2 than in R1
(T) Power dissipated per unit volume is greater in R2
than in R1

CLASS TEST
CLASS TEST JEE (Main + Advanced) 2020
ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST
COURSE
COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Two ammeters, 1 and 2, have different internal resistances: r1(known) r2(unknown). Each ammeter has
scale such that the angular deviation of the needle from zero is proportional to the current. Initially, the
ammeters are connected in series and then to a source of constant voltage. The deviations of the needles
of the ammeters are q1 and q2, respectively. The ammeters are then connected in parallel and then to the
same voltage source. This time, the deviations of the needles are q1' and q2', respectively. r2 in terms of r1,
q1, q2, q1' and q2' is
q1q'1 q 2q'1 q2q'2 q1q 2
(A) r1 q q' (B) r1 q q' (C) r1 q q' (D) r1 q' q'
2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2
A
2. Calculate the energy stored in the capacitor of capacitance 2mF, at V
the instant when the voltmeter ‘V’ gives a reading of 15V and the 1kW
B 2kW
ammeter A reads 15 mA. Resistance of voltmeter is unknown and 2mF
D
A
ammeter is 999 W.
1kW 1W
(A) 5 mJ
C
(B) 10 mJ
(C) 0.5 mJ
R 50V 0.5W
(D) 0
3. In a potentiometer, there are 10 identical cells (E, r-each) arranged in series in primary circuit. A cell of
emf E0 and internal resistance r0 is balanced at l1 length of the potentiometer wire. Now, the polarity of
two cells is reversed in primary circuit. The same cell of emf E0 now gets balanced at l2 then l1/l2 is :-
(A) 3/5 (B) 5/3 (C) 1/2 (D) 2/1
4. What are the resistances of the resistors R1 and R2, shown in the V
figure, if the voltage supply is 40 V, and the power dissipated in
R1 R2
resistor R is 80 W, the readings on the ammeter and on the
voltmeter are 3 A and 30 V, respectively. (All devices are ideal)
(A) R1 = 30 W R
A
(B) R2 = 30 W
(C) R1 = 10W
(D) R2 = 10W U
5. A potentiometer as shown in figure in which three batteries between A & B are connected when the
point P is the null point, measured by the potentiometer arrangement. Then choose correct statement(s)
e r
a P b
2V
1W
4V 0.5W
1W G
A B
6V
(A) current passing through 6 V battery is 4A
(B) current passing through 2 V battery is 4A
(C) VA – VB = 2V
(D) VA – VB = 6V
6. Two ideal voltmeters & an ideal ammeter are connected as shown. The battery is non ideal. Find the
correct plot of A vs x, V vs x & V1 vs x, where x is distance of slider on rheostat from left end.
V A
V1
V V1 V1
A
(A) (B) (C) (D)

x x x x
7. In the circuit shown, the battery is ideal. It has a voltage of 21 V. The R

galvanometer G1 shows 0.42 A. When another identical galvanometer G2 is
connected across R, the reading of G1 increases to 0.50 A :- G1
(A) The resistance of galvanometer is 30 W
(B) The resistance R = 40 W
(C) The reading of G2 = 0.20 A 21V
(D) If instead of this, G2 was connected parallel to G1, their reading would be same = 0.21A.
8. In given circuit :-
6W 35W
2W
5W 3W 8W 9W
2W 2W
42V
(A) Power dissipated in 5Ω resistor is 10 W. (B) Power dissipated in 5Ω resistor is 5 W.
(C) Power dissipated in 8Ω resistor is 0 W. (D) Power dissipated in 8Ω resistor is 2 W.
9. Figure shows two capacitors having same capacitance connected to a battery and two switches S1 and
S2. Initially S1 and S2 is closed :-
C C
S1
e S2
(A) Before opening S1 charge on left capacitor is Ce .

1
(B) After opening S1 the final charge on both capacitor is equal to Ce
2
(C) After opening S1 the final charge on both capacitor is Ce.
(D) After opening S1 the charge on left capacitor is Ce.
10. Four parallel metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 each of area A, are
separated successively by a distance d as shown in figure. P1 is
P1 P2 P3 P4
connected to the negative terminal of a battery, and P2 is
connected to the positive terminal. The battery maintains a V
potential difference of V. Mark the correct statement(s) :-
(A) If P3 is connected to the negative terminal, the capacitance
2 Î0 A
of the three-plate system P1P2P3 is .
d d d d
(B) If P3 is connected to the negative terminal, the charge on P2
Î0 A
is 2CV, where C is
d
(C) If P3 is connected to the negative terminal and P4 is connected to the positive terminal then the
Î0 A
capacitance of the four-plate system P1P2P3P4 is 3C, where C is
d
(D) If P3 is connected to the negative terminal and P4 is connected to the positive terminal then charge on
Î0 A
P4 is V
d
11. An electrical circuit is shown in the given figure. The resistance V 2
of each voltmeter is infinite and each ammeter is 100W. The

charge on the capacitor of 100 µF in steady state is 4 mC. Choose 200W
V C 900W
correct statements (s) regarding above circuit :- 1
[ideal
(A) Reading of voltmeter V2 is 16 V cell] 100W A
(B) Reading of Ammeter A1 is 0A and A2 is 1/25 A.
2
(C) Reading of voltmeter V1 is 40V A 1
(D) EMF of the ideal cell is 66 V.

12. The network has C1, C2, C3, C4 four capacitors each of capacitance C = 1 µF, all resistance are identical
having r = 1 W. The battery has emf E = 30 V. The circuit is analyzed at steady state. Mark the CORRECT
options. r
(A) ratio of steady state charge of C1 and C2 is 1 : 1 C3 r C2

(B) ratio of steady state charge of C2 and C4 is 1 : 1 C4 C1 r
(C) ratio of steady state charge of C1 and C3 is 1 : 1 r E
(D) ratio of steady state charge of C2 and C3 is 1 : 1 r
In the given circuit all capacitor were uncharged initially. First switch S1 is closed for long time when
circuit reaches to steady state, switch S1 is opened & S2 is closed.
R2 = 2W
7.5 V
60µF
30µF
() ()
R1 = 2W S1 S2

13. The current through R2, just after closing the switch S2 is :-
(A) 5A (B) 2.5 A (C) 3.75 A (D) 2A
14. Net heat produced in R2 after closing switch S2 :-
(A) 375 µJ (B) 100 µJ (C) 250 µJ (D) 200 µJ
SECTION-III
1. What is the size of current i (in A) in figure, where all resistances are 4.0 W and all batteries have an emf
of 10 V?
2. In the figure shown below, the maximum possible unknown resistance X (in W) , that can be measured
by the post office box are Xmax is given by R × 105 W, then R is : (in this experiment, we take out only
one plug in arm AB and only one plug in arm BC, but in arm AD we can take out many plugs).
G
E +
–
P Q
A 1000 100 10 B10 100 1000 C
5000 2000 1000

unknown
resistance
D 100 R 200 200

500
X
3. The circuit diagram given in the figure shows the experimental setup for the measurement of unknown
resistance by using a meter bridge. The wire connected between the points P and Q has non-uniform
resistance such that the resistance per unit length varies directly as the distance from the point P. Null
point is obtained with the jockey J with R1 and R2 in the given position. On interchanging the positions
of R1 and R2 in the gaps, the jockey has to be displaced through a distance x from the previous position
along the wire to establish the null point. If the ratio of R1/R2 = 3. The value of x is 50 ( K - 1) cm. Find
the value of K. (length of wire PQ = 1m)
R1 R2
J
P Q

4. For the arrangement of the potentiometer shown in the figure, the balance point is obtained at a distance
75 cm from A when the key k is open. The second balance point is obtained at 60 cm from A when the
key k is closed. Find the internal resistance (in W) of the battery E1.
E0=2V
A . B
®
E1=1.5V G
r
k
24 W
SECTION-IV
1. Column-I has some conductor across which battery is connected as shown. Variation of resistivity r is
also indicated. Which of the quantities in column-II remain constant throughout the volume of conductor.
(Assume that the free electron density is uniform in the material).
Column-I Column-II
(A) rµx (P) Magnitude of electric field
rµr
(B) (Q) Magnitude of current density
Hollow cylinder
rµr2
(C) (R) Power dissipated per unit volume
Hollow sphere
r=constant
(D) (S) Drift speed of free electron
Hollow sphere (T) Electric current

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. The capacitor each having capacitance C = 2 µF are connected S
with a battery of emf 30V as shown in figure. When the switch S is
C
closed. Find the amount of charge flown through the switch C
(A) 20mC (B) 60 mC C
(C) 40 mC (D) 10 mC 30V
2. 2
Three identical metal plates of area 1 m each are arranged horizontally, parallel to each other, with identical
paper (K = 4) sheets in between of thickness 0.177 mm completely filling the space between them.
Counted from the top, they are given charges equal to +2 mC, –1 mC and –1 mC, respectively. The
electrostatic energy stored in this system is (Î0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2)
(A) 25 J (B) 12.5 J (C) 50 J (D) None
3. Two identical parallel plate capacitors 1 and 2 are placed vertically and connected
in series to a battery. In capacitor-2 there is a charged small particle attached by a a
thin wire to a fixed point, as shown. Ignore the effect of the charge particle on the 1 2
charge distribution of the capacitor plates. At equilibrium, the angle between the
wire and the vertical direction is a. Now slowly pull a plate of capacitor-1 until
the distance between its two plates is doubled. After equilibrium, angle between
the wire and the vertical direction is.
-1 æ2 ö -1 æ1 ö -1 æ1 ö -1 æ3 ö
(A) tan ç tan a ÷ (B) tan ç tan a ÷ (C) tan ç tan a ÷ (D) tan ç tan a ÷
è3 ø è3 ø è2 ø è2 ø
4. If galvanometer has 1000 W resistance and R = 10000 W, then what should 20V
() R
be the resistance connected to galvanometer in parallel to it so that its deflection K1
reduces to half:-
(A) 455 W (B) 500 W G
() S
(C) 909 W (D) 1236 W K2
5. When a galvanometer is shunted with a 5W resistance, the deflection is reduced to one-fifth. If the
galvanometer is further shunted with a 3W wire, the further reduction (find the ratio of decrease in
current to the previous current) in the deflection will be (the main current remains the same) :-
æ4ö
(A) ç ÷ of the deflection when shunted with 5W only
è7ø
æ5ö
(B) ç ÷ of the deflection when shunted with 5W only
è 13 ø
æ3ö
(C) ç ÷ of the deflection when shunted with 5W only
è7ø
æ3ö
(D) ç ÷ of the deflection when shunted with 5W only
è 13 ø

6. The figure shows a potentiometer arrangement used to measure the internal resistance of the cell B of 5V.
The null point q is located at 20 cm on a 100 cm wire PR. Find the internal resistance 'r' of the cell B :-
20V
A
20cm q
P R
5V r G
B
20W
(A) 1W (B) 2W (C) 3W (D) 5 W

7. H1 is the heat produced in resistance R when A and B are C R
connected for a long time with no charge on the capacitor initially.
Heat produced in the resistance is H2 when B and C are connected
A B
for a long time thereafter. The energy supplied by the battery C
E
during charging is :-
(A) H1 (B) H2
(C) 2H1 (D) 2(H1 + H2)
8. An ideal parallel plate capacitor of area A is filled with three dielectric slabs having dielectric constants K1 = 3.0,
K2 = 5.0 and K3 = 2.0 as shown in the figure. Choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
A/2
8e A K1 K2 d/2
(A) the equivalent capacitance of the system is 0 Vo
K3 d/2
3d
A
(B) the electric field in K1 is more than the electric field in K2.
(C) the electric field on the left half of K3 is less than the electric field on the right half of K3.
(D) the electric field on the left half of K3 is more than the electric field on the right half of K3.
9. Four identical capacitor each of capacitance 5 µF are connected as
K 1
shown in Figure. They are attached to the battery of emf E = 9 V.
1 K
Initially the key K2 is open, and the switch K1 is closed. Then key K1
2
2 4 e
is opened and K2 is closed.
3
(A) The initial potential difference across capacitor 2 is 3 V.
(B) The final potential difference across capacitor 2 is 1.8 V.
(C) The charge flown through the battery after the reversal of switches is 3µC.
(D) The charge flown through the battery after the reversal of switches is zero.
10. An electric kettle has two heating coils. When one coil is switched on, the water in the kettle begins to boil
after 15 minutes and when the other is switched on, water boils after 30 minutes. Water in the kettle will boil
(A) In 45 minutes if coils are connected in series
(B) In 90 minutes if coils are connected in series
(C) In 10 minutes if coils are connected in parallel
(D) In 5 minutes if coils are connected in parallel

11. In a meter bridge experiment, the metre wire has been choosen R = 10W x
such that its cross section is uniform but its resistivity increase, linear
from r0 to 2r0 as you go from left end to right end neglect any end A
correction, choose the correct statement(s) :- 2r0
r
(A) If x = 10W, Null point is obtained closer to A on wire A
0
B
(B) If null point is obtained at mid point of AB wire x will be more
than 10W
(C) For given value of x null point will not change, even if we change the magnitude of r0
(D) We may get two null points for a particular value of x
12. The current in a wire of resistance 10W varies as shown.Select correct alternative(s).
I(A)
2
1
0 Dt(s)
1 2 3 4 5
(A) The heat produced in the wire in 4 s is 852.5 J

(B) The heat produced in the wire in 4 s is 850 J
(C) The charge flows across any section of the wire in 4 s is 15 C
(D) The charge flows across any section of the wire in 4 s is 15.5 C
Two conductors carry charges +Q and –Q. They create a nonuniform electric field as shown in figure.
A coordinate system is placed on the positive conductor, and the electric field strength along the y-axis
æ y2 ö
is found to vary according to the function E ( y ) = QA Î0 ç 1 + ÷ where A and B are constant. The
è Bø
separation between the conductors is d as shown in figure.
– –
– –
– M –
– –
– – E(y)
–– ––
–– –
P
y d
x
+ + ++ +
+ +
+ N +
13. The equivalent capacitance of the system is
1 1 æ d3 ö A Î0
(A) (B) (C) A Î0 ç d + ÷ (D) æ d3 ö
æ d3 ö æ d3 ö è 3B ø d +
A Î0 ç d - ÷ A Î0 ç d + ÷ ç ÷
3B ø 3B ø è 3B ø
è è
14. Surface charge density at point P on conductor M is
æ d2 ö æ d2 ö æ d2 ö æ d2 ö
(A) QA Î20 ç 1 + ÷ (B) 2QA Î0 ç 1 + ÷ (C) 2QA Î20 ç 1 + ÷ (D) QA Î0 ç 1 + ÷
è Bø è Bø è Bø è Bø

In given circuit, all batteries, voltmeters and ammeters are ideal. Voltmeters and ammeters have only
+ive scale for reading. Resistance of each resistor is 5W. Reading of voltmeters are V1 and V2 and of
ammeters are A1 and A2. Initially all switches are closed.
V1
S3 20V
S1
A2
10V
10V
A1
40V
S4 S2
V2
Coloumn–I Column-II Column-III

|A1 – A2| V1 V2
(I) 3A (i) 20 V (P) 45 V
(II) 0A (ii) 30 V (Q) 35 V
(III) 5A (iii) 50 V (R) 40 V
(IV) 1 A (iv) 40 V (S) 25 V
15. Only switch S2 is open
(A) (I) (iii) (S) (B) (IV) (ii) (P) (C) (I) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (S)
16. Only switch S3 is open :
(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (IV) (ii) (S) (C) (I) (iii) (P) (D) (II) (iv) (Q)
17. Only switch S1 is open :
(A) (III) (iii) (P) (B) (I) (iii) (R) (C) (IV) (ii) (P) (D) (III) (ii) (P)

SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question 1Q.[3M(0)]
1. ABCD is a square frame made from different wires of same length and each having different uniform
resistance per unit length. Resistances of wires forming sides AB, BC, CD and DA are 100W, 400 W,
500 W and 200 W respectively. An ideal cell is connected across B and D. A straight conducting wire
containing a resistance and a galvanometer in series starts rotating about pivoted point A from initial
p
position as shown with uniform angular velocity w = rad/sec. One end of the straight wire (rotating)
360
is pivoted at A and other end always in sliding contact with a side of the square. The time (in second)
after start when galvanometer shows zero deflection is.
A B Initial position
G w
D C
SECTION-III
1. Two identical parallel plate capacitors of capacitance C = 0.01 F each are connected in parallel and
charged to voltage 300 V and disconnected from the power source. The plates of one of the capacitors
were spaced at a distance of twice the original. What is the charge passed (in C) during this time through
the connecting wires?

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A parallel plate capacitor is charged from a battery and then isolated from it. Now a dielectric slab of
dielectric constant K is introduced in the region between plates, filling half of it as shown. The electric
field intensity in dielectric region is E1 & that in air between plates is E2.
E2 E æ 1ö
(A) E1 = (B) E1 = 2 (C) E1 = E2 ç1 - ÷ (D) E1 = E2
K K -1 è Kø
2. Three capacitors A, B and C each of capacitance 1 mF are connected in a circuit as shown in figure. The
energy stored in the capacitor C is
6V
A B C
18V
(A) 4 mJ (B) 6 mJ (C) 8 mJ (D) 2 mJ

3. In a planar vacuum diode, the dependence of the current on voltage has the form I = cV3/2 where c is a
constant. How many times will the pressure on the anode arising from the impact of electrons on its
surface increase, if the voltage on the diode were to double? Initial velocity of electrons emitted from the
cathode is negligible.
(A) four times (B) two times (C) 2 times (D) 2 2 times
4. An ammeter and a voltmeter are initially connected in series to a battery of zero internal resistance.
When switch S1 is closed the reading of the voltmeter becomes half of the initial, whereas the reading of
the ammeter becomes double. If now switch S2 is closed then reading of ammeter becomes :-
S1
A V
S2
6V
3 3
(A) times the initial value (B) times the value after closing S1
2 2
3 3
(C) times the value after closing S1 (D) times the initial value
4 4

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. Between the plates of a parallel-plate capacitor, there is a metallic plate whose thickness takes up 60% of
the capacitor gap. When that plate is absent the capacitor has a capacity C = 20nF. The capacitor is
connected to a dc voltage source of voltage =100 V. The metallic plate is slowly extracted from gap.
Find the mechanical work (in mJ) performed in the process of plate extraction.
(A) 150 (B) 100 (C) 200 (D) 250
6. A potentiometer wire has length of 10 m and resistance 10W as shown in figure. A circuit is setup as
shown. For null deflection in galvanometer length AP is :
8V 1.5W
A P B
20V 1W G
1W
(A) 2m (B) 4.5 m (C) 6.5 m (D) None of these

7. Three capacitors C1 = 2mF, C2 = 2 mF and C3 = 3mF having initial charges 4mC, zero and 1mC connected
through a battery of emf 2V as shown, on closing the switches S1 and S2.
+ +
+ +
+ +
C3 C1
2V C2
S2 S1
(A) charge on capacitor C1 is 4mC (B) charge on capacitor C2 is 0

(C) charge on capacitor C3 is 6mC (D) charge flown through S2 is 5mC
8. A series circuit consists of two capacitors, a resistor, and an ideal voltage source.
V
C S 2C
4CV
(A)The charge flown through the battery after closing the switch is .
3
4CV2
(B) Work done by the battery after closing the switch is
3
2CV2
(C) The change in potential energy of the capacitors after closing the switch is
3
2CV2
(D)Heat generated in the circuit after closing the switch is
3

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. In the circuit shown potential difference across the rod of metal oxide varies as V = Ki2. Where i is
current in the rod and K = 1 volt/amp2. It is given that power dissipated in rod is double the power
dissipated in R. Then :
R
Metal oxide
24 Volt
(A) Value of R = 2W (B) Current in the circuit is 2A

(C) Power dissipated in R is 32 W (D) If R is increased current in the circuit decreases.
10. In the network shown, R1 and R2 are unknown resistances, uniform rod AB is of length 1.0 m and
resistance 1.0 kW and A1 and A2 are ideal ammeters. The adjacent graph shows relation between current
in the ammeter A1 and distance x of the jockey D from the end A. Based on the above information, mark
CORRECT statements.
I (mA)
R1 C R2
A1 2
D 0
0.5 1.0 x (m)
A B
A2 -2
V0 1 MW
(A) Resistance R1 is closest to 0.2 kW (B) Ratio of resistance R1 to R2 is equal to 1 : 4.

(C) Emf V0 of the battery is closest to 3.6 V (D) None of the above is correct.
11. In the circuit shown R1 = R2 = 10W and resistance per unit length of wire PQ = 1W/cm and lengthPQ =
10 cm. If R2 is made 20 W then to get zero deflection in galvanometer. S is midpoint of wire PQ :-
R1 R2
12V
J
P Q
J S J
G
(A) The jockey at P can be moved towards S by 2 cm

(B) The jockey at Q can be moved towards S by 2cm
(C) The jockey at S can be moved towards P by a distance of 5/3 m
(D) The jockey at all position fixed and R1 should be made 20W

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A cylinder fitted with a piston which can slide without friction contains one mole of an ideal gas. The
walls of the cylinder and piston are adiabatic. The cylinder contains a resistor of resistance R = 2 k W
which is connected to a capacitor of capacity C = 75 mF. Initially potential difference across capacitor is
æ 640 ö
ç ÷ V and switch is open. When switch is closed for (2.5 ln 4) min, the gas expands isobarically and
è 3 ø
its temperature increases by 72 K. Heat loss through the wires is negligible. (R = 8.3 J mole-1 k-1)
R=2kW C=75mF
12. Work done by the gas is approximately

(A) 0.2 kJ (B) 0.4 kJ (C) 0.6 kJ (D) 0.8 kJ
13. Increment in internal energy of gas is
(A) 1 kJ (B) 2 kJ (C) 3 kJ (D) 4 kJ
14. The value of adiabatic exponent g for gas is
(A) 1.1 (B) 1.3 (C) 1.6 (D) 2.5
Paragraph from Question no. 15 and 16
A potentiometer can also be used to calibrate an ammeter or a voltmeter. Here we require a standard cell
of which emf is known say E0. This cell is connected to secondary branch of potentiometer and we
balance this standard cell against a length l0 on potentiometer wire. (by connecting 1 & 2). Now standard
cell is removed and the galvanometer end 2 is connected to point 3 on circuit and balanced against
length l1. Current I can be obtained using principle of potentiometer as well as from ammeter. I as given
by potentiometer is true value and ammeter reading may have error.
J B
A
E0
1
2
I R 3 G
– +
E K
A
15. If resistance R is 15W, E0 = 5V, l0 = 2.5m, l1 = 3m, current I as read by ammeter is 0.45 A
(A) The ammeter reads more than true value by 0.05 A
(B) The ammeter reads less than true value by 0.01A
(C) The ammeter reads less than true value by 0.05A
(D) The ammeter reads more than true value by 0.01 A
16. If the same error is obtained for another circuit where E0 = 10V, l0 = 3m, l1 = 1.5m, current I in ammeter
is 0.55A, the resistance R used is :
100
(A) 10 W (B) 8 W (C) W (B) 8.1 W
9
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. In the following circuit, switch S1 remains closed for a long time and switch S2 remains open. The
system reaches a steady state. Now we close switch S2 also, keeping S1 close. In the new steady state the
magnitude of change in charge on capacitor C2 of 2 µF is q µC. Find q.
C1 = 1µF
1W
S1
2W S2
15V 3W
C2 = 2µF C3 = 2µF
2. Two wires of the same length but of different square cross sections are made from the same material.
The sides of the cross sections of the first and second wires are d1 = 1 mm and d2 = 4 mm. The current
required to fuse the first wire is I1 = 1.0 A. Determine the least current I2 (in A) required to fuse the
second wire, assuming that the amount of heat dissipated to the ambient per second obeys the law
Q = kS(T – Tam), where S is the surface area of the wire, T is its temperature, Tam is the temperature of
the ambient away from the wire, and k is the proportionality factor which is the same for the two wires.
3. Figure shows a potentiometer connected to an external circuit. At an instant either switch S1 and S3 is
closed or S2 and S4 is closed. When switch S1 and S3 is closed null point is attained at J1(AJ1 = l1) and
æ l1 ö
when S2 and S4 is closed it is attained at J2(BJ2=l2). Find the value of 3 ç l ÷ .
è 2ø
P R
5V 3V
1W 2W
S3 S4
4W
Q S
S1 S2
G
A J B
L=100cm
e=20V 10W

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the figure shown, the current in the wires which join the points A and X is i1 and the points X and Y
is i2. Then i1 & i2 are respectively ?
i1
Y i2 B
A 6W 6W X 6W
+ –
24V
(A) i1 = 12 A, i2 = 4A (B) i1 = 8 A, i2 = 4A (C) i1 = 4A, i2 = 4A (D) i1 = 3A, i2 = 12A
2. In the given circuit find potential at point ‘O’ :- C
4V 3V C C C
(A) (B) O C
11 11 C
C
9V
(C) (D) None of these V
11
3. A resistance of R W draws current from a potentiometer. The potentiometer has a total resistance R0 W
(Figure). A voltage V is supplied to the potentiometer. An expression for the voltage across R when the
sliding contact is in the middle of the potentiometer is V
2VR 2VR
(A) V1 = R + 2R (B) V1 = R + 4R R0
0 0
A C
VR VR B
(C) V1 = R - 2R (D) V1 = R + R R
0 0
4. In the figure switch S is closed and steady state is reached. Now at t = 0 voltage V2 is increased according
to equation V = t + 10; upto the breakdown stage. The correct plot of charges q1 and q2 with respect to
t will be :-
12µF 6µF
q1 q2
S
v1=10V v2=10V
q1, q2 q1, q2 q1, q2 q2 q1, q2

q2 q1
q2
120 120 q2 q1
q1 q1
(A) 60 (B) 60 (C) 80 (D) 80
60
t t t t

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. Circuit for the measurement of resistance by potentiometer is shown. The galvanometer is first connected
at point A and zero deflection is observed at length P J = 10 cm. In second case it is connect at point C
and zere deflection is observed at a length 30cm from P. Then the unknown resistance X is
P J Q
G
A C
x
R
R R
(A) 2R (B) (C) (D) 3R
2 3
6. A parallel plate capacitor is charged to potential V0. Separation between plates is d0. Now the distance
between plates is changed periodically d = d0 + d1 sinwt. Find value of d1 if voltage of capacitor is given
1
by V = V0 (1 + sinwt).
2
d0
(A) d1 = d0 (B) d1 = (C) d1 = 2d0 (D) d1 = 0
2
7. The figure present an arrangement in horizontal plane. It consists of a parallel plate capacitor with one of
its square plate fixed by means of an insulating support. While the other plate is attached to the free end
of a spring made of insulating material of force constant K. If the capacitor carries charge Q and battery
is disconnected, mass and side length of plate A be M and L respectively, time period of oscillation of
A (assuming that it does not strike B) would be ........................(Ignore any friction)
A B
+ –
K
M k 2Me 0 L3 M
(A) 2p (B) 2p (C) 2p 2
(D) 2p
k M Q æ Q2 ö
k - çç ÷
3÷
2e
è 0 øL

8. Square copper plates of equal thickness and having, area 1 cm and 1 m2, are connected in series as 2
shown in the Figure.
(A) The resistance of the both the plates are equal

(B) The potential drop across both the plates are equal
(C) The current in both the plates are equal
(D) The total heat dissipated in both the plates per unit time are equal.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. We have a parallel plate capacitor made of two conducting, circular sheets of radius 2R each. They are
kept at a small separation d between them. Suppose, we insert a circular shape dielectric of radius R and
thickness d, between the gap with its centre coinciding with the plate centres the dielectric constant is k.
The correct statement is/are :
( k + 3 ) Î0 pR 2
(A) Capacitance of the capacitor is
d
(B) Capacitance of the capacitor is

(
k Î0 p 4R 2 )
d
(C) Ratio of electric field in the region with dielectric & without dielectric is 1
(D) Ratio of electric field in the region with dielectric & without dielectric is 1 : k
10. Consider a circuit as shown in figure. Then choose CORRECT statement(s) :-
2W 4W
5W
3W 6W
10V
(A) If 4W resistance is shorted (resistance less wire connected in parallel to it), the current through
battery will increase.
(B) If 4W resistor is shorted, the current through 5W resistance will increase.
(C) If instead of 4W, 5W, resistor is shorted, current through battery will decrease.
(D) If instead of 4W, 3W resistor is shorted, current through battery will decrease.
11. Two plates of mass m each are connected to mass M by two light inextensible strings. The pulleys are
ideal. To hold system in equilibrium, we need to charge the plates by a battery of at least 8 volts. If
distance between plates is 1µm, capacitance formed is 1µF, (g = 10 m/s2)
m
M d
m
(A) M = 12.8 kg (B) m = 3.2 kg (C) M = 6.4 kg (D) m = 1.6 kg

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

E
When a battery of emf E and internal resistance r is connected to a load resistance R, current I =
r+R
start in the circuit and battery start working. Chemical energy of battery start converting into heat, some
part through load resistance and other part through internal resistance. Power supplied by battery to load
resistance is = I DV; DV is potential difference across the load resistance.
For two different value of resistance R1 and R2, power supplied by battery to the load is same. Internal
resistance of battery is 8 W. We can choose only integer value of load resistance.
12. Maximum value of R1 + R2 is :
(A) 16 W (B) 65 W (C) 8 W (D) 13 W
13. R1 + R2 can’t be equal to :
(A) 34 W (B) 65 W (C) 20 W (D) 32 W
Answer Q.14, Q.15 and Q.16 by appropriately matching the information given the three columns
A parallel plate capacitor has a plate area 'A' and plate separation 'd'. A dielectric slab of thicknss 't' £ d
is placed between the plates having same area of its face. The dielectric constant of the slab is 'k'. The
dimensions of plate are given in column-I. In column-II is the values of k & t and in column-III is the
value of charge Q on the plates.
Column-I Column-II Column-III
(I) A = 10 cm2, d = 1 cm (i) k = 1, t = d (P) Q = 100 mC
d
(II) A = 10 cm2, d = 0.1 cm (ii) k = 2, t = (Q) Q = 10 mC
2
d
(III) A = 20 cm2, d = 0.2 cm (iii) k = 10, t = (R) Q = 1000 mC
2
(IV) A = 100 cm2, d = 1 cm (iv) k = 2, t = d (S) Q = 50 mC
14. In which of the case the electric field within the dielectric slab will be the maximum ?
(A) (IV), (iii), (Q) (B) (II), (ii), (Q) (C) (IV), (iii), (R) (D) (III), (iv), (S)
15. In which of the case the potential drop across the dielectric slab is the minimum
(A) (II), (i), (P) (B) (I), (i), (Q) (C) (III), (iii), (R) (D) (IV), (iv), (S)
16. In which of the case the energy stored in the capacitor is the maximum ?
(A) (I), (iii), (Q) (B) (II), (iv), (S) (C) (III), (ii), (S) (D) (IV), (i), (Q)

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. Circuit shows seven identical bulbs (A to G) connected through a battery of emf 200 V. The bulbs are
rated as 200 V, 100 Watt. The power dissipated in the bulb which glow brightest is given by P watt. Fill
2
the value of P.
3
200V
2. An ideal gas is enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. The piston is connected with a light
rod to one plate of capacitor whose other plate is fixed as shown. Initially the volume of the gas inside
the cylinder is V0, pressure is P0, atmospheric pressure is P0, separation between the plates of capacitor
is L, area of the piston as well as of the capacitor plates is A and emf of battery is e. A heater supplies
necessary heat to the gas such that equilibrium is achieved when pressure of the gas is given as
ne 0 e 2 L
P = P0 – and piston is displaced towards right by a distance . Find the value on n.
L 2
2
v0 P0
L
e
3. In the circuit shown, initially switch is closed and energy stored in the system (consisting of both capacitors)
U1
is U1. After opening the switch, energy stored in the system is U2. Then U ?
2
C C
4. In the circuit shown in figure the switch S is initially open and both the capacitors are initially uncharged.
Find the ratio of current through 2W resistor, just after the switch S is closed and a long time after the
switch S is closed.
2W 4µF
S
6V 2µF 8W
4W

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. An isolated parallel-plates capacitor has circular plates of radius 4.0 cm. Its gap is filled with a partially
conducting material of dielectric constant K and conductivity 5.0 × 10–4 W –1 m–1. When the capacitor is
charged to a surface charge density of 15 µC/m2, the initial current between the plates is 1.0 A. Determine
the value of dielectric constant K (approximately).
(A) K = 1.32 (B) K = 4.26 (C) K = 8.74 (D) K = 2.1
2. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitance C0 and 2C0 are connected in parallel and charged to a
potential difference V0. The battery is disconnected and the region between the capacitor plates of
capacitance C0 is completely filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant K. The potential difference
across the capacitors, now becomes :
V0 3V0 2V0 V0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(3K + 1) (K + 2) K (2K + 1)
3. In the figure, capacitor is completely charged and switch is closed at t = 0. The time after which the
current from the capacitor becomes 1/4th of its maximum value will be :-
C
R s
3R
7RC 7RC
(A) 2 RC ln2 (B)
ln2 (C) RC ln2 (D) ln2
4 2
4. In the circuit shown, if R1 : R2 : R3 : R4 = 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 then
(A) Ratio of current in R2 and R3 is 3 : 1 (B) Ratio of current in R1 and R3 is 1 : 2

(C) Ratio of current in R1 and R2 is 4 : 5 (D) current in R1 is more than one in R2
5. The two ends of a uniform conductor are joined to a cell of emf e and some internal resistance. Starting
from the midpoint P of the conductor, we move in the direction of the current and return to P. The
potential V at every point on the path is plotted against the distance covered (x). Which of the following
best represents the resulting curve?
<e
e <e e
(A) V (B) V (C) V (D) V
x x x x

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. In the adjacent circuit, AB is a potentiometer wire of length 40 cm and resistance 10W 10W
per unit length 50 W/m. As shown in the figure, the free end of an ideal voltmeter
is touching the potentiometer wire. What should be the velocity of the jockey as a V
A B
function of time so that reading in the voltmeter varies with time as (2 sin pt)?
4V
(A) (10 p sin pt) cm/s (B) (10 p cos pt) cm/s
(C) (20p sin pt) cm/s (D) (20 p cos pt) cm/s
7. In the given figure, two identical capacitors are shown, with one of them + –
+ –
having charge Q and the other being uncharged. + –
+ –
Process (A) : A dielectric of dielectric constant k is introduced between the
plates of the charged capacitor and then the switch S is closed. S
Process (B) : Switch S is closed without inserting the dielectric.
Find the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) Energy lost during process (A) is less as compared to process (B)
(B) Charge transferred to the uncharged capacitor in process (A) is more as compared to process (B)
(C) Common potential difference after redistribution of charge is more in process (B) as compared to
process (A)
(D) In process (B), electric field between the plates, in both the capacitors, becomes same, after
redistribution of charge.
8. A meter bridge is used to predict the value of unknown resistance X, it is observed that current is
flowing from A to B initially (when jockey is fixed at a point B). If the temperature of X is increased,
then select possible option/s :
X R
A
B
l
(A) Current reduces in magnitude

(B) Current remain constant (for any raise in temperature)
(C) Current become zero
(D) Current flows in opposite direction.
9. A spherical capacitor is half filled with an oil of dielectric constant k = 7 and
the rest is in vacuum. The inner and outer radii of the surfaces are R1 = 5 cm
R2 R1
and R2 = 6 cm respectively. The inner and outer surface of capacitor is
connected to a battery of emf x.
(A) The potential difference across the dielectric side is same as that across
vacuum side.
(B) The potential difference across the dielectric side is less than that across
vacuum side.
(C) The electric field in the dielectric is same as that in the vacuum.
(D) The electric field in the dielectric is less than that in the vacuum.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. A parallel plate capacitor is dipped in a dielectric liquid vertically, so that half of capacitor is in liquid.
Plates of capacitor are joined to an ideal battery of emf e. A, B, A' and B' are four points on plate at
facing surface as shown. Which of the following is/are correct?
e
A A'
B'
B
(A) VA–VB' = VA–VA'

(B) VA–VB' = VB–VA'
(C) Electric field around A in air = Electric field around B' in liquid.
(D) Electric field around B in liquid = Electric field around B' in liquid.
Paragraph for Questions No. 11 to 15
Van de Graaff generators like the one shown in figure are used to produce very high voltages. In the
figure, the + signs represent positive charge and the – signs represent negative charge. In this common
Van de Graaff generator, charge is separated by the frictional contact of the belt and the lower pulley
shown. Positive charge collects on the lower pulley and an equal amount of negative charge spreads out
along the inside of the belt. Electrons from the ground are attracted to the outside of the belt by the net
positive charge on the lower portion of the belt pulley system. These electrons travel up the belt and are
transferred to the dome, which is a hollow metal sphere. A high negative charge density can be built up
on the dome, because the electrons from the outside of the belt experience no net force from the charge
built up on the outside of the sphere.
The electric potential of the dome is V = Er where E is electric field just outside the dome and r is the
radius. The charges on the surface of the dome do not affect the electric field inside the cavity. The
potential that can build up on the dome is limited by the dielectric strength of the air, which is about
30,000 V/cm for dry air at room temperature. When the electric field around the dome reaches the
dielectric strength of the air, air molecules are ionized. This enables the air to conduct electricity.
Van de Graaff generators are routinely used in college physics laboratories. When a student gets within
a few inches of a Van de Graaff generator, she may draw a spark with an instantaneous current of
10 amps and remain uninjured. An instantaneous current is the transfer of charge within 1 ms

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. The 660 V rails on a subway can kill a person upon contact. A 10,000V Van de Graaff generator,
however, will only give a mild shock. Which of the following best explains this seeming paradox?
(A) The generator provides more energy per charge , but since it has few charges it transfers a lesser
amount of energy.
(B) The generator provides more energy, but since there is little energy per charge the current is small.
(C) Most of the energy provided by the generator is dissipated in the air because air presents a smaller
resistance than the human body
(D) Most of the energy flows directly to the ground without going through the human body since the
generator is grounded.
12. What is the maximum potential the dome, with a radius of 10 cm, can sustain in dry air?
(A) 3 kV (B) 5 kV (C) 300 kV (D) 500 kV
13. Why is the potential of the dome limited by the dielectric strength of the air?
(A) Once the potential of the dome reaches the dielectric strength of the air, charge from the belt is
repelled by the charge on the dome.
(B) Once the potential of the dome reaches the dielectric strength of the air, the air heats the metal of the
dome, and it is no longer a good conductor.
(C) Once the air molecules become ionized, charge on the dome can leak into the air.
(D) Once the air molecules become ionized, they no longer conduct electricity.
14. Why does negative charge from the outside of the belt continue to build up on the outside of the dome
instead of being repelled by the charge that is already there?
(A) The potential is zero inside the dome.
(B) The conducting dome shields the effects of the charges on the surface.
(C) There is only positive charge on the outside of the dome.
(D) Charge does not build up on the outside of the dome.
15. What is the work required to move a charge q from the top of the belt to the surface of the dome, if the
amount of charge on the dome is Q and q was the only charge on the belt?
(A) 0 (B) kQq/2r (C) kQq/r (D) kq/r
SECTION-III
1. If C is equal to 2000 mF then find the summation of charges on all capacitors after steady state.
2. A cell of emf e and internal resistance r is connected to an external resistance R. Efficiency of the power
supplied by cell increases to double when R resistance changes from 1W to 3W, find r (in W)

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Some events related to a capacitor are listed in column–I. Match these events with their effect (s) is
column–II.
d
Column–I (Events) Column–II (Effects)

(A) Insertion of dielectric while battery remain attached. (P) Electric field between plates changes
(B) Removal of dielectric while battery is not present (Q) Charge present on plates changes
(C) Slow decrease in separation between plates while (R) Energy stored in capacitor increases
battery is attached.
(D) Slow increase of separation between plates while (S) Work done by external agent
battery is not present. is positive
(T) None of these
2. Column I has four circuits each having an ammeter. Column II has four values of current in the ammeter.
The ammeter has zero resistance. The voltmeter, in (B) has infinite resistance and a reading 8V. The
resistance R has not been specified. Match the circuit with its correct ammeter reading.
Column I Column II
(A) (P) 0
(B) (Q) 2 Ampere
(C) (R) 4 Ampere
(D) (S) 5 Ampere

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A network is arranged as in Mance's experiment. This is used to find the internal resistance of the battery
R. The resistance of galvanometer, and of each of the other three arms, is 4 ohms. The current in the
galvanometer with the key open, as well as when it is closed is 0.2A. The internal resistance of battery
is :-
C
Q G P
D
S R
B K A
(A) 4W (B) 2W (C) 8W (D) 1W

2. A galvanometer of ig = 1mA & resistance = 10W is connected in a circuit as shown. This combination
(circuit) can be used as an ammeter or a voltmeter also. The range of ammeter (RA) and voltmeter (Rv)
are :-
5W
G
6W
40W 80W
9 8 4
(A) mA , 15 mV (B) 1 mA, 12 mV (C) mA , 20 mV (D) mA , 10 mV
8 3 3
3. A problem of practical interest is to make a beam of electrons turn at 90º corner. This can be done
with the parallel plates shown in figure. An electron with kinetic energy 8.0 × 10 –17 J enters through
a small hole in the bottom plate. The strength of electric field that is needed if the electron is to emerge
from an exit hole 1.0cm away from the entrance hole, traveling at right angles to its original direction
is........... × 105 N/C.
(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 6 (D) 2.5

4. A random shaped charged conducting body is placed in poor conducting dielectric medium of resistivity
r and dielectric constant k. Discharging of body through medium is best explained by equation
- rt
t t
- Kt - Î k
-
Î r kÎ0 r k 2Î0 r
(A) q = Q0 e 0 (B) q = Q0 e (C) q = Q0 e 0 (D) q = Q0 e

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

5. The circuit shown in the figure contains an ideal battery and two resistors, R1 and R2. A voltmeter is
used to measure the voltage across R1 then across R2, then across the battery. It's reading are, respectively
2.0V, 3.0V and 6.0V. The actual voltage (before connecting voltmeter) across R1 and R2, are V1 and
V2, respectively. Choose the CORRECT option(s)
(A) V1 = 2.4 V (B) V1 = 3.6 V (C) V2 = 2.4 V (D) V2 = 3.6 V

6. In the given circuit, when key K is open, reading of ammeter is I. Now key K is closed then the
INCORRECT statement(s) is/are:
(A) If e1 > IR, reading of the ammeter is less than I

(B) If IR < e1, reading of the ammeter is greater than I
(C) If e1 < 2IR, reading of the ammeter will be zero
(D) Reading of ammeter will not change
7. 3 dielectric slabs (each of area A) are filled between capacitor of plate area 2A. Capacitor is connected
with battery of emf V. Electric field and electric field energy stored in dielectric K, 6K, 3K are E1, E2, E3
and U1, U2, U3 respectively :
5AK Î0 V 2 A A
(A) Total energy stored in capacitors is V 6K d/2
2d d K
(B) E1 : E2 : E3 : : 3 : 2 : 4 3K d/2
(C) U1 : U2 : U3 : : 3 : 4 : 8
5AK Î0
(D) Capacitance of capacitor is .
d
8. Two large conducting plates having surface charge densities 4s and –s respectively, are fixed 'd' distance
apart. A small test charge q of mass m is attached to two identical non conducting springs as shown in
figure with spring in natural length. Then q will [neglect gravity] :-
2k
(A) Perform S.H.M. with angular frequency
m 4s s
+ –
+ –
5sq + q –
(B) Perform S.H.M. with amplitude
2ke0 + k m k –
+ –
(C) Not perform S.H.M., but will have a periodic motion + d –
A B
5sq
(D) Perform S.H.M. with amplitude 4ke
0

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. Figure shows the circuit diagram of a potentiometer apparatus. P is the point, where jockey would touch
potentiometer. (L ength of potentiometer wire = 10 m, resistance of potentiometer wire = 450 W and 10V
battery is ideal.)
50W
10V
P
A B
J
20V 1W
2 1
G
10V 1W
(A) Potential gradient of potentiometer wire at null deflection would be 0.9 V/m.
(B) For any location of P, we can not have null deflection point.
(C) For a particular point P, current at point 1 can be made zero, but never at point 2.
(D) For P coinciding with B current at point 1 would be in upwards direction.
10. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 'C' has charges on its plates initially as shown in the figure.
Now at t = 0, the switch 'S' is closed. Select the CORRECT alternative(s) for this circuit diagram.
S A B
t=0
–2eC eC
(A) In steady state the charges on the outer surfaces of plates 'A' and 'B' will be same in magnitude and
sign.
(B) In steady state the charges on the outer surfaces of plates 'A' and 'B' will be same in magnitude and
opposite in sign.
(C) In steady state the charges on the inner surfaces of plates 'A' and 'B' will be same in magnitude and
opposite in sign.
5e2 C
(D) The work done by the battery by the time steady state is reached is
2
11. In the figure shown, C1 = 11mF and C2 = 5 mF, then at steady state:
C1 a
7V,2W C2
.
b
3W
15V, 2W
(A) the potential difference across C1 is 5V

(B) the potential difference across C2 is 2V
(C) the potential difference between points a and b is –4V
(D) the potential difference between the terminals of 15 V battery is 9V

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

In the circuit shown in figure, the battery is an ideal one with emf V. The capacitor is initially uncharged.
The switch S is closed at time t = 0.
R/2 A 5R/2
S
V R C
R/2
B
12. The charge Q on the capacitor at time t is–
CV æ ö CV æ ö CV æ ö CV æ ö
t t 2t 2t
- - - -
(A) 2 çè 1 - e ÷ø (B) 2 çè 1 - e (C) 2 çè 1 - e (D) 2 çè 1 - e
RC 3RC 5RC 9RC
÷ ÷ ÷
ø ø ø
13. The current in AB at time t is–
æ -
t
ö æ -
t
ö
V æ -
t
ö 2V æ -
t
ö 2V ç e 3RC ÷ V ç e 3RC ÷
1- 1-
(A) 2R çè 1 - e ÷ø (B) R çè 1 - e ÷ø
3RC 3RC
(C) R ç 6 ÷ (D) 2R ç 6 ÷
è ø è ø
14. What is its limiting value iAB at t ® ¥ ?
V V 2V V
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2R R R 3R
15. All ammeters and voltmeters are ideal. The Rheostat can have maximum resistance R. The switch
mentioned in list-I is kept closed and the reading of voltmeter/ammeter is observed while changing the
Rheostat.
2R
V1
A2
R S1
R
A1
R S2 R V2
S3 R
V R
List-I List-II
(P) When only S1 is closed and (1) Reading of voltmeter V2 will decrease.
Rheostat is decreased
(Q) When S1 and S2 are closed and (2) Reading of ammeter A2 will remain
Rheostat is increased. unchanged.
(R) When only S3 is closed and (3) Reading of voltmeter V1 lies between
V V
Rheostat is decreased £ V1 £ .
5 3
(S) When all switches are closed (4) Reading of A1 and A2 are same.
and Rheostat is increased
(5) Reading of V1 and V2 are same.
(A) P ® 2,4; Q ® 1,2,3,5; R ® 1,2,3; S ® 2,4
(B) P ® 1,5; Q ® 1,3,5; R ® 3,4,5; S ® 1,4,5
(C) P ® 3,5; Q ® 1,3,4,5; R ® 2,3,4,5; S ® 1,4,5
(D) P ® 1,3; Q ® 1,2,5; R ® 1,2,3; S ® 1,3,4,5
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-II
1. A cell of emf 3V and internal resistance 0·75W is connected to a non–linear conductor whose V–I graph
is shown in figure. Obtain graphically the terminal voltage of the cell (in V).
SECTION-III
1. In the circuit shown in figure E is a battery of emf 100 V. Resistance R1 = 100W, R2 = 200W and
R3 = 200W. The voltmeter resistance is 200W. The voltmeter shows 400/x volt in steady state. Find the
value of x.
C = 100 mF
100 V
B
E R2
R1 V R2
A R3
2. At t = 0 switch is closed. The time at which charge on capacitor will become half of its initial value is t,
find t (RCln2 = 3.4 sec).
R R
R R
S
R R R
R
C
q0
3. The circuit is closed for long time so that the capacitors are fully charged. Switch is opened at a certain
instant. The heat developed in resistor R2 after that instant is K × 10–4 J. Then find the value of K.
C1=1mF
C2=2mF
R2=200W
R1=100W
R3=50W
sw
E=30v

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Consider the situation shown in diagram. Both capacitors are having same capacitance C. Capacitors
are initially uncharged. Switch K is closed at time = 0 & after a long time capacitors are fully charged.
Column-I represents value of r and Column-II represents charge passing through r during complete
charging process. Now match the followings :
C C
V r
K
R 2R
Column-I Column-II
CV
(A) r = 0 (P)
6
CV
(B) r=R (Q)
5
CV
(C) r = 2R (R)
4
CV
(D) r = 3R (S)
3
CV
(T)
2

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A thin metallic partition of negligible thickness is inserted between two shaded metallic plates as shown.
The remaining ends are then packed with insulating plates to form a container like structure. 2 taps
shown are opened at t = 0 and finally closed at t = 5s. Find capacitance of system between A and B after
closing taps. (Assume liquid to be non conducting) Volumetric flow rates and dieletric constants of
liquid are given.
k=3 3 3 k=2
2m /s 1m /s
A B
10 m
1m
1m
2m
(A) 8.62 × 10–11F (B) 8.85 × 10–10F (C) 4.42 × 10–10F (D) 4.42 × 10–11F
2. Consider the figure below, initially distance between plates is ‘d’ and ‘A’ is area
of plates. In this state spring is at its natural length. Now, charges +Q & –Q are
given to plates and system is allowed to reach mechanical equillibrium. Find
K,d
potential difference between plates in this state of equillibrium.
Qd æ Q2 ö Qd æ Q2 ö
(A) V = Ae0
ç 1 - ÷
2e0 AKd ø
(B) V = 2Ae0
ç 1 - ÷
2e0 AKd ø A
A
è è
Qd æ Q2 ö Qd æ Q2 ö d
(C) V = Ae0
ç 1 - ÷
4 e0 AKd ø
(D) V = Ae0
ç 1 - ÷
e0 AKd ø
è è
3. In an RC circuit, the time required for the charge on a capacitor to build up to a given fraction of its
equilibrium value, is independent of :
(A) the value of the applied emf to the circuit
(B) the value of C
(C) the value of R
(D) none of the above
4. In the circuit shown capacitor is initially uncharged and switch is closed at t = 0. Find the time at which
power dissipated in resistor is equal to rate of energy change in capacitor :-
C
R V
(A) RC (B) RC ln 2 (C) RC ln 3 (D) 2RC ln2
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A parallel-plate capacitor consists of a fixed plate and a movable plate that is allowed to slide in the
direction parallel to the plates. Let x be the distance of overlap, as shown in the figure. The separation
between the plates is fixed. Assume that the plates are electrically isolated, so that their charges ±Q are
constant. Force on the movable plate is proportional to :-
(Movable)
(Fixed)
x
(A) x–2 (B) x–1 (C) x0 (D) x
6. The given circuit is in steady state with the switch closed. At t = 0 switch is opened, which of the
following is/are correct ?
3W
6W 3µF
S
18V
2µF 3W
(A) Charge on 2µF before the switch is open is 9µC

(B) Charge on 3µF before the switch is open is 27µC
(C) voltage across 3µF, a long time after the switch is opened is 18V.
(D) voltage across 2µF, a long time after the switch is opened is 18V
7. The figure, a graph of the current in a discharging circuit of a capacitor through a resistor of resistance of
reistance 10W.
(A) The initial potential difference across the capactitor is 100 volt. i
1 10 A
(B) The capacitance of the capacitor is F.
10l n 2 2.5 A
500
(C) The total heat produced in the circuit will be joules. 2s t
10l n 2
1
(D) The thermal power in the resistor will decrease with a time constant second.
2l n 2
8. An uncharged capacitor is connected in circuit as shown in figure. Power ratings
V0
of bulbs are given. At t = 0 switch is closed :-
3P0 B1
(A) At t = 0, power consumption in circuit is C
2
P0,V0
P0 B2 B3
(B) After a long time power consumption in circuit is
2
P0,V0 P0,V0
(C) Brightness of B1 decreases with time
(D) Initially brightness of B2 is less than B1 but later B2 will be brighter

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. Figure shows the polarity and charge on capacitor with K open. C1

(Given : C1 = 2F, Q1 = 4C, C2 = 4F, Q2 = 16C and R = 10W) + –
(A) After closing the key, electrostatic electric field between plates of R K
one of capacitor momentarily becomes zero at some instant.
(B) Overall, the circuit would suffer heat loss. – +
C2
(C) Final charge on 2F capacitor would be 4C (one of the plates) with
polarity reversed with respect to initial condition.
(D) Final charge on 4F capacitor would be 8C with polarity reversed with respect to initial condition.
10. The space between two concentric conducting spherical shells of radius a and 2a is filled with a dielectric
medium having dielectric constant K and resistivity r. The inner sphere is given a charge +Q at t = 0 and
outer is earthed then
t
-
e0 K r
(A) charge on inner sphere as a function of time is Qe
2a
2t
-
e 0 Kr
(B) charge on inner sphere as a function of time is Qe a
r
(C) resistance is 8 pa
r
(D) resistance is
4a
It is possible to take a high quality photograph of a very fast moving object by illuminating the object for
quite a small fraction of a second. You may have come across photographs of a bullet penetrating a
banana or an apple in many text books or magazines. This is called 'Stop action' photography because
the fast moving object travels a very short distance during the time of illumination. Harold Edgerton, the
inventor of stroboscope, was a pioneer of this kind of photography.
A normal photographic plate works properly if it receives an energy of 4J during the exposure. To
release this energy in a very small fraction of time, huge amount of power is required. Such huge power
can not be generated directly from a battery because of its high internal resistance. To produce such
power a capacitor is used. The time in which a capacitor discharges can be very short. Although,
theoretically it would take a long time for a capacitor to discharge completely, it discharges almost
completely in about 10 time constants. Consider the following situation. A capacitor of 200µF, storing
4J energy is made to discharge through a flash light in 2ms. This setup is used to take the picture of a
bullet moving at a speed of 100 m/s. Assume that the flash light acts as a resistor and there is no other
resistance in the circuit.
11. If we use a lens of power 10 diopters, the lens to photographic plate distance is 15 cm and the bullet
moves perpendicular to the principal axis, what is the distance covered by bullet as seen on photographic
plate in 2ms ?
(A) 1 cm (B) 5 cm (C) 10 cm (D) 20 cm
12. What is the order of energy delivered to the flash light in 2 ms (approx.) ?
(A) 0.4 J (B) 1.83 J (C) 2.74 J (D) 3.45 J
13. What is the initial current in the circuit ?
(A) 200 A (B) 120 A (C) 700 A (D) 3700 A

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

14. Three capacitor A, B and C are connected with battery of emf e. All capacitors are identical initially.
A B
List-I List-II
(P) If dielectric slab is inserted between plates (1) Chemical energy of battery remains
of capacitor B slowly with the help of unchanged
external force, then
(Q) If dielectric slab is inserted between plates (2) Positive work is done on the given
of capacitor A slowly with help of external system by external force.
force.
(R) If capacitor C is removed from the circuit, (3) Force between plates of capacitor C
(assuming without any work) decreases.
(S) If separation between plates of capacitor (4) Magnitude of change of charge on B
A is slowly increased by external force, and C is same.
then
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 3 3 1,3 3,4
(B) 3,4 4 1,3 2,3,4
(C) 3 4 1,4 2,3,4
(D) 3,4 3 1,4 3,4
15. Match the condition given in list-I to the corresponding changes in list-II.
List-I List-II
(P) A capacitor C is connected to a battery (1) Electric field between the plates
of potential difference V. Now a dielectric of capacitor in which dielectric
of dielectric constant K is placed keeping is placed decreases.
the battery connected
V
(Q) A capacitor C is charged to a potential (2) Potential difference between the
difference V and isolated from the battery. plates of capacitor in which dielectric
Now a dielectric of dielectric constant K is is placed remains unchanged.
placed between the plates of the capacitor.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
(R) Two identical capacitors each of (3) Capacitance of the capacitor in

capacitance C are connected in parallel which dielectric is placed increases.
to a battery of potential difference V and
isolated from the battery. Now a dielectric
of dielectric constant K is placed between
one of the capacitors keeping the system
isolated.
C2
C1
(S) Two identical capacitors are connected (4) Energy of capacitor in which dielectric
in series with a battery of potential is placed increases.
difference V. Now a dielectric constant
K is placed between the plates of one
of the capacitors
C C
V
(5) Energy stored in the capacitor in
which dielectric is placed decreases.
(A) P ® 2,3,4; Q ® 1,3,4; R ® 1,3,5; S ® 1,3,4
(B) P ® 2,3,4; Q ® 1,3,5; R ® 1,3,5; S ® 1,3,5
(C) P ® 2,3; Q ® 1,5; R ® 3,5; S ® 1,2,5
(D) P ® 1,2,3,4; Q ® 1,2,3,5; R ® 2,3,5; S ® 1,3,4
SECTION-II
1. An uncharged capacitor and a resistor of big resistance are connected in series to a battery of electromotive
force 4.5 V. The voltage across the capacitor is 3 V one minute after the closing the circuit. What will
the voltage across the capacitor be 2 min. after closing circuit (in V) ?
30 e
2. Consider the shown network, the capacitor C1 (= 6mF) has an initial charge q0 = mC, C2 = 4 mF and
e -1
R = 80W. Initially C2 is uncharged. At t = 0, the switch S is closed. Obtain the charge on C2 (in µC) at
t = 192 µs.
S R
C1
C2

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
3. A dielectric slab of dielectric constant k, mass m, thickness d and area L × L is hanging vertically in
equilibrium under the influence of gravity and electrostatic pull of a capacitor connected to a battery of
voltage V. The capacitor has plates of area L × L and distance between plates is d. The capacitor is half
filled by the dielectric. Suddenly a mass of m is attached to dielectric without any impulse on the system.
The slab falls off in time t. Evaluate t (in sec). Take k = 2, V = 4 volts, L = 80 cm, d = 0.1 mm.
SECTION-IV
1. Column-I gives some electrical circuits in steady state, column-II gives some statements regrading the
circuits match appropriately.
Column-I Column-II
V R¢
5W 2.5V
(A) (P) Reading of voltmeter is 2 V
A 20W
2m F
C = 2mF
A
R¢
(B) V (Q) Reading of ammeter is 0.1 A
2V
C = 2mF
V
R¢
10W
3V 1V
(C) A
(R) Current through R¢ is zero
2V 0V 0V 2V
20W 2V
20W
20W 2V
2V 20W
(D) V 2mF
2V (S) Charge on capacitor is 2mC
20W
2V 2V
20W A
20W 2V
(T) Current through R' is non-zero

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Two conducting spheres of radius r and 2r at very large separation. Each sphere is having charge Q.
These sphere are connected with a conducting wire of resistance R. Then, the current flowing in the
wire at t = 2 ms. (where r = 30 cm, R = 90 MW and Q =10 mC)
100 5
(A) amp (B) amp
3e 3e 2r
r
50 25 R
(C) amp (D) amp
3e 3e
2. In the circuit shown, the switch is shifted from position 1 ® 2 at t = 0. The switch was initially in position
1 since a long time. The graph between charge on capacitor C and time 't' is :
1 2
R 2R
C
e 2e
q q q q
Ce 2Ce 3Ce Ce
(A) Ce/2 (B) Ce (C) Ce (D)

t t t O t
3. For given circuit charge on capacitor C1 and C2 in steady state will be equal to :-
(A) C1(VA – VC), C2(VC – VB) respectively VA C1 C2 VB
(B) C1(VA – VB), C2(VA – VB) respectively
(C) (C1 + C2) (VA – VB) on each capacitor R
æ C1C2 ö
(D) ç C + C ÷ (VA – VB) on each capacitor VC
è 1 2 ø
4. In the following RC circuit, the capacitor was charged in two different ways.
(i) The capacitor was first charged to 5V by moving the toggle switch to position P and then it was
charged to 10V by moving the toggle switch to position Q.
(ii) The capacitor was directly charged to 10V, by keeping the toggle switch at position Q.
Assuming the capacitor to be ideal, which one of the following statement is correct?
R
(A) The energy dissipation in cases (i) and (ii) will be equal and non-zero. C
(B) The energy dissipation for case (i) will be more than that for case (ii). P 5V
(C) The energy dissipation for case (i) will be less than that for case (ii).
10V
(D) The energy will not be dissipated in either case. Q

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

5. If ring of radius 'R' is placed on smooth floor connected Ring
by a string at the top. Other end of string is connected to Mass = M
upper plate of capacitor of same mass "M" and charge
density s and area A. Lower plate of capacitor is rigidly fixed. Mass = M
Then which of the following statements are correct if upper
plate of capacitor is falling freely with acceleration 'g'.
Rigidly
(A) Charge density of plates of capacitor must be s = 2Mg Î0 fixed plates
(B) The gain in kinetic energy of the ring and the plate of capacitor is equal to the loss in gravitational
potential energy
(C) Charge of plates of capacitor must be q = Mg Î0 A
(D) The gain in kinetic energy of the ring and the plate of capacitor is 1.5 times the loss in gravitational
potential energy
6. If the battery of voltage V is connected across terminals 1, the voltmeter
across terminal 2 reads V/2. If same battery is connected across terminal
2, the voltmeter connected across terminal 1 gives reading V. Which
of the following black box is correct
(A) (B)
(C) (D)
7. For the arrangement shown in figure, the switch is closed at t = 0. C2 is initially uncharged while C1 has
charge of 2mC. Then the current coming out of the battery just after switch is closed, will be
(A) 1 (B) 0 (C) 1.8 (D) 1.4

8. Circuit shown in the figure is in steady state. Now the capacitor is suddenly filled with medium of
dielectric constant K = 2.
11e
(A) Current through battery just after this moment is . R 2R
20R
e
(B) Current through '2R' just after this moment is R C
10R e
e
(C) Current through '2R' just after this moment is
15R
e
(D) Potential difference across capacitor just after this moment is
4

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. A dielectric slab of relative permittivity er and thickness t is inserted into the capacitor. Then
e0 A t
(A) the capacitance of the system increases by
æ 1ö
t ç1 - ÷
è er ø
+ er –
q e
(B) free = r
q bound e r - 1
d
(C) the fraction change in the energy stored is er – 1
æ 1ö
(D) the plates are moved apart by a relative distance t ç 1 - ÷ to recover the original energy stored
è er ø
(or original capacitance)
10. Two capacitors are connected to a resistance and battery as given. Capacitor with capacitance C is
charge upto 2V0, where V0 is potential of battery and capacitor of 2C capacitance is initially uncharged.
If switch is closed at t = 0 then choose CORRECT statement(s)
(A) Ratio of final charge on C to 2C is 2 C, 2V0
-2CV02 R +
(B) total work done by battery after switch is closed is
3
V0
+2CV02
(C) total work done by battery after switch is closed is
3
2C
1 2
(D) total heat loss across resistance after closing switch is CV0
3
In the given figure switch 'S' is closed at t = 0
Q
+ –C
6R 2R
S
R
2C
11. Mark the CORRECT option(s) :

3t
2Q æ - ö
(A) Charge on capacitor 2C as function of time is 3 çç1 - e
4RC
÷÷ .
è ø
3t
Qæ - ö
(B) Charge on capacitor C as function of time is 3 çç 1 - e
4RC
÷÷ .
è ø
3t
Q – 4RC
(C) Current through the resistance 6R as a function of time is 2RC e
3t
Q – 4RC
(D) Current through the resistance 6R as a function of time is e
6RC

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Mark the CORRECT option(s) :

2
2Q
(A) Amount of heat produced in resistance 'R' in long time is .
27C
2
4Q
(B) Amount of heat produced in resistance '2R' in long time is .
27C
2
Q
(C) Amount of heat produced in resistance '6R' in long time is .
9C
2
Q
(D) Amount of heat produced in resistance '6R' in long time is .
18C
Matching list based comprehension Type (4 × 4 × 4) 1 Table × 3 Q.[3M(–1)]
In the shown DC–RC circuit galvanometer of resistance ‘R’ is connected as shown. (Initially at t = 0 all
switchs are open & capacitors are uncharged)
S3
R
R3
E
C2
R2
G C1
S2
R4 R1
E
S1
E
Condition of switch, resistance & capacitance is given in column (I), (II), (III) respectively.
(I) S1 closed, S2 & S3 open (i) R1 = 2R, R2 = 2R (P) C1 = C2 = C
R3 = R, R4 = R
(II) S1 open, S2 & S3 closed (ii) R2 = R, R4 = 3R (Q) C1 = C2 = 2C
R3 = 2R, R1 = 6R
(III) S1, S2 closed S3 open (iii) R1 = R2 = R3 = R4 = R (R) C1 = C, C2 = 2C
(IV) S1, S3 open, S2 closed (iv) R1 = R2=2R, R4=R3=R (S) C1 = 2C, C2 = C

13. Initially both capacitors are uncharged. In which of the following case galvanometer shown no deflection
at t = 0 (just after switches is closed) ?
(A) (IV) (ii) (S) (B) (I) (i) (R) (C) (I) (ii) (S) (D) (IV) (iii) (R)
14. In which of the following case galvanometer shown no deflection at (t = ¥) (steady state)
(A) (II) (iv) (P) (B) (IV) (i) (S) (C) (II) (ii) (S) (D) (IV) (ii) (P)
15. In which of the following case final charge on capacitor C2 is zero :-
(A) (III) (iv) (R) (B) (III) (iii) (Q) (C) (II) (ii) (Q) (D) (IV) (ii) (R)

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-II
1. An uncharged capacitor of capacitance C is connected in given circuit diagram, switch S is closed at t =
t
-
0. If current in branch BC as function of time is given by I = I0 (amp) e t (in mS)
then find the numerical value of I0t.

B
1W 2W
A D
C=4m F
2W 1W
S
12V
2. Initially the plates of the parallel plate capacitor shown in the figure are A and B containing charge
+2µC and –2µC respectively. Negatively charged plate B is connected to a spring of spring constant
5000N/m at one end and the other end of the spring is connected to a rigid support. Now the plate A is
a ´ 10 -12
fixed and the system is released from rest. The maximum elongation produced in the spring is
Î0
m. The area of the plates is 2 cm2 , the medium between the plates is air and Electric permittivity of air
is Î0 (in SI). Then the value of a.
A B
3. Between the plates of a parallel-plate capacitor there is a metallic plate whose thickness takes up h =
0.60 of the capacitor gap. When that plate is absent the capacitor has a capacity C = 20 nF. The capacitor
is connected to a dc voltage source V = 100 V. The metallic plate is slowly extracted from the gap. Find
the mechanical work performed in the process of plate extraction (in µJ). If your answer is N fill value
N/30.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A plate A of a parallel plate capacitor is fixed, while the plate B is attached to the
wall by a spring and can move, remaining parallel to the plate A (see figure). The
capacitor is charged, plate B starts moving & comes to rest in an equilibrium
position. The separation between the plates d, decreases by 10%. What will be the k
decrease in the plate separation if the charging is done in a very short time that the E
plate B couldn't shift noticeably.

(A) 10 % (B) 8.1 % (C) 9 % (D) 6.3 %
2. A charged capacitor C1 is discharged through a resistor R. When the discharge
current attains the value I0, the key is shifted from 1 to 2. Then the amount of
heat Q liberated in the resistor starting from this moment, is
I02 R 2 C1C 2 I02 R 2 C1C 2 I02 R 2 æ (C1 + C 2 ) ö

(A) (B) (C) 2 çç C C ÷÷ (D) None
2(c1 + c 2 ) 4(c1 + c 2 ) è 1 2 ø
3. The figure shows a capacitor having three layers of equal thickness and same area as that of plate. Layer
I is vaccum, layer II is conductor and layer III is dielectric of dielectric constant K. The ratio of energy
stored in region III to total energy stored in capacitor is :-
I II III
1 3 4 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
K +1 K +1 K +3 3K + 1
4. The charge flown through the cell on closing the key k is equal to
k
c
c c
c
v
CV 4 3
(A) (B) CV (C) CV (D) CV
4 3 4

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A,B,C,D are large conducting plates kept parallel to each other. A and D are fixed. Plates B and C,
connected to each other by a rigid conducting rod can slide over frictionless rails as shown. Initially the
distance between plates A and B is same as that between plates C and D. If now the rod (alongwith
plates B and C) is slightly moved towards right, the capacitance between the terminals 1 and 2.
(A) remains unchanged
(B) increases
(C) decreases
(D) nothing can be said
6. Three identical large metal plates of area A are at distances d and 2d from each
other as shown. Metal plate A is uncharged, while metal plates B and C have
respective charges +q and –q. Metal plates A and C are connected by switch K
through a wire. How much energy is lost when switch is closed?
2q 2 d q 2d q2d
(A) (B) (C) (D) none of these
3e 0 A 6e 0 A 3e 0 A

7. Three identical charge-less capacitors of capacitance C each are connected in series. The capacitors are
charged by connecting a battery of electromotive force e to the terminal as shown in figure. Next, the
battery is disconnected, and two resistors of resistance R are connected simultaneously as shown in figure
below. If switches S1 & S2 are closed simultaneously at time t = 0, then choose the CORRECT option(s):
R
S2
C C C C C C
then
S1
e
R
2e
(A) Current in any resistor R just after t = 0 is .
3R
(B) Final magnitude of charge on all the capacitors will be same.
4
(C) Total heat loss through any one resistor is Ce2 .
54
3 2
(D) Initial total energy stored in the system is Ce .
2
8. The resistance each of 16 W and capacitance of each 100 mF D
16 W
are arranged as shown in the figure. A battery of emf 12V is C1 C2 16 W
16 W
joined across A and B. Then 16 W 16 W
16 W
(A) reading of the ammeter just after key closed is 2A. C3 16 W
A C
16 W B
9 C4
(B) reading of the ammeter long time after key closed is A 16 W
8 16 W 16 W 16 W
C5 C6
(C) reading of the ammeter just after key closed is 1A. 16 W
k
E
3 A
(D) reading of the ammeter long time after key closed is A V
8

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. A parallel plates capacitor is made of square conducting plates of side a and the separation between
plates is d. The capacitor is connected with battery of emf V volt as shown in the figure. There is a
dielectric slab of dimension a × a × d with dielectric constant k. At t = 0, dielectric slab is given velocity
v0 towards capacitor as shown in the figure. (Neglect the effect of gravity and electrostatic force acting
on the dielectric when dielectric is out side of capacitor. Also ignore any type frictional force acting on
the dielectric during its motion) let the x be the length dielectric inside the capacitor at t = t sec. [l0 >> a]
v0
d d V
l0 a
(A)Motion of dielectric slab is periodic but not simple harmonic motion

(B) Motion of dielectric slab is simple harmonic motion
(C) At any time, the slope of graph of total energy verses x is twice the slope of graph of potential energy
verses x.
1 2 e0 a 2 V 2
(D)The value of maximum energy stored in the system is mv 0 + (2k - 1)
2 2d
10. To measure the capacitance of a conductor, it is first charged to a potential V0 = 1350 V. It is then
connected by a conducting wire to a distant metal sphere of radius r = 3cm. As a result the conductor
potential drops to V1 = 900 V.
Choose the correct option (s)
(A) Initial charge on the conductor is 9nC
1
(B) Capacitance of the conductor is nF
150
(C) Charge on the metal sphere after connection is 6nC
(D) Electrostatic potential energy decreases after redistribution of charges.
11. Two square plates of sides l are placed parallel to each other with separation d as suggested in figure.
You may assume d is much less than l. The plates carry uniformly distributed static charges +Q0 and
–Q0. A block of metal has width l, length l, and thickness slightly less than d. It is inserted at distance x
into the space between the plates. The charges on the plates remain uniformly distributed as the block
slides in. In a static situation, a metal prevents an electric field from penetrating inside it. The metal can
be thought of as a perfect dielectric, with k ® ¥.
l
Q 20 d ( l - x )
(A) The stored energy as a function of x is given by
( 2l 3
Î0 ) x
(B) The magnitude of the force that acts on the metallic block is k d
Q 20 d
given by to the right .
( l3 Î0 )
(C) The area of the advancing front face of the block is essentially equal to ld, the stress (force per unit
Q 20
area) on it is .
2l 4 Î0 ( )
(D) The energy density in the electric field between the charged plates in terms of Q0, l, d, and Î0 is
Q 20
( 2l 4 Î0 )
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A variable condensator or also known as varco is a capacitor that its capacitance can be varied. One type
is varied by turning one of its plates clockwise. Suppose that a varco consists of a pair of half circle plate
with diameter D separated by a distance d. the varco plate is rotating with angular velocity w. The other
plate is fixed. The plates may have some initial charge.
wt
R E
p
This varco is connected in a circuit as shown. We will consider t = 0 to t = .
w
12. If the current is constant.
(A) The angular velocity is increasing with time
(B) The angular velocity is decreasing with time
(C) The angular velocity is constant with time
(D) It is not possible.
13. If R = 0 what torque needs to be applied to rotate the plate with constant small angular velocity?
e0E2D2 e0E2D2
(A) clockwise (B) anticlockwise
16d 16d
e0E2D2 e0E2D2
(C) clockwise (D) anticlockwise
8d 8d
A parallel plate capacitor placed in a cylindrical tank is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant k. The
area of cross section of tank is A and height of liquid is equal to the length of the square plate of plate
area l2. The separation of plates is d. A very small hole of area 'a' is opened at the bottom of the tank at
t = 0. If the capacitor in the process remains connected with a battery of emf E. Assume that the level of
liquid in the capacitor remains same as outside and Bernoulli's equation is valid for the situation.
14. Choose the CORRECT statement(s) :
Î0 lE a a
(A) The current in circuit as a function of time is i = ( k - 1) æç 2gl - gt ö÷
d Aè A ø
Î0 lE a
(B) The current in circuit as a function of time is i = ( k - 1) 2gl .
2d A
(C) The capacitance of capacitor decreases with time.
(D) The potential difference between the plates of capacitor remains constant.
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

dh a
(A) The rate at which the level of liquid decreases is = 2gl
dt 2A
dh a æ a ö
(B) The rate at which the level of liquid decreases is = ç 2gl - gt ÷
dt A è A ø
(C) The power supplied by the battery increases with time.
(D) When the container gets empty, the power delivered by the battery becomes zero.
Answer Q.16, Q.17 and Q.18 by appropriately matching the information given the three columns
Following is a circuit containing an ideal battery of emf E in which the elements X & Y are unknown &
may be a capacitor C, a resistor R, a battery of emf E, or may be their combination as mentioned in each
case. The connecting wires are perfectly conducting.
X Y
S
E
The switch S is initially open & it is closed at t = 0.
q (charge on C)
(I) Element X is R (i) Entire energy (non–zero) (P) CE
Element Y is C supplied by batteries is
dissipated as heat t
(II) Both elements X & Y (ii) Total charge drawn from (Q) I (current through
battery)
are R each the battery(s) after long
2E
CE R
time is t
2
I (Current through
(III) Element X is R, (iii) Total heat produced in (R) battery)
element Y is a parallel circuit is less than the

combination of R and C energy supplied by the
t
battery(s)
H (heat produced)
(IV) Element X is R (iv) I = 0 just after S is closed (S) 2
Et
element Y is battery as well as after long time 2R
E joined with same t
t
polarity
16. Of the given 4 situations, which one has maximum value of current just after closing the switch ?
(A) I, iii, P (B) IV, i, Q (C) II, iii, P (D) III, i, S
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
17. In which case the charge drawn from the battery(s) during t = 0 to t = RC is the least ?
(A) II - i - S (B) I, iii, P (C) III, ii, Q (D) IV, i, Q
18. In which case the current through battery(s) has different non zero values just after closing the switch &
after a long time ?
(A) II - i - S (B) I, iv, Q (C) IV, i, Q (D) III - iii- R
SECTION-III
1. A parallel plate capacitor having its lower end fixed and upper end is attached with spring having spring
constant K. Upper plate is in equilibrium before switch is closed. After switch is closed, the condition on
r
the potential of battery so that the system can acquire new equilibrium position is V £ æç p ö÷ L K .
3
è q ø e0 A
Then p + q + r is ? [p & q are smallest possible integers and V is potential difference across the battery]
SW
K
m
L
V

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Figure shows 3 different capacitors, separately charged by batteries, and then connected as shown, with
initially, switch open. When switch is closed, the charge :-
1µF 2µF
+ – + –
1V 2V
1V
+ –
S
1µF
(A) On all capacitors get equalized (B) becomes zero on all capacitors
(C) On 2µF capacitor increases by 20% (D) On 2µF capacitor decreases by 20%
2. In the given circuit switch S is closed at t = 0. The current I in the
C
figure at time t is
C
- t / RC - t / RC
ee 2ee I
(A) i = (B) i = e C
2R 3R
R
-
2t R
- t / RC
ee S
(C) i = ee
3RC R
(D) i =
2R R
3. Two wires are bent (shown as joint-circle) with radius r (in xy plane). The upper half has resistance of
2R W and the lower half of R W. A current I is passed into circle as shown. The magnetic field at centre
is :
2RW
y
r
I
x
RW
m0 I m0 I m0 I
(A) (B) (ẑ ) (C) zero (D) ẑ
r 2r 12r
4. Three infinite wires are arranged in space in three dimensions (along x, y and z axis) as shown. Each
wire carries current i. Find magnetic field at A.
m0 i ˆ m0 i ˆ m0i ˆ
(A) - i- j- k y
2pr 2pr pr
m0 i ˆ m 0 i ˆ m 0 i ˆ i
(B) - i+ j- k
4pr 4pr pr x
2 i
m0 i ˆ m0 i ˆ m0 i ˆ r
Current
(C) i+ j- k A
4pr 4pr pr outside r
m0 i ˆ m0 i ˆ m 0 i ˆ
(D) i+ j- k
2 pr 2 pr pr

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A charged particle enters into a uniform magnetic field with velocity v0 perpendicular to it, the length of
3
magnetic field is x = R , where R is the radius of the circular path of the particle in the field. The
2
magnitude of change in velocity of the particle when it comes out of the field is :-
v0 3v 0
(A) 2v0 (B) (C) (D) v0
2 2
6. Radii of the inner and outer concentric conducting spheres of a spherical capacitor are a and b. One half
of the space between the spheres is filled with a linear isotropic dielectric of permittivity e1 and the other
half with another linear isotropic dielectric of permittivity e2 as shown in the figure.
The outer sphere is given a total charge +Q and the inner sphere a total charge –Q. Which of the
following statements are correct?
(A) Electric fields in both the dielectrics at the same radial distance are not equal. e1
(B) Electric field intensities in both the dielectrics at radial distance r from center
Q
are given by E1 = E1 = .
2p ( e1 + e 2 ) r 2 e2
Q (b - a )
(C) Potential difference between the spheres is given by V = .
2p (e1 + e 2 ) ab
(D) Charge densities on both the halves of a sphere are equal.
7. The two plates of a capacitor of capacitance C are given charges Q1 and Q2. This capacitor is connected
across a resistance R as shown key is closed at t = 0. Find the charges on the plates after time t.
t
Q1 + Q 2 æ Q1 - Q 2 ö - RC Q1 Q2
(A) Total charge of the right plate q 2 = -ç
è ÷ø e
2 2
C
t
Q + Q 2 æ Q1 - Q 2 ö - RC R
(B) Total charge on the left plate q = 1 +ç
è ÷ø e
2 2
Q1 - Q2 K
(C) Initial potential difference across the plates is given by
2C
Q1 + Q2
(D) Initial potential difference across the plates is given by
2C
8. Consider a cube of side 'a' as shown. Eight point charges are placed
at the corners. The cube is rotated about the axis with constant w
q q
angular velocity 'w':
(A) Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is zero
q q
2m 0 qw q
(B) Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is q
pa
q q
8 m0 qw
(C) Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is
3 3 pa
(D) If polarity of any four charges are reversed, then magnetic field at the centre of cube will be zero.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. A single circular loop of wire with radius 0.02 m carries a current of 8.0 A. It is placed at the centre of
a long solenoid that has length 0.65m, radius 0.080 m and 1300 turns. (Axis of circular loop coincide
with axis of solenoid). Let 'i' be the current in solenoid.
Solenoid
Current carrying loop

(A)If i = 100 mA, the magnetic field at the center of coil can be zero.
(B) If i = 44 mA, the magnetic field at the center of coil can be zero.
(C) If i = 100 mA, the magnetic field at the center of coil can be 8p × 10–5 T.
(D)If i = 100 mA, the magnetic field at the center of coil can be 16p × 10–5 T.
Figure shows the circuit of a flashing lamp, used at construction sites. The fluorescent lamp L, having
negligible capacitance, is connected in parallel across the capacitor C of an RC circuit. There is a current
through the lamp only when the potential difference across it reaches the breakdown voltage VL . In this
event, the capacitor discharges completely through the lamp and lamp flashes briefly.
R
E C L
10. Consider an instant, when the capacitor has just discharged through the flash light. Taking this instant as
t = 0, the time after which the lamp flashes briefly is given by :-
æ E ö é æ E öù æ Eö æE-V ö
(A) RCln çè E - V ÷ø (B) RC ê1 - ln çè V ÷ø ú (C) RCln çè V ÷ø (D) RCln çè E L ÷ø
L ë L û L
11. The number of flashes per second produced by the arrangement is (neglecting the time of flashing or
discharging of capacitor) :-
1 1 1 1
(A) æ E ö
(B) (C) (D) é æ E öù
æ Eö æ E - VL ö
RCln ç RCln ç ÷ RCln ç RC ê1 - ln ç ÷ ú
è E - VL ÷ø è VL ø è E ÷ø ë è VL ø û
12. Which of the following graph represents the variation of potential drop across the resistor ?
V V
E
E
E–VL
E –V L
(A) (B)
t t
T0 2T0 T0 2T0
V V
E E
E–VL
(D) E
–VL
(C)
T0 2T0
t T 0 2T0
t
PHYSICS/Class Test # 42 E-3 /5

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

When the switch is shifted from position 1 to position 2 (as shown in figure), the steady state current
2
through the resistance R1 does not change its direction, but decreases to times of its previous value.
3
The batteries are ideal and identical :-
R 2R
R1
K
1 2
3R
13. Value of R1 is :-
R R R R
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 6 3 4
14. What is the ratio of the steady state charge on the capacitor before switching and after switching ?
3 1 3 4
(A) (B) (C) (D)
5 2 4 5
15. List-I List-II
Current Carrying Wires B0
m0 i æ 1 ö
(P) O (1) ç1 + ÷
a 4a è p ø
a m0i 1
(Q) O (2) 1+ 2
4a p
m0 i æ 1 1 ö
(R) a O
(3) ç + ÷
2a è 2 p ø
y
a O m0 i
(S) x (4)
z 4a
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 3 1 4 2
(B) 4 2 3 1
(C) 2 3 1 4
(D) 1 4 2 3

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-II
1. A 20 ohms resistor is connected in series with a capacitor or 0.01 farad and e.m.f. E volts given by
40e–3t + 20e–6t. If q = 0 at t = 0, the maximum charge on the capacitor is (in C).
SECTION-III
1. A, B, C are three identical neutral conducting plates, A and C are
rigidly attached to fixed supports whereas plate B is attached to a E
spring having constant K. The supports and spring are very small
in size and their effect on induced charges on plates A, B, C is
negligible. The seperations between plates are d as shown. If plate
B is displaced by x (x << d) in the plane and released it is found
that plate B under goes SHM. If K = 2 N/m, mass of plate B is A B C
8 kg, emf of battery = 2V and system is in gravity free space, the
time period of B is found to be T = ap. Find value of a. d d
2. Two identical capacitors having plate separation 1mm are connected parallel to each other across points
A and B as shown in figure. Total charge of 4 µC is imparted to the system by connecting a battery
across A and B and battery is removed. Now first plate of first capacitor and second plate of second
capacitor starts moving with constant velocity 3 m/s towards left. Find the magnitude of current (in mA)
flowing in the loop initially.
u0
1
A B
2
u0
3. The figure shows a RC circuit with a parallel plate capacitor. Before switching on the circuit, plate A of
the capacitor has a charge –Q0 while plate B has no net charge. Now, at t = 0, the circuit is switched on.
How much time (in second) will elapse before the net charge on plate A becomes zero.
2 ´ 106
(Given C = 1mF, Q0 = 1mC, e = 1000 V and R = ln 3 W )
–Q0
A B
R
S
e
4. Figure shows a conducting loop in shape of a trapezium carrying a current i = 10A. Find the magnetic
field B (in µT) at a point P. It is given that a = 10 cm.
P
a
2a
60° i

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A particle of mass m and charge q, accelerated by a potential difference V enters a region of a uniform
transverse magnetic field B in a direction perpendicular to boundary. If d is the thickness of the region of
B, the angle q through which the particle deviates from the initial direction on leaving the region is given
by :-
1/ 2 1/ 2
æ q ö æ q ö
(A) sin q = Bd ç ÷ (B) cos q = Bd ç ÷
è 2mV ø è 2mV ø
1/ 2
1/ 2
æ q ö
(C) tan q = Bd æç
q ö
÷ (D) cot q = Bd ç ÷
è 2mV ø è 2mV ø
2. Figure shows an Amperian path ABCDA. Part ABC is in vertical
plane PSTU while part CDA is in horizontal plane PQRS. T
Direction of circulation along the path is shown by an arrow U
r r
near point B and D. Ñò B.d l for this path according to Ampere’s
B
i1 A
law will be S
R
(A) ( -i1 - i2 + i 3 )m 0 i3 i1
C D
(B) ( -i1 + i2 )m 0 P Q
i3 i2
(C) i3 m0
(D) (i1 + i2 )m 0
3. A current of i ampere is flowing through each of the bent wires as shown the magnitude and direction of
magnetic field at 0 is
m 0i æ 1 2 ö m 0i æ 1 3 ö m 0i æ 1 3 ö m 0i æ 1 3 ö
(A) ç + ÷ (B) ç + ÷ (C) ç + ÷ (D) ç + ÷
4 è R R¢ ø 4 è R R¢ ø 8 è R 2R ¢ ø 8 è R R¢ ø
4. Which of the following most appropriately represent magnetic field lines near the end of a long solenoid
(A) (B)
(C) (D)

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. Total heat generated in 4W resistance after switch S is closed :- (Initially circuit was in steady-state)
400µF
4W
10V
S
20V ; 2W
(A) 80 mJ (B) zero (C) 40 mJ (D) 120 mJ

6. Figure shows two infinite sheets of thickness h each, carrying h
current of density (current/area) 'J'. The direction of current is
indicated in the diagram. Point 'O' is at the centre of cuboid
formed due to intersection of sheets. y
(A) The magnitude of magnetic field at point O is 2m 0 J j

(B) The magnitude of magnetic field at point O is zero. –j
h
(C) The magnitude of magnetic field at any finite distance O x –j
outside the sheet is zero.
(D)The magnitude of magnetic field at any finite distance
m0 Jh j
outside the sheet is
2
7. Two parallel, circular loops carrying a current of 40 A each are arranged as shown in figure. The first
loop is situated in the x–y plane with its center at the origin, and the second loop’s center is at z = 4 m. If
the two loops have the same radius a = 3 m, determine the magnetic field at: z
r -2432p ´ 10 -7
(A) z = 0, =
B ˆ
kT a
75 z = 4m
r -2432p ´ 10 -7 I
(B) z = 4, =
B ˆ
kT
75
r -1685p ´ 10 -7 a
(C) z = 0, =
B ˆ
kT 0 y
24
I
r -1685p ´ 10 -7 x
(D) z = 4, =
B ˆ
kT
24
r
8. A charge particle of charge q, mass m is projected with velocity vr . The electric field E = Ekˆ and
r
magnetic field B = Bjˆ is applied. The acceleration of the particle is
y
B v
q
m + 37° x
E
z
4qvB 3qE q ( 5E + 4vB) kˆ q ( 5E - 4vB) kˆ

(A) k̂ (B) k̂ (C) (D)
5m 5m 5m 5m

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
q
9. A particle of specific charge = p ´ 1010 Ckg–1 is projected from the origin along the positive x–axis
m
r
with a velocity of 10 ms in a uniform magnetic field B = -2 ´ 10-3 kˆ tesla. Choose correct alternative(s)
5 –1
(A) The centre of the circle lies on the y–axis

(B) The time period of revolution is 10–7 s.
5
(C) The radius of the circular path is mm
p
1
(D) The velocity of the particle at t = ´ 10-7 s is 105 ˆj ms -1
4
10. There is uniform magnetic field between large parallel plates of a capacitor having separation d and
potential difference V. A charge particle is projected very near to +ve plate parallel to it with velocity u.
Due to magnetic and electric field resultant motion of particle would be helical.
+ –
2md 2 + –
+ u –
(A) Time taken by particle to reach at –Ve plate is . + m,q
B
qV d
–
+ –
+ –
md 2 + –
(B) Time taken by particle to reach at –Ve plate is V
qV
qB2 d 2
(C) Number of revolutions completed by particle just before reaching at –ve plate
p2 mV
qB2 d 2
(D) Number of revolutions completed by particle just before reaching at –ve plate
2p 2mV
A circularly symmetrical magnetic field B (depends only on the distance from their axis), pointing
perpendicular to the page, occupies the shaded region in figure. It can be shown that if the total flux
r r
(
ò B.da )
is zero, then a charged particle that starts out at the centre will emerge from the field region on
a radial path (provided it escapes at all). On the reverse trajectory a particle fired towards the centre from
outside will hit its target at the centre though it may follow a weired route getting there.
Field region
Particle trajectory
11. If particle in the described situation is projected with speed v0 from the centre then it will emerge out
from the field with speed
(A) greater than v0
(B) less then v0
(C) equal to v0
(D) depends on the variation (with distance from centre) & value of magnetic field in the region
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Two concentric circularly symmetrical magnetic field are shown in the diagram. Both are uniform and
have same magnitude and pointing perpendicular to the page, one is extended in the region from zero to
R & pointing into the page & other is extended from R to 2R pointing out to the page. A charge particle
is projected from centre with speed v, its distance from the centre when it is moving in radial outward
direction is :
× ×
× × R×
v ×
×
×× × × ×
× ×
× × 2R
R
(A) (B) R (C) 2 R (D) 2 R
2
13. The circuit involves two ideal cells connected to a 1 mF capacitor via a key K.
Initially the key K is in position 1 and the capacitor is charged fully by 2V C=1mF
cell. The key is pushed to position 2. Column-I gives physical quantities 2V 4V

involving the circuit after the key is pushed from position 1. Column-II gives K
corresponding results. Match the statements in Column-I with the
1 2
corresponding values in Column-II and indicate your answer by darkening
appropriate bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the OMR.
Column-I Column-II
(P) The net charge crossing the 4 volt cell in mC is (1) 2
(Q) The magnitude of work done by 4 Volt cell in mJ is (2) 6
(R) The gain in potential energy of capacitor in mJ is (3) 8
(S) The net heat produced in circuit in mJ is (4) 16
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 4 3 2 1
(B) 4 1 2 3
(C) 1 2 3 4
(D) 1 3 2 1
SECTION-II
1. Find the potential of point A (in Volt) at steady state in the circuit shown in the figure.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. ( )
Magnetic field given by 100kˆ T in the region defined by x2 + y2 = 16 and y > 0. A charge particle of
(
mass m = 10–19 kg, q = 1.6 × 10–19 C, enters at origin with a velocity 640 ˆj m/s. What is the angle of)
deviation (in degree) suffered by charge particle in the magnetic field.
y
x
v0
SECTION-III
1. A charge particle of charge q and mass m is projected in a region which contains electric and magnetic
qE
field as shown in the figure with velocity v at an angle 45° with x direction. If v = , then net
m
deviation in particle motion will be q (in degree) then find the value of q/15. (neglect the effect of
gravity)
y
y
45° ×B
q x
E
mv
2qB 2
0.5
2. An electron is shot into one end of a solenoid. As it enters the uniform magnetic field within the solenoid,
its speed is 800 m/s and its velocity vector makes an angle of 30° with the central axis of the solenoid.
The solenoid carries 4.0 A current and has 8000 turns along its length. Find number of revolutions made
by the electron within the solenoid by the time it emerges from the solenoid’s opposite end. (Use charge
e
to mass ratio for electron = 3 × 1011 C/kg). Fill your answer of y if total number of revolution is
m
y
× 106.
5
3. In the circuit shown in figure the switch S is initially open and both the capacitors are initially uncharged.
Find the ratio of current through 2W resistor, just after the switch S is closed and a long time after the
switch S is closed.
2W 4µF
S
6V 2µF 8W
4W

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Column-I indicated certain situations and column-II indicates the values of electric field (induced or
electrostatic). Match the correct options :
Column-I Column-II
(A) A uniformly charged infinite cylinder (P) E = 0
of radius R. x is distance from axis of cylinder
r
(B) Current flowing through uniform cylindrical (Q) E increases with increase in x, reaches a
resistor. x is distance from left end. x is less maximum and then decreases.
than the length of resistor
V
r
(C) An ideal solenoid of radius R. Current (R) E decreases with increase in x, reaches a
through solenoid is increasing with time. minimum and then increases.
x is distance from axis of solenoid
r
(D) A conducting rod of length l is moving (S) E is constant
in a direction perpendicular to the
r
magnetic field with uniform velocity. (T) E continuously decreases with
x is distance from upper end. (x < l) increase in x
l v

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE
SECTION-I
1. The magnetic field due to a current carrying square loop of side a at a point located
symmetrically at a distance of a/2 from its centre (as shown is)
2 m 0i m0 i 2 m 0i
3 pa 6 pa 3 pa
2. An electron is projected from origin with velocity 3.2iˆ + ˆj ( m / s ) . A uniform magnetic field of 2kˆ tesla
is present. The path followed by electron is correctly shown in (me = 9 × 10– 31kg)
y y
p x p x
(A) (B)
z z
Helix on +ve side of z-axis Helix on -ve side of z-axis
x x
(C) y (D) y
circle in xy plane circle in xy plane
3. A charged sphere of mass m and charge –q starts sliding along the surface of a ×P × × × ×
smooth hemispherical bowl, at position P. The region has a transverse uniform × ×
q
magnetic field B. Normal force by the surface of bowl on the sphere at position × R ×
Q is :- × Q B×
× × × × ×
(A) mg sin q + qB 2gR sin q (B) 3 mg sin q + qB 2gR sin q
(C) mg sin q – qB 2gR sin q (D) 3 mg sin q – qB 2gR sin q
4. A charged particle is projected at a speed V = 106 m/s perpendicular to the boundary OX of two
homogeneous magnetic fields. Magnetic induction vector fields are parallel to each other and
perpendicular to the particle velocity. The average velocity of the particle till it completes a semicircle in
both magnetic fields is 105 m/s. Then :-
v
B1
X
O
B2
(A) B1 : B2 = 40 – p : 40 + p (B) B1 : B2 = 20 – p : 20 + p
(C) B1 : B2 = 1 : 1 (D) B1 : B2 = 2p : 2 + p

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A charge (q, m) is thrown perpendicularly with speed v from a point at a distance r from an infinite long
current (I) carrying wire. If its maximum distance from wire is R then :
æ 2mpmv ö
(A) R will be infinite (B) R will be ç re 0 qI ÷
ç ÷
è ø q v
(r)
æ 4mpmv ö æ mpmvqI ö
(C) R will be ç re 0 qI ÷ (D) R will be ç re 0 ÷
ç ÷ ç ÷
è ø è ø
6. A particle having charge 1C and mass 1 kg enters a region having uniform magnetic field of strength
'2T' with a speed of 12 m/s, as shown in figure, then the CORRECT statement(s) is/are :-
6m 6m 12m
y × × × × × × ×
B0=2T× B0=2T B0=2T × ×
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
30° × × × × × × × x
× ×v × × × × ×
× ×0× × × × ×
4p
(A) The time for which the charge particle remains in magnetic field is s.
3
(B) The velocity of charged particle becomes parallel to x-axis 6 time during its motion
(C) The distance between the point where the charge particle enters the uniform magnetic field and the
point where it emerges out is 6 m
2p
(D) The deviation of the charge particle when it emerges out of the magnetic field is rad.
3
7. A ring of mass m and radius R is set into pure rolling on horizontal rough surface, in a uniform magnetic
field of strength B as shown in the figure. A point charge q of negligible mass is attached to rolling ring.
Friction is sufficient so that it does not slip at any point of its motion. (q is measured in clockwise from
positive y-axis) :- y
× × × × × × × × × × × ××
(A) Ring will continue to move with constant velocity × × × ×m× × × q× × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × ××
(B) The value of friction acting on ring is Bqv cos q × × × × × × × × ×v ×= × ××
w/R
× × × × × q× × × × × × × ×
(C) The value of friction acting on ring is Bqv sin q × × ×R× × × × × × × × x ××
× × × × × × × × ×v × × × ×
æ mg ö ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
× ×
× ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
(D) Ring will lose contact with ground if v is greater than ç ÷ × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
è 2qB ø
A charge particle of mass m and charge q is projected on a rough horizontal XY plane. Both electric
r r
and magnetic fields are given by E = -10kˆ N / C and magnetic field B = -5kˆ tesla are present in the
region. The particle enters into the magnetic field at (4, 0, 0) m with a velocity 50 ˆj m/sec. The particle
1
starts into a curved path on the plane. If coefficient of friction m = between particle and plane, then
3
(qE = 2mg, g = 10m/s2)
8. Radius of curvature of the path followed by particle, initially, is
(A) 5m (B) 2.5m (C) 1.25m (D) 10m
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. The time after which particle comes to rest, is :-

(A) 5s (B) 4s (C) 3s (D) 1s
10. Total work done by electric force on the particle is
(A) 250J (B) zero (C) 125J (D) none
When a conductor carries a current i the charge carriers to voltmeter
move with a drift velocity vd directed along the length D
G
y
B
of conductor. A uniform magnetic field B is applied i
C F
perpendicular to current as shown in figure. H
x
A z
Magnetic force deflects charge carriers. As a resultant Y i
of magnetic deflection a potential difference called Hall X E
voltage is established in transverse direction to current. to voltmeter B

Z
In usual notations n = number of electron per unit

volume, s = conductivity of conductor, q = magnitude
of charge carrier.
11. Mark the CORRECT option :
(A) In steady state face CFGD becomes positively charged
1 iB
(B) Hall voltage developed across conductor has magnitude
nq Y
(C) An electric field is established from face ABCD towards EFGH
(D) By decreasing Z, voltage developed can be increased.
12. Direction of resultant electric field inside conductor from x-axis is given by :
sB iB sn ni
(A) tan a = (B) tan a = (C) tan a = (D) tan a =
nq sn iB sB
Matching List Type (4 × 4 & 4 × 5) 1 Q. [3 M (–1)]
13. The circuit consists of four switches S0, S1, S2, S3 as
shown below. All switches are initially open. Consider
2.5W 2.5W 5W
these four events in following order :-
(i) Switches S0, S1, S2 are closed. Switch S3 remains
2.5W 4µF 1µF 10V
open
(ii) Now switch S3 is also closed, so that all four switches S3 S2 S1 S0
are closed
(iii) Now switches S0 and S3 are opened simultaneously.
Switches S1 and S2 are left closed.
(iv) Now S2 is also opened and S0 is closed. After a long time, a dielectric slab (k = 3) is inserted slowly
between the plates of 1µF capacitor completely filling the gap.
List-I List-II
(P) Charge (in µC) on 1µF capacitor long (1) 10
time after event (i) is
(Q) Charge (in µC) on 4µF capacitor long time (2) 15
after event (ii) is
(R) Charge (in µC) on 1µF capacitor long time (3) 3
after event (iii) is
(S) Charged supplied (in µC) by the battery (4) 20
during event (iv) is
(5) 0
(A) P ® 1; Q ® 2; R ® 4; S ® 1 (B) P ® 1; Q ® 1; R ® 3; S ® 4
(C) P ® 3; Q ® 3; R ® 2; S ® 1 (D) P ® 1; Q ® 2; R ® 3; S ® 4
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. A direct current flows in a solenoid of length L and radius R, (L >> R), producing a magnetic field of
magnitude B0 inside the solenoid. Magnetic field line which leaves end penpendicularly is at distance
R
‘a’ from axis of solenoid. If a = , find n
n
2. Two infinitely long wires are placed perpendicular to the plane of paper. Current in wire A is 4i0 outward
+¥ r uur
the plane of paper and current in 'B' is i0 inward the plane of paper. The ò B.dl along the QP is
-¥
K
m0 i 0 . Find the value of K.
2
P +¥
Q –¥
3. A capacitor C1 (= C) is charged to a potential difference e is connected to a charging circuit by changing

the switch S as shown. Assume the instant of switching as t = 0. Capacitor C2 is, initially uncharged,
then, the charge on C2(= C) is changing according to equation ; q2 = Q2(1 – e–t/d). where, d is called time
æ n2 ö
constant and Q2 is the steady state charge on C2. Let, Q2 = n2(Ce) and = d = n1(RC). Find ç ÷ .
è n1 ø
S(t = 0) R
e
3e
C1
C2
4. A galvanometer of resistance 40W, shunted by a resistance of 50 W gives a deflection of 50 divisions

1000
when joined in series with a resistance of W and a 2 volt battery, what is the current sensitivity of
9
galvanometer (in div/mA)?

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A very long straight conductor has a circular cross-section of radius R and carries a current density J.
Inside the conductor there is a cylindrical hole of radius a whose axis is parallel to the axis of the
conductor and a distance b from it. Let the z-axis be the axis of the conductor, and let the axis of the hole
be at x = b. Find the x component of magnetic field on the y–axis at y = 2R. If your answer is
æ1 a2 ö
Bx = m 0 JR ç - 2 2 ÷ fill value of |A| + |B|.
è A BR + b ø
iin R
a
x
O C
b
SECTION-IV
1. In the column-I, there are certain situtations depicted. Match them with their description in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) A point charge is projected at an acute angle (P) Speed changes with time
to uniform magnetic field in gravity free space
(B) A satellite is moving around earth in an (Q) Momentum changes with time
elliptical orbit
(C) A charge is released from rest in uniform electric (R) Radius of curvature of path
and magnetic field parallel to each other changes with time
(gravity free space)
(D) A charge is released from rest in uniform electric (S) Acceleration is constant in magnitude
and magnetic field perpendicular to each other
(gravity free space)
(T) Acceleration changes its direction
with time

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
B
r uur A
What will be the value of B × dl , where AB is line perpendicular to an infinite
1.
ò A r
r i
current carrying wire as shown in diagram ? (where B is magnetic field due to
wire carrying current i) r
r
mi m 0i mi mi
(A) 0 (B) (C) 0 (D) 0
p 2 4 2 B
2. Thin tape of width l = 40 cm is rolled into a tube of radius R = 30 cm. 2

R
On the tape flows evenly distributed current of I = 200 A as shown in
I l
figure. The magnetic induction B on the axis of the tube at point 2 is :-
(A) 100 pµT (B) 80 pµT I
(C) 60 pµT (D) 120 pµT

3. To produce a uniform magnetic field directed parallel to a diameter of a cylindrical region, one can use
the saddle coils illustrated in figure. The loops are wrapped over a somewhat flattened tube. Assume the
straight sections of wire are very long. The end view of the tube shows how the windings are applied.
The overall current distribution is the superposition of two overlapping, circular cylinders of uniformly
distributed current, one toward you and one away from you. The current density J is the same for each
cylinder. The position of the axis of one cylinder is described by a position vector a relative to the other
cylinder. The magnetic field inside the hollow tube is.
I y
I
a
x
(a) (b) z
m0 Ja m Ja
(A) along x-axis (B) 0 along y-axis (C) µ0Ja along z-axis (D) µ0Ja along y-axis
2 2
4. There are constant electric field E 0ˆj & magnetic field Bkˆ present between plates P and P'. A particle of
mass m is projected from plate P' along y axis with velocity v1. After moving on the curved path, it
r r
passes through point A just grazing the plate P with velocity v2. The magnitude of impulse (i.e. FDt = Dp )
provided by magnetic force during the motion of particle from origin to point A is :–
y
E0 B0
A m v2
P
v1
m x
P'
(A) m|v2–v1| (B) m v12 + v 22 (C) mv1 (D) mv2

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. Figure shows an electron gun that emits electrons at very small angel with axis. The paraxial electrons
emitted from the cathode (filament) are refocused at a distance s after accelerating through a potential
difference V, s is given by (Take p2 = 10) :-
20mV 20mV
(A) s = 2 (B) s = v
eB2 eB2 – V + S
B
10mV
(C) s = (D) None of these
eB2
6. A particle of mass M and carrying charge Q is launched
with initial speed v and at an angle of q relative to the
horizontal direction. When it reaches the maximum height
it enters a region of uniform magnetic field. In the region it
moves at constant velocity in the horizontal direction.
Determine the direction and strength of the magnetic field.
Mg Mg Mg Mg
(A) outward (B) inward (C) outward (D) inward
Qv cosq Qv cosq Qv sin q Qv sin q
7. The given figure shows a set-up for accelerating protons from rest, B
× × × in × ×
through a potential (fixed) by the battery, and then through a velocity + + + + +
selector. The E and B fields are carefully adjusted so that the × × ×
× ×Selector
× × × × ×
accelerated protons go straight through the slit after exiting the × × × × ×
selector. You want to modify this so that electrons instead of protons × × × × ×
are used. You reverse the leads on the accelerating battery. What × × × × × Slit
× × E × ×
do you need to do to the potential difference between the plates that – – – – –
create the electric field in the selector?
(A) Nothing (B) Reduce its magnitude
(C) Increase its magnitude (D) Reverse the polarity, and reduce its magnitude.
8. Two infinite long wires A and B carrying currents 2 I and I are placed parallel to each other at x = 0 and
x = l respectively. The magnetic field intensity to the right of the wire B on the line that passes through
the two wires varies according to a law that is represented systematically as shown in figure.
y
x2
x1
B C x
A l
z
(A) Current in A is along positive z-axis and in B is along negative z-axis

(B) Leaving point C and infinity, the magnetic field intensity is not zero in the complete region. (including
region between A and B and region left to A)
(C) Magnetic filed intensity between A and B on the line joining A and B varies as
y
A B x
(D) Value of x1 and x2 are 2l and l ( 2 + 2) respectively

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. Two VERY LONG hollow nonconducting cylindrical shells (of different radius) are placed co-axially,
one inside other. They carry non-zero surface charge densities s1 & s2, as shown. The shells begin to
rotate about their common axis with non-zero angular speeds either clockwise or anticlockwise. If
magnetic field on the axis is zero then choose right possibliite(s) :-
w1
s2
s1
w2
(A) s1 ¹ s2, w1 ¹ w2 (B) s1 ¹ s2, w1 = w2 (C) s1 = s2, w1 ¹ w2 (D) s1 = s2, w1 = w2

10. An infinite current carrying wire carries current i in negative x direction. Force on a charged particle at
a point having coordinate (6, 2, 3) is zero if velocity of the particle is
(A) -4iˆ + 8ˆj (B) 4ˆj + 3kˆ (C) -6ˆj + 4kˆ (D) 6iˆ + 3ˆj - 2kˆ
11. A particle (q/m = 1) is released from rest at origin. Choose correct statement
r r
[Given B = 4e -6xˆj + sin2yiˆ and E = 4xiˆ ]
(A) Speed of the particle at x = 1 is v = 2 m/s (B) Particle will move in x–y plane only
(C) Speed of the particle at x = 2 is v = 2 m/s (D) None of these
Two charge particles each of mass ‘m’, carrying charge +q and
connected with each other by a massless inextensible string of
length 2L are describing circular path in the plane of paper, each
qB 0 L
with speed v = (where B0 is constant) about their centre of
m
r
mass in the region in which an uniform magnetic field B exists
into the plane of paper as shown in figure. Neglect any effect of
electrical & gravitational forces.
12. The magnitude of the magnetic field such that no tension is developed in the string will be
B0
(A) (B) B0 (C) 2B0 (D) 0
2
13. If the actual magnitude of magnetic field is half to that of calculated in part (i) then tension in the string
will be
3 q 2 B20 L q 2 B 02 L 2q 2 B20 L
(A) (B) zero (C) (D)
4 m 2m m
3 q 2 B 02 L
14. Given that the string breaks when the tension is T = . Now if the magnetic field is reduced to
4 m
such a value that the string just breaks then find the maximum separation between the two particles
during their motion
(A) 16 L (B) 4L (C) 14L (D) 2L
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

15. A very small current carrying square loop (current I) of side 'L' is placed in y-z plane with centre at
origin of the coordinate system (shown in figure). In column–I the coordinate of the points are given &
in column–II magnitude of strength of magnetic field is given. Then :-
.
y
P2(0, a, 0)
. P3(a, a, 0)
0
I
.
P1(a, 0, 0)
x
z
List–I List II
m 0 I L2
(P) At point O (0, 0, 0) (1)
2pa 3
2 2m 0 I
(Q) At point P1 (a, 0, 0) (here a > > L) (2)
pL
m 0 5 I L2
(R) At point P2 (0, a, 0) (here (a > > L) (3)
16p a 3
m0 I L2
(S) At point P3 (a, a, 0) (here a > > L) (4)
4p a 3
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 4 2 3 1
(B) 1 1 2 3
(C) 4 1 2 3
(D) 2 1 4 3
SECTION-III
1. Two semicircular ring of same radius (R) having current i1 & i2 are kept parallel to each other in y-z
plane as shown in the figure. Centre of first ring is kept at x = 0 and that of second ring is kept at
7 4R nm i
x= R . If magnetic field at point P (x = ) is along the x-axis then its value is 0 1 . Find the value
12 3 20R
of n.
R0 7
x=—
12R P
i1 O1 x
O2 i2
x=0 x = 4R
—
R0 3

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. We have two separate long cylindrical wires both having different B

but uniform current densities. The radius of one of the wires is twice B1
of the other. The figure shows the graph of magnetic field (B) with
radial distance (r) from their axis. The curved parts of the two graphs
B2
æB ö
are overlapping. If the ratio ç 1 ÷ = x then give 2x. R 2R x
è B2 ø
3. A wire PQ of mass 10 g is at rest on two parallel metal rails. The separation between the rails is 4.9 cm.
A magnetic field of 0.80 tesla is applied perpendicular to the plane of the rails, directed downwards. The
resistance of the circuit is slowly decreased. When the resistance decreases to below 20 ohm, the wire
PQ begins to slide on the rails. The coefficient of friction between the wire and the rails is found to be
ab
100
, where a and b are single digit integers. Then find the value of a + b.
SECTION-IV
r
1. A negative charged particle of mass ‘m’ having charge q enters in magnetic field B = B0 kˆ at point P
r é m ù
(3m, 0, 0) with velocity v0 = 3 ˆj + 4kˆ , at t = 0 as shown in the figure êGiven = 1ú [No other field
ë B0 q û
is present]
y
v0
q m
O x
P
Column I Column II
(A) Pitch of the motion of particle (P) ( -3sin t iˆ + 3cost j ) unit
24p
(B)
25
´ radius of curvature of particle during (Q) ( -3cos t iˆ - 3sin t ˆj ) unit
motion at time t = t sec
(C) Component of velocity of particle in x-y plane. (R) 8p unit
(D) Acceleration of particle (S) Constant
(T) Variable

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Two long concentric cylindrical conductors of radii a & b (b < a) are maintained at a potential difference
V & carry equal & opposite currents I. An electron with a particular velocity “U” parallel to the axis will
travel undeviated in the evacuated region between the conductors. Then U =
4pV 2pV 2pV 8pV
(A) (B) (C) (D)
æbö æaö æbö æaö
m 0 Iln ç ÷ m 0 Iln ç ÷ m 0 Iln ç ÷ m 0 Iln ç ÷
èaø èbø èaø èbø
2. A conducting wire bent in the form of a parabola y2 = 2x carries a current i = 2 A
r
as shown in figure. This wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field B = -4 k̂ Tesla.
The magnetic force on the wire is (in newton)
(A) - 16 î (B) 32 î (C) - 32 î (D) 16 î
3. Two uniform magnetic fields B1 and B2 exist above and below the plane. The magnetic force acting on
unit area of the plane is :-
2 B1
B22 - B12 B1 - B2
(A) (B) ¯
2m 0 2m 0 Plane
2
B1 + B2 B2
(C) 2 (D) None of the above

2m0
4. The drawing shows a thin, uniform rod that has a length of 0.45 m and a mass of 0.09 kg. This rod lies
in the plane of the paper and is attached to the floor by a hinge at point P. A uniform magnetic field of
0.36 T is directed perpendicularly into the plane of the paper. There is a current I = 4.0 A in the rod, and
rod does not rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. Find the angle q.
B (into page)
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
I
× × × × × ×g
× P× × × ×
q
(A) cos–1(0.36) (B) cos–1(0. 72) (C) cos–1 (0.46) (D) cos–1 (2/3)
5. Two current carrying coil having radius 'r' are separated by distance 'd' as shown in r
diagram. If r << d. Then find the force between two ring. Current in both the ring
is clockwise and equal to i.
6m0 i 2 p2 r 4 m 0 i 2 p2 r 4 d
(A) (B)
4p d 4 4p d 4
3m 0 i 2 p2 r 4 m0 i 2 p2 r 4 r
(C) (D)
4p d 4 2p d 4

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. An infinitely long straight wire carring a current I1 is partially surrounded

by a loop, as shown in figure. The loop has a length L and radius R,
I1
current I2.The axis of loop coincider with the wire. Find force between
two system R
L
m0 I1 II 2 L
(A) zero B) I2
2p R
m 0 I1 I 2 L mII L
(C) (D) 0 1 2
pR R
7. The torque required to hold a small circular coil of 10 turns, area 1 mm2 and carrying a current of
æ 21 ö
ç ÷ A in the middle of a long solenoid of 103 turns/m carrying a current of 2.5A, with its axis
è 44 ø
perpendicular to the axis of the solenoid is
SOLENOID
COIL
B
AXIS
(A) 1.5 × 10–6 N-m (B) 1.5 × 10–8 N-m (C) 1.5 × 10+6 N-m (D) 1.5 × 10+8 N-m
r
8. ()
There exist uniform magnetic field B = 5T kˆ from x = 0 to x = 2m. From x = 2m to x = 4m a uniform
r
()
electric field E = 50N / C iˆ . A point charge (q = 2C, m = 1kg) is projected from origin with velocity
r
()
V = 20m / s ˆj . Which of the following is/are correct : y
p
(A) Time spend by the charge particle in magnetic field is s O x=2 x=4 x
20
1
(B) Time spend by the charge particle in electric field is s
5
(C) Charge particle will leave the electric field with speed 20 2 m/s
(D) Charge particle will leave the electric field with velocity 20iˆ + 20jˆ
9. Figure shows a square loop carrying current I is present in the magnetic field which is given by
r B0 z ĵ + B0 y k̂
B= L where B0 is positive constant. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
L
æ B IL ö
(A) force on side (0,0) to (0,L) is çç 0 ÷÷ î .
è 2 ø
(B) force on side (0,L) to (L,L) is –B0I L ˆj .

(C) Net magnetic force on loop is zero.
(D) force on side (L,0) to (0,0) is zero.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. A uniform conducting rectangular loop of sides l, b and mass m carrying current i is hanging horizontally
with the help of two vertical strings. There exists a uniform horizontal magnetic field B which is parallel
to the longer side of loop. Choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
T1 T2
B
l
mg mg - 2ibB
(A) The value of T1 = T2 = (B) The value of T1 =
2 2
mg + 2ibB
(C) The value of T2 = (D) The value of T1 < value of T2
2
11. In a region of space, where a uniform vertical magnetic field of induction B exists, a light rod of length
L and mass m rigidly connected between two sleeves can slide on two horizontally fixed very long
parallel conducting rails. A capacitor of capacitance C charged to voltage V0 is connected through a
switch to the rails as shown. Initially the switch is open and the rod is at rest. Now the switch is closed.
Assume the rails to be long enough and ignoring electrical resistance and frictional forces. Which of the
following conclusion can you make?
B B
C L
BlCV0
(A) The steady-state speed acquired by the rod is .
m + CB 2 L2
CB 2 L2
(B) Efficiency of conversion of electrical energy of the capacitor into mechanical energy is .
m + 2CB 2 L2
1 æ m ö
(C) Heat released in the resistance of the jumper is CV02 ç 2 2 ÷.
2 è m + CB L ø
(D) None of the above is correct.
12. In the figure shown a coil of single turn is wound on a sphere of radius R and mass M. The plane of the
coil is parallel to the inclined plane and lies in the equatorial plane of the sphere. Current in the coil is i.
The sphere is in equilibrium.
mg tan q
(A) The value of B is
piR
(B) The current in coil is clockwise as seen from top.
(C) Minimum friction coefficient required is tan q.
(D) If the surface is smooth, sphere will slide down without rotation.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Paragraph for question nos. 13 to 15
The dead-quiet “caterpillar drive” for submarines in the movie "The Hunt for Red October" is based on
a magnetohydrodynamic (MHD) drive ; as the submarines moves forward, seawater flows through
multiple channels in a structure built around the rear of the hull. Figure shows the essentials of a channel.
Magnets, positioned along opposite sides of the channel with opposite poles facing each other, create a
magnetic field within the channel. Electrodes (not shown) create an electric field across the channel.
The electric field derives a current across the channel and through the water ; the magnetic force on the
current propels the water toward the rear of the channel, thus propelling the submarines forward.
South pole
2m 4m
Water flow
1m
N S N S North pole
Top view Flow of

North pole
sea water
South pole
13. In figure what should be the direction of electric field ?

(A) upward (B) downward (C) left ward (D) rightward
14. If the value of magnetic field is 100T and current flowing is 50 A what is the force with which the water
is pushed out through this channel?
(A) 500 N (B) 5000N (C) 10000N (D) 20000N
15. What should be the value of electric field to achieve the 50 A current given that resistivity of sea water
is 8W-m.
(A) 25 V/m (B) 50 V/m (C) 100 V/m (D) 200 V/m
SECTION-III
1. A superconducting current carrying ring of mass m = 40 gm and R = 2cm B q

R
floats in the magnetic field of a magnet. If the field lines make an angle
q = 30° with vertical and the ring is placed co-axially, assuming i = 10A,
r n N
find the magnetic field B . if answer is . Write the value of n.
3p
2. Consider a loop of freely deformable conducting wire with insulation

of length 2l, the two ends of which are fixed (permanently) to the ceiling.
A load of mass 'm' is fixed to the middle of the wire (the mass of the wire
in negligible). There is also a outward magnetic field of induction B; free I
fall acceleration is g. A current I is flowing through the wire which starts I
increasing slowly to value I0. How large current I0 is needed to lift the
æ ö 3 3 3 m
load by Dh0 = l ç1 - ÷ . m = kg , l = 2m, B = 1 tesla.
è pø p

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
p
3. A semicircular loop of mass per unit length kg/m is placed on a surface with its plane parallel to the
10
surface in a uniform magnetic field of magnitude 1 Tesla as shown in figure. Find the minimum amount
of current (in A) that should be passed in the loop so that it just start to rotate?
SECTION-IV
1. Find correct match for the figure in column I as shown with the items given in column II :
Match the following column :
Column-I Column-II
I
(A) (P) F¹0
I
× ×
× ×
× B ×
(B) × × (Q) F = 0, t ¹ 0
× ×
× I ×
R 2B
R
(C) (R) F = 0, t = 0
I
R
2B B
(D) (S) F ¹ 0, t = 0
R
I
(T) F ¹ 0, t ¹ 0

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A thin uniform rod with negligible mass and length l is attached to the floor by a frictionless hinge at
point P. A horizontal spring with force constant k connects the other end to wall. The rod is in a uniform
magnetic field B directed into the plane of paper. What is extension in spring in equilibrium when a
current i is passed through the rod in direction shown. Assuming spring to be in natural length initially.
B
×
× B
i ×
53°
P
53°
P
Hinge
Hinge
Spring in relaxed position In equilibrium position
5ilB 3ilB 5ilB 5ilB

(A) (B) (C) (D)
8k 8k 4k 6k
2. Find the magnetic dipole moment of the rectangular loop shown in the figure. Sides, a = 3m, b = 4m and
c = 2m, current in the loop I = 1 Amp
Y
c
I
I X
450 b
Z a
I
(A) 11.8 Am2 (B) 15.8 Am2 (C) 13.8 Am2 (D) 12.8 Am2
3. Diagram shows a charged disc rigidly fixed to a rotation axis AB (That
A y
passes through the centre of mass of disc and is perpendicular to the w ÄB
plane containing disc). Disc is set into rotation with constant angular l x
O g
speed 'w' in a magnetic field as shown in the figure. Choose the
INCORRECT statement :- B
(A) Torque on disc due to reaction force of axis is along positive x-axis.
(B) Torque of magnetic field on the disc is same about any axis.
(C) Torque of gravity about the axis of rotation is non-zero.
(D) Net torque on disc is zero.
4. The given fig. shows a coil bent with AB = BC = CD = DE = EF = FG = GH = HA = 1 m and carrying
current 1 A. There exists in space a vertical uniform magnetic field of 2 T in the y-direction. Then find
out the torque (in vector form) on the loop.
(A) 2kˆ
(B) -2kˆ
(C) 2 ˆj
(D) – 2 ˆj

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A wire carrying 3A current is wrapped around a non - conducting cube of side 1m as shown below. The
magntidude of net magnetic moment due to the loop will be :-
i = 3A
i
i
9 1
(A) unit (B) unit (C) 9 unit (D) None of these
2 3
6. A thin uniform ring of mass m and having electric charge Q uniformly distributed rotates around an axis
perpendicular to its plane and going through its center. The angular momentum of the ring is
7.5 × 10–4 kg-m2/s. The ring is in a homogeneous magnetic field of a field strength of 0.1 T and the lines
of the magnetic induction are parallel with the plane of the ring. Torque exerted on the ring is ? [The
specific charge (charge-mass ratio) of the ring is Q/m = 10–5 C/kg].
Q m
B
(A) 3.75 × 10–10 (N-m) upward along the plane

(B) 3.75 × 10–10 (N-m) downward along the plane
(C) 7.5 × 10–10 (N-m) upward along the plane
(D) none of these
7. A circular current carrying loop of radius R is bent about its diameter by 90° and placed in a magnetic
r
field B = B0 (iˆ + ˆj) as shown in figure.
(A) The torque acting on the loop is zero
y
I pR 2 ˆ ˆ
(B) The magnetic moment of the loop is
2
-i - j ( ) I
(C) The angular acceleration of the loop is non zero.
x
I pR 2 ˆ ˆ
(D) The magnetic moment of the loop is
2
(
-i + j ) z I

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
8. A uniform, thin, uniformly charged disk of mass m radius R and uniform surface charge density s
rotates with angular speed w about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to disc. The disk is in
region with a uniform magnetic field B that makes angle q with rotation axis. Mark the CORRECT
statement :-
Rotation
axis
w
B
w
1
(A) Torque exerted on the disk by magnetic field is psR 4 wB sin q
4
psR 2 B
(B) Ffrequency with which angular velocity vector rotates is given by sin q .
4m
(C) For an observer looking from above the angular velocity vector begins to rotate anticlockwise sense.
(D) For an observer looking from above the angular velocity vector begins to rotate clockwise sense.
Consider the circuit shown with the two switches S1 and S2. The battery has an emf of e and the internal
resistor has a resistance. The bottom wire is encased in an insulated wrapping of mass M which carries
a positive static charge of Q. Assume that the masses of all other wires and components are very small
as compared to this charge bearing wrapping. The dimensions of the circuit are l . The bridge (or middle
connecting) wire, with S2 in it, is l/2 above the bottom wire. The device is suspended in such a way that
it can rotate in vertical circle about axis AB. The circuit maintains its shape regardless of the switch
configuration. A magnetic field B, and an electric field (E), both point out of the page, exist in the space.
Magnetic interaction between wires of the circuit is negligible.
I e B
A
S1
S2
l
R l/2
E
B C D
++++++++++++++++++
l
9. With both switches open, find the equilibrium angle q that the plane of the circuit makes with the vertical
as it swings upwards due to the presence of the electric field.
(A) tan–1 (QE/3Mg) (B) tan–1 (4QE/3Mg) (C) tan–1(QE/6Mg) (D) tan–1(QE/Mg)
10. With S1 closed and S2 open, find the equilibrium angle q (assuming current through battery as I)
(A) tan–1 QE/(3Mg+ ILB) (B) tan–1 4QE/(3Mg+ILB)
(C) tan–1 QE/(6Mg+ILB) (D) tan–1QE/(Mg+ILB)
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. With S1 and S2 both closed, magnetic force on the wire CD is (assuming current through battery as I)
I 2
(A ) I B l (B) Bl (C) zero (D) IBl
2 3
A person wants to roll a solid non-conducting spherical ball of mass m and radius r on a surface whose
coefficient of static friction is µ. He placed the ball on the surface wrapped with n turns of closely
packed conducting coils of negligible mass at the diameter. By some arrangement he is able to pass a
current i through the coils either in the clockwise direction or in the anticlockwise direction. A constant
r
horizontal magnetic field B is present throughout the space as shown in the figure. (Assume µ is large
enough to help rolling motion)
i B
12. If current i is passed through the coils the maximum torque in the coil is :-
(A) –pnir2B k̂ (B) pnir2B ĵ (C) -pnir 2 Bjˆ (D) pnir 2 Bkˆ
13. The angular velocity of the ball when it has rotated through an angle q is (q < 180°) is :-
10 pniB 5 pniB 5 pniB 5 pniB

(A) sin q (B) sin q (C) cos q (D) sin q
7 m 14 m 14 m 7 m
SECTION-II
1. Two coaxial long solenoids having number of turns 3000 & 1500 per metre, radii 2.0 m & 1.0 m and
carry current of 2A & 4A in opposite sense respectively. Find the magnetic energy stored per unit length
(in J/m). [Take p2 = 10]
SECTION-III
1. A wire is wrapped N = 10 times over a solid sphere of mass m = 5kg, current I = 2A, which is placed on
r
a smooth horizontal surface. A horizontal magnetic field of induction B = 10T is present. Find the
angular acceleration experienced by the sphere. Assume that the mass of the wire is negligible compared
to the mass of the sphere. If answer is 20np. Write value of n.
m R
B

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A small circular loop of radius a = 2cm carrying a current i0 = 1A is placed co-axially with an ideal
solenoid of radius R = 5cm, and current i = 1A flowing through its windings. Number of turns per unit
length is n = 100. If the loop is displaced from the centre C of the solenoid to the end of the solenoid
slowly by an external agent, find the magnitude of work done by the external agent. If answer is
æ pm0 ´10 -2 ö
xç ÷ (in J) . Then the value of x is.
è 3 ø
C
D
R
l >> R
3. A current carrying uniform square frame is suspended from hinged supports as shown in the figure such
that it can freely rotate about its upper side. The length and mass of each side of the frame is 2m and 4kg
r
( )
respectively. A uniform magnetic field B = 3iˆ + 4ˆj is applied. When the wire frame is rotated to 45°
from vertical and released it remains in equilibrium. If the magnitude of current (in A) in the wire frame
is I then find æç 3 ö÷ I .
è 5ø
x
z
4. A rigid circular massless frame carrying current of 6 A is fixed to a uniform nonconducting hemispherical
shell of mass 3 kg and the system lies in a gravity free space. The wire frame lies in x-y plane and a
uniform magnetic field (2 Tesla) is switched on along y-axis. If the angular acceleration (in rad/s2) of the
shell at this instant is x × p then find the value of x.
z
F B
C E y
x D
2
5. A long and thin metallic tube of radius cm carries a current of 4000 A long its length. Calculate the
p
magnetic pressure (in kPa) on the tube that tries to compress it.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Column-I shows some charge distributions and current distributions accompanied by their descriptions.
Column-II shows the instantaneous characteristics. Here (S) symbolizes the system on which results are
to be obtained.
z
E
–l
(A) +
+
+
y (P) Net force on S is zero
++
x + + ++ + +
+l
Circular ring (S) half positive and

other half negative placed in a uniform
electric field, with centre at origin.
z
y
(B) +Q (Q) Net force on S have no x-component
p
x r
–Q
Dipole (S) is placed infront of a long uniformly

negatively charged wire parallel to x-axis, such
r r
that p is perpendicular to r and dipole is kept
parallel to z-axis.
z
i
i
(C) y (R) Net torque on S is along x-axis
i
A square current carrying coil (S) is placed

in xy-plane with centre at origin and sides
parallel to x-axis and y-axis, and a long wire
placed parallel above square on z-axis and
parallel to x-axis.
y
(D) x (S) Net torque on S is zero
A circular current coil (S) with (T) Direction of magnetic dipole moment or
one half in yz-plane other half electric dipole moment is in x-y plane.
in xz-plane, placed in a uniform
magnetic field in x-direction.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the figure shown ABCDEFA was a square loop of side l, but is folded in two equal parts so that half
of it lies in x-z plane and the other half lies in the y-z plane. The origin ‘O’ is centre of the frame. The
loop carries current ‘i’. The magnetic field at the centre 'O' is :-
y D
m0 i
(A)
m0 i
2 2pl
( iˆ – ˆj ) (
ˆ ˆ
(B) 2 p l – i + j ) C
B
E
O x
(C)
2 m0 i ˆ ˆ
pl
i+j ( ) (D)
m0 i
2 pl
( ) iˆ + ˆj
z F A
2. A wire of length l, carrying a current i is kept along x-axis as shown in the figure.
y
x0 l
x
i
(A)Unit vector along magnetic field due to the wire at (a, b, c) is independent on x0.
(B) Unit vector along magnetic field due to the wire at (a, b, 0) is dependent on x0.
(C) Unit vector along magnetic field due to the wire at (0, b, c) is independent of b and c
(D)Unit vector along magnetic field due to the wire at (a, 0, c) is independent of a and c
r
3. In a non uniform magnetic field having strength B = B0 x (- k̂ ) (here B0 is constant). A particle of mass
r
m and charge Q is projected horizontally with velocity V = V0 î from the origin at time t = 0. If
QB0 V0
= 1 & at any instant ‘t’ the velocity vector of the particle is found to be î + aˆj + bk̂ then value
m 2
of a & b will be (neglect gravity)
V0
(A) a = ,b=0 (B) a = 0, b = 0
2
3V0 3V0
(C) a = ,b=0 (D) a = 0, b =
2 2
4. An electron enters the space between the plates of a charged capacitor as shown. The charge density on
the plate is s. Electric field intensity in the space between the plates is E. A uniform magnetic field B
r
also in that space perpendicular to the direction of E. The electron moves perpendicular to both E and
r
B without any change in direction. The time taken by the electron to travel a distance l in that space
is.................
Î0 lB Î0 l
(A) (B) + + +
s sB –
sl sB – – –
(C) Î B (D) Î l
0 0

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
r
5. A particle of charge per unit mass a is released from origin with velocity V = v 0 i in a magnetic field
r 3 v0 r 3 v0
ˆ for x £
B = -B0 K and B = 0 for x> . The x-coordinate of the particle at time
2 B0 a 2 B0 a
æ p ö
t>ç ÷ would be
è 3B0 a ø
3 v 3 æ p ö 3 v0 æ p ö
(A) 2 B a + 2 v 0 ç t - B a ÷ (B) 2 B a + v 0 ç t - 3B a ÷
0
0 è 0 ø 0 è 0 ø
3 v v æ p ö 3 v0 v0t
(C) 2 B a + 2 ç t - 3B a ÷
0 0
(D) 2 B a + 2
0 è 0 ø 0
6. A rod has a total charge Q uniformly distributed along its length 2l. If the rod rotates with angular
velocity w about its one of the end, the magnetic moment of the rotating rod is :-
Qwl2 2Qwl 2 2l
(A) (B)
6 3 + + + + + + + +
Total charge = Q
4Qwl2 Pivot
(C) (D) 0
3
7. Figure shows a long straight conductor A, carrying a current I, where in electrons
Å
are drifting at velocity v. B represents a narrow beam of protons (in vacuum) Å
Å
moving with speed v (same as that of electrons) and result in an equivalent Å
I Å
current, same as that of current in the conductor (for any stationary observer). O Å v
Å
is an observer situated midway between the two conductors and is moving with d O d Å
Å
Å
same velocity as that of electrons or protons. Å
Å
(A) O would observe a net magnetic field Å
Å
(B) O would not observe a net magnetic field (A) (B)
(C) According to O, magnetic field of both A and B is zero.
(D) According to O, magnetic field of both A and B is cancel each other.
8. In the figure, there is a uniform conducting structure in which each small square has side a. The structure
is kept in uniform magnetic field B :-
i × × ×
G
A D
× × ×
E × × ×
O F
a × × ×
B
H C ×i
a
(A) The magnetic force on the structure is 2 2 iBa

(B) The potential of point B = potential of point D.
(C) Potential of point O = potential of point B
(D) The magnetic force on the structure is 2 iBa

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. A nonconducting disc can have a radius up R = p . It carries a charge of density s given by

2
s = A cos r – B sin r 0 £ r £ R
where r is radial distance from centre. The disc is rotated about an axis perpendicular to its plane and
passing through its centre with an angular velocity w = 2 rad/s :-
A
(A) Radius of disc r for which magnetic field at centre is maximum is r = tan -1
B
-1 B
(B) Radius of disc r for which magnetic field at centre is maximum is r = tan
A
(C) Maximum magnetic field at centre is m0 ( A 2 + B2 - B )

(D) Maximum magnetic field at centre is m 0 ( A 2 + B2 )
10. A circular beam of charge of radius a consists of electrons moving with a constant speed u along the +z
direction. The beam’s axis is coincident with the z axis and the electron charge density is given by
r = cr2 (C/m3) where c is a constant and r is the radial distance from the axis of the beam :-
(A) The current crossing the xy-plane is pcua4
(B) The electric field at distance r (r < a) from z axis is proportional to r3
(C) The magnetic field at distance r (r < a) from z axis is proportional to r3
(D) The electric field at distance r (r < a) from z axis is inversely proportional to r.
11. A non-conducting cylindrical shell of radius R is placed in uniform magnetic field. The axis of the
cylinder is parallel to the direction of magnetic field. A hole is drilled in cylinder and a particle having
charge q and mass m is projected with velocity v0 perpendicular to magnetic field and directed towards
the axis of cylinder as shown in diagram. The particle collides elastically with inner wall of the cylinder
and rebounds.
× × × × × × × × × × ×
(A) The minimum no. of collisions after which it will emerge is two × × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × ×
æ qBR ö × × × × × × × × × × ×
(B) The maximum speed v0 for which it can come out is v 0 = ç ÷ 3. × × × × × × × × × × ×
è m ø × × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × ×
× ×v × × × × × × × × ×
æ pm ö ×
0
× × × × × × × × × ×
(C) The minimum time in which it can come out will be ç ÷ × × × ×
(q, m)
× × × × × × ×
è qB ø
v0 ì æ qBR ö ü
(D) If the particle is projected with a velocity íwhere v 0 = ç ÷ 3 ý it will come out after five
3 î è m ø þ
collisions.
12. A smooth cylinder is fixed on a smooth surface with its axis vertical hole
and radius 1 cm. If a downward magnetic field of magnetic field A
intensity 1 × 105 T exists in a region and charge (q) = 100µC of mass q Ä
100 gm is projected with velocity 4 m/s in anticlockwise direction R
then : V cylinder
(A) Normal exerted by the walls of the cylinder is 120 N
(B) Normal exerted by walls of cylinder is zero
(C) Particle will fly radially outward when it reaches position A on the cylinder.
(D) Radius of curvature at position A will be 4 cm

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. A thin glass rod of radius R and length L carries a uniform surface
Z
charge s. It is set spinning about its axis, at an angular velocity w. w
The magnetic field at a distance S >> R from the axis, in the x-y
L/2
m0 wsLR a
plane is given by g , where a, b & g are integers. Fill Y
é æLö ù
2 2
b ê S2 + ç ÷ ú L/2
ëê è 2 ø úû X
b
the value of a + + g in OMR sheet.
2
2. Figure shows circular region of radius R = 3 m in which upper half has uniform magnetic field
r r
B = 0.2 ( - kˆ ) T and lower half has uniform magnetic field B = 0.2kT
ˆ . A very thin parallel beam of point
charges each having mass m = 2 gm, speed v = 0.3 m/sec and charge q = +1 mC are projected along the
diameter as shown in figure. A screen is placed perpendicular to initial velocity of charges as shown. If
the distance between the points on screen where charges will strikes after being deflected by the magnetic
field is 4X meters, then calculate X.
Screen
3. Consider 3 straight, infinitely long, equally spaced wires (with almost zero radius), each carrying a
current I in the same direction and seperated by distance d. Mass per unit length of each wire is m. If the
middle wire is displaced a small distance x in the same plane, then find out minimum time interval in
pmd
which wire will return to its equilibrium position. If your answer is N . Fill the value of N.
m0 I
4. Mercury is contained in U-tube of uniform square cross-section of side a = 4mm.

Electrodes A and D are sealed inside as shown in the fig. An electric current
I = 10A passes between the electrodes from A to D and magnetic field
B = 5.44 wb/m2 is applied across the horizontal arm perpendicular into the plane
of the figure. Here density of mercury = 13.6 × 103 kg/m3, g = 10 m/s2, Nelgect × ×× ×A
××××
surface tension. The difference (in mm) in mercury level in limbs of U tube is D
× × ×××
B
400
. Find x.
x

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Match the column.
Column-I Column-II
(A) The pressure on walls (P) Current (X) is flowing axially on the surface of a
due to quantity ‘X’ is long thin hollow pipe of radius r.
tending to contract them
Energy : Magnetic field energy

(B) The pressure on walls (Q) Current (X) is flowing tangentially on the surface
due to quantity ‘X’ is of a long thin hollow pipe of radius r.
tending to expand them
Energy : Magnetic field energy

(C) The energy/volume inside the (R) Two current (X) carrying infinite thin sheets as
walls is more than outside. shown in figure.
Energy : Magnetic field energy.

(D) The energy /volume outside (S) A soap bubble present in air containing air.
the walls is more than inside. The temperature inside and outside air is the same.
Surface tension is (X)
Energy : internal energy of air

(T) Point source of light (X) is present at the centre of
a spherical shell with both surfaces perfectly black.
Energy : light energy.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A square loop of uniform conducting wire is as shown in figure. A current-I (in amperes) entes the loop
from one end and exists the loop from opposite end as shown in figure. The length of one side of square
loop is l metre. The wire has uniform cross section area and uniform linear mass density. In four situations
of column-I, the loop is subjected to four different uniform and constant magnetic field. Under the
conditions of column-I, match the column-I with corresponding results of column-II (B0 in column I is
a positive non-zero constant.
y
I
I/2
I/2 I/2
x
I
Column I Column II
r
(A) B = B0iˆ in tesla (P) Magnitude of net force on loop is 2B0 Il newton
r
(B) B = B0 ˆj in tesla (Q) Magnitude of net force on loop is zero
r
(C) B = B0 (iˆ + ˆj ) in tesla (R) Magnitude of net torque on loop about its centre is zero
r
(D) B = B0 kˆ in tesla (S) Magnitude of net force on loop is B0 Il newton
(T) Magnitude of net torque on a loop about its centre is non-zero.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM

CLASS ENTHUSIAST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Constant current is flowing in toroid & top-view of toroid
B
section in which loop ABCD is present as shown in figure.
Then choose the CORRECT statement. C
r r A
(A) ò B.d l is more for AB than DC D
r r
(B) ò B.d l is less for AB than DC
r r (a)
(b)
(C) ò B.d l is equal for both AB and DC
O
(D) Can't say anything without knowing about cross section shape of toroid
2. A thick uniformly charged hollow cylinder of inner radius a and outer radius b rotates with constant
angular speed w about its axis APB, charge density = r
++ + + + + + + + ++
++ + + + + + + + + ++
+
+ a b + w
+ A P B +
++ + + + + + + + + ++
++ + + + + + + + ++
L
Given that
L >>> a
L >>> b
and P is mid point of AB. Choose the incorrect option.
m0 wr(b2 - a2 )
(A) Magnetic field at point P is
2
m0 wr(b2 - a 2 )
(B) Magnetic field at point B is
4
(C) Direction of magnetic field at A, B, P is same.
(D) Graph of magnetic field on the axis of cylinder with distance from point P is
B(magnetic field)
x
L/2 L/2 (distance
from P)
3. When magnetic flux through a coil is changed, the variation of induced current in the coil with time is as
shown in graph. If resistance of coil is 10 W, then the total change in flux of coil will be
I
(A) 4 (B) 8 (C) 2 (D) 6

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. A conducting loop is halfway into a magnetic field. Suppose the magnetic field
begins to increase rapidly in strength. What happens to the loop ? × × × ×
(A) The loop is pushed upward, toward the top of the page. ×r × × ×
B
× × × ×
(B) The loop is pushed downward, toward the bottom of the page.
× × × ×
(C) The loop is pulled to the left, into the magnetic field.
(D) The loop is pushed to the right, out of the magnetic field.
5. A uniform magnetic field B = kt is passing perpendicular to plane of a ring of
resistance R. k is a constant and t is time. If resistance of the ring is constant, the × × ××
current flowing through the ring is :- × × ×
× × × × × ×
(A) Clockwise and constant × × ×× ×
× × ×× × ×
(B) Anticlockwise and constant × × ×
× ×
(C) Zero
(D) Anticlockwise and increasing with time
6. A circular conducting loop of radius R carries a current I. Another straight infinite conductor carrying
current I passes through the diameter of this loop as shown in the figure. The magnitude of force exerted
by the straight conductor on the loop is :-
R
O
m0 I 2 m0 I 2
(A) pµ0I2 (B) µ0I2 (C) (D)
2p p
7. A block of mass 4m and a conducting square loop of mass m (with a cell of emf E and resistance R) are
connected by a light insulating string passing over a frictionless pulley as shown in the figure. The plane
of the loop (initially at rest) is perpendicular to magnetic field. As the system is released :-
m =0 y
4m
´ ´ ´ ´ ´m ´ x
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´ z
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´
l ´
g
´ ´
´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´l ´ ´ ´
(A) The block does not move.

(B) The loop starts rotating about y-axis.
(C) The loop moves down with constantvelocity
(D) The acceleration of the block is constant but not zero.
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
8. A 100 turn rectangular coil ABCD (in XY plane) is hung from one arm of a balance (Figure). A mass
500g is added to the other arm to balance the weight of the coil. A current 4.9 A passes through the coil
and a constant magnetic field of 0.2 T acting inward (in xz plane) is switched on such that only arm CD
of length 1 cm lies in the field. How much additional mass ‘m’ must be added to regain the balance?
(g = 9.8m/s2)
A B
D C
(A) 500 gm (B) 1 gm (C) 100 gm (D) 10 gm

9. In the following figures, the rate of change of magnetic flux linked with area is measured as
æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö
ç dt ÷ , ç dt ÷ and ç dt ÷ respectively at the instant shown in diagram then :-
è øA è ø B è øC
w2
v B
v
N B v
(i) S N B (ii) S (iii)
w1
æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö
(A) ç dt ÷ = ç dt ÷ = 0 (B) ç dt ÷ = ç dt ÷ = 0, ç dt ÷ ¹ 0
è ø A è øB è øA è øC è øB
æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö æ df ö
(C) ç ÷ = 0 (D) ç ÷ =ç ÷ =0&ç ÷ ¹ 0
è dt øC è dt øC è dt ø B è dt øA
10. A ring of radius 20 cm has a total resistance of 0.04W. A uniform magnetic field varying with time B =
(0.4t) T is perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
2p
(A) Induced current in the ring is A.
5
(B) The ring will be in tension.
(C) The ring will be in compression.
(D) The magnetic field due to ring at the center of the ring is in direction opposite to applied magnetic
field.
11. A charge particle of charge q is projected with a speed v in a downward magnetic field in the smooth
tube. Neglecting the effect of gravity:
(A) the particle moves in a circle of radius R. x
qBR x x x
(B) if v £ ,r < R an d N = 0, where r = radius of the circular path x B
m x x x x
R x
qBR mv 2 x x x
(C) if v > ; r = R and N = - Bqv , where N = reaction force
m R Å V
(D) all circles must passes through the point of projection

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. A thin long cylindrical shell of radius R carries a uniform surface charge density s. It rotates with a
constant angular velocity w in a gravity free space. Its mass per unit surface area is l. The sheet from
which the cylinder is made can withstand a maximum stress of T N/m. under longitudinal loading. It is
B2
known that the relative permeability of cylinder is 1. [Magnetostatic energy density is given by 2m ]
0
R w
m0 s2 w2 R2
(A) Magnetostatic energy density inside the cylinder will be
2
m0 s2 w2 R2
(B) Magnetostatic energy density outside the cylinder will be
2
(C) Maximum angular velocity with which the cylinder can be rotated without developing a crack on it
2T - s2 / e0
is w0 =
2lR + m 0 s2R 2
(D) Maximum angular velocity with which the cylinder can be rotated without developing a crack on it
2T
is w0 = 2lR + m s2R 2
0
13. Figure shows a square current carrying coil of edge length L. The magnetic field on the coil is given by
r B y B x y
B = 0 iˆ + 0 ˆj where B0 is a positive constant. (A is area of coil) i
L L
1
(A) If coil is free to rotate about x axis torque on the coil is given by iAB0 î .
x
2
1
(B) If coil is free to rotate about y - axis torque on coil is given by - iAB 0ˆj .
2
(C) Resultant force on coil is zero.
r r
(D) Equation for the torque µ ´ B where µ is magnetic moment of coil is not valid on the coil if any of
the side is fixed as axis.
14. Match the options given in List-I with those given in List-II.
List-I List-II
B
(P) A current carrying loop placed (1) Net force as well as net
in uniform magnetic field in torque on the loop is zero.
plane of the loop.
(Q) Current carrying loop placed (2) Net force as well as net
near an infinite current carrying torque on the loop is non
wire (both in same plane). zero.
(R) A small current carrying loop (3) Net force on the loop is zero
placed vertically below the infinite but net torque on the loop
current carrying wire. is non zero
CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
(S) A small current carrying loop (4) Net force on the loop is non
placed in plane perpendicular to zero but net torque on the
wire infinite current carrying wire as loop is zero.
shown.
Code :
P Q R S P Q R S
(A) 3 4 1 2 (B) 3 4 2 1
(C) 3 2 4 1 (D) 3 1 4 2
SECTION-III
1. A current of I = 2 A flows in a circuit having the shape of an isosceles trapezium.
If magnetic field at point O in the plane of trapezium is 2 × 10–6 T and if length of O
smaller base of trapezium is l = 100 mm and distance h = 50 mm as shown then find
ratio of length of parallel sides of trapezium. h
2. The square loop has sides of length 2cm. A magnetic field points out of the page and its magnitude is
x
given by B = (4t2y) T. Emf induced in loop is given by µV at t = 2.5 s. Find the value of x.
10
y
x
3. A conducting ring of mass m and radius r has a weightless conducting rod PQ of length 2r and resistance
2R attached to it along its diameter. It is pivoted at its centre C with its plane vertical, and two blocks of
mass m and 2m are suspended by means of a light in-extensible string passing over it as shown in the
figure. The ring is free to rotate about C and the system is placed in a magnetic field B (into the plane of
the ring). A circuit is now completed by connecting the ring at A and C to a battery of emf V. Find the
value of V (in volt) so that the system remains static. Take B = 0.1 T, m = 10 gm, r = 0.5 m, R = 1W.
–
A
P V
+
C
Q
m 2m
4. Figure shows a square loop 10 cm on each side in the x-y plane with its centre at the origin. An infinite
wire is at z = 12 cm above y-axis. What is torque on loop due to magnetic force? If torque is expressed
as 12x ×10–6 N-m, fill value of x.
z
i1 = 65A
12 cm
D
y
A
C
10 cm
i2 = 78A x
B

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. The magnetic dipole moment of a uniformly charged lamina in shape of equilateral triangle of side a is
M, when rotated about axis AB with uniform w (see figure). If a hexagonal lamina of side a and having
same charge density is rotated about axis A'B' (with same angular speed w). The diopole moment
generated is 5aM. Find a.
A'
A a
a a
a a
a a
a a
B B'
SECTION-IV
1. Ravana-modified : Consider a two dimensional network of uniform wire (non-zero resistivity). Point
B, D, E and centers of all the ‘heads’ are collinear and so are A,C, F and the centre ‘head’. ‘Heads touch
each other symmetrically. Assume dc source unless stated otherwise,
D B E
F
A
Column – I Column – II
(A) Magnetic field at the centre of the central (P) Zero
‘head’ when battery is connected between
A and B
(B) Magnetic field at the centre of the central (Q) Non-zero
‘head’ when battery is connected between
D and E
(C) Magnetic field at the centre of the central (R) Zero or non-zero behaviour of average
‘head’ when battery is connected between field over a long period is same when a.c.
A and C source is used
(D) Magnetic field at the centre of the central (S) Can't be defined if the points are short
‘head’ when battery is connected between circuited using ideal wire of shortest length.
C and E (T) Non-zero if the points are short circuited
using ideal wire of shortest length.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM
CLASS
TM
Path to success KOTA (RAJASTHAN ) ENTHUSIAST COURSE

ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A wire carrying a current I is bent into the shape of an exponential spiral, r = eq, from q = 0 to q = 2p as
shown in figure. To complete a loop, the ends of the spiral are connected by a straight wire along the
x-axis. Find the magnitude of B at the origin.
I
I
q x
r
I
m0 I m0I
(A) éë1 - e -2 p ùû (B) 2 éë1 - e -2 p ùû
2p 2 4p
m0 I m0 I
(C) éë1 - e -2 p ùû (D) éë1 - e -2 p ùû
2p 4p
2. An infinitely long cylindrical wire of radius 'R' is carrying a current with current density j = ar3 (where
R
a is constant and 'r' is the radial distance from the axis of the wire). If the magnetic field at r = is 'B1'
2
B2
and at r = 2R is 'B2' then the ratio B is:-
1
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8

3. A conductor carrying current 60A is in the form of a semicircle AB of radius R and lying in xy-plane
® ®
with its centre 'O' at origin as shown in the figure. The magnitude of Ñò B × d l for the circle x + z2 = 3R2
2
in xz-plane due to current in curve AB is 10nm0. Find the value of n(n is an integer)
B
I
O X
Z A
(A) 7 (B) 3 (C) 5 (D) 8

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. The flux linked with a coil of 200 turns, rises at a uniform rate from 0 to 40 µ Wb in 0.01 s, then remains
constant for next 0.02 s and then falls to zero at a uniform rate in 0.005 s. Which one of the following
graph represents the induced emf in coil with time ?
e
0.8 V
e 0.03 0.035
(A) 0.8 V (B) t(sec)
0.01
t(sec)
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.035
–1.6V
e
1.6V e
0.01 0.03 0.035

(C) 0.01 (D) t(sec)
0.03 0.035
t(sec) –0.8V
–0.8 V
5. A long copper wire of circular cross-section carries a current of 10A. "S" is a plane surface as shown in
figure wholly inside the wire passing through axis of cylinder. The magnetic flux per meter of wire, for
the plane surface is, in wb/m.
‘S’ plane
(A) 1 × 10–5 (B) 1.5 × 10–6 (C) 1 × 10–6 (D) 1.5 × 10–5
6. A rectangular loop PQRS, is being pulled with constant speed into a uniform transverse magnetic field
by a force F (as shown). E.m.f. induced in side PS and potential difference between points P and S
respectively are (Resistance of the loop = r)
P × ×Q × ×
× × × F ×
l
× × × ×
S × ×R × ×
B
2l
Fr
(A) Zero, (B) zero, Zero
Bl
Fr Fr Fr
(C) Zero, (D) ,
6Bl 6Bl 6Bl

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. Two metallic rings of radius R are rolling on a metallic rod. A magnetic field of magnitude B is applies
in the region. The magnitude of potential difference between point A and point C on the two rings
(as shown), will be :-
C A
´ ´w ´ ´ ´ ´ w´ ´
v v
´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´ ´
2
(A) 0 (B) 4 BwR 2 (C) 8 BwR 2 (D) 2 BwR
8. A wire of 3 mm radius is made up of an inner material (0 < r < 2 mm) for which conductivity s = 107
SI units, and an outer material (2 mm < r < 3 mm) for which conductivity s = 4x107 SI units. If the
wire carries a total current of 100 mA dc,
(A) The current in both the material is the same
(B) The current in the inner material is less than that in the outer material.
r
(C) The magnetic field in the inner material as function of r is T
1200
æ 105 r 2 1 ö
(D) The magnetic field in the outer wire as a function of r is 3 ×10 ç 6 - 20 ÷ T –6
è ø
9. In zero gravity region, a point charge +Q of mass M is connected to a spring of natural length L0 and
spring constant k. A uniform magnetic field B is directed inside the plane of paper. The point charge is
Mv 0
given an initial velocity v0 perpendicular to the length of spring as shown. It is given that B = .
QL 0
Then which of the following quantities remain(s) conserved during the motion of particle?
V0
×B
O +Q,M
k
L0
(A) Kinetic energy (B) Potential energy
(C) Total energy of system (D) Angular momentum of particle about O
10. In a region having an electric field and a magnetic field, a positive charge is released with the below
given parameters
r
ì E = aiˆ
ïï r
ˆ ˆ
íB = bi + cj + dkˆ
ïr ˆ ˆ
ïî v = xi + yj
(A) If ( yb + cx ) kˆ + xdjˆ = 0 charged particle moves along straight line

(B) For c = 0, d = 0, y = 0 charged particle moves along straight line with increasing speed
(C) For c = 0, d = 0, y ¹ 0 charged particle moves along helix of varying pitch
rr
(D) For a = 0, v.B = 0 charged particle moves along circle

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. A closed conducting loop, having resistance R, is being rotated about an axis perpendicular to the
magnetic field. Magnetic flux through the closed conducting loop is continuously changing according
to the graph shown in the adjacent figure. Then, which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
Flux f (in T-m2)
10
time t(in sec)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-10
(A) The electric current through the loop is minimum (zero) at t = 1 s, 3s and 5s.
(B) The electric current through the loop is minimum (zero) at t = 0 s, 2s and 6s.
(C) Total charge flown through any cross-section of a closed conducting loop between 0 and 6 s is zero
(D) Total work done in rotating the loop in the magnetic field is zero
12. A square loop of finite resistance at time t = 0 starts moving parallel to x-axis with a constant acceleration
1 m/s2 as shown in a space where magnetic field is changing with position and time according to relations
dB dB
= 10-3 T / s , = -10 -3 T / m .
dt dx
× × ×
Force
× × ×
× × ×
(A) Initially current in loop is anticlockwise (B) Initially current in loop is clockwise
(C) At t = 1s, current in loop is zero (D) After t > 1s current is anticlockwise
Paragraph For Questions 13 to 15
A small ball of mass m and charge q is attached to the bottom end of a piece of negligible-mass thread of
length l, whose top end is fixed. The system formed by the thread and ball is in vertical plane and is in
uniform horizontal magnetic field B, which is perpendicular to the plane of figure and points into the
paper
m, q
V0 A
The ball is started with a velocity v0 from lower most point of circle in a direction perpendicular both to
the magnetic induction and to direction of thread. The ball moves along a circular path such that thread
remains tight during the whole motion. Neglect any loss of energy.

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
13. What is the magnitude of magnetic induction B, if the minimum initial speed at which the described
1
motion of ball(complete vertical circular motion) occurs is v 0 = 17gL
2
3mg mg
(A) 2q gL (B) 2 gL
2mg
(C) 3q gL (D) Situation is not possible
14. By what factor is the force acting on the thread (tension in thread) at point A is greater than at point C,
when speed of the ball is the above stated one?
21 + 17 21 + 2 17 21 + 3 17
18 18 18
15. Choose CORRECT statement
(A) If direction of magnetic field is reversed then value of B will be same as calculated in above questions
of this paragraph
(B) If B is reversed, then conservation of energy will still be applicable
(C) If magnetic field were not present then particle will complete vertical circle for any value of v0
(D) All of above are correct
SECTION-III
1. A charge particle of mass 'm' and charge –q is released from rest from the given position. In the presence
and absence of uniform horizontal magnetic field normal reaction acting on the charge at point P are N1
5Bq 2gR
and N2 respectively. Neglect friction. The value of N1 – N2 is given by . Find k
k
m
× × × × × ×
×
\\\\
\\\\
× × × × ×R
B
\\
\\\\
\\ \ × × × ×
\\\
\
\
\\ \
\\
\\\\ \ \\
\\\ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \\\\
P
Hemispherical surface
2. A moving-coil galvanometer has 100 turns and each turn has an area 2.0 cm2. The magnetic field
produced by the manget is 0.01 T. The deflection in the coil is 2 radian when a current of 10 mA is
passed through it. If the torsional constant of the suspension wire is N × 10–6 N-m/rad, then find N.
3. A non relativistic positive charge particle of charge q and mass m is projected perpendicular to uniform
magnetic field B as shown. Neglecting gravity calculate X-coordinate of point on screen at which the
r 3 mV
charge particle will hit : d = , where r = . If the x-coordinate is nr then find n.
2 qB
V
× × × × × ×B
d
× × × × × ×
d
Screen
x=0 x

CLASS TEST
TM

ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. Square wire frame ABCD of mass 5kg is connected by a block of mass "5kg" placed on a rough surface
having coefficient of friction equals to 0.6. String is massless and passes over a frictionless pulley.
Frame consist of Battery of E.M.F. 10 volt and a resistance 5W is connected in a loop as shown. Length
of side of loop is 5m and magnetic field is 0.5 T. Find the time taken by loop to enter completely into
magnetic field (Neglect self induction of the coil ABCD & consider wire CD just inside the magnetic
field at the time of release)
5kg
A B
10 5W 5m
C D
SECTION-IV
1. A circular conducting coil of radius 1m and resistance 1W is placed such that half of its area is in a region
()
of uniform magnetic field B1 kˆ and the remaining half is in another region of uniform magnetic field
( ) as shown in figure. Column I shows values of B and B

B2 - kˆ 1 2
as a function of time t, (for t ³ 0), while
column II predicts possible directions of current and magnitude of force.
B1 B2
Column-I Column-II
(A) B1= 0; B2 = 10 (P) Current either always clockwise or always zero
or always anticlockwise
(B) B1= 10; B2 = 10t + 14 (Q) Current sometimes clockwise, sometimes
anticlockwise, and at some time zero
(C) B1 = t2; B2 = t2 + 4 (R) Force may be non zero
(D) B1 = t2; B2 = t + 4 (S) force must be non–zero

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A current 'I' flows through a thin wire as shown in the figure. If there exists an external magnetic field B
in the same plane of the wire. The torque acting on the coil is :-
y 2a
2a
a
x
a
2a
2a
æ pa 2 2ö æ pa 2 2ö
Iç
(A) ç 2
è
+ 8a ÷
÷
ø
B (B) Iç
ç 2
è
+ 4 a ÷B
÷
ø
(C) I pa 2 + 8a 2 B (D) 0 ( )
2. Two-small magnetic dipole with the same magnetic moments µ are located at a distance r from each
other. Determine force of their interaction.
µ µ
3 mo m 2 mo m 2 1mo m 2 mo m 2
(A) F = (B) F = (C) F = (D) F =
2p r 4 p r4 2p r 4 2p r 4
3. A wire of radius R, carries current uniformly distributed over its cross section. The total current carried
by the wire is I. The magnetic energy per unit length inside the wire is
m0 I2 m0 I2 m0 I2 m0 I2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4p 8p 2p 16p
4. A uniform magnetic field B that is perpendicular to the plane of the page now passes through the loops,
as shown. The field is confined to a region of radius a, where a < b, and is changing at a constant rate.
The induced emf in the wire loop of radius b is e. What is the induced emf in the wire loop of radius
2b :-
(A) 0 (B) e/2 (C) e (D) 2e

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A spy taps the serial link between two computers by wrapping a small coil around the current-carrying
wire connecting the computers. The current versus time for the transmission between the two computers
is a signal as shown in figure. Then the sketch of the induced emf in the coil versus time as detected by
the spy will be :-
I(t)
t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ms
e(t)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ms t
(A)
e(t)
(B) t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ms
e(t)
(C) t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ms
e(t)
(D)
t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ms
6. Consider a toroid of circular cross-section of radius b, major radius R much greater than minor radius b.
Find the total energy stored in toroid. (I is current, N is total number of turns) :-
m 0 N 2 I2 b 2 m 0 N 2 I2 b 2 m 0 N 2 I2 b 2 m 0 N 2 I2 b 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2R 3R 6R 4R
7. For an ideal transformer, ratio of V1 & V2 is equal to
V1(~) L1 L2 V2(~)
Where L1 & L2 are self inductances of primary and secondary windings. (For an ideal transformer
coefficient of mutual induction for pair of coils is M = L1L 2 ) :-
L1 L1 L2 L2
(A) L (B) (C) L (D)
2 L2 1 L1

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

8. Rod AB, BC, CD & DA form a square loop having current i, mass and length of each rod is m and l
respectively, is situated in a uniform magnetic field B as shown in the figure and it can rotate about axis
P1P2, then
P1
(m,l) B (m,l)
i i
A C
B
(m,l) i i (m,l)
D
P2
3 Bi
(A) Angular accelerati on of the square loop at t = 0, is
2m
3iB
(B) Angular velocity when square loop rotated by 30°, is
2m
iBl2
(C) Torque on the loop when it rotated by 60°, is
2
(D) Angular acceleration of the square loop when it is rotated from starting to 90°, decreases
9. The radius of the circular loop is 'a'. Magnetic field is increasing at the constant rate a. Magnetic field is
confined to a cylindrical region and axis of magnetic field coincides with the axis of the loop. Resistance
per unit length of the wire of loop is r. Choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
aa
(A) Current in the loop PQRS is anticlockwise × × × × ×
2r S
aa
(B) Current in the loop PQRS in clockwise × × × × ×
r P x R
(C) Current in the wire PR is zero

× × × × ×
Q
paa
(D) Current in the wire PR is
2r
10. In each of the following diagrams, the magnetic field in the circular region is inside the plane of the
paper and is increasing with time. Four different shaped metallic conductors 'PQR' are placed as shown.
The end P will be more positively charged compared to R in : (Q is the centre in options AB).
Q
ÄB ÄB ÄB
ÄB
R
(A) P Q (B) P Q R (C) (D) C
P Q R
P R

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A massless square loop of side a is kept in xz plane as shown. Magnetic field in space is non uniform
B0 y ˆ
given by B = k . The loop is rotated about x-axis with constant angular velocity w.
a
y
x
a
z
11. e.m.f. induced in the loop as function of time is equal to :-

B0 a 2 B0 a2 w
(A) w sin 2wt (B) (1 + sin 2wt )
2 2
(C) 2B0a2w cos wt (D) B0a2w cos2wt
12. Torque required to rotate the loop with constant angular velocity (as a function of time). Take resistance
of loop = R.
B02 a 4 w B02 a 4 w 2
(1 + sin 2wt )
2
(A) (B) sin 2wt
4R 4R
4 B02 a 4 w 2 B02 a 4 w
(C) cos wt (D) cos4 wt
R R
Paragraph for Question Nos. 13 & 14
In the figure a small dielectric body of mass m carries charge q. The body lies at the end of a rod of
length b, having negligible mass. The other end of the rod is connected to a vertical shaft mounted on
frictonless bearings so that the rod is perpendicular to the shaft and thus free to swing in a horizontal
plane. At time t = 0, the rod is at rest, and a uniform magnetic field is turned on whose magnitude
increases linearly with time : B = kt, where k is a constant. The direction of the field is parallel to the
shaft.
m, q
B = ktB
b
13. What is the angular acceleration of the body about the shaft.
qk 2qk qk 2qk
(A) a = (B) a = (C) a = (D) a =
2m m m 3m
14. What is the speed v of the body as a function of time ?
2qkbt qkbt 2qkbt 2qkbt
(A)v = (B) v = (C) v = (D) v =
2m 2m m 3m

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. There is a metallic ring of radius 1m and having negligible resistance placed perpendicular to a constant
magnetic field of magnitude 1T as shown in figure. One end of a resistanceless rod is hinged at the
centre of ring O and other end is placed on the ring. Now rod is rotated with constant angular velocity
4 rad/s by some external agent and circuit is connected as shown in the figure, initially switch is open
and capacitor is uncharged. If switch S is closed at t = 0, then calculate heat loss (in mJ) from the resistor
R1 from t = 0 to the instant when voltage across the capacitor becomes half of steady state voltage.
(Assume plane of ring to be horizontal and friction to be absent at all the contacts).
R1
R2 = 20 W
B0 R1 = 10 W
××
R2 C = 3 mF
×O ×× C
× ×
2. An infinitely long straight wire carries a current i1 = 1 amp. A rectangular current loop placed in the
same plane of shown dimensions carries a current i2 = 1 amp anticlockwise. Magnitude of net force on
m0
the loop is found to be b . Find value of b.
4p
i1 i2 2a
2a
2a
3. A line charge l = 10–6 C/m is fixed on the rim of a wheel of radius 'R' = 1m which is then suspended
horizontally, so that it is free to rotate (the spokes are made of wood). In the central region up to radius
1 r
a= m there is uniform magnetic field, B0 = 1T pointing up. Now suddenly the field is turned off. If
2
the moment of inertia (I) is = 0.25 kg/m2, the final angular velocity 'w' of the wheel is np × 10–6 rad/s.
Find n.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. An uniform magnetic field is present in a cylindrical region as shown. This field is increasing uniformly
with time. An equilateral loop is placed in such a way that its vertex coincide with centre of cylinderical
region. Resistances of sides BC and CA are negligible whereas that of AB is 2W. If a current of magnitude
2A ampere flows int he triangular loop, due to induced emf, find potential difference between points A
and B (in volt).
dB
= constant
dt
A B
5. Two infinite parallel wires separated by a distance d carry equal currents I in opposite directions, with I
dI
increasing at the rate = 2A / s . A square loop of wire of length d on a side lies in the plane of the
dt
wires at a distance d = 2p(m) from one of the parallel wires, as illustrated in figure. Find the emf induced
2
(in V ) in the square loop. I f your answer is nµ 0ln write value of n.
3
I
1
d
I
2
d
d
d
6. Find the value of instantaneous power (in W) supplied by battery at the moment after the switch is
closed.
5000W
100V 1H 5000W

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Four small identical bar magnets each of magnetic dipole moment M are placed on vertices of a square
of side a such that diagonals of the square coincide with perpendicular bisectors of respectively magnets.
The net magnetic field at the centre of the square is :- S N
m0 M a a
(A) 0 (B) 3 N S
2p a O
S N
2 2m 0 M m M a a
(C) . 3 (D) 0 . 3
p a p a N S
2. If the B-H curves of two samples of P and Q of iron are as shown below, then which one of the
following statements is CORRECT ?
B B
H H
Sample P Sample Q
(A) Both P and Q are suitable for making permanent magnet

(B) P is suitable for making permanent magnet and Q for making electromagnet
(C) P is suitable for making electromagnet and Q is suitable for permanent magnet
(D) Both P and Q are suitable for making electromagnets
3. Two capacitors of capacitance C1 and C2 are charged to a potential +– +–
difference of V1 and V2 respectively and are connected to an inductor +– +–
+ – +–
of inductance L as shown in the figure. Initially key k is open. Now V 1 + – V 2 +–
+ –– +–
key k is closed and current in the circuit starts increasing. When K C1 + C2 +–
current in the circuit is maximum L
(A) charge on both the capacitors is same
(B) induced emf in the inductor is zero
(C) potential difference across both the capacitors is half of the induced emf
(D) electrostatic potential energy stored in both the capacitors is same
4. A wire of fixed length is wound in such a way that it forms a solenoid of length 'l' and radius 'r'. Its self
inductance is found to be L. Now if same wire is wound in such a way that it forms a solenoid of length
l r
and radius , then the self inductance will be:
2 2
(A) 2 L (B) L (C) 4 L (D) 8 L
5. Two resistors of 10 W and 20 W and an ideal inductor of 10 H are connected to a 2 V battery as shown.
The key K is inserted at time t = 0. The initial (t = 0) and final (t ®¥) currents through battery are
1 1 1 1
(A) A, A (B) A, A
15 10 10 15
2 1 1 2
(C) A, A (D) A, A
15 10 15 25

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. Find the initial current through the inductor and the current through it after a long time. Switch is closed
at t = 0.
2W 3W
i
10V t=0 6W 2H
(A) 2A, 2A (B) 10/11 A, 0 A (C) 2A, 0A (D) 0A, 2A.

7. A cylindrical space is having uniform magnetic field. The field varies
with time as B = B0 + at. From point A to B there are three different
paths as shown in figure.
Path 1 is a semi circle of radius a, with AB as diameter.
Path 2 contain two straight lines AO and OB. O
1
Path 3 is a single straight line AB.
r r
If ò E.d l from A to B along paths 1, 2 and 3 are E1, E2 and E3
A
2
2a 3 B
respectively, then mark the INCORRECT options. :-
(A) E1 = E2 = E3 (B) E1 = E3 > E2
(C) E1 > E3 > E2 (D) E3 > E2 > E1
8. The potential difference across a 2H inductor as a function of time is shown in the figure. At time
t = 0, current is zero. Choose the correct statement(s) :-
V(volts)
10
0 2 4 t(sec)
(A) Current at t = 2 sec is 5A

(B) Current at t = 2 sec is 10A
(C) Current vs time graph across inductor will be iL
iC
(D) Current vs time graph across inductor will be
t
9. A very long straight conductor and a square conducting frame lie in a plane and are
separated from each other as shown in the figure a = 10 cm. If current in the square
frame is increasing a rate of 2 A/s in clockwise direction :-
(A) Mutual inductance of the two loops is 2ln2 × 10–8H
(B) The current induced in the wire is upwards.
(C) The current induced in the wire is downwards. a a
(D) The current induced in the wire is zero.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. A coil is wound on a hollow insulating cylinder, which contains in it a laminated iron core. The dependence
of inductance L with the displacement x of the iron core is shown in the figure. In the initial state x = 0
(the core is fully inserted into the coil), the current in the coil is 1.0 A.
L(mH)
6.0
4.0
2.0
- 20 - 10 0.0 10 20 x(cm)
(A) The current in the coil immediately after the core is quickly taken out of the coil is 5 amp.
(B) The current in the coil immediately after the core is quickly taken out of the coil is 2.5 amp.
(C) Magnetic flux associated with coil initially is 5 milli Tesla m2.
(D) Magnetic flux associated with coil just after quick removal is 5 mili Tesla m2.
11. In the circuit shown below, switch S is kept open and circuit is in steady state. At t = 0, the switch S is
closed and new steady state is reached after some time. Mark the CORRECT option(s) :
3W
500mH
100µF 6V 12V
3W
3W S
(A) Current in the inductor when the circuit reaches the new steady state is 4A.
(B) The net change in flux in the inductor is 1.5 Wb.
(C) The potential difference across the inductor is 9 V when the circuit reaches a new steady state.
(D) The charge stored in the capacitor in the new steady state is 1.2 mC.
A small bead of mass m and charge q is threaded on a thin horizontal ring of radius R made of insulating
material. The bead can move on the circular track without friction and is initially at rest. A magnetic field
that is cylindrically symmetric (about axis t) is created, in which the component of magnetic induction
that is perpendicular to the plane of the track depends only on the distance r measured from the centre
and time t :
E0
B (r, t) =
.t,
r
where E0 is a given constant. (In a negligibly small neighbourhood of r = 0 the induction has some finite
value)
O R
m,q
t

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

(A) Bead experiences an electric force that has decreasing magnitude and radially outward
(B)Bead experiences an electric force that has increasing magnitude and radially outward
(C)Bead experiences electric force of constant magnitude
(D) Bead experiences a conservative electric force
13. The velocity-time function of the bead is :-
E0q E0q E0q E 0 qR
(A) t (B) t (C) t (D) t
2mR 2m m m
14. How does the radial component of the normal force between the bead and the track change as function
of time ?
E 20 q 2 t 2 E20 q2 t 2 R
(A) (B)
mR m
E 20 q 2 t 2
(C) (D) Wire does not exert any radial force on bead
mR
The cause of earth's magnetic field has been investigated by scientists for last 4 centuries. One speculation
is that this magnetic field is caused by charges circulating in the molten core of earth. In this paragraph,
we will try to explore this possibility. Assume that the circulating charges are moving in a circular path
about the centre of earth. Their circle is assumed to be in the same plane as magnetic equator. The axis
of this circle (and imaginary magnet of earth) are assume to be parallel the earth's rotational axis. We
assume that the circulation charges are rotating in the same sense/opposite sense to the earth's rotation.
At the magnetic equator, the magnetic field of earth is observed to be 4 × 10–3 T. The radius of earth is
assumed to be 6 × 106 m.
15. Choose CORRECT statement(s) :
(A) If field was produced by moving positive charges they would circulate in direction of earth's rotation.
(B) If field was produced by moving negative charges, they would circulate in direction of earth's
rotation.
(C) The magnetic moment of earth is 864 × 1022 J/T.
(D) The magnetic field of earth at poles would be 8 × 10–3 T.
16. If sun produces magnetic field of 10–2 T at an angle of 53° to axis of rotation of earth :
geo North
w
53°
geo South
(A) The torque on earth is approx 5.2 × 1020 Nm

(B) The potential energy of earth-sun magnetic field is +ve.
(C) The potential energy of earth-sun magnetic field is –ve.
(D) The torque on earth is approx 6.9 × 1022 Nm.
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. A uniform magnetic field B exists in a square region of side ‘a’ in inward direction. A particle having
charge q and mass m enters the region with velocity v0 perpendicular to side AP and exits from side CD
qBa
and an angle q with normal to side CD as shown in diagram. If sinq = xmv then find x.
0
q
D C
× × × ×
× × × ×
× × × ×
× × × ×
A P
V0
2. A solid sphere of mass m = 1kg and radius R = 10 cm is being wrapped by N turns of a massless wire,
is kept on a rough inclined plane. If the wire carries a current i, the sphere remains in equilibrium in a
r r
horizontal magnetic field B If B is suddenly reversed, find the angular acceleration of the sphere. If
answer is n × 100 rad/s2. Write the value of n. (Given q = 37°)
i Sphere
3. A loop is formed by two parallel conductors connected by a solenoid with inductance L = 103 H and a
conducting rod of mass m = 1gm which can freely slide (without friction) over a pair of conductors. The
conductors are located in a horizontal plane in a uniform magnetic field B = 4T in the direction soon.
The distance between conductors is equal to l = 1 m. At the moment t = 0, the rod is imparted an initial
velocity V0 to the right. Determine angular frequency (in rad/s) of oscillation of rod.
B V0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Column-I shows some curves, and their properties in part of space are given in column-II.
Here C – represents a closed loop, S – represents a closed surface
Match the Column-I with Column-II.
S
(A) (P) Such curves can represent both electric and

magnetic field lines
Density of field lines first

increases then decreases
as we move radially outward
r r
ÑòC l ¹ 0
C
(B) (Q) H.d
r
where H represents electric or magnetic field
Density of field lines continuously

decreases as we move radially outward
Axis
r r
(C) S (R) ÑòC l = 0
H.d
r
C where H represents electric or magnetic field
Axis
S
r r
(D) C (S) ÑòS H.dA =0
r
r r
(T) ÑòS H.dA ¹ 0
r

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the given circuit diagram, the key K is switched on at t = 0. The ratio of the current i through the cell
at t = 0 and at t = ¥ will be :-
L 3R
C R
i 6R
e k
(A) 3 : 1 (B) 1 : 3 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
2. The circuit is in steady state with switch S closed. Now if switch is B
opened, the voltage developed across the inductor will be :- S

(A) 5V with B at higher potential
(B) 5V with A at higher potential A 4W
12W
15v
(C) 3V with B at higher potential
(D) 10V with B at higher potential
3. When switch S is closed, then for what value of R will the time constant will be 100 ms.
40mH
200 W
R 600W
(A) 400 W (B) 300 W (C) 200 W (D) 100 W

4. A magnetic field (B), uniform between two magnets can be determined by measuring the induced
voltage in the loop as it is pulled through the gap at uniform speed 20 m/sec. Size of magnet is 2 cm ×
1cm × 2cm and size of coil 4 cm × 6 cm as shown in figure. The correct variation of induced emf with
time is : (Assume at t = 0, the coil enters the magnetic field) :-
m
2c
N
1cm
m
4c
S
m
2c
1cm
6cm
E E
0.40B 0.40B
(A) 500 µsec (B) 0
500 t(µsec)
2500 3000 2500 3000
–0.40B –0.40B
E E
0.80B 0.80B
(C) 500 µsec (D) 0
500 t(µsec)
2500 3000 2500 3000
–0.80B –0.80B

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
r
5. A conducting ring of radius R is placed in uniform inward magnetic field B as shown. If ring is moving
with velocity vr in its plane, the induced emf across arc PQ will be :-
P
Q
vBR æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
(A) ç 1+ ÷ (B) vBR ç 1 - ÷ 45°
2 è 2ø è 2ø v
B
æ 1 ö vBR æ 1 ö
(C) vBR ç 1 + ÷ (D) ç 1- ÷
è 2ø 2 è 2ø
6. In the shown figure uniform magnetic field B0 is pointing out of the plane in the region. Wire CD is
fixed and has resistance R, while OA & OB are conducting wires rotating with angular velocity w about
O as shown. If at some instant OA = OB = l and each wire makes angle q = 30° with Y-axis of the
current through resistance R is :
Y
B
D R
C
B A
w 30 30 w
l l
O
Bw l2 3Bw l 2 3Bw l2 Bw l2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
R 2R 4R 2R
7. A charge (q, m) is thrown perpendicularly with speed v from a point at a distance r from an infinite long
current (I) carrying wire. If its maximum distance from wire is R then :
æ 2 pmv ö
(A) R will be infinite (B) R will be ç re m0 qI ÷
ç ÷
è ø
q v
(r)
æ 4 pmv ö æ pmv ö
(C) R will be ç re m0 qI ÷ (D) R will be ç re m0qI ÷
ç ÷ ç ÷
è ø è ø
8. A particle of mass m and charge q enters a region of magnetic field (as shown) with speed v. There is a
region in which the magnetic field is absent, as shown. The particle after entering the region collides
elastically with a rigid wall. Time after which the velocity of particle becomes anti parallel to its initial
velocity is :
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
x x x
mv mv Wall
2qB 2qB
m m m m
(A) (p + 4 ) (B) qB ( p + 2 ) (C) 4qB ( p + 2 ) (D) 4qB ( 2 p + 3 )
2qB
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

9. At a small distance from a solenoid carrying a current there is placed a
circular coil with a current in such a manner that the solenoid’s axis
lies in the plane of the circular coil. The directions of the currents in
solenoid and circular coil are shown by arrows. Mark the CORRECT
statement(s) :
(A) Circular coil rotates counter clockwise and begins to moves towards the solenoid.
(B) Circular coil rotates clockwise and begins to moves away from the solenoid.
(C) If the direction of current in the circular coil is opposite to that in figure then circular coil rotates
counter clockwise and begins to moves away the solenoid.
(D) If the direction of current in the circular coil is opposite to that in figure then circular coil rotates
clockwise and begins to moves towards the solenoid.
10. Two long wires parallel to Z-axis, having current I each in same direction are at distance 4a from each
other. A cylinder of radius a and length L has its axis as Z-axis and centre the origin of coordinates.If the
net upward magnetic flux through half of the curved cylindrical surface above X-Z plane be f. Then
mark the INCORRECT options.
Y
I
(–2a, 0, 0)
X
(2a, 0, 0)
I
L
µ0 ILln2 µ0 ILln3 -µ0ILln2 -µ0ILln3

(A) f = (B) f = (C) f = (D) f =
p p p p
11. Shown below are the essentials of a commercial mass spectrometer. This device is used to measure the
composition of gas samples, by measuring the abundance of species of different masses. An ion of mass m
and charge q = +e is produced in source S, a chamber in which a gas discharge is taking place. The initially
stationary ion leaves S, accelerated by a potential difference DV > 0, and then enters a selector chamber, S1,
r r
in which there is an adjustable magnetic field B1 , pointing out of the page and a deflecting electric field E ,
r
pointing from positive to negative plate. Only particles of a uniform velocity v1 leave the selector. The
r
emerging particles at S2, enter a second magnetic field B2 , also pointing out of the page. The particle then
moves in a semicircle, striking an electronic sensor at a distance x from the entry slit :-
eB22 x 2 S2
(A) the mass of the particle is
8DV S1 B1 – ––
S
eB22 x 2 E+ ++
DV
(B) the mass of the particle is B2
4 DV
(C) the magnetic field in the selector chamber that is needed to x
ExB2
ensure that the particle travels straight through is
2DV
(D) the magnetic field in the selector chamber that is needed to electronic sensor
ExB 2
ensure that the particle travels straight through is .
4 DV
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Figure shows a uniform magnetic field B (directed inwards), cylindrical in shape,
with radius R. Dotted line shows the boundary of magnetic field. A point charge
q, mass m, moving with velocity u, directed towards the centre of cylindrical R
u
region, enters the field :
C
(A) If u increases, time spent by charge inside field increases then decreases.
(B) If u increases, time spent by charge inside field decreases.
(C) Time spent inside is directly proportional to m.
(D) Time spent inside is not directly proportional to m.
13. A ring of mass m and radius R is set into pure rolling on horizontal rough surface in a uniform magnetic
field of strength B as shown in the figure. A point charge q of negligible mass is attached to rolling ring.
Friction is sufficient so that it does not slip at any point of its motion. ( q is measured in clockwise from
positive y-axis)
××××××× m× × × × × × × × × × × ×
×××××××× ××× q ××××××
×××××××× ×××××××××××
× × × × × × × q × × × × v = wR ×
××××××× ×××××××××××
×××× R × ×××××××××××
×××××××× ×××××× v × x ×
×××××××× ×××××××××××
×××××××× ×××××××××××
×××××××× ×××××××××××
(A) Ring will continue to move with constant velocity for the case when it does not loose contact
(B) The value of friction acting on ring is Bqv cos q
(C) The value of friction acting on ring is Bqv sin q
æ mg ö
(D) Ring will lose contact with ground if v is greater than ç ÷
è 2qB ø
A very long insulating cylinder (dielectric constant e) of length L and radius R (L>>R) has a charge Q
uniformly distributed over its outside surface. Cylinder is rotated about its symmetry axis with angular
velocity w (see figure). [Ignore edge effects]
R
z
E
w
14. The magnetic field inside the cylinder is

m0Qw m0Qw m0Qw m0Qw
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2p R 2p L R L
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
15. A single-turn coil of radius 2R and resistance r is wrapped around the cylinder as shown in figure, and
the rotation of the cylinder is slowed down linearly (w(t) = w0(1–t/t0)) as a function of time. What is the
magnitude of the induced current in the coil? In what direction does the current flow?
m 0QR 2w 0
(A) in the direction of rotation
2pr Lt0 2R
m 0 QR 2w 0
(B) in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation
2pr Lt0
m 0 QR 2w 0
(C) in the direction of rotation
2 r Lt0
m 0QR 2w 0
(D) in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation
2r Lt0
The magnetron
This is a valve with a cylindrical anode surrounding a linear cathode (Figure-1). This type of value
provides a simple way to determine e/m. A solenoid is placed over the valve with its axis coincident
with that of the cathode. In the magnetron we must assume that the cathode is very narrow, so that the
electric field at its surface is high. If we do this then we can also assume that the electron experience
most be their acceleration close to the cathode and so their velocity across the rest of the valve to the
anode is uniform.
With no current in the coil of the solenoid the electron emitted from the cathode (due to Electric field)
travel in straight line along a radius and are collected by the anode –a current (I A) flows in the valve.
Now if a current is passed through the solenoid a magnetic field will be produced and the emitted
electron will begin to curve in the field - the radii of their paths becoming smaller and smaller as the
current, and therefore the magnetic field is increased. Up to this point the anode current remains constant.
Eventually a point will be reached for a solenoid current IC where the diameter of their path is just equal
to the radius of the anode, any further increase in the solenoid current and the electrons will not hit the
anode. There will then be a sudden drop in the anode current.
Assume that the voltage difference between the cathode and the anode is V, the magnetic field due to
the solenoid is B and radius of the valve is R.
Solenoid
Solenoid
IA
Anode
Cathode
Electron path IC
Solenoid Current
Critical Electron Path
16. Which of the following changes to the setup will affect the result of critical value of IC?
(A) Taking a solenoid of larger radius
(B) Taking a cathode of larger radius
(C) Taking a anode of larger radius (but still inside the solenoid)
(D) Taking a solenoid of larger number of turns per unit length.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
17. Mark the correct statement(s) :

(A) If instead of electrons, the cathode would emit protons. The protons would travel in a larger radius
and IA would become zero at a larger value of IC.
(B) If instead of electrons, the cathode would emit protons. The protons would travel in a smaller radius
and IA would become zero at a larger value of IC.
2mV
(C) Value of B at which the current IA become zero is
qR 2
8mV
(D) Value of B at which the current IA become zero is
qR 2
SECTION-III
1 In the figure, the flux due to magnetic field through the loop perpendicular to the plane of the coil and
directed into the paper is varying according to the relation, f = t2 + 7t + 1 where f is in weber and t is in
seconds. The magnitude of the emf induced in the loop at t = 1s is (in volt).
2. A small ball of mass m carrying positive charge +Q is dropped in uniform horizontal magnetic field B.
(3k - 1) m 2g
The vertical depth of the deepest point of its path from initial position is Find k.
Q 2 B2
3. A disk, having homogenous mass and charge distribution has mass m, charge Q, radius r is rotating on
its own axis with ( w) ĵ in zx plane with centre at origin in a free space (no hinge). P is a point on the
circumference of disk. At an instant when P is at (0, 0, r), a magnetic field
é wm ù ˆ
ë û
( )
ê 2 n Q ú - k is switched on in the region. As a result, the acceleration of P becomes double
momentarily. Write n.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-I
1. A frame is rotating about hinge at O in a uniform transverse magnetic field as shown in the figure.
Dimensions of various sections of the rod are shown. Some points are marked on the rod C choose the
incorrect alternative
× × × × × × 2c× × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × × × ×
b
× × × × × × × × × × × ×
b
× ×a × × × × × × × ×d× ×
w A c B
O
× × × × × × × × × × × ×C
× × × × × × × × × × × ×
(A) Potential difference between O and A can never be zero
(B) Potential difference between A and C may be zero
(C) Potential difference between O and C does not depend on b
(D) Potential difference between A and B does not depend on a
2. A rectangular loop has a sliding connector PQ of length 2 m and resistance P
10 W and it is moving with a speed 5 m/s as shown. The set-up is placed in 5m/s
a uniform magnetic field 3T going into the plane of the paper. The three
10W 10W 10W
currents I1, I2 and I are :-
(A) I1 = I2 = 3A, I = 1A (B) I1 = I2 = 5A, I = 2A × 3T I I2
(C) I1 = I2 = 1A, I = 2A (D) I1 = I2 = I = 2A I1 Q
3. The loop shown moves with a constant velocity ‘V’ in a uniform magnetic field of magnitude ‘B’
directed into the paper. The potential difference between P and Q is :-
3
(A) e = BLV, Q is positive with respect to P
4 L
1 V
(B) e = BLV, P is positive with respect to Q P
4 L
—
L 4
(C) e = 0 B Q
1
(D) e = BLV, Q is positive with respect to P
4
4. A thin conducting rod OA of length l is rotated about end O with constant angular frequency w. The
magnetic field in the quadrants are B1 = 0; B2 = B0; B3 = 2B0; B4 = 4B0. B2 and B4 are into the plane of
the paper whereas B3 is out of the plane. The average emf induced in one cycle is :
w
B2=B0 B1=0
Ä l
O A
B3=2B0 B4=4B0
Ä
13 3 1 3
(A) wB0 l 2 (B) wB0 l 2 (C) wB0 l 2 (D) wB0 l 2
16 8 6 4
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A point charge is moving in clockwise direction in a circle with constant speed. Consider the magnetic
field produced by the charge at a point P (not centre of the circle) on the axis of the circle.
(A) it is constant in magnitude only
(B) it is constant in direction only
(C) it is constant in direction and magnitude both
(D) it is not constant in magnitude and direction both
6. The magnetic field inside a solid conducting long wire at distance r from its axis is given as B = B 0r3
where B0 is constant. Which of the following relations correctly represents current enclosed in the loop
of radius r shown in the figure:
2pB0 r 3 pB0 r 4
(A) (B)
5m 0 2m0 r
2pB0 r 2 2pB0 r 4
(C) (D)
m0 m0
7. A wire segment is bent into the shape of an Archimedes spiral (see figure).
y
I
r
P q
–(a+b) Z a x
The equation that describes the curve in the range 0 £ q £ p is
b
r(q) = a + q , for 0 £ q £ p
p
where q is the angle from x-axis in radians. Point P is at the origin. I is the current. Magnetic field at point
P is
m0 Ib m0 I 1 1 m0 I æ 1 1 ö m0 I æ b ö
(A) (B) + (C) ç - ÷ (D) ln ç 1 + ÷
2a 2p a 2 b 2 4 èa bø 4b è a ø
8. Consider two identical circular loops of same radius, with the second (right side) coil rotated slightly
clockwise relative to the first when looked from above as shown in figure (a). A large current is suddenly
injected into the left side loop. What happen to the right side loop?
Top view Side view
figure (a) figure (b)
(A) Force to the left, torque rotates clockwise (in top view)
(B) Force to the right, torque rotates clockwise (in top view)
(C) Force to the right, torque rotates counterclockwise (in top view)
(D) Can't tell without knowing which direction current injected into left loop
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

9. A wire frame is in the shape of a quadrant of a circle of radius a, having resistance R and is free to rotate
about O about axis perpendicular to plane of paper. Above line PQ a uniform magnetic field exist
having magnitude B and direction out of plane for region I and inside plane for region II. If frame rotates
with constant w. Mark the CORRECT options :-
Region I Region II
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
O × × × ×
P w Q
a p/2 a
B2wpa 4
(A) As frame goes from region I to region II, the thermal energy dissipated is
2R
B2wpa 4
(B) As frame goes from region I to region II, the thermal energy dissipated is
4R
3B2 wpa 4
(C) Total thermal energy dissipated in one cycle is
8R
3B2 w2a4
(D) Average power is
8R
A non conducting hollow hemisphere of radius R is rotated with constant angular velocity w about a
fixed vertical axis as shown in the figure. The surface charge density on the sphere is varying as
s = s0cosf, f being measured with the vertical axis.
A C B
f
10. The magnetic induction at the centre C is

æ m 0 s0 wR ö æ m 0 s 0 wR ö
(A) ç ÷ (B) ç ÷
è 8 ø è 4 ø
æ 3m 0 s0 wR ö æ 3m 0 s0 wR ö
(C) ç ÷ (D) ç ÷
è 8 ø è 4 ø

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. If a small conducting ring of radius a is held co-axially at the centre C, and the hemisphere starts rotating
with the constant angular acceleration a, then find the current flowing in the ring. Given that the resistance
of the ring is r.
m0 s0 pa 2 Ra 3m 0 s0 pa 2 Ra
(A) (B)
4r 4r
3m 0 s0 pa 2 Ra m0 s0 pa 2 Ra
(C) (D)
8r 8r
SECTION-II
1. In 1897, J.J. Thomson measured the charge-to-mass ratio (e/m) of an electron by using a device similar
to that illustrated in figure. Electrons from the heated filament A are accelerated by a potential difference
DV through a small opening O. The electrons pass through a region where perpendicular electric and
magnetic fields can be applied; these electrons eventually collide with a fluorescent screen kept just after
the deflecting plates, where they are observed. Thomson measured the vertical deflection 5 cm at the
screen that a certain known electric field 1.6 × 104 N/C produced, and then he applied a magnetic field
of strength 10–4 T that returned the beam to its undeflected position. If 1 m is the length of the deflecting
plates, he calculated the charge to mass ratio as a × 109 (in S.I. units). Fill the value of a in OMR sheet.
DV
Deflected
Beam
A B
O ××××× y
×××××
E L Undeflected
Beam
Flourescent
Evacuated Screen
Region
SECTION-III
1. Find the magnetic field due to current i flowing in an elliptical loop at it's focus. The equation of ellipse
l
(in polar coordinates as shown) is = (1 + e cos q). Here e is eccentricity which is a constant.
r
Take l = 50 cm, e = 0.8, i = 2A, if your answer is np × 10–7 T, fill n in OMR sheet.
r
l q
l F

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A small body of mass m, having a positive charge q begins to slide from the top of a smooth fixed half-
cylinder of radius R = 10 m. At what height (in m), measured from the base of the half-cylinder, the
body detaches itself from cylinder ? Movement occurs in a uniform magnetic field B directed perpendicular
m g
to the plane of the drawing and the observer. Take B = .
2q R
q, m
+ ®
B
3. A very long straight conductor has a circular cross-section of radius R and carries a current density J.
Inside the conductor there is a cylindrical hole of radius a whose axis is parallel to the axis of the
conductor and a distance b from it. Let the z-axis be the axis of the conductor, and let the axis of the hole
be at x = b. Find the x component of magnetic field on the y–axis at y = 2R. If your answer is
æ1 a2 ö
Bx = m 0 JR ç - 2 2 ÷ fill value of |A| + |B|.
è A BR + b ø
iin R
a
x
O C
b
1
4. A non conducting rod of length 2m is hinged at one end and a charge of C is distributed uniformly
10
over it. At t = 0, it is released from the position shown. There exist a uniform magnetic field of 15 T
inside the plane of motion of rod. If mass of rod is 100 g, then find the value of hinge force (in N) when
p
rod is rotated by due to gravity.
2
released at t = 0
B
5. A neutral atom of atomic mass number 100 which is stationary at the origin in gravity free space emits
an a-particle (A) in z-direction. The product ion is P. A uniform magnetic field exists in the
x-direction. Disregard the electro magnetic interaction between A and P. If the angle of rotation of A
12np
after which A and P will meet for the first time is radians, what is the value of n ?
25

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. A particle has a charge of 4nC. When it moves with a velocity v1 = 3 × 104 m/s at 45° above y axis in yz
plane, a uniform magnetic field exerts a force of F1 along –ve x axis on it. When it moves with a velocity
of v2 = 2 × 104 m/s along x axis, the same magnetic field exerts a force F2 of 16 × 10–5 N along y axis.
What is the magnitude of the magnetic field (in T)?
z
v1
F1 45°
F2 y
x v2
SECTION-IV
1. In all the situations current in loop-I is i1 and current in loop-II is i2. Consider the infinite wire as the side
of infinite large loop. Column-II describes the variation in current i1 in different arrangements and
column-I describes the various effects.
Column I Column-II
(A) Current is clockwise in loop-II. (P) Current i1 is clockwise and I II
decreasing at constant rate.
(B) Current is anticlockwise in loop-II. (Q) Current i1 is clockwise and
decreasing at constant rate. I II
(C) Flux of current i1 through (R) Current in infinite wire is i1

loop-II is less than flux of and decreasing at constant rate.
current i1 through loop-I The wire is perpendicular to II
I
plane of loop.
(D) Loop-II tends to reduce (S) Loop-I having constant current II

its area due to magnetic in clockwise direction moving
force applied by magnetic upward with retardation. I
field of i1 Both loops are co-axial.
(T) Current in infinite wire is i1

upward and decreasing at
constant rate. The wire is
parallel to the plane of loop. I II

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A particle of charge q & mass m is projected in x-y plane in region containing magnetic fields as shown
mV
( )
with velocity vi + vjˆ m/s from origin given that d =
qB
. Find the coordinate where particle crosses
the y-axis again.
y 2B B
X X X X
No X X X X
field
X X X X
O x
X X X X
X X X X
(A) (0, d) (
(B) 0, 2d ) (C) (0, 2d) (
(D) 0, d / 2 )
2. A long straight wire carries a current I0, is placed near a loop with
resistance R, as shown in the figure. Two wires of loop are at
distance, a, 2a respectively from a wire. A conducting rod with
zero resistance and mass m is placed across the loop. What is the R
F
force needed to move the rod with constant speed v. 2a
2 2
m02 I02 v m0 I0 v
(A) 2
( ln2)2 (B) 2
( l n 2)2 a
p R 4p R
2 2 2 2 I0
m0 I0 v m0 I0 v
(C) 2
( l n 2)2 (D) 2
2p R 2p R
3. The given figure shows an inductor and resistor fixed P
on a conducting wire. A movable conducting wire PQ
starts moving on the fixed rails from t = 0 with constant B = 2T
R = 2W
velocity 1 m/s. The work done by the external force on L = 2H l = 2m v = 1m/s
the wire PQ in 2 seconds is :-
(A) 16 J (B) 32 J Q
(C) 48 J (D) 64 J
4. Regarding the given circuit, the correct statement is
(A) (Va–Vb) is increasing with time 0.5F 2W
a b
(B) (Va–Vb) is decreasing with time
10V
(C) (Va – Vb) = 10 V
4H
(D) (Va – Vb) = zero 4W

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. In the circuit, the switch is closed and then opened after a long time t. Find the correct graph(s) :-
1H
100W
10V 150W
through inductor
through battery
through 100W
through 150W
Current
Current
Current
Current
(A) (B) (C) (D)
t t t t

6. A conducting ring is placed in a uniform external magnetic field present in the space within the ring and
perpendicular to plane of ring. The magnetic field changes at a constant rate due to which a current of
magnitude 4 amp flows in the ring. The resistance of parts PQR and PSR are 4W and 8W respectively.
Then :-
R
× ×
× × ×
S × × × × Q
× × ×× × ×
× × × ×
× ×
P
(A) The emf induced in the ring 48 V

(B) Potential difference between P & R is 24 V
(C) Potential difference between P & R is 8V
(D) Potential difference between P & R is zero as conservative electric field in the ring wire is zero
Figure shows a thin circular horizontal laminated aluminium ring, with square cross-section of very
small area A, containing horizontal laminae. It is released from rest and falls vertically under gravity
through horizontal radial magnetic field B produced by north, N and south, S magnetic poles. It has
mass m, radius r and resistivity r,. The centre of the ring falls down the vertical line of symmetry of the
system.
S Ring
B
S N S
S
Topview

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. What is magnetic force on the ring :-

2pAB2vr 2pAB2vr
(A) , downward (B) , upward
r r
pAB2 vr pAB2 vr
(C) , downward (D) , upward
r r
8. Obtain an expression for terminal valocity of the ring.
mgr 2mgr 2mgr mgr
(A) vT = (B) vT = (C) vT = (D) vT =
pAB2 r pAB2 r 3pAB2 r 2pAB2 r
Consider a square loop of wire with dimension a. One side of which is parallel to another long straight
wire carrying current i0, at a distance a. The resistance of the loop is R. Neglect the self inductance of the
loop. Initially switch S was closed and at t = 0 it is opened.
i0
a a
9. What is the net amount of charge that will flow after t = 0 through a fixed cross-section of the wire of the
loop?
m0i0 ln ( 2 ) a 2m0i0ln ( 2 ) a m0i0 ln ( 2 ) a 4m0i0ln ( 2 ) a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
pR pR 2pR pR
10. What is the net momentum P given to the loop during the switching-off of the current :-
m02i 20 ´ ln ( 2 ) a m02i 02 ´ ln ( 2 ) a m02i 20 ´ ln ( 2 ) a m02i 20 ´ ln ( 2 ) a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2p 2 R 4p 2 R p2 R 16p2 R
For the circuit shown in figure, R1 = 3R, R2 = R, C1 = C2 = C, and L1 = L2 = L. The electromotive force
of the battery is e. Initially the switch is closed and the system is operating in a stationary regime.
V
R1 R2
C1 L2
C2
11. Reading of the voltmeter immediately after the switch is open is equal to :-
2e
(A) e (B) 2 e (C) (D) None of these
3
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Total amount of heat dissipated after opening the switch, until a new equilibrium state is achieved, is
equal to :-
1 2 1 Le 2 1 2 Le 2 Le 2 Le 2
(A) Ce + (B) Ce + 2 (C) Ce +
2
(D) 2Ce +
2
2 2 R2 2 R R2 R2
Matching List Type (4 × 4) 1 Q . [ 3 M (–1)]
1W
3W L
36volt
13. 6W
6W C
( )
S
List-I List-II
(P) Current through battery just after closing of switch (in ampere) (1) 12
(Q) Current through capacitor just after closing of switch (in ampere) (2) 8
(R) Switch is closed and when steady state of current is achieved (3) 9
the current through battery (in ampere)
(S) After steady state switch is re-opened just after reopening of (4) 1
switch the ratio of current through inductor and capacitor
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 1 2 3 4
(B) 3 4 2 1
(C) 4 3 1 2
(D) 2 1 4 3
SECTION-III
1. Consider a cylindrical region of uniform but time varying magnetic field. Now consider a plane
perpendicular to this field. Top view of this cylindrical magnetic field on the plane is shown in the
diagram which is a circular region of radius r0 = 1m. A particle of mass p kg & charge 2C is projected
with velocity of v0 = 5 m/s, tangential to this circle from point A. This particle intersects another radial
line OB at point B with velocity v. If the magnetic field is increasing at the rate of 4T/s then find the
value of v.
v0 A
× × × ×
× × × r0 × ×
× × × × ×
B × × × O × ×
v × × × ×
× ×

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A transmission line consists of two concentric tubes of thin copper sheet metal with radii R 1 = R and
R2 = 2R (see figure). The current flows to the left along the central tubes and back along the other,
completing a circuit; the current is uniformly distributed over the surface of each tube. The self-inductance
per meter length of this transmission line is æç ö÷ ln ( X ) micro henry (µH). Find the value of X.
1
è 10 ø
1m
R2
R1
3. Two small current carrying loops each of radius r are kept in same plane such that separation between
m 0 pr 4
their centres is a (a >>> r), then their mutual inductance will be . Find out the value of k.
ka 3
4. A ring made of a superconductor is placed into a homogeneous magnetic field whose intensity grows
from zero to B0 = 2T. The plane of the ring is perpendicular to the force lines of the field. The induced
1
current appearing in the ring is 1/x (amp). The radius of the ring r = cm and its inductance
p
L = 1mH. Find x.
5. The diagram shows a circuit having a coil of resistance R and inductance L connected to a conducting
rod PQ which can slide on a perfectly conducting circular ring of radius 10 cm with its centre at 'P'.
Assume that friction & gravity are absent and a constant uniform magnetic field of 5 T exists as shown
in figure. At t = 0, the circuit is switched on and simultaneously a time varying external torque is applied
on the rod so that it rotates about P with a constant angular velocity 40 rad/s. Find magnitude of this
torque when current reaches half of its maximum value. Neglect the self inductance of the loop formed
by the circuit. Resistance R = 1W. If your answer is x × 10–4 Nm fill value of x/25.
× × Q ×B
× × ×
× P × ×
× × ×
S
L R
6. Consider the circuit given in the diagram. Switch S is closed at time = 0. The current in the circuit
increases with time. At some instant rate of energy storage in the inductor will become maximum. At
that time find ratio of power supplied by battery and thermal power generated in resistor.
L R
S
E

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A current I is flowing in a circular ring 1 of radius R. A second ring 2 whose radius r is much smaller
than that of the first, is moving with constant velocity V along the axis in such a manner that the plane of
the ring remains parallel to the plane of the ring 1 during the course of the motion. Find the maximum
emf induced in the ring 2.
24 m0 pIr 2 V 24 m0 pIr 2 V 2 m0 pIr 2 V 48 m0 pIr 2 V
(A) 2 (B) (C) 2 (D) 2
25 5 R 25 R 2 3 3 R 25 5 R
2. A wire of mass m can slide without friction on two parallel rails as P
shown with a capacitor. A time dependent force F = kt is applied F =kt
C l
parallel to the rod PQ. A magnetic field BÄ exist perpendicular to
the plane of rails. Which of the following represents variation of
current with time? Q B
(A) I (B) I (C) I (D) I
t t t t
3. A particle of positive charge q and mass m enters with velocity vjˆ at the origin in a magnetic field B
( - k̂ ) which is present in the whole space. The charge makes a perfectly inelastic collision with identical
particle at rest but free to move at its maximum Y-coordinate. After collision the combined charge will
mv
move on trajectory (where r = ) :-
qB
mv
(A) y = ( - î ) (B) (X + r)2 + (Y – r/2)2 = r2/4
qB
(C) (X – r)2 + (Y – r)2 = r2 (D) (X – r)2 + (Y + r/2)2 = r2/4
4. In the diagram shown, a particle of charge +Q and mass M is projected making an angle b with the
vertical line. Draw the possible path on which the charge will move. Above the dark line magnetic field
is B1 and below it is B2. (Consider all possible cases for values of B1 and B2)
B1
V
b
O
B2
v
v v
v
(A) (B) O (C) (D)
O
O

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

5. A circular conducting loop of radius r0 and having resistance per unit length l as shown in the figure is
placed in a magnetic field B which is constant in space and time. The ends of the loop are crossed and
pulled in opposite directions with a velocity v such that the loop always remains circular and the radius
of the loop goes on decreasing, then
(A) Radius of the loop changes with r as r = r0 – vt/p
(B) EMF induced in the loop as a function of time is e = 2Bv[r0 – vt/p]
Bv
(C) Current induced in the loop is I =
2pl
Bv
(D) Current induced in the loop is I =
pl
®
6. Magnetic field along x-axis varies according to the relation B = B0 xiˆ . Given a coil of area A with its
axis along x-axis is connected over the top of a plastic trolly which moves along x-axis with velocity v.
If the resistance of coil is R, then (at t = 0, coil is at x = 0 and v = v0)
O X
V0
(A) The flux linked with the coil at any position x is B0x A
B0 Av 0
(B) An observer at origin ‘O’ finds the induced current as anticlockwise if trolley moves with
R
constant velocity v = v0.
B0 A(v 0 + at)
(C) If the trolly has acceleration a then the induced current as a function of time t is given as
R
anticlockwise
(D) If the trolly has acceleration a then the induced current as function of position x is given as
B0 A ( v 20 + 2ax ) anticlockwise
R
7. Diagram shows a cylindrical magnetic field increasing at B0 per second. ABCD is a rectangular loop.
AB being diameter (2R) of field. EMF (magnitude) across :-
D A
Boundary of
C B magnetic field
pR 2 B0 pR 2 B0
(A) AB is zero (B) DC is zero (C) DC is (D) AD is
4 8
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
8. Consider a metal rod of length L that is given a uniform acceleration as shown in figure (a) and an
identical rod rotating with constant angular velocity in figure (b).
l
a R
w
A B A
l
Figure (a) stationary conducting
circular frame
Figure (b)
(A) If VA and VB are potential of end A and B respectively, then VA < VB in figure (a)
(B) If VA and VB are potential of end A and B respectively, then VA > VB in figure (b)
ma
(C) Electric field inside rod has magnitude in figure (a)
e
mw2 r
(D) Electric field inside rod has magnitude in figure (b)
e
9. Two circular rings of radius a, having resistance per unit length l are moving with uniform speed v
®
ˆ . At t = 0,
along x-axis one over other as shown in the figure in a uniform magnetic field B = B0 ( - k)
separation between centre is just greater than 2a.
A
B
D C1 G F C2 E
B
v v
72B2av
(A) the magnetic force on any circular ring at the time t, when ÐAC1B = 60° is .
5pl
18B2av
(B) the magnetic force on any circular ring at the time t, when ÐAC1B = 60° is .
5pl
3Bv
(C) the current in the branch BDA of the ring at the time t, when ÐAC1B = 60° is .
5pl
2Bv
(D) the current in the branch BDA of the ring at the time t, when ÐAC1B = 60° is .
5pl

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. Two identical charged particles (of mass m and having charge q) are simultaneously projected from
origin (as shown) with equal speeds v, in a region of transverse magnetic field.
×y × × × ×
B
× × × × ×
× × v× × ×
× ×60° × × ×
x
× × ×v × ×
2
r r pm r r æ mv ö
(A) If r1 and r2 are the position vectors of the particles at time t = then r1 .r2 equals 2 ç ÷
qB è qB ø
2
r r pm r r 1 æ mv ö
(B) If r1 and r2 are the position vectors of the particles at time t = then r1 .r2 equals ç ÷
qB 2 è qB ø
(C)Magnitude of relative speeds of the particles after they are projected remains constant
(D)Magnitude of relative angular momentum of the particles after they are projected first increases,
then decreases
11. A charged particle having its charge to mass ratio as b goes in a conical pendulum of length L making
an angle q with vertical and angular velocity w. If a magnetic field B is directed vertically downwards
(see figure) :
w
L q
1é g ù
(A) B = ê w -
bë wL cos q úû
(B) Angular momentum of the particle about the point of suspension remains constant.
(C) If the direction of B were reversed maintaining same w and L, then q will remain unchanged.
(D) Rate of change of angular momentum of the particle about the point of suspension is not a constant
vector.
A metal cylinder is rotating at an angular velocity w around its axis of symmetry. The cylinder is in a
r
uniform magnetic field with the induction vector B parallel to its axis.
r r vector are oppositely directed, what is magnitude of electric field
12. If magnetic induction vector B and w
in the metal cylinder
(ewB + mw2 )r (ewB - mw2 )r (mw2 - ewB)r
(A) Zero (B) (C) (D)
e e e
13. In previous question, determine the charge density in the interior of the cylinder.
e 0 w(eB - mw)
(A) Zero (B) r =
2e
2e 0 w(eB + mw) e 0 w(eB + mw)
(C) r = (D) r =
e 2e

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
r r
14. If B and w point in the same direction, mark the correct statement
eB
(A) If w > ; electric field vector is radily inward, the outer surface of the cylinder carries positive
m
charge
eB
(B) If w > ; electric field vector is radily outward, the outer surface of the cylinder carries negative
m
charge
eB
(C) If w = ; electric field vector is radily inward, the outer surface of the cylinder carries positive
m
charge
eB
(D) If w < ; electric field vector is radily outward, the outer surface of the cylinder carries negative
m
charge
SECTION-II
1. A square loop of length L = 0.2 m and resistance R = 80 mW lies with one of its length along the x-axis
as shown in the figure. It moves with speed V = 10 m/s in the positive x-direction in a magnetic field
which is into the page and has a magnitude that varies with x according to B = ax where a = 0.2 Tm–1.
The magnitude of induced current is I ampere. Then the value of 10I is. (Neglect self inductance of the
loop)
y
× × × × × B = ax
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
× × × × × V
× × × × ×
× × × × ×
x=0× × × × × x
SECTION-III
1. A very small loop of radius r moves co-axially with a constant velocity v, to another bigger loop of
radius R which is carrying a steady current i. It is assumed that the smaller loop begins to move from the
centre of the bigger loop. Find the expression for emf induced in the smaller loop in the function of time.
æ ö
m v 2 pitR 2 r 2 ÷
If your answer is N ç 0 . Give the value of N + P
(
ç R2 + v 2 t 2 P ÷
è ø )
t
i v
x
R

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A loop is formed with two springs and a conducting rod of length l = 1m and mass m = 1 kg. A uniform
magnetic field B = 0.01T is directed perpendicular to the plane of the loop. At t = 0 the rod is released
when the spring is extended by a distance 4cm. What is the maximum value of the emf
(in mV ) (spring constant k = 200 N/m) ?
B
× × k × ×
× × × l×
k
× × × ×
3. A disc of radius r is made of a material of negligible resistance and can rotate about a horizontal shaft. A
smaller disc of radius r is fixed onto the same shaft and has a massless cord wrapped around it, which is
attached to a small object of mass m as shown. Two ends of a resistor of resistance R are connected to
the perimeter of the disc and to the shaft by wiping contacts. The system is then placed into a uniform
horizontal magnetic field B and mass m is released. Find the constant angular velocity (in rad/s) with
w
which the disc will rotate after a certain time. If your answer is w give value of . Data : r = 10 cm,
20
r = 2 cm, R = 0.01 W, B = 0.2 T, m = 50 g.
r
r
B m
4. An inverted L shaped conductor PRQ is made by joining two perpendicular conducting rods, each of
r
length 1.5 L, at end R. This structure is moving in x-y plane containing variable magnetic field, B = -3xkˆ
with a velocity viˆ + vjˆ . If potential of P is VP and that of Q is VQ, then, value of VP - VQ at the instant
æ 9vL2 ö
a
when P is at origin as shown in figure is ç ÷ . Fill the value of 'a' in OMR sheet.
è 8 ø
x
P R

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Column I shows certain system at t = 0. Column II shows its behavior there after. Neglect dissipative
forces in all cases.
Column I Column II
r C +Q
(A) System experiences net torque (P) p
charged
intially about C. bead
A charged bead is constrained to move along

a non conducting ring in gravity free space. A
dipole is fixed at the centre of ring. Charge is
released from perpendicular bisector of dipole
at t = 0. System is bead.
C.M. of
ball, nonuniform
(B) Angular velocity about C first (Q) mass distribution
C
increases then decreases
A spherical ball made of wood is released

inside water from rest in the configuration
shown at t = 0. Point C is geometric centre of
ball. System is ball.
(C) System executes periodic motion (R) r

B
uniformly
C charged disc
Disc hangs with an elastic wire of some

torsional stiffness. Uniform magnetic field is
suddenly switched on at t = 0.
System is disc. r
B
(D) Acceleration of centre of mass (S) C
of system is zero initially.

A current carrying coil is placed in a uniform
magnetic field parallel to the plane of coil at
t = 0, coil lies in a gravity free space.
System is coil.
C
(T)
A boy on a swing small angular amplitude.

When swing gets to mean position (t = 0) boy
instantaneously stands up.
System is swing & boy.
CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A current I flows along the length of a thin walled, long metallic hollow cylinder of radius R, distributed
uniformly on its surface then pressure on the wall will be :
æ m0 I 2 ö æ m I2 ö
(A) æç m02I 2 ö÷
2
(B) ç 4 p2 R 2 ÷ (C) ç p20R 2 ÷ (D) None of these
è 8 p R ø è ø è ø
2. A smooth insulating ring of radius R, with a bead having charge q is placed horizontally and in a
uniform magnetic field of strength B0 and perpendicular to the ring plane. Starting from t = 0, the
magnetic field is changed to B (t) = B0 + at, where a is a positive constant. The contact force between
the ring and bead as a function of time is (Neglect gravity)
aq 2 Rt aq 2 Rt
(A) ( 2B0 + at ) (B) ( 2B0 + at )
m 4m
aq 2 Rt 4aq 2 Rt
(C) ( B 0 + at ) (D) ( 2B0 + at )
4m m
3. Two small pith balls, each carrying a charge q, are attached to the ends of a
light rod of length d, which is suspended from the ceiling by a thin torsion-free
fiber, as shown in the figure below. There is a uniform magnetic field B, pointing Fiber
B
straight down, in the cylindrical region of radius R around the fiber. The system
Field
is initially at rest. If the magnetic field is turned off, which of the following Region
describes what happens to the system ?
(A) It rotates with angular momentum qBR2. q Rod q
1 d
(B) It rotates with angular momentum qBd 2 .
4
1 R
(C) It rotates with angular momentum qBRd .
2
(D) It does not rotate because to do so would violate conservation of angular momentum.
4. A uniform magnetic field B increasing with time exists in a cylindrical region of
ÄB
centre O and radius R. The direction of magnetic field is inwards the paper as P
R
shown. The work done by external agent in taking a unit positive charge slowly
from A to C via paths APC, AOC and AQC be WAPC, WAOC and WAQC C A
O
respectively. Then :
(A) WAPC = WAOC = WAQC (B) WAPC > WAOC > WAQC Q
(C) WAPC < WAOC < WAQC (D) WAPC = WAQC < WAOC
5. A unifrom time varying magnetic field is present in a cylindrical region as shown. P
Magnetic field strength increases linearly with time and a charged particle is released
from a point P, just outside the cylindrical region. If its angular momentum about
center is L, then which of the graph correctly demonstrate its behaviour as function
of time ? (Neglect gravity)
L L L L
(A) (B) (C) (D)

t t t t

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. A magnetic field, confined in a cylindrical region of radius R, is changing at the rate of 4 T/s. A conducting
3
rod PQ of length R is placed in the region as shown. The induced emf across the rod will be :
2
P
R2 R 2p
(A) (p + 6)V (B) V
24 24 C 60°
R 2p R2
(C) V (D) (p + 6)V Q
6 6
7. In the diagram a time varying magnetic field passes through a circular region of radius “R” and the
magnetic field directed outwards and it is a function of radial distance ‘r’and time ‘t’ as B = B0 rt . The
electric field strength at a radial distance R/2 from the center ?
B0 R 2 B0 R 2 2 B0 R 2 B0 R 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12 6 3 16
8. A current I flows through a loop ABCDEFGHA along the edge of the cube of width l meters as shown
in the figure. One corner of the loop lies at origin.
Y
C
H
G A X
B
D
E
F
Z
Then mark the CORRECT statement(s) : -
(A) This current path ABCDEFGHA can be treated as a superposition of three square loops carrying
current I. The three loops are FGHAF, FABEF, FGDEF
(B) The unit vector in the direction of magnetic field at the centre of cube is - ĵ .
r
(C) Now if a uniform external magnetic field B = B0ˆj is switched on, then the unit vector in the direction
r
of torque due to external magnetic field ( B ) acting on the current carrying loop (ABCDEFGHA) is
2iˆ - ˆj
.
5
(D) None of these
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. Four identical charge particles each of mass 0.1kg and charge 2C

connected to each other via massless non-conducting rods of equal length.
The whole arrangement is placed in a cylindrical region carrying a uniform q,m q,m
magnetic field as shown in the figure (B0 = 4T, a = 1m). Suddenly the
magnetic field is switched off. Then choose the correct statement(s) :- a O
(A) the angular momentum of the system is 8 Nm/s
q,m q,m
(B) the angular momentum of the system is 8 2 Nm/s
(C) Angular velocity of the system is 40 rad/s
(D) the magnetic field at point O after the magnetic field is switched off is non zero.
10. In figure the switch is closed at t = 0, with the capacitor of capacity 1 µF and
having initial charge of 20 µC (the polarity shown). The left square loop has
very large dimensions as compared to the distance between loops and a S
resistance of 10 W is connected in series with capacitor as shown. A wire of
R A
length 8 mm and resistance per unit length of 0.5 W/mm is bent in the form x
of square loop A and placed at a distance x = 1 m from left loop. C

–
(A) The mutual inductance of the system will be 8 × 10 H –13 +
(B) The induced current in the loop A will be clockwise
(C) The induced current in the loop A will be anticlockwise
(D) The induced current in the loop A at time t = 2RCln2 will be 10–8 A
11. The primary winding of step-down transformer with a turn ratio 10 has a source voltage of 120 V
connected to it. The resistance of the secondary and primary winding is negligible, the current in secondary
is I = 5 A.
(A) The current in primary is 0.5 A (B) The power delivered to the load is 60 W
(C) The load resistance is 24 ohms (D) The voltage across the load is 1200 V.
A variable magnetic field exist in a cylindrical region of space which is perpendicular & into the plane of
paper. Magnetic field in region (I) 0 < r £ R is uniform and increasing with constant rate. Magnetic field in
the region (II) R < r £ 2R is also uniform and increasing with constant rate which is (1/3) times of that in
region (I). At t=0, field in both region is found zero and at t=t0, field in the region (II) is found B0.
12. Induced electric field at r=R & t=t0 is :–

3RB 0 2RB 0 3RB 0 RB 0
(A) 2t (B) t (C) t0 (D) 3t
0 0 0
13. Induced electric field at r=2R & t =t 0 is :–

3RB 0 2RB 0 3RB 0 RB 0
(A) 2t (B) t (C) t (D) 3t
0 0 0 0
14. As a result of increasing magnetic field a charge particle initially kept at rest in region (II) starts moving
in circular trajectory of radius r. Value of r is :–
R
(A) 3 R (B) 2 R (C) 2R (D)
3

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A non conducting thin ring of radius R and mass m is placed on a rough horizontal insulating plane.
B0 t 2 3
Charge Q is uniformly distributed over the ring. At t=0 an uniform vertical magnetic field B =
2
QB0 R
is switched on. The coefficient of friction is m =
2mg
r
15. What is ò dF where r is force applied by electric field on an infinitesimal element of ring.
over the ring
dF
QB0 Rt QB0 Rt 3
(A) QB0Rt (B) (C) QB0 Rt 3 (D)
2 2
16. Time (in seconds) at which ring will just start rotating is :-
3 1 1
(A) (B) (C) 3 (D)
2 2 3
17. Magnetic field is switched off at t= 3 sec. Find the angular velocity just after this:
QB0 2QB0 QB0 2QB0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
m 3 m 2m m 3
SECTION-III
6
1. A uniform magnetic field of intensity B = sin 2t directed into the plane of the paper exists in the
p
cylindrical region of radius 1 m. A loop of resistance 10W folded in the form of equilateral triangle of
side length 2m is placed as shown in figure. Find the maximum potential drop in wire AB.
2. A resistance less ring has 2 bulbs A & B rated at 2 V, 10 W and 2 V, 20W

respectively. The ring encloses an ideal solenoid whose magnetic field is as
A B
shown. The radius of solenoid is 1m and the number of turns/length = 1000/
m. The current changes at rate of 9 A/sec. Find the power dissipated P in
bulb B. Fill P × 104 in nearest integer.
3. A uniform ring of radius (R) is fixed in a horizontal plane, ring has resistance
(lW/m). There is a perpendicular magnetic field (B) in the region. A perfectly
R
conducting rod of length l(> 2R) is kept along the diameter of ring and is made
to accelerate uniformly in the horizontal plane with acceleration (a) as shown. a
B
æRö
When the rod has travelled a distance equal to ç ÷ at that instant, current (in
è2ø
amp) through the rod is (Assume l = 3, B = 4pT, R = 1m,a = 3 m/s2)

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. An infinitely long straight wire carries a slowly varying current I(t). The line integral of electric field
along the loop shown in figure is given by.
S
S0
I(t)
m0 l dI m l dI ( S - S )
( lnS - lnS0 )
0
(B) - 2p dt S + S
0
(A) -
2p dt ( 0 )
m l (S + S ) dI m0 l dI
( lnS - lnS0 )
0
(C) - 2p S - S dt
0
(D)
( 0) 4 p dt
2. As shown, a uniform magnetic field B pointing out of the paper plane is confined in the shaded area
of radius r. At a distance R (R > r) from the center of the shaded area there is a point particle of mass
m and carrying charge q. Speed of the particle if the magnetic field in the region is quickly changed to
zero will be.
qBr 2
(A) V = (B) 0
2mR
qBr 2 2qBr 2
(C) V = (D) v =
mR mR
3. At t = 0, switch is closed. At t = t sec core is dragged out suddenly by an external agent. Find the value
of current just before and just after pulling the core. Resistance of the circuit is very small and can be
neglected.
L0
mr
R=0 S
e
2et et et et
(A) ibefore = L , iafter = mr 2 L (B) ibefore = L , iafter = mr L
0 0 0 0
et et et et
(C) ibefore = L , iafter = mr 2 L (D) ibefore = 4L , iafter = mr L
0 0 0 0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
r r
4. Two very tiny wire loops, with areas a1 and a 2 are situated a displacement rr apart (see figure). Their
mutual inductance is given by
a1
a2
m0 r r r r 3m0 r r r r
3 ë ( 1
(A) é3 a × rˆ )( a 2 × rˆ ) + a1 × a2 ùû (B) 3 ë ( 1
é3 a × rˆ )( a 2 × rˆ ) + a1 × a2 ùû
4 pr 4 pr
3m0 r r r r m0 r r r r
3 ë ( 1
(C) é3 a × rˆ )( a 2 × rˆ ) - a1 × a2 ùû (D) 3 ë ( 1
é3 a × rˆ )( a 2 × rˆ ) - a1 × a2 ùû
4 pr 4 pr
5. In the given figure, the mutual inductance of coil and the very long straight wire is M, the coil has
resistance R and the self inductance L. The wire lies in the same plane as that of the coil. The current in
the wire varies according to the law i = at, where a is a constant and t is the time. The time dependence
of current in the coil is (consider clockwise current in loop as positive) :-
Ma - tR / L Ma
(A) - e (B) - (1 - e- tR / L )
i
r
R R R
Ma - tR / L Ma
(C) e (D) (1 - e - tR / L )
R R
6. The given figure shows an inductor and resistance fixed on a conducting wire. A movable conducting
wire PQ starts moving on the fixed rails from t = 0 with constant velocity 1 m/s. The work done by the
external force on the wire PQ in 2 seconds is :-
B = 2T
L = 2H R = 2W
l = 2m v = 1m/s
(A) 16 J (B) 32 J (C) 48 J (D) 64 J

7. In the shown figure the mutual inductance of two coils is M, the coil II has resistance R and the self
inductance L. The current in the coil I varies according to the law i = at, where a is a constant and t is
time. Find the current in coil II as function of time (except M for the pair and L for the coil II ignore any
other effect of induction)
Coil-I Coil-II
Mæ ö Ma æ ö
Rt Rt
Ma - L
Rt - - Ma
(B) R ç1 - e ÷ (C) R ç1 - e ÷
L L
(A) e (D)
R è ø è ø R

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
8. A loop is formed by two parallel conductors connected by a solenoid with inductance L and a conducting
rod of mass m, which can freely (without friction) slide over the conductors. The conductors are located
in a horizontal plane in a uniform vertical magnetic field with induction B. The distance between the
conductors is equal to l. At the moment t = 0 a constant force F starts acting on the rod. Angular
frequency of motion of rod is w. If F and m are doubled then :
1 ÄB
(A) w become times (B) w become 2 times
2 L F=constant
m,l
1
(C) w become 2 times (D) w become times
2
9. A long co-axial cable carries current I as shown in figure. (Current flows down the surface of inner
cylinder of radius a and back along the outer cylinder of radius b.) Choose the correct statement(s) :
I
b
a I
m0 I2 l æ b ö
(A) The magnetic energy stored in a section of length l is ln ç ÷
4p èaø
m0 I
(B) The magnetic field between the cylinders have magnitude of 2p ( b - a )
m0 l æ b ö
(C) Self inductance of the cable of length l is ln
4 p çè a ÷ø
(D) Magnetic field outside the cylinder is zero.
10. A solenoid of inductance L and resistance r is connected in parallel to a resistance R. A battery of emf E
and of negligible internal resistance is connected across this parallel combination as shown in figure.
The circuit is in steady state. At time t = 0, switch S is opened. Choose the CORRECT option(s).
R
E (r + R) L, r
(A) Current in the inductor just after opening of the switch is = S
rR + –
E
(B) Total energy dissipated in the solenoid and the resistor long time after opening of the switch is
1 E (R + r )
2 2
L
2 r 2R2
E2 L
(C) The amount of heat generated in the solenoid after opening of switch is
2r ( r + R )
E2 L
(D) The amount of heat generated in the solenoid after opening of the switch is
2R ( r + R )
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. A magnet is placed co-axially with the conducting loop :-
N
S
(A) when the magnet is pushed towards right, a clockwise current is observed
(B) if the flux passing through the loop is f and its resistance is R, the total charge flown after the magnet
f
is thrown to infinity is
R
(C) if the loop's resistance is neglected and inductance is assumed to be L, the flux passing through the
loop is conserved.
f
(D) if we bring the resistanceless loop from infinity, it will carry a current i = , where
L
L = inductance of the loop and f = flux passing through the coil by the magnet.
12. In the circuit shown switch S is closed at t = 0. At time (t) which of the following is/are CORRECT:
I1 L
a b
R R
I2 L
S
I
V
V æ -4Rt
ö V æ -4Rt
ö
(A) I = 2R ç1 - e
L
÷ (B) I1 = I2 = ç 1 - e L
÷
è ø 2R è ø
dVab
(C) At t = 0, =0 (D) I = I12 + I 22
dt
13. A network is given as shown. Switch was at position 1 for long time. at t = 0 it is shifted to position 2,
then
2W 2
1
10V 2W
4H 1H
(A) Current just after switching is 20 Amp (B) Current just after switching is 4 Amp
5
-4t / 5 3
(C) Current in the circuit varies i = + e (D) Current just after switching is 0
2 2

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Suppose that we have two solenoids of the same length. Their diameters differ only to the extent to
which one can be fitted onto the other. The inductances of the two solenoids can be considered the same
and equal to L 0. Here are the ways in which the solenoids can be connected :
(1) the solenoids are connected in series and are separated by a large distance ;
(2) the solenoids are connected in parallel and are separated by a large distance ;
(3) the solenoids are connected in series, one is fitted onto the other, and the senses of the turns coincide ;
(4) the solenoids are connected in parallel, one is fitted onto the other, and the senses of the turns
coincide ;
(5) the solenoids are connected in series, one is fitted onto the other, and the senses of the turns are opposite;
(6) the solenoids are connected in parallel, one is fitted onto the other, and the senses of the turns are
opposite.
2 3
5
4

dI
(A) in case (i) net emf induced e = -2L 0
dt
dI
(B) in case (ii) net emf induced e = - L 0
dt
dI
(C) in case (i) net emf induced e = - L 0
dt
dI
(D) in case (ii) net emf induced e = -2L 0
dt
15. Mark the INCORRECT statement :-
(A) In case (iii) inductance of system is 4L0
(B) In case (iv) inductance of system is L0
(C) In case (v & vi) inductance of system is zero
(D) In case (v & vi) inductance of system is L0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question (upto second decimal place) 2Q.[3(0)]
1. Metal rod with a mass m = 10 g, and length L = 0.2 m is suspended by two light wires length l = 1 cm
in a magnetic field induction B = 1 T which is directed vertically downwards (Figure). A capacitor of
capacitance C = 100 µF charged to a voltage of 100 V is connected as shown. Determine the maximum
deflection (in degree) of the rod from the initial position after the switch is closed. Resistance of wire and
rod is not taken into account.
B
L
l
2. In a motor, a rotor is fitted with the armature that has current of 10 A. The rotor rotates with angular
speed of 3 rad/s. Magnetic field of magnitude 2 T varies in direction in such a way that it is always
perpendicular to the loop area. If the rotor coil has N number of turns and area of each loop is 0.45 m2
then find the value N. Given that motor consumes 2106 W power and there are no losses.
w
loop windings
(rotor coil)
rotor
SECTION-III
di 1
2. In the circuit shown current is changing at the rate of = 2A / s . If L1 = L2 = 1H and M12 = H, find
dt 2
emf V (in volt) between terminals X & Y.
L1 L2
X Y

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the given circuit, the switch is closed to the position bc from the earlier position of ac at t = 0. The
current in the inductor after 2s of closing the switch between b and c is :
a c 1W
+
10V – b L=1H
1
(A) A (B) 10e– 2 A (C) 10e A (D) 10e2 A
10e2
2. In the figure shown below, the switch S has been closed on 'a' for a long time. It is then thrown to 'b'.
The resulting current through the inductor is sketched in figure on right for four sets of values of R and
L, Which curve goes with which set of values?
(1) R0, L0 (2) 2R0, L0 (3) R0, 2L0 (4) 2R0, 2L0
aS R
b i b d
L c
a
t
(A) a, 2; b, 4; c, 1; d,3 (B) a, 2; b, 1; c, 4; d,3 (C) a, 4; b, 2; c, 1; d,3 (D) a, 4; b, 2; c, 3; d,4
3. A long solenoid is made of a superconducting wire carrying a current I0. The solenoid is slowly stretched
so that its cross section does not change but its length changes from L 0 to L1. What is the new current in
the solenoid assuming the solenoid is still tightly wound ?
L0 i 0 L1i 0 L20 i 0 L21i 0
(A) L (B) L (C) L2 (D) L2
1 0 1 0
1
4. Two capacitors C1 & C2 of capacitance ´ 10 -2 F each and an inductor L of inductance 2 × 10–2 H are
p2
connected in series as shown in the figure. Initially charge on each capacitors are 4 3 µC. At t = 0
1
switch S1 is closed and at t = sec , switch S2 is also closed. The maximum charge on capacitor C2
400
during LC oscillation is :-
L
C C
+q 1 –q +q 2–q
s1
s2
(A) 3 µC (B) 6 2mC (C) 3 3 µC (D) 6 3 µC

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. Two conducting spheres of equal radii R are placed far apart and are connected by an ideal inductor as
shown. Initially one of the spheres has a charge Q while other is uncharged. Switch is closed at time,
t = 0. Then :-
L S
R R
(A) Minimum time after which all charge can be transferred to other sphere is 2p3 Î0 LR
(B) Minimum time after which all charge can be transferred to other sphere is 8p3 Î0 LR
(C) First sphere will acquire a negative charge at some instant of time
(D) At some instant of time both spheres will have zero charge
6. An ideal DC source of emf E is connected with an uncharged capacitor and inductor. If switch is closed
at t = 0, what is the maximum charge on the capacitor in subsequent flow of charge ?
L C
(A) 2CE (B) CE (C) 1.5 CE (D) 4CE

7. The circuit shown in figure consisting of three identical lamps and two coils is connected to a direct
current source. The ohmic resistance of the coils is negligible. After some time switch S is opened.
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct for the instant immediately after opening the switch?
(A) All the lamps are turned off (B) Brightness of B2 & B3 remains unchanged
(C) Brightness of B1 suddenly increases (D) Insufficient data to draw any conclusion.
8. The switch is closed at t = 0 in the adjoining circuit. Which of the following is/are CORRECT ?
R L
R R
X Z
Y
s
E
(A) The potential difference across YZ at t = 0 is 2E/3

(B) The potential difference across XY at t = ¥ is E/2
(C) The potential difference across YZ at t = 0 is E/2
(D) The potential difference across XY at t = ¥ is 2E/3
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. The given arrangement carries a capacitor with capacitance 40mF and two inductors L1 = 25 H and
L2 = 100 H. If the capacitor initially carries a charge of 10 mC, then :-
L1 'Q ' + C L2
–
k1 k2
(A) the maximum current through the inductor L1 when key k1 is closed is 20 mA
(B) the maximum current through the inductor L2 when key k2 is closed is 5mA
(C) the maximum current through inductor L2 when both the keys are closed is 5 mA
(D) time period of oscillation of charge is minimum when both the keys are closed
10. A capacitor with charge Q on it is connected to an inductor L as shown in diagram at t = 0. When the
switch is flipped from position 1 to 2, the current in the circuit is observed to be at half of its maximum
value. Then :-
C L L
1
2
Q Q 3
(A) Charge on capacitor at the time was (B) Charge on capacitor at that time was
2 2
Q2 Q2
(C) Total energy lost is (D) Total energy lost is
4C 8C
11. In the circuit shown source may be AC or DC. At t = 0 switch S is closed. Choose the correct statement(s)
:-
L C
source
S
(A) After a long time charge on the capacitor will be zero if source is DC
(B) After a long time charge on the capacitor will be zero if source is AC
(C) After a long time charge on the capacitor will not be constant if source is DC
(D) After a long time charge on the capacitor will not be constant if source is AC

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

12. Match the physical quantity of List-I with value given in List-II.
List-I List-II
2MW 2µF
(P) 2MW
(1) 100
V
time constant
t = .... sec
2MW 2µF
(Q) (2) 1.33
2MW
V 2MW
time constant,
t = .... sec
C
(R) C C (3) 4
L
L
L
C = 100 µF, L = 1H
angular frequency
w = ....... rad/sec
(S) 2R (4) 6
R
R C
I + –
V
I(0) .....
=
I(¥)
I(0) and I(¥) are current
drawn from the battery
at t = 0 and t ® ¥
Codes :
P Q R S P Q R S
(A) 2 1 4 3 (B) 3 1 4 2
(C) 3 4 1 2 (D) 4 2 3 1
SECTION-III
1. There are two concentric coplanar rings where outer ring has radius 4m. The inner ring has radius 1mm,
resistance 1 W & self inductance 2 µH. Initially the outer and inner rings have current of 5 × 106 A & 2A
respectively in clockwise sense. Later on current in inner ring is found to be 3A clockwise whereas for
outer ring it is 5 × 106 A anticlockwise. If total charge flown through the inner ring till this moment is Q 0
µC then find value of Q0. (Take p2 = 10)
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A small charged particle (charge q and mass m) is released at t = 0 q,

xm
inside a smooth hollow circular tube (it’s like tube of wheel) placed x
x
xx
r
inside a long solenoid (n turns per unit length). Cross sectional view of x
x
x
R
the arrangement is given. Axis of tube is coinciding with axis of
solenoid. Radius of tube is very small i.e. r such that we can take S
magnetic field which is passing through the tube is same as at axis of E
solenoid. Cross-sectional area of tube is also very small such that

charged particle can just move inside it. [Neglect the resistance of solenoid.] If the switch S is closed at
m 0 nEqr
t = 0. The speed of the particle after a long time is k mR . Find the value of k.
3. Two capacitors of capacitance C and 3C are charged to potential difference V0 and 2V0 respectively
and connected to an inductor of inductance L as shown in the figure. Initially the current in the inductor
is zero. Now the switch S is closed. Find the maximum current (in mA) in the inductor. (Take C = 12
µF, L = 1H & V0 = 1V)
V0 2V0
+ – + –
C 3C
S
4. Figure shows a circuit containing three resistor X1, X2 & X3 having resistance R each, an inductor,
L
capacitor and an emf source having inductance 'L', capacitance C & emf e respectively (Given R = ).
C
The switch is first connected to position-1. When charge on capacitor becomes half of it maximum
possible value then switch S is connected to position-2. Current in resistance X3 just after shifting the
switch from position-1 to position-2 is (given L = 20mH, C = 2µF, R = 100W, x = 5V)
R X1
L
C R X2
x
1
S
R X3
2
5. Two capacitors of equal capacity 1 µF each are joined in series with an inductor of inductance 0.5 H.
One of the capacitors has an initial charge 1 mC and other is uncharged. Switch is closed at t = 0. Find
maximum current (in A) through the inductor.
1µF 1H 1µF
Q –Q
Q = 1mC
S

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Match the following Questions.
Column-I Column-II
Piston
(A) (P) Equilibrium of A can be unstable
l/2 l/2
Thermally insulated container. Friction is
absent. Helium gas is present on both sides
of the thermally insulated piston. Piston is
slightly displaced from equilibrium & released.
Piston is A.
L
(B) (Q) Acceleration of A increases on moving
away from equilibrium position
Rod & parallel rails are conducting. Uniform

magnetic field B is pointing into the plane of
paper. B is time independent. Friction is absent
between rod and parallel rails. Inductor L is ideal.
At equilibrium rod is given an impulse perpendicular
to its length. Rod is A. (Neglect self inductance of
rectangular loop)
(1) (2) (3)
(C) (R) Graph of kinetic energy of A as a function
l/2 l/2 of position measured from equilibrium
Infinite long parallel current carrying wires can be parabola.
are placed as shown. Wire (1) and (3) are
fixed and wire (2) can move freely. Wire is slightly
displaced from equilibrium & released. Wire 2 is A.
non-viscous
(D) (S) Motion of A can be oscillatory
liquid
A cubical block floats in a non-viscous liquid

as shown. Block is slightly displaced in vertical
direction from equilibrium and (T) Graph of velocity of A as a function of position
released. Block is A. measured from equilibrium can be ellipse.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A long solenoid contains another coaxial solenoid (whose radius R is half of I
its own). Their coils have same numbers of turns per unit length and initially
both carry no current. At any moment the current flowing in the inner coil 2I
is twice as large as that in the outer one and their directions are the same. R
As a result of the increasing current a charged particle initially at rest r
between the solenoids, starts moving along a circular trajectory. The radius
of the circular trajectory is : 2R
5 7
(A) R (B) 2R (C) R (D) 3R
4 6
dB
2. There is a cylindrical region of variable magnetic field = a having a wire frame inside as shown
dt
- me ü
each part of the wire frame has resistance r. If iDE = ìí ý then find the value of (m + n). (Where e is
î nr þ
the e.m.f. developed in the rod AC)
r
r
r
i
B
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 7 w
3. A very long solid conducting cylinder of radius R is placed in a constant and
uniform magnetic field which is parallel to the axis of the cylinder. Now the R
cylinder is rotated with a constant angular velocity w as shown in the figure.

Charge and mass of electron can be taken as e and m respectively.
(A) The magnitude of electric field inside the cylinder as a function of radial
mw2
distance r is wB - e
r.
BwR3
(B) The potential difference between the axis of cylinder and circumference is
2
mw
(C) The magnitude of volume charge density of the cylinder is w B - e0 .
e
B mw
(D) The magnitude of volume charge density of the cylinder is w - e0 .
2 e

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. A long coaxial cable carries current I (along its surface). The current flows down the surface of inner
cylinder of radius a and back along the outer cylinder of radius b.
I
m I2 b
(A)Energy stored in magnetic field per unit length is 0 ln b
8p a I
a
m0 I2 b
(B) Energy stored in magnetic field per unit length is ln
2p a
m0 æ b ö
(C) Self inductance of given arrangement per unit length is ln ç ÷
2p è a ø
m0 æ b ö
(D)Self inductance of given arrangement per unit length is ln ç ÷
4p è a ø
5. If the voltage waveform in figure is applied to a 10-mH inductor, find the inductor current Assume
i(0) = 0.
v(t)
0
1 2 t
–5
(A) The current through the inductor at t = 1 seconds is 5 × 10–2 A

(B) The current through the inductor at t = 2 seconds is 0 A
(C) The current through the inductor at t = 1 seconds is 250 A
(D) The current through the inductor at t = 2 seconds is 5 × 10–3 A
Many ac circuits used in practical electronic systems involve resistance,
inductive reactance, and capacitive reactance. A simple example is a series
circuit containing a resistor, an inductor, a capacitor, and an ac source,
as shown in figure. To analyze this and similar circuits, we will use a
phasor diagram that includes the voltage and the current phasors for each
of the components. In this circuit, because of Kirchhoff’s loop rule,
the instantaneous total voltage Vad across all the three components is equal to the source voltage at that
instant. We will show that the phasor representing this total voltage is the vector sum of the phasors for
the individual voltages.
2
æ 1 ö
Impedance of circuit Z = R 2 + X 2 = R 2 + çè wL - ÷
wC ø
6. If w is small then impedance will be mainly decided by
1 1
(A) R and wL (B) R and (C) wL and (D) None of these
wC wC

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. If w is large then impedance will be mainly decided by

1 1
(A) R and wL (B) R and (C) wL and (D) None of these
wC wC
8. If Vs = 200 sin 100t, R= 500 W, L = 10 H and C = 20 mF, find the value of impedance of circuit.
(A) 500 W (B) 500 2W (C) 1000 W (D) 825 W
Figure shows a metallic square frame of edge a and total resistance R. A uniform × × × D × × ×
magnetic field B exists in the space in the direction perpendicular to the plane of × × A × × C × ×
paper. Two strings are attached to the opposite corners of the square. The strings × × × B × × ×
v
start moving with constant speed v at t = 0 and square starts to deform into a × v × × × × ×
rhombus.
9. Find the induced emf in the frame at the instant when the angles at corners A and C reduce to "2q" :-
æ cos 2q ö æ cos 2q ö 1 æ sin q ö 1 æ sin q ö
(A) 2Bav ç ÷ (B) Bav ç ÷ (C) Bav ç ÷ (D) Bav ç ÷
è sin q ø è sin q ø 2 è cos 2q ø 4 è cos 2q ø
10. Find the value of magnitude of magnetic force on side DC when angles at corners A and C reduce to
60° :-
B2 a 2 v 2B2 a 2 v 3 B2 a 2 v B2 a 2 v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
R R 2 R 2R
A smooth insulating ring of radius R, with a bead of mass m and charge q is placed horizontally and in
a uniform magnetic field of strength B0 and perpendicular to the ring plane. Starting from t = 0, the magnetic
field is changed to B (t) = B0 + at, where a is a positive constant & t is time. Neglect gravity.
11. The contact force between the ring and bead as a function of time t is :
aq 2 Rt a q 2 Rt aq 2 Rt qR
(A) (2B0 + at) (B) (B 0 + a t) (C) (B0 + at) (D) (2B0 + at)
4m 2m m 2m
12. The velocity of bead as function of time t
qR qR 2qR qR
(A) at (B) at (C) at (D) (B0 + at)
m 2m m 2m
SECTION-III
1. A long wire bend into the shape of a right angle is held stationary on a horizontal frictionless plane. A
very long rod of mass 1 kg initially starts with velocity v0 = 4 m/s from the apex A of the bend wire. The
resistance per unit length of the wire and the rod is ( )
2 - 1 ´10-2 W /m. The whole arrangement is put in
a region of uniform magnetic field of 0.05 T directed normally into the horizontal plane. Find the dis-
tance travelled by the rod before it comes to rest.
´ ´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ ´ ´
A
´ ´ ´ ´ ´
´ ´ ´ ´ ´

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. A block of mass 300 g is attached to the ceiling by a spring that has a force constant k = 200 N/m. A
conducting massless rod is rigidly attached to the block and can slide without friction along two vertical
parallel rails which are at a distance L = 1m apart. A capacitor of known capacitance C = 500 µF is
attached to the rails by the wire and the entire system is kept in magnetic field B = 20 T as shown in
figure. Neglect the self inductance and electrical resistance of all wire and rod. If 'w' is angular frequency
w
(in rad/sec) of vertical oscillation of block then is equal to :-
10
k
m
3. Two straight infinitely long current wires lying along the x-axis and the y-axis carry currents 100 A and
200 A as indicated in the adjoining figure. A rigid square metallic wire frame ABCD of side 10 cm and
resistance (R = 10W) is connected to a capacitor C1 = 1mF as shown in the figure. The wire frame, which
lies in the x-y plane, moves with a constant velocity 30 (iˆ + ˆj)m / s. At the instant, when the point A is
located at (20 cm, 20 cm) the charge q0 on the capacitor (as shown in the figure) is 0.2 mC. If, at the
above mentioned instant, the current flowing in the circuit is given by 10 –n amp. Fill the value of n in
nearest integer.
Y
C
D C
i=200A R
A B
(0,0)
X
i=100A
4. A non conducting ring of mass 4 kg is uniformly charged with l = 4C/m and kept on rough horizontal
surface with friction coefficient µ = p/4. A time varying magnetic field B = Bot2 is applied in a circular
region of radius a (a<r) perpendicular to the plane of ring as shown in figure. Find out the time (in sec)
when ring just starts to rotate on surface. (take a= 5cm and g = 10m/s2 B0 = 125 SI Unit).
®
B
+ +
+ +
l a +
+ r +
+ + +
+ + +
5. A superconducting round ring of radius a = 20 cm and inductance L = 0.1 H was located in a uniform
magnetic field of induction B = 10 T. The plane of ring was parallel to the vector B, and the current in
the ring was equal to zero. Then the ring was turned through 90° so that its plane became perpendicular
to the field. The work (in J) performed during the turn is (Assume p2 = 10) :-

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
p
6. A long single layer tightly wound solenoid with a wire of resistivity ´ 1 0 - 8 ohm-m has 1000 turns
2
per meter. The thickness of wire insulation is negligible. The radius of solenoid is 5 cm. If the phase
p
difference between current and alternating voltage applied to the solenoid with frequency 100 Hz is ,
x
find x ( Take p 2 = 10 ).
SECTION-IV
1. Match the column
Column-I Column-II
(A) The pressure on walls is tending (P) A soap bubble present in air containing air.
to contract them. The temperature inside and outside air is
the same.
Energy : internal energy of air.

(B) The pressure on walls in tending (Q) Current flowing in a thin hollow pipe of
to expand them radius r.
Energy : Magnetic field energy.

(C) The energy/volume inside the (R) A hollow conducting shell with a charge on it.
walls is more than outside.
r
Energy : electrostatic field energy.

(D) The energy/volume outside the (S) Point source of light is present at the
walls is more than inside. centre of a spherical shell with both
surfaces perfectly black.
r
S
Energy : light energy.

(T) A cubical container has adiabatic walls.
The temperature of air inside is less than
the temperature of air outside. The density
of air is same on both sides.
Energy : internal energy of air

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Maximum charge on capacitor after switch is closed :- L +CE –CE
(A) 2CE
C
(B) 4CE
(C) 3CE
t=0 2E
(D) None of these
2. For the circuit shown, the switch was closed at switch S1 for a 2W S S
1 2
long time till steady state condition reached. At time t = 0,

the switch S1 is opened and S2 is closed. The current through 1µF
inductor as a function of time will be 10V 1H
(A) 5 cos 100 t
(B) 10 cos 100 t
(C) 5 cos 1000 t
(D) 10 cos 1000 t
3. A resistor of resistance R, an inductor of inductance L and a capacitor of capacitance C are connected
in series and t he combination is connected to a battery of emf e as shown. At
t = 0, the switch S is closed. Let, after a very long time, the thermal energy developed in circuit be
Q, energy stored in circuit be U and energy supplied by the battery be E. Then :- C
(A) Q : U : E = 1 : 1 : 2
R L
(B) Q : U : E = 1 : 3 : 4
(C) Q : U : E = 3 : 1 : 4
(D) Q : U : E = 1 : 2 : 3 S
e
4. A conducting loop is halfway into a magnetic field. Suppose the magnetic field begins to increase
rapidly in strength. What happens to the loop ?
× × × ×
(A) The loop is pushed upward, toward the top of the page.
×r × × ×
(B) The loop is pushed downward, toward the bottom of the page. B
× × × ×
(C) The loop is pulled to the left, into the magnetic field. × × × ×
(D) The loop is pushed to the right, out of the magnetic field.
5. A block is attached to the ceiling by a spring that has a force constant k = 200 N/m.
A conducting rod is rigidly attached to the block. The combined mass of the block
and the rod is m = 0.3 kg. The rod can slide without friction along two vertical
parallel rails, which are a distance L = 1 m apart. A capacitor of known capacitance
C = 500 mF is attached to the rails by the wires. The entire system is placed in a
uniform magnetic field B = 20 T directed as shown. Find the angular frequency (in
rad/sec) of the vertical oscillations of the block. Neglect the self-inductance and
electrical resistance of the rod and all wires.
20 5
(A) 20 5 (B) 20 (C) (D) none
3

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ur r B 2
The magnetic field in a region is given by B = k
0
6. y where L is a fixed length. A conducting rod
L
of length L lies along the Y-axis between the origin and the point (0, L, 0). If the rod moves with a
velocity V = V î , what is the emf induced between the ends of the rod?
0
B0 v 0 l2 B0 v 0 l2 2B0 v 0 l 2 B0 v 0 l 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 2 3 6
7. Two parallel conducting rails, separated by a distance l, are
r
placed horizontally in a region of uniform magnetic field B ,
m m v0
perpendicular to the plane of the rails as shown in the figure. l ÄB
Two conducting wires, each of length l are placed so as to l
slide on parallel conducting rails without friction. One of the
wires is given a velocity v0 parallel to the rails. Loss in kinetic
energy of the system till the steady state is achieved will be :
3 2 3 2 1 2
(A) 0 (B) mv 0 (C) mv 0 (D) mv 0
4 8 4
8. A uniform magnetic field exists in cylindrical region of radius R with
axis passing through O. The field is made to vary at a constant rate. The
O
variation of the induced electric field E with distance r from the axis is
R r
given by : Q
E E E E
(A) (B) (C) (D)

R r R r R r R r
9. Some magnetic flux is changed from a coil of resistance 10W. As a result 4A

an induced current is developed in it which varies with time as shown in
figure. The magnitude of change in flux through the coil in weber is :- i
(A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 6 (D) None of these t t = 0.1s
10. Two conducting rings P and Q of radii r and 2r rotate uniformly in opposite directions with centre of
mass velocities 2v and v respectively on a conducting surface S. There is a uniform magnetic field
of magnitude B perpendicular to the plane of the rings. The potential difference between the highest
points of the two rings is
(A) 0 (B) 4 Bvr
(3) 8 Bvr (D) 16 Bvr
11. In figure the rolling axle, of length l is pushed along horizontal B
rails at a constant speed v. A resistor R is connected to the rails at
points a and b, directly opposite each other. The wheels make good
electrical contact with the rails, so the axle, rails, and R form a
a v
closed-loop circuit. The only significant resistance in the circuit is
R b
R. A uniform magnetic field B is vertically downward. Mark the
CORRECT statement(s)

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Blv
(A) The induced current I in the resistor is .
R
B2 l 2v 2
(B) Horizontal force F is required to keep the axle rolling at constant speed is .
R
(C) End of the resistor, a is at the higher electric potential than b.
(D) After the axle rolls past the resistor, the current in R reverse direction.
12. In the figure shown a conducting rod of mass m, length 'l' and resistance 'R' can smoothly move
r
along parallel rails in horizontal plane. Initially the rod is at rest. A uniform magnetic field B
perpendicular to t he plane of motion exists in the region. Now switch S is closed at
t = 0, then : C
S
(A) The charge on the capacitor in steady state is mce/(m + cB2l2)
(B) The charge on the capacitor in steady state is 2mce/(m + cB2l2) e
BÄ
(C) Velocity of conducting rod in steady state is 2Blce/(m + cB2l2) m,l,R
(D) Velocity of conducting rod in steady state is Blce/(m + cB2l2)
13. A massless frame is present in uniform magnetic field and a
block of mass m hangs on the frame as shown in figure. When × × × ×
magnetic
mg field (B) × P × I Q×
a constant current I > is mantained in the frame, it gets × × × ×
lB
× × × ×
displaced by ‘h’ in some time interval. If e is the emf of battery massless
then which of the following is/are CORRECT ? frame
(A) Work done by magnetic force is IlBh S R
(B) Work done by battery is IlBh m

2(IlB - mg)h
(C) Velocity of block when it gets displacement by h is
m
(D) Force on charges in the segment PQ while the frame moves up is in the vertical direction
14. The circuit below shows two parallel rails separated by distance of 10 cm. The rails has 10 W
resistor each at its middle. The region of space contains magnetic field which is uniform throughout
the space. There are two conducting wires on the parallel rails moving towards each other with
speed of 10 m/s.
10W
10m/s 10m/s B = 2T uniform
10cm
everywhere
10W
conducting
sliders
(A) Current in the circuit is 0.2 A.

(B) Power lost in the circuit is 0.8 W.
(C) The electric field inside the wires is non-conservative in nature.
(D) The electric field inside the wires is conservative in nature.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Answer Q.15, Q.16 and Q.17 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
columns of the following table.
Column-1 gives various circuit diagram with a black box which can contain either inductor or
resistor. Column-2 lists time constant for the various circuit while column-3 lists the value of
current (i1) at either t = 0 or t ® ¥. Initially before switching on inductor does not carry any energy.
Column–1 Column-2 Column-3
L i1 R
Black box
L
(I) (i) (P) i1 = 0 at t = 0
2R
e t=0
L
i1 Black box
2R 2L e
(II) (ii) (Q) i1 = at t ® ¥
3R R
e t=0
R
Black box
i1 3L e
(III) 2R (iii) (R) i1 = at t = 0
R 2R
e t=0
R
Black
box
i1
2L
3L e
(IV) 2R (iv) (S) i1 = at t = 0
2R 3R
e t=0
15. If the black box consists of , then correct matching will be :

2R
(A) (I) (iv) (Q) (B) (II) (i) (P) (C) (I) (iv) (R) (D) (IV) (iii) (P)
R
16. If the black box consists of , then correct matching will be :
(A) (I) (ii) (P) (B) (IV) (i) (Q) (C) (II) (iv) (S) (D) (II) (iii) (R)
17. If the black box consists of (connecting wire), then correct matching will be :
(A) (II) (iii) (Q) (B) (II) (i) (R) (C) (II) (i) (P) (D) (II) (ii) (Q)

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
a
1. In the figure shown i1 = 10e–2t A, i2 = 4A and VC = 3e–2t V. If VL = ae–bt then find :-
b
b
+
VC 2F
–
i2
R1 = 2 W
c
a
i1 R2 = 3 W
+
L = 4H
–
iL
d
P
2. ABCD is a square frame of conductor of electrical resistivity r. The frame A D
lies in a vertical plane. PQ is an imaginary boundary separating space
r
into two parts. Left of PQ, a uniform gravitational field g exists (figure)
g h
whereas no gravitational field is present right of PQ. The electrical potential
k mgh
difference between A and B will be . e is charge on an electron B C
4 e
Q
and m is mass of electron. Find k.
SECTION-IV
1. In column–I some circuit are given. In all the circuits except in (A) switch S remains closed for long
time and then it is opened at t = 0 while for (A), the situation is reversed. Column–II tells something
about the circuit quantities. Match the entries of column–I with the entries of column–II.
Column-I Column-II
L
R
S
(A) (P) Voltage across inductor can be greater than E at t =0.
E r
(r < R)
(B) S R (Q) Voltage across inductor would be less than E at t =0.

E
L
R
(C) S (R) After long time, energy stored in inductor is zero.
E
L
S
(D) R (S) After long time, energy sotred in inductor is non-zero

E
(T) Voltage across inductor increases as time progress.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A bar of mass m, length d and resistance R slides without friction in a horizontal plane, moving on
parallel rails as shown in figure. A battery that maintains a constant emf e is connected between the rails,
r
and a constant magnetic field B is directed perpendicularly to the plane of the page. Assuming the bar
starts from rest, Find speed at time t :-
e æ ö e æ ö
B2 dt B 2d 2 t
(A) v = Bd çç1 - e ÷ (B) v = Bd çç1 - e ÷

mR 2mR
÷ ÷ B (out of page)
è ø è ø d e
e æ ö
Bdt
(C) v =
e
Bd
2 2
(
1 - e- B d t / mR ) (D) v = çç1 - e mR
Bd è
÷÷
ø
2. In the shown figure, uniform magnetic field B0 is pointing out of the plane in the region. Wire CD is
fixed and has resistance R, while OA and OB are conducting wires rotating with angular velocity w
about O as shown. If at some instant OA = OB = l and each wire makes angle q = 30° with y-axis, then
current through resistance R is
B0
Y
A R B
D C
w w
l l
30° 30°
B0 wl2 3B0 wl2 3B0 wl2

(A) (B) (C) (D) Zero
R 2R 4R
3. The switch in the circuit pictured is in position a for a long time. At t = 0 the switch is moved from a to
b. The energy in inductor will becomes half of its maximum value in a minimum time t equals
p p
(A) 2p LC LC (B) (C) LC (D) p LC
4 2
4. In the circuit shown, the capacitor is initially charged with a 12 V battery, when switch S1 is open and
switch S2 is closed. S1 is then closed and, at the same time, S2 is opened. The maximum value of current
in the circuit is
E=12V
S2
C=9pF
S1
L=2.5mH
(A) 0.38 mA (B) 0.84 mA (C) 0.72 mA (D) 0.1 mA

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

5. Figure shows a part of a circuit. At a particular instant of time the potentials
of points 'A', 'B' and 'D' are 8V, 16V and 4V respectively and voltage
across the capacitor at that instant is 4V with polarity as shown. Choose
the CORRECT statement(s) :-
æ 16 ö
(A)The potential of point O at the given instant is ç ÷ V
è 3ø R 1 = 4W
æ4ö
(B)The charge on the capacitor at the given instant is decreasing at a rate ç ÷ C/s
è3ø
æ4ö
(C)The charge on the capacitor at the given instant is increasing at a rate ç ÷ C/s
è3ø
(D)The electric current at the given instant of time in resistance R1 is flowing from O to B having
æ8ö
magnitude ç ÷ A
è3ø
6. In the circuit shown, switch S is first pushed up to charge the capacitor. Swtich S is then pushed down.
10V
50mH
(A) Maximum value of energy stored in the inductor is 250 × 10–6 J

(B) Maximum value of energy stored in the capacitor is 250 × 10–6 J
(C) Maximum current in the circuit is 100 mA
(D) Maximum charge on the capacitor is 5 µC
7. Three identical fixed metal plates are arranged in the air at equal distances d from each other. The area
of each of the plates equals A. The plate 1 has charge + Q, while plates 2 and 3 are not charged and are
connected through a key K to the inductor L. The distance between the plates is small compared with
their size. The ohmic resistance of the coil can be neglected :-
+Q
1 2 3
d d
K
L
(A)Just before the switch K is closed, the charge on right surface of plate 2 is Q/2
(B) Just before the switch K is closed, the charge on right surface of plate 3 is Q/2
Q d
(C) After the switch K is closed, the maximum current in the circuit is 2 Le A
0
d
(D)After the switch K is closed, the maximum current in the circuit is Q Le A
0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A circular coil of wire has a radius of 0.5m and a total resistance of 1.57 W. The coil lies in the x-y plane.
r
The coil is in uniform magnetic field B that is in –z direction, which is directed away from you as you
view the coil. The magnitude B of the field depends on time as follows : It increases at a constant rate
from 0 at t = 0 to 0.8 T at t = 0.5 sec, is constant at 0.8T from t = 0.5 sec to t = 1 sec and decreases at a
constant rate from 0.8T at t = 1 sec to 0 at t = 2 sec.
8. Draw a graph of the current I induced in the coil versus t for 0 to 2 sec. Let counter clockwise currents
be positive and clockwise currents be negative.
I I
1 2 1 2
t(sec)
(A) 0.5 (B) 0.5
I I
0.5 0.5
t(sec) t(sec)
(C) 1 2 (D) 1 2
9. What is the maximum induced electric field magnitude in the coil during 0 to 2 sec interval :-
(A) 0.4 V/m (B) 0.2 V/m (C) 0.6 V/m (D) 8 V/m
Answer Q.10, 11 & 12 by appropriately matching the information given in the three columns of
the following table.
Figure shows a solid wooden cylinder of mass m = 0.250 kg and length L = 0.100 m with N = 10 turns
of wire wrapped around it longitudinally, so that the plane of wire coil contains the long central axis of
the cylinder. The cylinder is released on a plane inclined at an angle q to the horizontal, with the plane
of the coil parallel to the inclined plane. A magnetic field B of different magnitudes and directions as per
column-1 is applied in the region. The value of current through the coil is I and such that the direction of
field in all cases produced by coil makes an acute angle with vertically upward direction. There is
enough friction to ensure that the cylinder rolls without slipping. (take g = 10 m/s2)
upward
leftward rightward
downward
37°

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Answer the questions given below on the basis of given matrix.

(B) (I) (Acceleration of C.M of cylinder)
(I) 0 T (i) 0 Amp (P) 0 m/s2
2g
(II) 0.5 T upward (ii) 1 Amp (Q) m / s2
15
4g
(III) 0.5 T downward (iii) 15/8 Amp (R) m / s2
5
5.6g
(IV) 0.5 T leftward (iv) 5/2 Amp (S) m / s2
3
10. In which case among the following cases will the cylinder remain stationary
(A) (II) (iii) (P) (B) (III) (ii) (P) (C) (II) (iv) (P) (D) (III) (iv) (P)
11. In which case will the induced emf rise at the maximum rate initially ?
(A) (III) (iv) (R) (B) (III) (iii) (S) (C) (III) (iv) (S) (D) (II) (iv) (Q)
12. Among the given situations, when will the friction be a maximum ?
(A) (IV) (iii) (P) (B) (III) (iv) (S) (C) (II) (iii) (S) (D) (IV) (iv) (Q)
SECTION-II
Numerical Answer Type Question (upto second decimal place) 1Q.[3(0)]
1. A square loop of side length l ( = 25 cm) falls into a finite and uniform magnetic field (B = 0.5T)
confined to a region as shown. Find the height 'h' (in m) through which the loop should be dropped, so
that its velocity does not change during the period it enters the magnetic field. Assume mass of loop
m = 25 gm, the resistance R = 2.5 W and g = 10 m/s2.
B×
SECTION-III
1. The L-shaped conductor as shown in figure moves with 10 m/s across a stationary L-shaped conductor
in a 0.10 T magnetic field. The two vertices overlap so that the enclosed area is zero at time t = 0. The
conductor has resistance of 0.010 ohms per meter. If current at time t = 0.10 sec. is x amp, find the value
2
æ x ö
of ç ÷ .
è 25 ø
10m/s

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
2. Two identical conducting bars rest on two horizontal parallel conducting rails. The bars are perpendicular
to the rails and parallel to each other as shown. The distance between the bars is l. At a certain moment,
a uniform vertical upward magnetic field is turned on. The field quickly reaches its maximum magnitude
and then remains constant. Assume that the resistance of each bar is much greater than the resistance of
the rails. Neglecting friction, find the new distance ‘d’ between the bars. If the new distance comes out
l
to be ; fill a in OMR sheet.
a
TOP VIEW
3. A homogeneous field of magnetic induction B is perpendicular to a track of gauge l which is inclined at

an angle a = 30° to the horizontal. A frictionless conducting rod of mass m straddles the two rails of the
mgR
track as shown in the figure. If maximum speed of the conductor is = . Then find n
nB2 l 2
B
m
a l
4. A non–conducting ring of radius R having uniformly distributed charge Q

starts rotating about x–x¢ axis passing through diameter with an angular
acceleration a as shown in the figure. Another small conducting ring having x’ x
R
radius a (a << R) is kept fixed at the centre of bigger ring in such a way that
axis xx¢ is passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane. If the
resistance of small ring is r = 1W, find the induced current in it in ampere.
16 ´ 102
(Given q = m0
C, R = 1 m, a = 0.1 m, a = 8 rad/s2)
5. Two long parallel rails, a distance d = 1m apart and each having a resistance per unit length l = 2W/m
are joined at one end by a resistance R = 1W. A perfectly conducting rod MN of mass m = 1kg is free to
slide along the rails without friction. There is a uniform magnetic field of induction B = 1 T normal to the
plane of the paper and directed into the paper. A variable force F is applied to the rod MN such that, as
the rod moves, a constant current i = 1 Amp. flows through R. Find the applied force F(in N) at a
distance x = 1m of the rod from R.
M
ÄB
R F d
x
N

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) 1 Q . [ 8 M ( f o r ea ch en t r y + 2 (0 )]
1. A homogeneous magnetic field B is perpendicular to a sufficiently long track of width l which is
horizontal. A frictionless rod of mass m straddles the two rail of the track as shown in the figure. Entire
arrangement lies in horizontal plane. For the situation suggested in column-II match the appropriate
entries in column-I. The rails are also resistanceless.
B
D
A
Column-I Column-II
(A) A is a battery of emf V and internal (P) Energy is dissipated during the motion.
resistance R. The conducting rod is
initially at rest.
(B) A is a resistance. The non-conducting rod (Q) The rod moves with a constant
is projected to the right with a velocity V0 velocity after a long time.
(C) A is an inductor having with initial current i0. (R) After a certain time interval rod will
It is having no resistance and CD is a change its direction of motion.
conducting rod.
i0
D
(D) A is a resistance. The conducting rod is (S) If a constant force is applied on the rod to
projected to the right with a velocity V0. the right, it can move with a constant velocity.
(T) The rod stops after some time in absence
of an external force.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A capacitor and a coil in series are connected to a 6 volt ac source. By varying the frequency of the
source, maximum current of 600 mA observed. If the same coil is now connected to a cell of emf 6 volt
and internal resistance of 2W, the steady-state current through it will be :-
(A) 0.5 A (B) 0.6 A (C) 1.0 A (D) 2.0 A
2. A hollow cylinder has length l, radius r, and thickness d, where l >> r >> d,
and is made of a material with resistivity r. A time-varying current I flows
I
through the cylinder in the tangential direction. Assume the current is always
r
uniformly distributed along the length of the cylinder. The cylinder is fixed so
that it cannot move; assume that there are no externally generated magnetic
fields during the time considered for the problems below. Assume current at l
t = 0 to be I0. What is current I(t) for t > 0
r 2r 2 m0 rd m0 rd
- t - t - t - t
2 m0 rd m0 rd r
(A) I = I0 e (B) I = I0 e (C) I = I0 e (D) I = I0 e 2r
3. Three capacitor of capacitance C each are connected in series as shown in the figure. Initially switch S
is open. Now capacitors are charged by a battery of emf V by connecting between terminal A and B.
After long time battery is disconnected and inductor of inductance L is connected between A and B at
time t = 0 so that an oscillatory circuit is formed. Now at an instant t 0 switch S is closed, then find the
amplitude of charge oscillations of the remaining capacitors.
C C
A
B
C
L
æ æ 3 ö ö æ æ 3 ö ö
ç cos2 çç ÷ t0 ÷ ç cos2 çç ÷ t0 ÷
1ç è LC ÷ø ÷ CV 1 ç è LC ÷ø ÷
(A) CV ç 1 - ÷ (B) 1-
6 3 3 5ç 3 ÷
ç ÷ ç ÷
ç ÷ ç ÷
è ø è ø
æ æ 3 ö ö
ç cos2 çç ÷ t0 ÷
1ç è LC ÷ø ÷ CV
(C) CV ç 1 - (D)
4 3 ÷ 3
ç ÷
ç ÷
è ø

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. Consider the electrical circuit given below; initially chargeless capacitors C1

C1 and C2 were connected to a battery and at certain moment, the key K K
will be closed. After that moment, current and voltage will start oscillating.
For these oscillations : e L
C2
(A) When charge on C2 is maximum, current through C1 is same as
current in L.
(B) When charge on C1 is maximum, power delivered by battery is positive.
(C) Charge on C2 is maximum when current through L is maximum.
(D) None of these
5. In the circuit shown, switch can be placed in position 1 or 2.
1
2
(A) If switch is in position 1 for a very -2 long time and then shifted to 2 at t = 0 then current will grow
with time for t > 0
(B) If switch is in position 1 for a very -2 long time and then shifted to 2 at t = 0 then current will decay
with time for t > 0
(C) If switch is in position 2 for a very -2 long time and then shifted to 1 at t = 0 then current will decay
with time for t > 0
(D) If switch is in position 2 for a very -2 long time and then shifted to 1 at t = 0 then current will not
change for t > 0
6. Consider the circuit shown in figure. At time t = 0, switch S is closed. The current through the inductor
is i1, the current through the capacitor branch is i2, and the charge on the capacitor is q2. Then choose the
CORRECT statements :-
R
i=i1+i2
+ i2 q2
e i1 L C
– –q2
S
æ di1 ö
(A) At any instant according to Kirchoff rule, R(i1 + i2) + L ç ÷=e
è dt ø
q
(B) At any instant according to Kirchoff rule, R(i1 + i2) – 2 = e
C
e
(C) Initial values of i1 & i2 will be zero and respectively
R
e
(D) Initial values of i1 & i2 will be and zero respectively
R
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. In the circuit shown in the figure, the switch is initially at position 1 for a long time. Now, at t = 0, the
switch is turned to position 2. Initially charge on capacitor ‘ C’ is zero. Choose the CORRECT statements:-
(A) After the switch is thrown to position 2, the circuit performs LC oscillation
L
3
with angular frequency C 2C 2
2LC
1
2C
(B) Just after the switch is turned, the current through the circuit is E e
3L
4CE
(C) The maximum charge in capacitor ‘C’ is equal to
3
CE
(D) The maximum charge in capacitor ‘C’ is equal to
3
8. Two conductors of infinite length carry a current i each, which varies with time
æ 2 ö
÷t
i
according to relation i = i eçè m 0 ø . They are parallel and separated by a distance
0
2a. A circular conducting ring of radius a and having a resistance 1 W/length, in

the plane of wires lies between the two straight conductors and insulated from
them as shown :-
i
(A) Mutual inductance of system is 2 µ0a.
(B) Mutual inductance of system is µ0a. 2a
(C) Net magnetic field at the centre of circle is always zero.
(D) Net magnetic field at the centre of circle increases with time.
9. A long straight wire of negligible resistance is bent into V shape, its two arms making an angle a with
each other and placed horizotally in a vertical, homogeneous field B. A rod of total mass m, and resistance
r per unit length, is placed on V shaped conductor, at a distance x0 from its vertex A, and perpendicular
to the bisector of angle a (see fegure)
a/2 v0
A
a/2
The rod is started off with an initial velocity v0 in the direction of bisector and away from vertex A. The
rod is long enough not to fall off the wire during the subsquent motion, and the electrical contact between
the two is good although friction between them is negligible. Choose CORRECT statement(s)
B2 2 a B2 2 a
(A) At any position x, let velocity of wire is v then x 0 tan + mV0 = x tan + mv
r 2 r 2
mv 0 r
(B) maximum value of x cordinate of wire is x max = x 02 +
a
B2 tan
2
(C) As x increases, v decreases
(D) Whatever is the direction of vertical magnetic field, the rod will ultimately stop.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. Two fixed parallel conducting rails of negligible resistance are connected at one end by a capacitor C.
Distance between the rails is l. Arrangement is kept on a horizontal plane with vertical uniform magnetic
field as shown in the figure. Initially capacitor is uncharged & a rod of resistance R & mass m is laid
perpendicularly on to the rails & given a velocity v0. Choose the CORRECT option(s), provided that
the rail is long enough & homogeneous field extends far enough (Friction & effect of self induction is
negligible)
× × × × × ×
B2l2C
(A) Final velocity of the wire is v0 . × × × × × ×
m + B 2 l 2C
× × × × × ×
l
é mBlC ù C B
(B) Final charge on the capacitor is ê v
2 2 ú 0. × × × × × ×
ëm + B l C û v0
× × × × × ×
Bv 0 l
(C) Final current in the circuit is . × × × × × ×
2R
2
æ m ö
(D) Ratio of final kinetic energy & initial kinetic energy is ç ÷ .
èm+B l Cø
2 2
11. A circular conducting loop of radius R and resistance per unit length l is pulled out from the region of
uniform magnetic field with constant velocity v. The situation shown in the figure corresponds to time
t = 0. Mark out the CORRECT statement(s) :
× × × × ×
(A) Just after t = 0 i.e., the motion starts, the induced
× × × × ×
3Bv 60º
current in the loop is × × × × ×
R
V
2pl × × × × ×
3R × × × × ×
(B) Current will be induced in the loop for sec
2v
Bv 3R 2 – 4v 2t2 + 4Rvt
(C) At any time t, the current induced in the loop is given by and is in clockwise
l × 2pR
direction.
R
(D) Induced current is in clockwise direction for t = 0 to and thereafter it becomes in anticlockwise
2v
direction.
Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (-1)]
r
A homogeneous field of magnetic induction B is perpendicular to a track of width l which is inclined
at an angle a to the horizontal. A frictionless conducting rod of mass m straddles the two rails of the
track as shown infigure. Now the rod is being released from rest, if the circuit formed by the rod and the
track is closed by :-
(ii) a capacitor of capacitance C, or (ii) a coil of inductance L or (iii) a resistor ?
L
C
S
R B
m
a l

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Mark the INCORRECT statement :-

(A)If switch is connected to resistor then rod eventually attains terminal velocity.
(B)If switch connected to capacitor velocity continuously increases.
(C) If switch connected to inductor then rod executes simple harmonic motion with initial position as
equilibrium position.
(D) If resistor is connected then long time after power dissipated in resistor equals power delivered by
gravity
13. Mark the correct statement :-
B2 l 2
(A) with inductor angular frequency of oscillation is given by w2 =
2mL
mg sin a
(B) with capacitor acceleration of rod is a =
m + B2 l 2 C cos2 a
mgL sin a
(C) with inductor equilibrium position is given by x0 =
B2 l 2
(D) displacement of rod as function of time is given by x(t) = A coswt (where origin is at initial position)
SECTION-III
1. An arrangement of smooth pair of long conducting rails which are resistanceless are joined to a charged
capacitor. The rails are connected by a rod of mass m and length l and resistance R. Vertical magnetic
field is uniform. The rod is initially at rest. It starts moving due to the influence of magnetic field. What
should be the mass of the rod (in mg) so that its kinetic energy in steady state is maximum ?
[Take : l = 1m, B = 2T, C = 1µF, R = 1W]
–Q
Q
C l
mass = m
2. A rod of mass m = 2kg slides without friction along two parallel rails at distance d = 1.3 m from each
other (see figure). The rails are joined by a resistor to a resistance R = 0.32W and placed in a vertical
magnetic field of induction B = 0.4 T. The rod is pushed with velocity v0 = 3.38 m/s. Find the distance
(in m) covered by the rod until it stops.
R
v0
3. A resistor and an inductor in series are connected to a battery through a switch. After the switch has
been closed, at what time (in sec) will the Joule heat dissipated in the resistor change at the fastest rate?
L=10H 6.93W

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. A circuit shown consists of two inductors of inductances L1 and

1 2
L2, a capacitor of capacitance C, a battery of electromotive force
E and internal resistance r and a switch. Initially the switch was in
position 1 for a long time. Find the maximum current (in A) in the E,r L1 L2 C
inductor L2 after the switch is thrown to position 2 ?
(Given : E = 5V, L1 = 4mH, L2 = 1mH, r = 2W )
5. A long straight conductor carries a current I0. At distances a and (a + b) from it, there are two identical
wires, each having resistance l per unit length, which are inter-connected by a resistance R as shown in
Figure. A conducting rod AB of length b can slide along the wires without friction. At t = 0, the rod is
in extreme left position and starts to move to the right without friction and with constant velocity v. The
force function (in terms of time t) required to maintain velocity of rod constant to V m/s is
2
m 20 I 02 V
é æ a + b öù
2 êlog e ç a ÷ ú . The value of K is
Kp (R + 2V t l) ë è øû
R V b
B
a
I0
6. A rigid square loop having resistance R and mass 100 gm has side length 1m. It is projected with
velocity v0 = 5 m/s in a region having uniform magnetic field of strength 10 T as shown in figure. Find
R
the value of (in ohms) so that the loop comes to rest when it is completely inside the magnetic field
100
region. (ignore gravity)
1m × × × × ×
× × × × ×
R × × × × ×
× × × × ×
v0 × × × × ×
× × × × ×
7. A uniform disc of radius R having charge Q distributed uniformly all over its surface is placed on a
smooth horizontal surface. A magnetic field B = Kxt2, where K = constant, x is the distance (in metre)
from the centre of the disc and t is the time (in second) is switched on perpendicular to the plane of the
disc. The torque (in N-m) acting on the disc after 15 sec. (Take 2KQ = 1 S.I. unit and R = 1 metre).

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Complete toroidal coil of rectangular cross section is shown in figure. Current i is flowing in each turn
and no. of turns are N. Find the value of coefficient of self inductance.
b
a
N turns
i
h
m0 N 2 h æ b ö 3m0 N 2 h æ b ö 3m0 N 2 h æ b ö m0 N 2 h æ b ö
(A) L = ln ç ÷ (B) L = ln ç ÷ (C) L = ln ç ÷ (D) L = ln ç ÷
4p èaø 2p èaø 4p èaø 2p èaø
2. In the circuit shown in figure, A is a sliding contact which can move over a smooth rod PQ. Resistance
per unit length of the rod PQ is 1 ohm/m. Initially slider is just left to the point P and circuit is in the
steady state. At t = 0 slider starts moving with constant velocity v = 5 m/s towards right. Current in the
circuit at t = 2 sec is :-
L=2H R=20W
A V
30V P Q
(A) 1 amp (B) less than 0.5 amp

(C) more than 1 amp (D) in between 0.5 to 1.0 amp
3. The power factor in a circuit connected to an AC power supply has a value which is
(i) zero when the circuit contains an ideal inductance only
(ii) unity when the circuit contains an ideal resistance only
(iii) zero when the circuit contains an ideal resistance only
(iv) zero when the circuit contains an ideal capacitance only
(A) (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (i), (ii), (iv) (C) (i), (iii), (iv) (D) (ii), (iii)
4. A periodic voltage V varies with time t as shown in the figure. T is the
V
time period. The r.m.s. value of the voltage is :- V0
V0 V0
(A) (B) T/4 T t
8 2
V0
(C) V0 (D)
4

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. The graph shows the current versus the voltage in a driven RLC circuit at a
fixed frequency. The arrow indicates the direction that this curve is drawn as
time progresses. In this plot, the
(A) Current lags the voltage by about 90 degrees
(B) Current leads the voltage by about 90 degrees
(C) Current and voltage are in phase
(D) Current and voltage are 180 degrees out of phase
6. A charged capacitor discharges through a resistance R with time constant t. The two are now placed in
1
series across an AC source of angular frequency w = . The impedance of the circuit will be-
t
R
(A) (B) R (C) 2R (D) 2R
2
7. In the R-C circuit, if the capacitor is filled with a dielectric, then
R C
~
V, 50Hz
(A)Impedance of the circuit increases

(B) Brightness of the bulb increases
(C)Resonance will be occur at lower frequency.
(D) The value of rms current will decrease.
8. Graph shows voltage (V) and current (I) against time for an AC circuit where all elements will be in
series. Circuit may be contain :-
V&I V
I
(A) L, C only (B) L only (C) L,R only (D) R, C only

9. Current in R3 in the shown circuit
E L
R3
R1
C R2
(A) just after closing the switch is zero (B) long after closing the switch is zero
E E
(C) just after closing the switch is (D) long after closing the switch is
R3 R3

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. A circuit containing capacitors C1 and C2, shown in the figure is in the steady state with key K1 closed.
At the instant t = 0, K1 is opened and K2 is closed. The ratio of energy in the inductor and that of
capacitor C1 becomes one third at time 't' for the first time. If charge on capacitor C1 at that instant is q1
and that on capacitor C2 is q2 then choose the CORRECT statement(s) :-
R
K1 20V
C1=2µF C2=3µF
K2
L=0.2mH
(A) Angular frequency of oscillations of the L.C. circuit will be 5 × 104 rad/s.
(B) Time ‘t’ will be 21 µs.
(C) Charge on capacitor C1 at that instant will be, q1 = 12 3µC .
(D) Charge on capacitor C2 at that instant will be, q2 = 24µC.
11. The voltage shown in the figure is applied to a 2.5 mF capacitor and a 0.5 H inductor separately. choose
correct graph
20
v 10
(volt)
O
–10 1 2 3 4 5 t(ms)
–20
iC (current across capacitor)

(mA)
iL (current across inductor)
O 5 t(ms) (mA)
1 2 3 4
(A) (B) O
1 2 3 4 5 t(ms)
E E
(Energy stored (Energy stored
in inductor) in capacitor)
(C) O (D) O
1 2 3 4 5 t(ms) 1 2 3 4 5 t(ms)

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. Figure shows on electric circuit with negligibly small active resistance. Initially left capacitor is charged
to a potential V0 and then the switch was closed.
L
+
C – C
CV0 2
(A) Charge on right capacitor is given by (1 – coswt); w =
2 LC
(B) At the instant when charge on capacitor plates have same magnitude, total energy in capacitor and
inductor is equal.
C
(C) Maximum current in the circuit has magnitude V0
2L
(D) Maximum magnitude of induced emf in circuit is V0.
13. In the circuit shown in the figure, the A.C. source gives a voltage V = 20 cos (2000 t) volt. Neglecting
source resistance, the voltmeter and ammeter readings will be :–
(A) 0V, 2A (B) 0 V, 1.4A (C) 5.6 V, 0.47 A (D) 1.68 V, 0.47 A
(Si n gl e C or r ect A n sw er T y p e)
A voltage source V = V0 sin (100 t) is connected to a black box in which there can be either one element
out of L,C,R or any two of them connected in series.
V/i
Black Box V 0=100V source voltage

i0=Ö 2A
current in
the circuit
t(sec.)
p
sec
~ V=V sin(100t) 400
0
At steady state the variation of current in the circuit and the source voltage are plotted together with time,
using an oscilloscope, as shown.
14. The element(s) present in black box is/are :
(A) only C (B) LC (C) L and R (D) R and C
15. Values of the parameters of the elements, present in the black box are :
(A) R = 50W, C=200 mF (B) R = 50W, L = 2mH
(C) R = 400 W, C = 50mF (D) None of these

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
16. If AC source is removed, the circuit is shorted and then at t = 0, a battery of constant EMF is connected
across the black box. The current in the circuit will-
(A) Increases exponentially with constant = 0.02 sec.
(B) Decrease exponentially with time constant = 0.01 sec.
(C) Oscillate with angular frequency 20 sec–1
(D) First increase and then decrease.
Paragraph for Question no. 17 & 18
A student constructs a series RLC circuit. While operating the circuit at a frequency f, he uses an AC
voltmeter and measures the potential difference across each device as ( DVR)max=4.8V, (DVC)max = 29V,
and (DVL)max = 20 V.
17. How should the frequency of this circuit be changed to increase the current im through the circuit?
(A) Increase f
(B) Decrease f
(C) The current is already at a maximum
(D) There is not enough information to answer the question
18. What will happen to the value of (DVL)max if the frequency is adjusted to increase the current through the
circuit?
(A) (DVL)max will increase
(B) (DVL)max will decrease
(C) (DVL)max will remain the same regardless of any changes to f.
(D) The current is already at a maximum
(E) There is not enough information to answer the question
SECTION-III
1. A superconducting current carrying ring of mass m = 40 gm and R = 2cm floats in the magnetic field of
a magnet. If the field lines make an angle q = 30° with vertical and the ring is placed co-axially, assuming
r n
i = 10A, find the magnetic field B . if answer is . Write the value of n.
3p
B q
R
3
2. In the circuit shown power factor of box is given by 0.5 and power factor of circuit is given by .
2
Current leading the voltage. The effective resistance of the box is made by using 5 resistance of equal
value. Find the value of each resistance (Assume all the combination are in series)
Box
10W

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the circuit the rms value of voltage across the capacitor C, inductor L and resister R1 are respectively
5Ö5, 10V and 5V. Then the peak voltage a cross R2 is
(A) 7 V (B) 10 V (C) 15 V (D) 5Ö2 V

2. The A.C. circuit shown in figure. Find the frequency (w0) of the AC voltage source so that current
through the source will be in same phase as of voltage of source.
1 R2 1 R2 1 1 R2 R
(A) w0 = + (B) w0 = - (C) w0 = (D) w0 = + +
LC L 2
LC L 2
LC LC 4 L 2 L
3. In the given L-C-R circuit the value of rms current through the a.c. source is
L
Vrms Vrms
(A) 2
(B) 2
R
æ 1 ö æ wL ö
R + ç wL -
2
÷ R +ç
2
÷
wC ø è 1 - w LC ø
2
è C
Vrms Vrms
~
(C) (D) Vrms w
( )
2
R 2 + w2 LC - wL 1
(R + wL) + 2 2
2
wC
4. For an AC series circuit which of the following options are correct :
(A) When i is maximum then V is maximum then circuit must be purely resistive.
(B) When i is maximum then V is maximum then circuit may consist series R-L-C.
(C) When i is maximum then V is zero then circuit may be purely inductive.
(D) When i is maximum then V is zero then circuit may be purely capacitive.
C
5. The switch S is closed at t = 0 as shown in the figure.
R1=3W R2=6W
(A) The current as function of time in the inductor is 3(1 – e ) A.
–4t
A
1H B
(B) The current through R1 just after closing of switch is 8A
R3=6W R4=3W
(C) The power supply by the battery as function of time is 108(1 – e–4t)W
D
(D) The current through R2 after a long time closing of switch is 3A S
36 V

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. An ideal battery is connected to a resistor and an ideal inductor as shown.

Considering steady state :-
(A) EMF across inductor is equal to emf across battery.
(B) Potential difference across inductor is equal to emf across inductor in
magnitude.
(C) Potential difference across resistor is equal to emf across inductor in magnitude.
(D) EMF across resistor is zero.
7. The given graph shows variation with time in the source voltage and steady state current drawn by a
series RLC circuit. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) Current lags the voltage. (B) Resistance in the circuit is 250 3 W.
(C) Reactance in the circuit is 250W. (D) Average power dissipation in the circuit is 20 3 W.
8. Two similar bulbs of rating (100W, 50 2 V ) are connected in circuit as B2
shown when frequency of source is varied, brightness of B2 changes. It is
observed that a 50 hz frequency both the bulbs have same brightness. Select
B1
correct alternative/s.
(A) Current in both the bulbs will be in same phase when both have same
brightness. ~
(B) Current through source will be 2A when both the bulbs have same V = 100 sin (2 pft)
brightness.
(C) Current through source will be 2 2 A when both the bulbs have same brightness.
(D) B1 will be more brighter for all frequencies except 50 Hz
An electric current that reverses its direction with a constant frequency is called alternating current. The
T/2
ò0
Idt
average or mean value of ac is defined for half cycle as Imean = T /2

. The effective, virtual or rms value
ò
0
dt
ò I dt
2
0
of ac is defined as Irms = T
ò dt
0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. The mean and rms value of an alternatic current as shown in figure are I
I0
2I0 4I0
(A) ,I 2 (B) ,I
p 0 p 0 T/2
t
T
I0 I0 2I0 I0
(C) p , (D) p ,
2 2
10. The mean and rms value of an alternating voltage as shown in figure then
V
V0
0 T T 3T
t
2 2
V0 3V0 V0 V0 V0
(A) V0, V0 (B) , V0 (C) , (D) ,
2 2 2 4 2
11. The mean and rms value of an alternating voltage as shown in figure then
V0 V0 V0 V0 V0 V0 0 V0 V
(A) , (B) , (C) , (D) 2 ,
3 2 2 3 2 3 3
There is a thin aluminium doughnut of square cross-section A and radius r. It is released from rest and
falls vertically under gravity through horizontal radial magnetic field B produced by north, N and south,
S magnetic poles as shown in figure. The ring has mass m, radius r and resistivity r. The centre of the
ring falls down the vertical line of symmetry of the system.
S Ring
B
S N S
A
S
Crossectional view of ring
Top view of ring falling
through radial magnetic field
12. What is magnetic force on the ring at the instant when speed of ring is v :-
2pAB2vr 2pAB2vr
(A) , downward (B) , upward
r r
pAB2 vr pAB2 vr
(C) , downward (D) , upward
r r

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
13. Obtain an expression for terminal velocity of the ring.

mgr 2mgr 2mgr mgr
(A)vT = (B) vT = (C) vT = (D) vT =
pAB r2
pAB r2
3pAB2 r 2pAB2 r
14. Heat dissipated per unit time after achiving terminal velocity of ring :
m 2 g2r 2m 2 g2r 2m 2 g2r m 2 g2r
(A) (B) (C) (D)
pAB2 r pAB2 r 3pAB2 r 2pAB2 r
15. Column-I contains some circuits and column –II contains some properties. In column-II current signifies
instantaneous current and potential difference refers instantaneous potential difference.
Column – I Column – II
Charge System Properties
x
(P) (1) In branch x, current varies
a b
S
R
~
e=e0sin(w t)
A closely separated conducting wire is

wrapped over an insulating cylinder. Wire
is connected to a resistance R and an
alternating source via a switch S, which
is closed at t = 0
S
R
r a b
(Q) x
A charged metallic sphere of radius r is (2) Between points a and b magnitude of

earthed with a resistance R and a switch potential difference increases always.
S, which is closed at t = 0.
x R
(R) S
r
a e b
An inductor L and resistor R is connected to (3) In branch x, current is constant

a cell of emf e and internal resistance r with
a switch(s), which is closed at t = 0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
R X
Q
G
(S) X J
e s
a b
A circuit (used to measure an unknown (4) Between points a and b, of potential

resistance) is in balanced conditions difference zero always.
(Galvanometer reads zero)
Code :
P Q R S
(A) 1 1 1 3
(B) 1 2 3 4
(C) 2 1 3 4
(D) 2 3 1 4
SECTION-II
1. In a series LR circuit connected to an alternating voltage source, it is observed that at the instant voltage
across the source is maximum, voltage across the inductor is 3V and voltage across the resistance is 4V.
If resistance is 2W, what is reactance (in W) of the inductor ?
SECTION-III
1. In the circuit shown, find the current in Amp through the battery at t = 0.1 ln 2 sec, if switch is closed at
t = 0.
S R=3W
e=180/11V
R=3W L=0.5H
R=3W R=3W
2. Three alternating voltage sources V1 = 3sinwt volt, V2=5sin(wt +f1) volt

V3
7
and V3 = 5 sin(wt – f2) volt connected across a resistance R = W as V2 Ö7/3W
3
shown in the figure (where f1 and f2 corresponds to 30° and 127° V1
respectively). Find the peak current (in Amp) through the resistor.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
3. A coil, a capacitor and an AC source of voltage 24 V (rms) are connected in series.By varying the
frequncy of the source, a maximum rms current of 6 A is observed. If this coil is connected to a DC
battery of emf 12V and internal resistance 2W, then find current (in amp), through it.
SECTION-IV
1. A homogeneous magnetic field B is perpendicular to a sufficiently long fixed track of width l which is
horizontal. A frictionless rod of mass m straddles the two rail of the track as shown in the figure. Entire
arrangement lies in horizontal plane. For the situation suggested in column-II match the appropriate
entries in column-I. The rails are also resistanceless.
B
D
A
Column-I Column-II
(A) A is a battery of emf V and internal (P) Energy is dissipated during the motion.
resistance R. The conducting rod is
initially at rest.
C
(B) A is a resistance. The non-conducting (Q) The rod moves with a constant
rod is projected to the right with a velocity after a long time.
velocity V0
C
(C) A is an inductor having with initial (R) After a certain time interval rod will
current i0. It is having no resistance change its direction of motion.
and CD is a conducting rod.
(consider no loss of energy)
i0
D
C
(D) A is a resistance. The conducting (S) If a constant force is applied on the rod
rod is projected to the right with to the right, it can move with a constant
a velocity V0. velocity from starting itself
(T) The rod stops after some time permanently
in absence of an external force.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A coil (which can be modelled as a series circuit) has been designed for high Q performance at a rated
voltage and a specified frequency. If the frequency of operation is doubled and the coil is operated at the
same rated voltage, then the Q factor and the active power P consumed by the coil will be affected as
below
(A) P is doubled, Q is halved (B) P is halved, Q is doubled
(C) P remains constant but Q increases 4 times (D) P decreases 4 times but Q is doubled
2. Consider L, C, R circuit as shown in figure, with a.c. source of peak value V and angular frequency w.
Then the peak value of current through the ac source
2 l
V 1 æ 1 ö
(A) (B) V 2 + ç - wC ÷ C
2 R è wL ø
1 æ 1 ö
+ ç wL - ÷ R
2
R è wC ø
V VRwC
(C) (D) ~
( )
2 2
æ 1 ö w2 C2 + R w2C 2 - 1 V, w
R + ç wL -2
÷
è wC ø
3. Two identical incandescent light bulbs are connected as shown in the figure. When an AC voltage
source of frequency f is applied in circuit, which of the following observations will be CORRECT?
R R
~ C
L
Bulb b1
Bulb b2
(A) Maximum brightness of both bulbs does not depend on frequency f, if f =

1
2p
( 1 / LC )
(B) Both bulbs will glow with same brightness provided frequency f =
1
2p
1 / LC ( )
(C) Bulb b1 will light up initially and goes off, bulb b2 will be ON constantly
(D) Bulb b1 will blink and bulb b2 will be ON constantly
4. In the given LCR series circuit find the reading of the hot wire ammeter.
120V
V
40 W
~
200Ö 2 sinwt
(A) 2 A (B) 4 A (C) 5 A (D) 9 A

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
5. A coil with inductance L and resistance R is connected to an alternating source. What should be the
capacity of a capacitor connected in series with the coil such that active power of circuit does not
change.
1 1 1 w2
(A) C = (B) C = (C) C = (D) C =
w2 w2L 2w 2 L L
6. In the circuit diagram shown, XC = 100W, XL = 200W & R = 100 W. Effective current through the
source is :-
C
200V ~ R
L
1
(A) 2 A (B) 2 2 A (C) 2 A (D) A
2
7. Consider the A.C. circuit as shown in the figure and choose CORRECT option(s). R.M.S. value of
potential difference between A and B is VAB :
R A R
L B
R0
V=V0sinwt
(A) VAB will increase on increasing R0

(B) VAB will decrease on decreasing R0
(C) VAB does not depend on non-zero value of R0
(D) VAB does not depend on non-zero value of w.
8. Figure shows two circuits in each case V0 denotes peak value of input voltage. Input voltage is given by
V = V0 sinwt and output voltage by V = VMsin(wt + d) :
C R
Vinput R Voutput Vinput C Voutput
Circuit-1 Circuit-2
V0
(A) In circuit-1 maximum output voltage is VM =
1 + ( wRC )
-2
V0
(B) In circuit-2 maximum output voltage is VM =
1 + ( wRC )
2
V02
(C) In circuit-1 average power dissipated is given by Pav =
2R é1 + ( wRC ) ù
-2
ë û
(D) Phase angle d for circuit-2 is given by tand = wRC

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. In the given a.c. circuit, choose the CORRECT statement(s). 1W XL =1W

(A) Impedance of circuit is 2W
Xc=2W
1
(B) Power factor of circuit is
2
(C) Peak value of current through resistance is 50 2 A ~
(D) Average power supplied by source is 2500 W. V=100 sin wt
10. In an LCR series AC circuit, voltage across resistance is 2 volt. The inductive and capacitive reactances
are 10W and 5W respectively. The phase difference between voltage across the circuit and current is
30°, then pick up the CORRECT statement(s) :
2
(A) the resistance of resistor is 5 3 W. (B) the current in the circuit is A
5 3
4
(C) the voltage of AC source is volts (D) the voltage of AC source is 4 3 volts
3
11. If given circuit is balance wheat stone bridge of the AC bridge then (Balance condition of the AC bridge
z1 z3
is = )
z 2 z4
B
Z1 Z2
C
R2
R1
A G C
R4
R3
Z3 L
Z4
D
~
V0 sinwt
(A) it will be independent of source frequency (B) it will be dependent of source frequency
(C) L = CR2R3 (D) L = CR3R4
Figure shows a two branched parallel circuit with RA = 20W, XL = 15 W, RB = 6W and XC = 8W. The
total current supplied by alternating source V is I = 14A.

RA XL
RB
XC
~
I V
12. Current passing through the inductor (XL) is :-
(A) Zero (B) 4A (C) 10 A (D) 14 A
13. Power dissipated in the circuit is :-
(A) Zero (B) 500 W (C) 920 W (D) 1400 W

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Box Box
C
V = V 0 sinw t V = V 0 sinw t
1
When a box is connected with a source V = V0 sinwt, then power factor of circuit is . If a capacitor
2
is connected in series with the box, then power factor of circuit becomes unity. (Assume that box
contains only series combination of elements)
14. Box may contains resistance in series with an
(A) capacitor (B) inductor (C) another resistance (D) none of the above
15. Impedence of box with same source is :-
2 1
(A) (B) (C) wC (D) 2 wC
wC wC
16. In box ratio of resistance and reactance is
(A) equal to 1 (B) greater than 1 (C) less than 1 (D) none of above
SECTION-III
1. An alternating voltage V0 = 100 V with angular frequency w is connected across the capacitor and
inductor having XL = 5W and XC = 10W. Find the ratio of current through inductor to AC source.
L
2. An uncharged capacitor C = 100 µF is connected in series with 50 W and with AC source as shown in
the figure. If switch S is closed at t = 0, the maximum value of (V A – VB) is K volt. Calculate K.
A
C = 100µF R
B
100W 100W
~
16 sin (100t) S
3. Diagram shows a circuit. Switch S1 was closed for a long time with S2 open. At t = 0 switch S2 was
closed & S1 was opened. The time period of L-C oscillation after t = 0 is given by 2pa × 10–4 s. Fill the
value of a.(Given C = 30µF, L1 = L2 = 6 mH).
L2 C
s2
L1
s1
e

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Box may have any series combination of L, C and R. Column-I represents source current and column-
II represents possible statements.
box
vsource
Column-I Column-II
Isource
(A) t (P) Box may contain LCR.
Isource
(B) t (Q) Box may contain only LR.
Isource
(C) t (R) Power factor of box is zero.
Isource
(D) t (S) Box may contain only CR.
(T) State of resonance.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Consider a wave represented by y = a cos (wt – kx) where symbols have their usual meaning. This
2
2p
wave has (here k = ) :-
l
(A) An amplitude a, frequency w and wave length l
(B) An amplitude a, frequency 2w and wave length 2l
a l
(C) An amplitude , frequency 2w and wave length
2 2
a
(D) An amplitude , frequency 2w and wave length l
2
2. An inductor of reactance 1 W and a resistor of 2 W are connected in series to the terminals of a 6 V (rms)
a.c. source. The power dissipated in the circuit is :
(A) 8 W (B) 12 W (C) 14.4 W (D) 18 W
3. Switch S of circuit shown in figure is in position 1 for a long time. At instant t = 0, it is thrown from
position 1 to 2. The thermal power P1(t) generated in resistance R1.
C
R2
2
S
R1
+ –
E2R -2t /(R 2 + R 2 )C E2R - t /(R 2 + R 2 )C

(A) (R R1 )2 .e (B) (R + R1 )2 .e
1+ 2 1 2
E2R1 E2R - t /(R 2 + R 2 )C

(C) .e - t / 2(R2 + R2 )C (D) 2(R + R1 )2 .e
(R1 + R 2 )2 1 2
4. A transverse wave is passing through a string shown in figure. Mass density of the string is
1 kg/m3 and cross section area of string is 0.01m2. Equation of wave in string is y = 2sin (20t – 10x). The
hanging mass is (in kg) ['t' is in second and 'x' is in meter]:-
m
(A) 40 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.004 (D) 0.4

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
1
5. A semi circular wire is given angular velocity w = , with the help of an external agent. A uniform
LC
magnetic field B exists in space and is directed into the plane of the figure. (circuit part remains at rest)
(Left part is at rest). then the incorrect statement for given arrangement is :
pBa 2
(A) The rms value of current in the circuit is P
R 2LC R
pBa 2 C B
(B) The rms value of current in the circuit is a
2R 2LC
w= 1
p 2 B2 a 2 L
(C) The maximum energy stored in the capacitor is Q LC
8R 2 C
p 2 B2 a 4
(D) The maximum power delivered by the external agent is
8LCR
6. The diagram shows the variation of V and I in an AC circuit. The circuit only be a series RC or series
RL or series LC or series RLC. Consider the four different combinations of V and I graphs. Pick the
correct combination/combinations for each graph. Solid curves represent I and broken curves represent
V.
V I I V
Time Time
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Phase difference Phase difference
between V & I is p/4 between V & I is p/4.
Take the angular frequency of the AC voltage source to be 100 rad/s (This is w)
(I) : R = 1kW, L = 1H and C = 100mF
(II) : R = 1W and L = 10–2H
(III) : R = 100W and C = 10+2mF
(IV) : L = 1H, C = 100mF and R = 1W
(A) a ® II ; d ® I, IV (B) c ® I ; d ® none
(C) b ® III ; c ® IV (D) a ® II,III ; b ® II,III
7. A circuit consists of two capacitors, a 24V battery and an AC source connected as shown in figure. The
AC voltage is given by e = (20 cos 120pt)V, where t is in second.
e0=20V C1 3µF C2 1.5µF
24V
(A) Charge on capacitor C2 as function of time Q2 = (30µC) cos (120pt) + 36µC

(B) Steady state current is 33.9mA sin (120pt + p)
(C) Maximum energy stored in capacitor C1 & C2 is 36 mJ
(D) Minimum energy stored in capacitors C1 and C2 is 36µJ

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
8. A circuit, containing an inductance and a resistance connected in series, has an AC source of 200 V,
50Hz connected across it. An AC current of 10A rms flows through the circuit and the power loss is
measured to be 1 kW.
3
(A) The inductance of the circuit is H.
10p
(B) The frequency of the AC when the phase difference between the current and emf becomes p/4, with
50
the above components isHz .
3
(C) The frequency of the AC when the phase difference between the current and emf becomes p/3, with
25
the above components is Hz .
3
(D) The frequency of the AC when the phase difference between the current and emf becomes p/4,
25
with the above components is Hz .
3
( - ax - bt
2 2
- 2 abxt )
9. Equation of a travelling wave is y = 5e where x & y are in meter and t is in sec.
a = 25 m and b = 9 sec
–2 –2
(A) Travelling wave propagates along (+) x direction.

(B) Travelling wave propagates along (–) x direction.
3
(C) Speed of wave is m/sec.
5
(D) Maximum displacement of particle is 5m.
Portable electronic devices such as radios and compact disc players are often powered by direct current
supplied by batteries. Many devices come with AC-DC converters such as that shown in figure (i).
Such a converter contains a transformer that steps the voltage down from 120 V to, typically , 9V and a
circuit that converts alternating current to direct current. The AC-DC converting process is called
rectification, and the converting device is called a rectifier.
i
Diode
~ C R
Primary t
(input)
(i) A half-wave rectifier with an optional (ii) Current versus time in the resistor. The
filter capacitor solid curve represents the current with no
filter capacitor, and the dashed curve is
the current when the circuit includes the
capacitor.
We can also design filters that respond differently to different frequencies. Consider the simple series
RC circuit shown in figure. The input voltage is across the series combination of the two elements. The
output is the voltage across the resistor.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
~ Dv in R Dvout
(b)
Now consider the circuit shown in figure, where we have interchanged the resistor and capacitor and
where the output voltage is taken across the capacitor. At low frequencies, the reactance of the capacitor
and the voltage across the capacitor is high. As the frequency increases, the voltage across the capacitor
drops. Therefore, this filter is an RC low-pass filter.
~ Dv in C Dvout
(c)
10. Consider the filter circuit shown in Figure (b), the ratio of the input, output voltage is :-
Dv in R Dv in R
(A) = (B) =
Dv out 2 Dv out 2
æ 1 ö æ 1 ö
R2 + ç ÷ R2 - ç ÷
è wC ø è wC ø
Dv out R Dv out R
(C) Dv = 2
(D) =
in æ 1 ö Dv in 2
R2 + ç ÷ 2 æ 1 ö
R -ç
è wC ø ÷
è wC ø
Dv out
11. What value of does approach as the frequency decreases toward zero ?
Dv in
1 1
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D) Zero
2 4
12. Consider the filter circuit shown in figure (c). The ratio of the input, output voltage is :-
Dv out 1 / wC Dv in 1 / wC
(A) = (B) =
Dv in 2 Dv out 2
2 æ 1 ö 2 æ 1 ö
R +ç ÷ R -ç ÷
è wC ø è wC ø
Dv out 1 / wC Dv in 1/ wC
(C) = (D) =
Dv in 2 Dv out 2
2 æ 1 ö 2 æ 1 ö
R -ç ÷ R +ç ÷
è wC ø è wC ø

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

In AC circuits, deflection based galvanometers always fail to record the current, as coil of galvanometer
experiences an alternating torque of fast frequency and hence gives zero reading. AC ammeters are
based on heating effect and can measure alternating current. Although an AC ammeter measures i2 but
is calibrated to give irms. In a circuit two coils of equal inductances and two cells of emfs e1 = 50 V and
e2 = 100 V are connected to a 220 V AC source. The internal resistances of the cells are r1 and r2. In the
circuit current lags the voltage by 45°. A DC voltmeter connected between points A and B reads zero.
e1 r1 e2 r2
A L B
220V
r2
13. Value of r is :-
1
1 1 1
(A) 2 (B) (C) (D)
2 4 8
14. When an AC voltmeter is connected across A and B, its reading in steady state is :-
(A) 220 V (B) 153.5 V (C) 107 V (D) 93.5 V
SECTION-III
1. The amount of power delivered by the ac source in the capacitor & resistance R1 of the circuit given
X
below is ´ 10 3 watt, then x is :
8
Xc=12 W R1=5W
XL=8W R2=6W
~
Erms = 130 V
2. A DC ammeter and an AC thermal ammeter are connected to a circuit in series. When a DC is passed
through the circuit, the DC ammeter shows I1 = 6 A. When an AC flows through the circuit, the AC
ammeter shows I2 = 8A. What will the difference in final readings (in amp) of ammeters, if the DC and
the AC flow simultaneously through the circuit?
3. The earth has a radius of 6400 km. The inner core of 1000 km radius is solid. Outside it, there is a region
from 1000 km to a radius of 3500 km which is in molten state. Then again from 3500 km to 6400 km the
earth is solid. Only longitudinal (P) waves can travel inside a liquid. Assume that the P wave has a speed
of 10 km/s in the densest part and a speed of 8 km/sec in the other solid layer. An earthquake occurs at
some place close to the surface of the earth and was recorded in a seismometer at a diametrically opposite
point on the earth (waves travel along the diameter) after 32 minute 5 second. Find the speed (in km/s)
of the P-wave in the liquid layer. Give your answer to the nearest integer.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
1. Match the following column :
inductor
unknown
circuit element
~
x=x0sinwt
Column-I Column-II
(If current i in the circuit is) (Unknown circuit element may be)
æ pö
(A) i = i 0 sin ç wt - ÷ (P) L – C series combination
è 4ø
æ pö
(B) i = i 0 sin ç wt + ÷ (Q) L – R series combination
è 4ø
(C) i = i0 sin wt (R) R – C series combination
(D) i = i0 cos wt (S) L – C – R series combination
2. A sine wave y = A sin (2px – 2pt + p/3) is propagating in the medium. Match the description of the
motion of particles of the medium with entries in column I.
Column-I Column-II
1 1
(A) x = m, t = sec (P) Velocity is in positive y direction
3 3
1
(B) x= m, t = 1sec (Q) Velocity is in negative y direction
3
1
(C) x = 1m, t = sec (R) Particle is stationary
3
(D) x = 1m, t = 1 sec (S) Particle has positive displacement
(T) Particle has negative displacemnt

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the figure shown hot wire voltmeter and hot wire ammeter A
are ideal. The reading of voltmeter is :-
XC=2W
(A) 5 2 V V ~ 10v(sinwt)
(B) 5 V 5W
(C) 10 V
XL=7W
(D) None of these
2. In the circuit diagram shown, XC = 100 ohms, XL = 200 ohms &
R = 100 ohms. The effective current through the source is :
(A) 2 A
(B) 2 2 A
(C) 0.5 A
(D) None of these
3. In the given circuit, the current through 5mH indicator in steady state is
(A) 4/3 Amp (B) 8/3 AMP (C) 4 Amp (D) 2/3 Amp
4. When a transverse plane wave tranverses a medium, individual particles execute periodic motion
pæ xö
given by equation y = 4 sin çè 2t + ÷ø . The phase difference for two position of same particle which
2 8
are occupied by time intervals 0.4 s apart is
(A) 72° (B) 135° (C) 45° (D) 108°
5. A composite string is made up by joining two strings of different masses per unit length m and 4m
respectively. The composite string is under the same tension. A transverse wave pulse Y = (6 mm) sin
(5t + 40x), where t is in seconds and x in metres, is sent along the lighter string towards the joint. The
joint is at x = 0. The equation of the wave pulse reflected from the joint is
(A) (2mm) sin(5t – 40x) (B) (4mm) sin(40x – 5t)
(C) – (2mm) sin(5t – 40x) (D) (2mm) sin(5t – 10x)
1 2p
6. A complex wave is represented by an expression of the form y ( t ) = 1sin wt + sin 3wt , where w =
2 T
is the angular frequency and T is the period of the wave. Which of the following sketchs best represent
the wave ?
y(t) y(t) y(t) y(t)
t t t t
(A) (B) (C) (D)

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. String 1 is connected with string 2. The mass per unit length in string 1 is m1 and the mass per unit length
in string 2 is 4m1. The tension in the strings is T. A travelling wave is coming from the left. What fraction
of the energy in the incident wave goes into string 2?
string 1 string 2
(A) 1/8 (B) 4/9 (C) 2/3 (D) 8/9
8. An ant with mass m is sitting peacefully on top of a horizontal, stretched rope. The rope has mass per
unit length µ and is under tension T. Some one starts a sinusoidal transverse wave of wavelength l
propagating along the rope. The motion of the rope is in a vertical plane. What minimum wave amplitude
will make the ant become momentarily weightless? Assume that m is so small that the presence of the
ant has no effect on the propagation of the wave.
mgl 2 mgl 2 2mgl 2 mgl 2
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 2
2p T pT pT 4p T
9. In the following circuit, the AC source is an ideal voltage source. Resonance is defined as a situation
where the current through the source and the voltage across the source are in the same phase. At resonance,
which of the following will be in the same phase as that of the applied voltage ? (V R voltage across
resistor, IR current across resistor, IC current across capacitor, IL current across inductor)
V = V0sin(wt) ~ C L R
(A) VR (B) IC (C) IL (D) IR

10. A ring of thin wire with active resistance 30W and inductance 1H rotates with
constant angular velocity 40 rad/s in an external uniform magnetic field w
perpendicular to the rotation axis. In the process, the magnetic flux due to external × × × ×
magnetic field alone across the ring varies with time as f = 5 sin(40t), where all × × ×
B
×
physical quantities are in S.I. units. Then :
(A) Maximum value of current in the ring is 4 amp. × × × ×
(B) Current will be zero when flux will be maximum.
× × × ×
(C) Average power loss is 400 W.
(D) Power loss will be maximum when flux will be maximum.
11. A source of current i0 sinwt, with i0 as constant, is connected L2
to the circuit shown in the diagram. The frequency w is A C2
controllable. The inductors L1, L2 and capacitor C1, C2 are all V
ideal. An ideal voltmeter is connected between points A and i sinwt B
C1 L1
0
B. Choose CORRECT option(s).
i 0 wL1
(A) For very small w (but non zero), reading of voltmeter is
2
i0
(B) For very small w( but not zero), reading of voltmeter is
2 wC1
i 0 wL1
(C) For very large w, reading of voltmeter is
2
i0
(D) For very large w, reading the voltmeter is
2wC1

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. One end of a string of length L is tied to the ceiling of a lift accelerating upwards with an acceleration
2g. The other end of the string is free. The linear mass density of the string varies linearly from 0 to l
from bottom to top.
(A) The velocity of the wave in the string will be 0.
(B) The acceleration of the wave on the string will be 3g/4 every where.
(C) The time taken by a pulse to reach from bottom to top will be 8L / 3g .
(D) The time taken by a pulse to reach from bottom to top will be 4L / 3g .
13. Curve 'y–x' at an instant for a wave travelling along x-axis on a string is y
shown. Slope at the point A on the curve, as shown, is 53°. 53°
A x
(A) Transverse velocity of the particle at point A is positive if the wave is
travelling along positive x-axis.
(B) Transverse velocity of the particle at point A is positive if the wave is
travelling along negative x-axis of the particle at point A
(C) Magnitude of transverse velocity of the particle at point A is greater than wave speed.
(D) Magnitude of transverse velocity of the particle at point A is lesser than wave speed.
14. The figures represent two snaps of a travelling wave on a string of mass per unit length, µ = 0.25 kg/m.
1
The two snaps are taken at time t = 0 and at t = s . Then the possible solution for wave are :
24
y(mm) y(mm)
10 10
5 5
x(m) 1 x(m)
–5 –5
–10 t=0 –10 1
t= — s
24
Figure-1 Figure-2
(A) speed of wave is 4 m/s.

(B) the tension in the string is 4 N
æ pö
(C) the equation of the wave is y = 10 sin ç px - 4 pt + ÷
è 6 ø
p
(D) the maximum velocity of the particle = m/s
25
15. A long string of mass per unit length 0.2 kg m–1 is stretched to a tension of 500 N. Choose the CORRECT
option(s):
(A) speed of transverse waves on string is 50 ms–1
(B) speed of transverse waves on string is 25 ms–1
(C) mean power required to maintain a travelling wave of amplitude 10 mm and wavelength 0.5 m is
197 W
(D) mean power required to maintain a travelling wave of amplitude 10 mm and wavelength 0.5 m is
150 W

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
16. Consider a travelling simple harmonic wave on a string of mass per unit length m and tension T. Kinetic energy
2 2
1 æ ¶y ö 1 æ ¶y ö
per unit length is given by u k = m ç ÷ and potential energy per unit length is given by u p = T ç ÷ .
2 è ¶t ø 2 è ¶x ø
Mark the CORRECT option(s).
T
(A ) Power transmitted by wave equals (uk + up) .
m
(B) uk and up simultaneously attain their maximum and minimum values.
(C) Total energy per unit length of a string is constant when a harmonic wave travels on it.
(D) A small part of string has maximum potential energy when it is at its equilibrium position.
17. Two waves given by equation y1 = A sin (wt – kx) and y2 = 4A sin (2wt – 4kx) are traveling in two
different strings having same mass per unit length and same cross-sectional area. Tension in first string
is four times tension in the second string.
(A) Ratio of average energy density U1/U2 is 1/64 (B) Ratio of average intensity I1/I2 is 1/32
(C) Ratio of average power P1/P2 is 1/16 (D) Ratio of velocity of wave v1/v2 is 1/2
18. A sinusoidal wave of amplitude A and wavelength l is incident from heavier string on a joint between
two strings of which one is heavy and another is light. Choose correct option.
(A) the amplitude of transmitted wave is more than that of the incident wave
(B) the wavelength of the transmitted wave is more than that of the incident wave.
(C) the amplitude of the reflected wave is less than the amplitude of incident wave.
(D) the wavelength of the reflected wave is same as that of the incident wave.
SECTION-II
1. A rope AB of length L placed on a smooth horizontal surface and pulled by a horizontal force F at end
9T2F
B. The mass of rope is m. If a transverse wave travels from A to B in time T, the value of is.
mL
A B
F
SECTION-IV
1. The figure represents two snaps of a travelling wave on a string of mass per unit length m = 0.25 kg/m.
The first snap is taken at t = 0 and the second is taken at t = 0.05s. Match the entries in column I with
column II. [All the entries are in SI unit]
Column-I Column-II
25 y(mm)
(A) Speed of the wave. (P)
9
t=0s
5 10
(B) Frequency of the wave. (Q) t=0.05 s
3 5
10p
(C) Maximum speed of the particle. (R) 1 2 3
x(m)
3 O
10 –5
(D) Tension in the string (S)
3
–10
p
(T)
30

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-I
1. Statement 1 : Y = 2A sin kx cos wt refers to a travelling wave along –ve x-direction.
and
Statement 2 : When a continuous travelling wave interacts with its reflection from a rigid support,
forms a standing wave.
(A) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True ; Statement-2 is a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(B) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is True ; Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for Statement-1.
(C) Statement-1 is True, Statement-2 is False.
(D) Statement-1 is False, Statement-2 is True.
æ px ö
2. A standing wave given by the equation y = 2A sin ç ÷ sin wt is formed between the points x = –L and
è L ø
x = L. What is the minimum separation between two particles whose maximum velocity is half the
maximum velocity of the antinodes :-
L L L 2L
(A) (B) (C) (D)
12 6 3 3
3. A trianguler pulse moving at 2cm/s on a rope approches an end at which it is free to slide on vertical
3
pole. What is the particle speed at the free end at sec from the instant shown.
4
2cm/s
1cm
1cm 1cm 1cm
(A) 2cm/s (B) 1cm/s (C) 3cm/s (D) 4cm/s
é x ù
4. The equation of a plane progressive wave is y = 0.02 sin 8p êt - . When it is reflected at a rarer
ë 20 úû
medium (medium with higher velocity) at x = 0, its amplitude becomes 75% of its previous value. The
equation of the reflected wave is :
é x ù é x ù
(A) y = 0.02sin 8p êt - (B) y = 0.02sin 8p êt +
ë 20 úû ë 20 úû
é x ù é x ù
(C) y = +0.015sin 8p êt + (D) y = -0.015sin 8p êt +
ë 20 úû ë 20 úû

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

5. A triangular wave pulse on a taut string travels in positive x-direction with speed v. The tension in the
string is F, and linear mass density of string is µ. At t = 0, the shape of pulse is given by
ì 0 if x < -L
ï h(L + x)
ï for -L < x < 0
ï L
y(x,0) = í
ï h(L - x)
for 0<x<L
ï L
ï 0 for x>L
î
Choose the INCORRECT statement(s)
(A) Magnitude of instantaneous power is zero for –L < (x – vt) < 0
2
æhö
(B) Magnitude of instantaneous power is Fv ç ÷ for (x – vt) < –L
èLø
2
(C) Magnitude of instantaneous power is Fv æç h ö÷ for (x – vt) > L
èLø
2
æhö
(D) Magnitude of instantaneous power is Fv ç ÷ for 0< (x – vt) < L
èLø
6. Which of the following statement(s) are TRUE about a stationary wave ?
(A) No particle will move with same amplitude.
(B) All particles between two successive nodes reach their extreme position together in phase.
(C) Displacement and velocity nodes co-exist.
(D) Velocity nodes and pressure nodes co-exist.
7. String of length L whose one end is at x = 0, vibrates according to the relations given by different
equations. Choose the CORRECT statement(s).
px px
(A) y = A sin sin wt has 1 antinodes, 2 nodes (B) y = A cos sin wt has 2 antinodes, 1 nodes
L L
2 px 2px
(C) y = A sin sin wt has 3 nodes, 2 antinodes (D) y = A cos sin wt has 3 antinodes, 2 nodes
L L
8. A string of length L fixed at both ends is vibrating in lowest mode of its vibration for which particle at
x = L/6 from one end is having maximum displacement. The frequency of vibration of this mode is
120Hz. For this situation, mark out CORRECT statement(s) :
(A) The particle at x = L/2 will have maximum displacement
(B) The given mode is 2nd overtone
(C) The next higher overtone for which same particle at x = L/6 has maximum displacement is 6th one
(D) The next higher overtone for which same particle at x = L/6 has maximum displacement is 8th one
9. A light string is tied at one end to fixed support and to a heavy string of equal length L at the other end
as shown in figure. Mass per unit length of the strings are µ and 9µ and the tension is T. Find the possible
values of frequencies such that point A is an antinode.
µ A 9µ
L L
1 T 3 T 3 T 7 T
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4L m 4L m 2L m 6L m

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. For a wave travelling along a straight line, the distance between two points in the same phase is 5 m,
while the distance between two points that are in the opposite phase is 1.5m.
(A) Distance between points in same phase may be 0.5 m
(B) Distance between points in opposite phase may be 0.5 m
(C) Distance between points in same phase may be 1m
(D) Distance between points in opposite phase may be 1m
Two pulses traveling on the same string are described by the functions
5 -5
y1 = ; y2 = where y1, y2 and x are in metre and t in second
( 3 x - 4t ) 2
+2 (3 x + 4t - 6)2 + 2
11. In which direction does each pulse travel ?
(A) y1 travels along + x direction while y2 travels along -x direction
(B) y1 travels along -x direction while y2 travels along +x direction
(C) Both y1 and y2 travel along +x direction
(D) Both y1 and y2 travel along -x direction
12. At what time resultant displacement of particle will be zero due to superposition of both pulse?
(A) t = 0.50 sec (B) t = 0.75 sec (C) t = 1.50 sec (D) t = 1.75 sec
13. At what point the resultant displacement of particles is zero due to superposition of both pulse
(A) x = 1.0 m (B) x = 2.0 m (C) x = 3.0 m (D) x = 4.0 m
SECTION-II
1. Sinusoidal progressive wave of amplitude 10 cm is to be sent along a string that has linear mass density
of 4 × 10–2 kg/m and a tension of 100 N. The source can deliver a maximum average power of 40 W.
What is the maximum frequency (in Hz) at which source can operate? Take p2 = 10
2. A string is stretched along the x-axis. There is a transverse disturbance along the string :
æ px ö
y ( x,t ) = 4 sin ç ÷ cos(10pt) [cm]
è 3 ø
where x is measured in centimeter and t in seconds.
Assume the velocities and amplitudes are equal for the two waves.
The velocity (in cm/s) of the two waves moving towards each other which create this disturbance is
3. A wave generator at one end of a very long string creates a wave given by
p
y1 = (6.0 cm) cos
[(2.00 m–1)x + (8.00 s–1)t]
2
and a wave generator at the other end creates the wave
p
y2 = (6.0 cm) cos [(2.00 m–1)x – (8.00 s–1)t].
2
for x > 0, what is the location of the node (in cm) having the smallest value of x.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. A steel wire is rigidly fixed at both ends. Its length, mass and cross-sectional area are 1m, 0.1kg and
10–6 m2 respectively. Then the temperature of the wire is lowered by 20°C. If transverse waves are set
up by plucking the wire at 0.25 m from one end and assuming that the wire vibrates with minimum
number of loops possible for such a case. Find the frequency of vibrations (in Hz). If your answer is N
fill value of N/11. Given the coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.21 × 10– 5°C–1, and Young's
modulus = 2 × 1011 N/m2.
Pluck
2. A string of length l fixed at one end and free at another end is vibrating in 5th harmonic. Maximum
l A
displacement of particle is A. Amplitude of oscillation of a particle at distance from free end is
10 a
find value of a.
l/2 l/2 l/4
SECTION-IV
1. Figure shows a snapshot of a wave travelling towards right. Four points A, B, C, D have been shown on
string.
A
B
D
C
Column-I Column-II
(A) Point-A (P) Energy density is increasing with time
(B) Point-B (Q) Speed is increasing with time
(C) Point-C (R) Speed is decreasing with time
(D) Point-D (S) Power is being transmitted towards right
(T) Strain is increasing with time
2. In case of mechanical wave a particle oscillates and during oscillation its kinetic energy and potential
energy changes.
Column-I Column-II
(A) When particle of travelling wave is passing through (P) Kinetic energy is maximum
mean position.
(B) When particle of travelling wave is at extreme (Q) Potential energy is maximum
position.
(C) When particle between node and antinode in standing (R) Kinetic energy is minimum
wave is passing through mean position
(D) When particle between node and antinode in standing (S) Potential energy is minimum
wave is at extreme position

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A string of length L consists of two distinct sections. The left half has linear mass density m = m o/2,
while the right half has linear mass density m ¢ = 3 m o. Tension in the string is Fo. The time required for
a transverse wave pulse to travel from one end of the string to the other is
L mo L 2m o L mo L mo
(A) 4 F ( 2 + 6 ) (B) 2 F (1 + 3 ) (C) 2 2F ( 2 + 6 ) (D) 2 2F (1 + 6 )
o o o o
2. A string on a musical instrument is held under tension T and extends from the point x = 0 to point x = L.
The string is overwound with a wire in such a way that its mass per unit length µ (x) increases uniformly
from µ0 at x = 0 to µL at x = L. Find the time interval required for a transverse pulse to travel the length
of the string is
(
3L mL + m 0 + m L m0 ) (
3L m L + m0 - m L m0 )
(A) Dt = (B) Dt =
2 T ( m L - m0 ) 2 T ( m L + m0 )
(
3L m L + m0 + mL m0 ) (
2L m L + m0 + mL m0 )
(C) Dt = (D) Dt =
2 T ( mL + m 0 ) 3 T ( mL + m0 )
3. A progressive simple harmonic wave is moving in air along the x-axis. displacement(y)
The part of this wave at a given point x = x0 from the source and at a
x=x0
certain instant t = t0 has the waveform shown below in the displacement
time (y-t) graph. Velocity of the wave has value v0 and its angular velocity a
time(t)
is w. Which of the following equations will correctly represent the t=t0
complete wave at x0 agreeing with above wave forms? (y-t)graph
é ì 2p ü pù é ì 2p ü pù
(A) y = -a ê cos í ( t - t0 ) ý - ú (B) y = -a êsin í ( t - t0 ) ý + ú
ë îT þ 2û ë îT þ 2û
é ì 2p ü pù é ì 2p ü pù
(C) y = a êsin í ( t - t0 ) ý + ú (D) y = a êsin í ( t - t0 ) ý - ú
ë îT þ 2û ë îT þ 2û
4. A heavy but uniform rope of length L is suspended from a ceiling. A particle is dropped from the ceiling
at the instant when the bottom end is given a transverse wave pulse. Where will the particle meet the
pulse
2L L
(A) At a distance from the bottom (B) At a distance from the bottom
3 3
3L
(C) At a distance from the bottom (D) None of the above
4
5. A string with a mass density of 4 × 10–3 kg/m is under tension of 360 N and is fixed at both ends. One
of its resonance frequencies is 375 Hz. The next higher resonance frequency is 450 Hz. The mass of the
string is :-
(A) 2 × 10–3 kg (B) 3 × 10–3 kg (C) 4 × 10–3 kg (D) 8 × 10–3 kg

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. A string is under tension and stationary vibrations are produced in it. A, B, C, D are positions of
consecutive nodes. Choose the INCORRECT option.
l
(A) The distance AB =
2
(B) The phase difference between a vibrating point on AB and another on BC is zero.
(C) The amplitudes of vibration of different points between A and the midpoint of A and B are different.
(D) When every point of AB is having maximum displacement then every point of BC is having maximum
displacement in opposite direction.
æ æ x - y öö æ æ x + y öö
7. A wave equation is represented as y = A sin ç a ç ÷ ÷ cos ç wt - a ç ÷ ÷ , where x & y are in
è è 2 øø è è 2 øø
meter and t is second then :-
(A) The wave is stationary wave
(B) The wave is a progressive wave propagating along +x axis
(C) The wave is a progressive wave propagating at right angle to the +x axis
4p
(D) All point lying on line y = x + are always at rest.
a
0.1C3
8. The wave function for the wave pulse is y(x, t) = 2 , with C = 4 cm at x = 0 the displacement
C + (x - vt) 2
y(x, t) is observed to decrease from its maximum value to half of its maximum value in time
t = 2 × 10–3 s.
(A) y(x, t) represents the motion of travelling pulse moving along positive X direction
(B) y(x, t) does not represent the motion of a travelling pulse
(C) Speed of wave pulse is 20 m/s
(D) Speed of wave pulse is 10 m/s
9. A block string system is shown in the figure. Mass of block A, B and C is 5 Kg, 2 Kg, and 2 Kg
respectively. Mass of rod is given as 1 kg and its length is 1 m. A wave transverse is transmitted in the
rod in between the block B and C once in forward and once backward direction. Choose the CORRECT
statements.
B C
A
2
(A) Time for string wave to reach one end to other end in forward direction is ( 3 - 2 ) sec
5
(B) Time for waves to reach one end to other end is same for both in forward and backward direction
(C) Time for wave to reach one end to other end is different for forward and backward direction
1
(D) Time for string wave to reach one to other end in backward direction is (15)1 / 2 sec.
10

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. Consider a rope AB of non-uniform density as shown in figure. If we consider direction A to B as the
n
æxö
direction of increasing x, with x = 0, at A, linear mass density of rope is given by m = ç ÷ m 0 where n
èlø
is a constant (n ³ 0) and l is the length of the rope.
A B
x
x=0
Now the rope is hanged vertically from a roof keeping end B attached to the roof and one pulse is
produced at the lower end A and other pulse is attached at upper end B as shown in figure.
A
Choose the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) Time taken by both pulse to reach other end is same.
(B) Time taken by pulse to reach other end increases as value of n increases.
(C) Acceleration of both pulse is constant during their journey from A to B or B to A for all values of n.
(D) Acceleration of pulse does not depend on value of n.
11. In which case is the power being delivered by a given progressive sinusoidal wave on a given string is
doubled?
(A) The wave amplitude is doubled (keeping the frequency the same).
(B) The wave frequency is cut in half (keeping the amplitude the same).
(C) The string is made four time as taut (keeping its linear density the same).
(D) The diameter of the string is doubled (keeping the tension the same).
12. Two very long strings are tied together at the point x = 0. In the region x < 0, the wave speed is v 1, while
in the region x > 0, the speed is v2. A sinusoidal wave is incident on the knot from the left (x < 0); part
of the wave is reflected and part is transmitted. For x < 0, the displacement of the wave is described by
y(x, t) = A sin (k1x – wt) + B sin(k1x + wt), while for x > 0, y(x, t) = C sin (k2x – wt), where w/k1 = v1 and
w/k2 = v2. Which of the following is/are CORRECT :
C 2v 2 B ( v 2 - v1 ) v1 2 v1 2
(A) = (B) = (C) B2 + C = A2 (D) A 2 + C = B2
A ( v1 + v 2 ) A ( v1 + v 2 ) v2 v2
æ pö
13. A waveform : y1 = A sin ç 2x - 4t + ÷ is superposed with a second waveform, to produce a standing
è 3ø
wave with a node at x = 0. The equation of the second waveform can be :-
æ 5p ö æ pö
(A) y2 = A sin ç 2x + 4t + ÷ (B) y2 = A sin ç 2x - 4t + ÷
è 3 ø è 3ø
æ pö æ pö
(C) y2 = A sin ç 2x + 4t - ÷ (D) y2 = A sin ç 2x + 4t + ÷
è 3ø è 3ø

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
14. Consider standing wave formed due to superposition of two sinusoidal plane waves having the same
amplitude, frequency and moving in opposite direction. Mark the correct statements :
(A) the energy of a standing wave transforms completely into potential energy and at some other instant
into kinetic energy during a part of complete cycle.
(B) kinetic energy and potential energy attain their maximum and minimum values simultaneously
(C) there is transition of energy from each node to its adjacent antinodes and back.
(D) the time averaged energy flux in any cross section of the wave is zero.
Paragraph for Questions No. 15 and 16
The world is focusing its attention on renewable sources of energy like solar energy, wind energy, tidal
energy and wave energy. These sources are non-polluting, do not cause the emission of greenhouse
gases, or cause any large scale damage to the ecology or environment.
Waves on the surface of the ocean are a good source of power. To illustrate this, we calculate the
mechanical energy carried by an average wave of crest 1m, wavelength 20 m and a period of 5s. The
wave profile is taken as approximately step-like, instead of a sinusoidal function.
A simple minded calculation gives us a contribution of 200 kW from the release of potential energy by
such a wave over a 1 m wavefront.
10m
2m
15. The speed of the wave is

(A ) 100 ms–1 (B) 4 ms–1 (C) 0.25 ms–1 (D) none of these
16. Wave energy provides an inexpensive source of power. In the paragraph above, only the potential
energy carried by the wave was calculated. The contribution to power due to kinetic energy assuming
that all the water in the crest is moving forward at the speed of the wave gives us, over a 1 m wavefront
approximately, of the order of
(A) 100 W (B) 103 W (C) 104 W (D) 105 W
SECTION-II
1. Consider an elastic string stretched between two fixed ends A and B as shown in figure. The speed of
transverse waves in the string is v and its linear mass density is m. The string is plucked and held in a
triangular form with maximum height h << L at its middle point. At t = 0, the plucked string is released.
All effects due to gravity may be neglected. Let T be the period of string’s vibrations. If total mechanical
P m v 2h 2 Q m L h2
energy of the vibrating string can be expressed either or where P and Q are integer.
L T2
Find P × Q.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
1. A thin string of density 0.1 kg/m is held at one end and the other end is oscillated according to the
equation y(x = 0, t) = 20 (cm) sin (40 t) where t is in seconds. The string is under a tension of 10 N. The
40
string passes through a bath filled with kg of water. Due to friction, heat is transferred through the
21
bath and a snapshot at sometime is given below. After 100 a second the temperature of the bath rises by
one Kelvin. Then find the value of a. [Specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 kJ/kgK]
A A
Air 2
Water
2. In a wave, at any instant there is an incident wave and a partially reflected wave present. The ratio of
3
maximum to minimum displacement of particles is . What percent of incident energy is reflected ?
2
SECTION-IV
1. A triangular wave pulse on a taut string travels in the positive x-direction with speed v. The tension in
the string is F, and the linear mass density of the string is µ. At t = 0, the shape of the pulse is given by
ì0 if x < - L
ïh ( L + x ) / L for - L < x < 0
y( x, 0) = í
h (L - x ) / L for 0 < x < L
ï
î0 for x > L
Match information of column-I with column-II (Assume h to be positive).

Column-I Column-II
(A) For (x – vt) < –L (P) Slope of string is negative.
(B) For –L < (x – vt) < 0 (Q) Instantaneous power transmitted is non-zero
constant.
(C) For 0 < (x – vt) < L (R) Particle velocity is positive.
(D) For (x – vt) > L (S) Particle velocity is negative.
(T) Slope of string is zero.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-I
1. The figure to the right shows a travelling wave moving in the positive x-direction. At time
t = 0 s, the wave plotted as a function of position has the shape shown by the solid curve, and at t = 3s,
the shape shown by the dashed curve.
y(m)
1.5
1.0
0.5
x(m)
–1 1 2 3 4 5
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
The following six panels show plots as a function of time, at the position x = 0 m.
y(m) y(m)
1.5 1.5
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
t(s) t(s)
5 10 15 5 10 15
1. –0.5
4. –0.5
–1.0 –1.0
–1.5 –1.5
y(m) y(m)
1.5 1.5
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
t(s) t(s)
4 6 8 10 4 6 8 10
2. –2
–0.5
2 5. –2
–0.5
2
–1.0 –1.0
–1.5 –1.5
y(m) y(m)
1.5 1.5
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
t(s) t(s)
3. –1
–0.5
1 2 3 4 5 6. –1
–0.5
1 2 3 4 5
–1.0 –1.0
–1.5 –1.5
Which of the panels represent possible shapes of the travelling wave ?

(A) 4 & 6 (B) 1 & 3 (C) 1, 2 & 3 (D) 4, 5 & 6
CLASS TEST
TM
2. How long will it take for the sound wave to travel a distance 1m from point P to point Q, If the temperature
between these two points changes linearly from T0 to 4T0 and the velocity of sound propagation in air is
V = k T , where K is a constant :
1 T0 2 1
(A) 2k T (B) (C) 3k T (D) 3kT
0 2k 0 0
3. 200 students are taking an examination in a room, and the sounds of pens scratching on paper, sighs,
groans, and muttered imprecations has created a more or less continuous sound level of this noise of
60dB. Assuming each student contributes equally to this noise and nothing else changes or adds to it,
what will the sound level in the room be when only 50 students are left ? ( log10 2 = 0.3 )
(A) 50 dB (B) 15 dB (C) 66 dB (D) 54 dB
4. Standing waves are set up in a string of length 240cm clamped horizontally at both ends. The separation
between any two consecutive points where displacement amplitude is 3 2 cm is 20cm. The standing
waves were set by two travelling waves of equal amplitude of 3 cm. The overtone in which the string is
vibrating will be :-
(A) 2nd (B) 3rd (C) 4th (D) 5th
5. Sound waves from different source are interfering and pressure at same point in space is given as –
P = P0sin (200 pt + p/2) cos (3 pt + p/3)
(A) The frequency of one source is above 100Hz and other source is below 100Hz.
(B) Beat frequency is 3 Hz
(C) Beat frequency is 200 Hz
(D) Beat frequency can be 3 Hz as well as 200 Hz
6. The figure shows a taut string, initially aligned with the x-axis, which carries a waveform travelling
towards the right without any change in its shape. The bold line and the dotted line indicate the
displacement of the string (i.e., shape of the waveform) at time = t second and at time = (t + dt) second,
respectively. The speed of particle at point P at t = 2 sec is 1 cm/s. Choose the CORRECT statement(s)
from the following (assume that dt is positive) :-
y
P
45°
O x
vy vy
(A) O x
(B) O x
Particle velocity as a function of position Particle velocity as a function of position
(C) Speed of waveform is 1 cm/s and it is moving along positive x-axis

(D) Speed of waveform is 1 cm/s and it is moving along negative x-axis.
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. A standing wave is set up in a string of variable length and tension by a vibrator of variable frequency.
Both ends of the string are fixed. When the vibrator has a frequency f, in a string of length L and under
tension T, n antinodes are set up in the string. Mark the correct statement(s) :
1
(A) If the length of the string is doubled, the frequency should be changed by a factor of so that same
2
number of antinodes are produced.
(B) If the length of the string is doubled, the frequency should be changed by a factor of 2 so that same
number of antinodes are produced.
(C) If the frequency and length are held constant, tension needed to produce n + 1 antinodes is given by
2
é n ù
ê ú T
ëê ( n + 1 ) ûú
(D) If the frequency is tripled and the length of the string is halved, then tension should be changed by
9
factor of so that twice as many antinodes are produced.
16
8. A sphere of mass M is supported by a string that passes over a light horizontal rod of length L. Given that
the angle is q and that f represents the fundamental frequency of standing waves in the portion of the
string above the rod. This frequency is excited using a tuning fork of frequency f.
q
L
Mg cos q
(A) the mass of this vibrating portion of the string is
4f 2L
(B) if we increase q without changing other parameters of the problem, the wire can oscillate
in its first overtone.
(C) if we decrease the mass M without changing other parameters of the problem, the wire
can oscillate in its first overtone.
(D) if we decrease the length L without changing other parameters of the problem, the wire
can oscillate in its first overtone.
9. Curve 'y–x' at an instant for a wave travelling along x-axis on a string is shown. Slope at the point A on
the curve, as shown, is 53°.
y
53°
A x
(A) Transverse velocity of the particle at point A is positive if the wave is travelling along positive x-
axis.
(B) Transverse velocity of the particle at point A is positive if the wave is travelling along negative x-
axis of the particle at point A
(C) Magnitude of transverse velocity of the particle at point A is greater than wave speed.
(D) Magnitude of transverse velocity of the particle at point A is lesser than wave speed.

CLASS TEST
TM
10. A harmonic pressure wave produced by a distant source is travelling through your vicinity and wavefronts
that travel through your vicinity are vertical planes. Let +x direction is to be east and +y direction be
toward north. The wave function of wave is :
p(x, y, t) = Acos(kxx + kyy – wt)
ky
(A) Direction of wave propagation is at an angle q = cot–1 k with +x axis
x
ky
(B) Direction of wave propagation is at an angle q = tan–1 k with +x axis
x
w
(C) Wave speed is
kx + k y
w
(D) Wave speed is
k + k 2y
2
x
æ 2px1 pö æ x2 pö
11. Two coherent waves represented by y1 = A sin çç - wt + ÷÷ and y = A sin çç 2p - wt + ÷÷ are
è l 4ø 2
è l 6ø
superposed. The two waves will produce :
23
(A) constructive interference at (x1–x2) =2l (B) constructive interference at (x1–x2) = l
24
11
(C) destructive interference at (x1–x2) =1.5l (D) destructive interference at (x1–x2) = l
24
A uniform rod of length L is free at one end (x = L) and is subjected to a sinusoidal displacement S =
S0sin wt at the other end (x = 0). As a result, each point on the rod oscillates with same frequency w but
with different amplitude. Here Y represents Young's modulus and r is density of the rod. Normally, the
motion will be damped and the amplitude will be less than the values predicted. But here we will be
ignoring this effect. Using these conditions,
x=0 x=L
12. The displacement s at (x, t) is given by
æ wx ö é æ wL ö æ wx ö æ wL ö ù
(A) s = s0 cos ç v ÷ êcos ç v ÷ + tan ç v ÷ ´ sin ç v ÷ ú sin wt
è øë è ø è ø è øû
æ wx ö é æ wL ö æ wx ö ù
(B) s = s0 cos ç ÷ ê1 + tan ç ÷ tan ç ÷ ú sin wt
è v øë è v ø è v øû
(C) s = s0 cos ç ÷ ê1 + sin ç ÷ tan ç ÷ ú sin wt
(D) s = s0 cos ç ÷ ê1 + tan ç ÷ sin ç ÷ ú sin wt
13. If Y = 1012 N/m2, r = 104 kg/m3, L = 10 m, resonant frequencies (at which s becomes very large) are
(A) 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, ................. (B) 250 Hz, 750 Hz, .................
(C) 125 Hz, 375 Hz, ................. (D) 250 Hz, 500 Hz, .................

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Coloumn–1 Column-2 Column-3
Equation of wave Energy in one Average power
wavelength transmitted at
point X
æ 2p 5p ö
(I) y = A sin ç 2pnt - nx + (i) 2p 2µA2n 2l (P) 0
è v 6 ÷ø
æ 5p ö
(II) y = A sin ç x ÷ cos ( 2pnt ) (ii) 4p 2µA2n 2l (Q) 2p 2µvA2n 2
è 2l ø
æ 4p ö p2mvA 2 n2
(III) y = A sin ç x ÷ cos ( 2pnt ) (iii) p2µA2n 2l (R)
è l ø 2
æ 2p pö p2mA 2 n2 l pmvA 2 n2
(IV) y = A sin ç nx - 2pnt + ÷ (iv) (S)
è v 6ø 2 4
14. A progressive wave is moving in the positive x direction with speed v. The amplitude of the wave is A
l A
and frequency of the source is n. At t = 0, the particle at x = is located at y = + and moving away
3 2
3l
from the mean position. Point X is located at a distance from the source.
4
(A) (II) (iv) (P) (B) (I) (i) (Q) (C) (III) (ii) (R) (D) (IV) (iii) (S)
15. A string of length l fixed at both ends and vibrating in its 3rd overtone. The maximum amplitude of the
l
particle at anti-node is A. At t = 0, the particle at x = is located at its positive extreme. Point X is
6
l
located at a distance from the source.
2
(A) (II) (iii) (Q) (B) (III) (iv) (P) (C) (III) (iii) (P) (D) (II) (iv) (R)
16. A string is vibrating in its 5 harmonic with fixed end at x = 0 and free end at x = l. The maximum
th
l
amplitude of the particle at antinode is A. At t = 0, the particle at x = is at the positive extreme. Point
4
l
X is located at a distance from the source.
5
(A) (III) (ii) (P) (B) (II) (ii) (R) (C) (II) (iv) (P) (D) (II) (iii) (P)
SECTION-III
1. A steel wire of length 1m, mass 0.1 kg and uniform cross-section 1 mm is fixed rigidly at both ends that
2
there is no tension in the wire initially. The temperature of the wire is lowered by 20ºC and vibrations
are set up in the wire such that three antinodes are formed between the ends. An observer moving at 70
ms–1 towards the wire observes the frequency of emitted sound to be 40 Hz. Find Young's modulus of
steel (in 1011 N/m2). The coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.21 × 10–5 K–1 and the velocity of
sound in air is 330 ms–1.

CLASS TEST
TM
2. A string fixed at both the ends of length 2m, vibrating in its 7th overtone. Equation of the standing wave
is given by y = A sin kx cos ( wt + p / 3 ) . All the symbols have their usual meaning. Mass per unit length
of the string is 0.5 gm/cm. Given that A = 1 cm and w = 100 p rad/sec. If after time t0 starting from
t = 0 sec, energy of vibration is completely potential for the second time. Find 120 t 0. (Use p2 = 10)
3. A 16 kg object hangs in equilibrium from a string with a total length of L = 16m and a linear density of
µ = 0.01 kg/m. The string is wrapped around two light small frictionless pulleys that are separated by
distance d = 6 m. At what frequency (in Hz) must the string between the pulleys vibrate to form the
standing ware pattern with three loops on the string. If your answer is n then fill value of n .
d=6m
5m 5m
4. A ball of radius R = 100 cm is located in the way of propagation of a plane sound wave. The sonic
wavelength is l = 2 cm, the frequency is n = 100p Hz, the pressure oscillation amplitude in air is (Dp)m
= 4 Pa. Find the mean energy flow rate (in watt), averaged over an oscillation period, reaching the
surface of the ball. Take density of air 1 kg/m3.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. A boy is running in a stadium shaped in form of circle of radius 100 m. At the centre of stadium on
ground a loudspeaker emits waves of frequency 165 Hz. The ceiling of stadium is 5 m high. Waves
coming directly from speaker and after one reflection from ceiling interfere. What are possible
radii of boy’s running circle so that he hears maximum sound. vsound = 330 m/s.
é 25 - 2n 2 ù é 50 - 2n 2 ù
(A) êx = ú
2n û n = 1, 2, 3, 4 (B) êx = ú
4n û n = 1, 2, 3, 4
ë ë
é 50 - 4n 2 ù é 100 - 4n2 ù
(C) ê x = ú (D) ê x = ú n = 1, 2, 3, 4
ë 4n û n = 1, 2, 3, 4 ë 4n û
2. A student is performing the experiment of Resonance Column. The diameter of the column tube is
20
cm. The frequency of the tuning fork is 1050 Hz. The air temperature is 38°C in which the speed
3
of sound is 336 m/s. The zero of the meter scale coincides with the top end of the Resonance column
tube. When the first resonance occurs, the reading of the water level in the column is
(A) 8 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 6 cm (D) 12 cm
3. A pipe open at the top end is held vertically with some of its lower protion dipped in water. At a
certain depth of immersion, the air column of length 3/8 m in the pipe resonates with a tuning fork
of frequency 680 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. The pipe is now raised up by a distance 'x'
until it resonates in the 'next overtone' with the same tuning fork. The value of 'x' is
(A) 20 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 25 cm
4. A source is moving with a constant speed u on a straight line, emitting a sound of frequency f 0.
There are three observers A, B and C. A on track, B at a perpendicular distance of d from the track
and C at a perpendicular distance of 2d form the track as shown in the figure. The variation of the
observed frequency with respect to the position x,
v
S
f (in Hz) x
A
q
1
2
B
f0
C
1
q (in Radian)
0 p/2 p
(A) A – 3, B – 2, C – 1 (B) A – 2, B – 3, C– 1 (C) A – 1, B – 2, C – 3 (D) A – 1, B – 3, C – 2

5. A wall is moving with velocity u and a source of sound moves with velocity
u
u/2 in the same direction as shown in figure. Assuming that the sound travels
with velocity 10 u. The ratio of incident sound wavelength on the wall to the
u/2
reflected sound wavelength by the wall, is equal to (assume observer for S
reflected sound is at rest) :
(A) 9 : 11 (B) 11 : 19 (C) 4 : 5 (D) 5 : 4
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. Three musicians experiment with the Doppler effect. Musician A rides in a car at a speed u directly
away from musician B who is stationary. Musician C rides in a car directly toward B and travels at
the same speed as A. Musician A plays a note at frequency fA on his trumpet. B hears the note,
adjusts his trumpet, and plays the same note he heard. Choose the incorrect statement :
A B C
u u
(A) The note heard by C coming from B will be the same pitch as fA.
(B) The note heard by A coming from B will be higher in pitch than fA.
(C) The note heard by A coming from B will be lower in pitch than fA.
(D) The note heard by B coming from A will be lower in pitch than fA.
7. Displacement vs position graph is shown for a longitudinal wave. In the graph below is shown
pressure profile of medium. Choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
(A) If wave is moving towards right then pressure profile is 2
(B) If wave is moving towards left then pressure profile is 2
(C) If wave is moving towards right then pressure profile is 1 1
(D) If wave is moving towards left then pressure profile is 1 2
8. Which of the following statements is/are valid?
(A) The sound waves from two tuning forks of the same frequency will interfere constructively at
some points.
(B) Two waves, A and B, have the same wave velocity. If A has a higher frequency than B, then A
will have a shorter wavelength
(C) In a transverse wave, the motion of the particle of the medium is in the same direction as the
wave velocity.
(D) The propagation speed (or wave velocity) of a wave can be found by dividing its wavelength
by its period.
A' M
9. Figure shows a closed pipe (closed at both ends) of
length 10m. MN is a membrane (thin sheet) capable
of doing simple harmonic motion of amplitude 1mm G1 G2
along left and right from shown situation. On two
sides of membrane are two gases G1 and G2 in which A N
B
sound can travel at 300 m/s and 100 m/s respectively. 6m 4m
(A) If resonance is obtained in right side (G2), side (G1) might not resonate.
(B) Resonance in both gases will be possible for some specific frequencies only.
2
(C) For angular frequency 75 p rad/sec., a particle, m right of AA' would be oscillating with
3
maximum displacement 0.5 mm.
2
(D) For angular frequency 75 p rad/sec., a particle, m right of AA' would be oscillating with
3
3
maximum displacement mm.
2
10. A sound source S moves with speed of 20 m/s with respect to the medium. There are two detectors
A & B located as shown in figure. If wavelength emitted by source are in the range of 20 to 50 cm
then choose correct statement(s) :-
(A) A wavelength detected by A may be 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm
20m/s
(B) A wavelength detected by A may be 19 cm, 30 cm, 41 cm S
B A
(C) A wavelength detected by B may be 20 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm
(D) A wavelength detected by B may be 22 cm, 51 cm, 53 cm

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

A ship swims at constant velocity vr on a windless ocean. A short
B
sound pulse is emitted from a sound source located at point A of the
open deck of the ship, the speed of sound is v0. The sound is reflected l ®
v
from wall B that is at distance l from point A and is parallel to the A C
direction of travel. The sound is also reflected from wall C that is l
also at distance l but is perpendicular to the direction of travel. The sound reflected from wall B is
received at A after time tB and similarly from wall C after time t C.
v0
11. If tB = ntC, then the ratio of would be
v
1 1 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
n n 1- n 2
1 - n2
12. If rather then pulse, a continuous sound wave of frequency f is produced by source, then the beat
frequency as observed by an observer at A would be
f f f
n2 1 - n2 n
Paragraph for Q. No. 13 to 15
Figure shows a cylinder piston arrangement in which a piston is moved.
For molecules striking the piston, the speed of approach is = vp + vm.
Speed of separation is = vm + 2vp after striking the piston.
As shown in figure each molecule that strikes the moving piston has the quantity 2v p added to its
speed. Thus, kinetic energy is added to the gas.
An identical molecule moving at vm towards the piston that strikes head-on another molecule
moving away from the piston with speed vm + 2vp. The one originally moving toward the piston
with velocity vm now moves away with velocity vm + 2vp, and the other molecule heads back toward
the piston with speed vm. The net result of all this collision is that the excess velocity 2vp is passed
on from one molecule to the next. The rightmost molecule with the extra velocity is at the leading
edge of a propagating disturbance as shown in figure. If we look within the disturbed region, at any
given moment we can expect that half the molecules have velocity -vm toward the piston and half
have velocity +vm + 2vp away from the piston as shown in figure (b). When the piston stops moving,
the molecules returning to it with speed vm simply have their velocities reversed, and we are back
where we started, except for the propagating disturbance, which is now traveling down the tube with
a speed of vm + 2vp » vm. In the disturbed region the gas molecules have excess average speed vp,
but that region of excess speed propagates with much higher speed vm. A compressed region is
formed whenever the piston is pushed into the tube. A rarefactions region is formed whenever the
piston is pushed back into the tube. As the piston oscillates sinusoidally, regions of compression
and rarefaction are continuously set up. The pressure variation is a maximum when the displacement
from equilibrium is zero, and the displacement from equilibrium is a maximum when the pressure
variation is zero.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Disturbed region vP vm vm + 2vP vm vm + 2vP vm

v vm + 2vp First event Second event Third event
m
Piston
motion When piston is moving forward
Figure (a) vm vm – 2vP vm vm – 2vP vm
vP First event Second event Third event
When piston is moving backward

Figure (b)
13. Consider for the case piston is pushed inward. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) The gas in the region between the piston and the leading edge of the disturbance has acquired an
average velocity vp to the right
(B) Each gas molecule hit by the piston gains velocity 2vp in the x-direction, thus increasing the
kinetic energy of the gas.
(C) Extra kinetic energy is passed on from molecule to molecule at roughly the speed vm which is
much faster than the piston speed vp
(D) The molecules that were pushed out of the way by the piston also create a region of increased
density that itself also propagates down the tube along with the excess kinetic energy.
14. Mark the CORRECT statement(s) :-
(A) A compressed region is formed whenever the piston is pushed into the tube. This compressed
region, moves through the tube with speed of sound in the medium.
(B) A rarefaction region is formed whenever the piston is pushed back into the tube. This rarefaction
region also moves through the tube with speed of sound in the medium.
(C) When a compressed region is formed density of the medium increases.
(D) When a rarefaction region is formed density of the medium decreases.
15. Consider that piston oscillates to and fro in simple harmonic motion. Mark the CORRECT
statement(s) about longitudinal pressure wave.
(A) The density variation of the particles have their maxima and minima at the position of equilibrium
of the particles.
(B) At the position of maximum displacement of particles the density is at the ambient (environment)
value.
(C) Greatest compression occurs at the same time and place where the velocity of the particles is
maximum and in direction of wave propagation.
(D) Greatest rarefaction occurs at the same time and place where the velocity of the particles is
maximum and in direction of wave propagation.
16. Figure shows displacement vs x-graph for a longitudinal wave at Disp.
time t travelling along +x-direction.
A
List-I List-II
(P) Point A (1) Maximum pressure B x
(Q) Point B (2) Minimum pressure D
(R) Point C (3) Acceleration positive C
(S) Point D (4) Acceleration negative
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
Code :-
P Q R S
(A) 4 1 3 2
(B) 1 3 2 4
(C) 2 3 1 4
(D) 4 1 2 3
SECTION-III
1. As shown in the figure, two loudspeakers are located at point A and B. P1 P2
Both are vibrating in phase at a frequency n and P1 and P2 are their A d1 C d2 B
respective power outputs. Point C lies on a line joining the two
loudspeakers at a distance of d1 from A and d2 from B. With both speakers switched on what is the
power (in W/m2) at point C. Take velocity of sound = 300 ms–1, frequency n = 100 Hz, d1 = 1m and
d2 = 1.5 m, P1 = 8p watts and P2 = 18 p watts. Also assume that loudspeakers behave like isotropic
sources. (emit sound uniformly in all directions).
2. A source plays a tone with frequency f0 = 440 Hz. What is the speed of a car moving straight
towards the source, if the driver hears a frequency of 462 Hz. If your answer is v0 (in m/s) then fill
v0 + 1
value of . (Speed of sound in the air is v = 340 ms–1, the effects of the material of the car can
2
be neglected)
3. As shown in figure water is pumped into a tall vertical cylinder at a volume f
flow rate R. The radius of the cylinder is r, and at the open top of the cylinder
a tuning fork is vibrating with a frequency f. As the water rises, time interval
pr 2 v
elapse between successive resonances is given by t = where v is
R af
speed of sound in air. Find a.
SECTION-IV R
1. Column I shows four systems, for producing standing waves. Match each system with statements
given in Column II describing the nature and different parameters of the standing waves.
Column I Column II
A
(A) (P) Longitudinal standing wave
(B) A (Q) Transverse standing wave
(C) A (R) Power transfer can take place across point A
(D) A (S) All overtones are possible

(T) KE of particle A is always zero

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. In the given arrangement a source is placed at the fixed end of the spring with spring constant 100 N/m
and the receiver is attached to the moving end of the spring, which in turn is connected to a box of mass
4kg, which is oscillating horizontally with an amplitude of oscillation 2m. If the source emits a frequency
of 990 Hz then (speed of sound = 330 m/s) :-
k receiver
source M
(A) maximum frequency received by the receiver is 990 Hz

(B) minimum frequency received by the receiver is 990 Hz
(C) frequency band width received by the receiver is 960 Hz - 1020 Hz
(D) maximum and minimum frequencies are received at the extreme position.
2. Consider the optical system shown in the figure that follows. The point source of light S is having
wavelength equal to l. The light is reaching screen only after reflection. For point P to be 2nd maxima,
the value of l would be (D > > d and d > > l) :-
S d
P
3d
D
12d 2 6d 2 8d 2 24d 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
D D D D
3. A point source of light S is place in front of a perfectly reflecting mirror as shown in the figure. S is a
screen. The intensity at the centre of screen is found to be I. If the mirror is removed, then the intensity
at the centre of screen would be :-
S
a a
S
10 I 9I
(A) I (B) (C) (D) 2 I
9 10
4. A lens of diameter 5.0 cm and focal length f = 20.0 cm was cut along the diameter into two identical
halves. In the process, a thin layer of lens (a = 1.0 mm) is lost. Then the halves were put together to form
a composite lens. A source slit is placed 10 cm from the lens, emitting light of wavelength l = 600 nm.
Behind the lens, a screen wall located at a distance b = 80 cm from lens. Find the fringe width :-
(A) 0.15 mm (B) 0.3 mm (C) 0.6 mm (D) 1.2 µm
5. In a regular YDSE, when thin film of refractive index m is placed in front of the lower slit then it is observed
that the intensity at the central point becomes half of the original intensity. It is also observed that the initial
3rd maxima is now below the central point and the initial 4th minima is above the central point. Now
instead, a film of refractive index m1 and thickness same as the above film, is put in the front of the lower
slit. It is observed that whole fringe pattern shifts by one fringe width. What is the value of m1?
(A) (4m + 9)/12 (B) (4m + 9)/13 (C) (9m + 4)/13 (D) None

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. In the young's double slit experiment a point P from the central bright fringe is such that the intensity at
3
the point P is times the maximum intensity. Distance between the slits is d and wavelenth is l . The
4
angular position of P is -
ælö -1 æ l ö -1 æ l ö -1 æ l ö
(A) sin–1 ç ÷ (B) sin ç ÷ (C) sin ç ÷ (D) sin ç ÷
d è ø è 12d ø è 3d ø è 6d ø
4
7. A thin oil film of refractive index 1.2 floats on the surface of water (µ = ). When a light of wavelength
3
l = 9.6 × 10–7 m falls normally on the film from air, then it appears dark when seen normally. The
minimum change in its thickness for which it will appear bright in normally reflected light by the same
light is :-
(A) 10–7 m (B) 2 × 10–7 m (C) 3 × 10–7 m (D) 5 × 10–7 m
8. A woman stands at rest in front of a large, smooth wall. She holds a vibrating tuning fork of frequency f0
directly in front of her (between her and the wall). The woman now runs towards the wall with speed vw.
She detects f1 beats per second due to the interference between the sound waves reaching her directly from
the fork and those reaching her after being reflected from the wall. If the woman instead runs away from
the wall, holding the tuning fork at her back so it is between her and the wall, she detects f2 beats per
seconds. (Velocity of sound is v)
æ 2v w ö æ 2v w ö æ v - vw ö æ 2v w ö
(A) f1 = f0 ç ÷ (B) f2 = f0 ç ÷ (C) f1 = f0 ç ÷ (D) f2 = f0 ç ÷
è v - vw ø è v - vw ø è 2v w ø è v + vw ø
9. A parallel beam of light (l = 5000 Å) is incident at an angle q = 30° with
the normal to the slit plane in a Young's double slit experiment. The intensity
due to each slit is I0. Point O is equidistant from S1 and S2. The distance S1
between slits is 1 mm, then :- q O
(A) The intensity at O is 4 I0.
(B) The intensity at O is zero
(C) The intensity at a point on the screen 4mm above O is 4I0. 2m
(D) The intensity at a point on the screen 4 mm above O is zero.
10. Four trials of Young's double slit experiment are conducted. (Given : lblue = 450 nm and lred = 700 nm)
(i) In the first trial, blue light passes through two fine slits 400 µm apart and forms an interference pattern
on a screen 4m away.
(ii) In a second trial, red light passes through the same slits and falls on the same screen.
(iii) A third trial is performed with red light and the same screen, but with slits 800 µm apart
(iv) A final trial is performed with red light, slits 800µm apart, and a screen 8m away.
If angle between the first maxima and central maxima in each trial is qi, qii, qiii & qiv respectively &
distance between the central maxima and first maxima is y1, yii, yiii & yiv respectively then:
(A) qi > qii > qiii > qiv (B) yi > yii > yiii > yiv
(C) qii > qi > qiii = qiv (D) yii = yiv > yi > yiii

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Paragraph for Question no. 11 to 13
In the front of the upper slit of YDSE apparatus, a thin film of a liquid of refractive index 1.40 is placed.
It is a hot day the liquid starts evaporating from the surface. A beam of light at wavelength 560 nm is
incident onto the YDSE apparatus and the intensity I at the centre of the screen is monitored. Figure
gives intensity I as a function of time t. The intensity changes because of evaporation from the two sides
of the film. Assume that the film is flat and has parallel sides. Also assume that the film's thickness
decreases at a constant rate.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
t in sec.
11. What can not be the initial thickness of the film?
(A) 7 µm (B) 4.9 µm (C) 7.7 µm (D) 9.1 µm
12. If the maximum intensity is I0, then :-
I0 3I 0
(A) Intensity at t = 10 sec is (B) Intensity at t = 10 sec is
2 4
I0 I0
(C) Intensity at t = 10 sec is (D) Intensity at t = 10 sec,
4 2 2
13. The rate of change of thickness can be :
140 28 56
(A) nm/sec (B) 70 nm/sec (C) nm/sec (D) nm/sec
3 3 3
14. List-I shows four system of string each of same length, for producing travelling wave or standing wave.
In each case velocity of travelling wave on string is same i.e.v. Match each system of list-I with expressions
given in list-II describing the energy of the wave.
List-I List-II
mA 2 p2 v 2
(P) A (1)
4l
l
Travelling wave
A
9mA 2 p2 v 2
(Q) (2)
16l
l
Standing wave of one loop with
amplitude of antinode equal to A
A
mA 2 p2 v 2
(R) (3)
l
l
Standing wave of one plus half loop
with amplitude of antinode equal to A
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
A
2mA 2p2 v 2
(S) (4)
l
l
Standing wave of 2 loop with
amplitude of antinode equal to A.
Codes :
P Q R S
(A) 4 1 2 3
(B) 4 2 1 4
(C) 2 2 3 1
(D) 1 1 2 3
SECTION-III
1. The diagram above shows the basic idea behind a disk siren. It consists of a disk in which there are 16
equally spaced holes, all at the same distance from its axle. When a jet of air is directed at the holes and
the disc is rotated at a particular constant rate, the frequency of the note produced is 320 Hz.
When a disk containing 24 holes is rotated at 4/3 times the rate then frequency of note produced is
320 n Hz. Find the value of n
Air
2. A bus is moving with a velocity vB along positive x-axis along a road as shown in the figure. A shooter
S is at a distance l from the road. He has a detector which can detect signals only of frequency 1500 Hz.
The bus blows horn of frequency 1000 Hz. When detector detects a signal, shooter immediately shoots
towards the road along SC and bullet hits the bus. If velocity of sound in medium is 360 m/s and
vbus 2
= , then velocity of bullet (in m/s) is (12)n m/s. Find n.
vsound 3 3
Bus VB C Road
3. Two coherent sources S1 and S2 separated by distance 2l emit light of wavelength l in phase as shown
in the figure. A circular wire of radius 100l is placed in such a way that S1S2 lies in its plane and the
mid-point of S1S2 is at the centre of wire. The angular positions on the wire for which intensity reduces
to half of its maximum value for the first time is given as q. Find the value of 32 cosq.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. One slit of a Young's experiment is covered by a glass plate (µ1 = 1.4) and the other by another glass
plate (µ2 = 1.7) of the same thickness. The point of central maxima on the screen, before the plates were
introduced is now occupide by the third bright fringe. Find the thickness of the plates (in µm), when the
wavelength of light used is 4000 Å.
5. Solar cell devices that generate electricity when exposed to sunlight are often coated with a transparent
thin film of silicon monoxide (SiO, refractive index = 2) to minimize the reflective losses from the
surface. A silicon solar cell (n = 3.5) is coated with a thin film of silicon monoxide of thickness 60 nm.
As an engineer, you have to coat an addition layer of silicon monoxide film so that reflection is least for
a wave of wavelength 880 nm, then the minimum thickness of additional coat is (x × 102) Å. Find the
value of x.
SECTION-IV
1. Ranvir and Akshay are rowing two boats in a river with the same speed v relative to the river. Ranvir is
upstream relative to Akshay. The river is flowing with speed v/2. Each boat sends, through the water, a
signal to the other. The frequencies f0 of the generated continuous sonic signals are the same. Each
observer observes the wave sent by the other person. In each of the situation in column-I, Match the
appropriate entries.
Column I Column II
r r
v v
(A) Ranveer Akshay (P) The times it takes for the signals to travel
from one boat to the other will be the same.
v/2
r r
(B) v v (Q) The wavelength observed by Akshay is greater
Ranveer Akshay
than the wavelength observed by Ranvir.
v/2
r r
v v
(C) Ranveer
(R) The frequency observed by Akshay is greater
Akshay
than the frequency observed by Ranvir.
v/2
r r
(D) v v (S) The wavelength observed by Akshay is lesser
Ranveer Akshay than the wavelength observed by Ranvir.
v/2 (T) The frequency observed by Akshay is equal to

the frequency observed by Ranvir.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. For displacement(s)-x graph shown for a sound wave, select appropriate excess pressure(p)-x graph.
s
p p
(A) x (B) x
p p
(C) x (D) x
2. A vertical tube is completely filled with water. A small sound source of constant frequency is held a little
above the open upper end and water is run out from the lower end. A number of resonance positions are
detected. The first of these occurs when the water surface is 7cm below the top of the tube and another
occurs at 39cm. At which of the following distances should resonance also be detected?
(A) 14cm (B) 18cm (C) 23cm (D) 31cm
3. A rod of specific gravity 0.7 is found to be stretched by one millimetre when suspended vertically and
loaded with a weight of lead of specific gravity 11, the volume of the weight being equal to that of the
rod. What fundamental (approximately) frequency will the rod alone emit when clamped at the middle
and rubbed longitudinally ?
1 1100g 1 11 ´10 4 g 1 770g 1 7 ´ 10 3 g

(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 7 2 7 2 3 2 11
4. A source of frequency f is rotating in a circular path of radius R. An observer in the same plane is also
rotating in a circular path of radius 2R. The centers of both circular paths are separated by 6R. Both
these are rotating with same angular velocity w in same direction. Find the difference between maximum
and minimum frequency received by observer. 'C' is speed of sound.
2CwRf 6CwRf 3CwRf 4CwRf
(A) C2 - ( wR )2 (B) C2 - ( wR )2 (C) C2 - ( wR )2 (D) C2 - ( wR )2
5. In Young's double slit experiment with light of wavelength l = 600 nm, intensity of central fringe is I 0.
Now one of the slit is covered by glass plate of refraction index 1.4 and thickness t = 5 µ m, the new
intensity at the same point on screen will be :-
I0 3I 0 I0
(A) (B) (C) I0 (D)
4 4 2

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6. As shown in arrangement waves with identical wavelength and amplitudes and that are initially in phase
travel through different media. Ray–1 travels through air and Ray–2 through a transparent medium for
equal length L in four different situations. In each situation the two rays reach a common point on the
screen. The number of wavelength in length L is N1 for Ray–1 and N2 for Ray–2. The order of situation
according to the intensity of the light at the common position in descending order :-
L
Ray–2 Situation 1 2 3 4
N1 2.25 1.80 3.00 3.25
Ray–1
N2 2.75 2.80 3.25 4.00
(A) I3 = I4 > I2 > I1 (B) I1 > I3 = I4 > I2 (C) I1 > I2 > I3 > I4 (D) I2 > I3 = I4 > I1
7. In Young's double slit experiment the slits are 0.5 mm apart and interference is observed on a screen
placed at a distance of 100 cm from the slits. It is found that the 9th bright fringe is at a distance of 9.0
mm from the second dark fringe from the centre of the fringe pattern. What is the wavelength of light
used :-
(A) 2000 Å (B) 4000 Å (C) 6000 Å (D) 8000 Å
8. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength l = 100 (Å) is incident on the slits separated by
distance d = 2mm. There is a screen at a distance D = 1m from slit. If R.I. of the medium between slits
and screen is varying with time as m = 20 – 4t until it becomes 1. A glass slab of R.I. m = 5 and thickness
0.2 mm is placed infront of one of the slit S1 as shown in figure. In figure y represent position of central
maxima on the screen from its geometrical centre. Then calculate value of y (in cm) at t = 5 sec.
m = 20 – 4t
S1 m y
S2
(A) 40 (B) 7.5 (C) 20 (D) 15

9. Sound wave in form of sine wave is travelling along +x axis , DP - x graph is shown. Choose correct
options.
DP
C
A B x
(A) Particle on just left side of A and just right side of A are moving in opposite directions.
(B) Speed of particle on just left of A is less than that on right of A.
(C) Particles on just left and just right of B have opposite direction of motion.
(D) Particles on just left and just right of C are moving in same direction

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
10. In a YDSE setup, we plot the phase difference (f) between both waves at point P on the screen against
the angular position (q) of point P on the screen. The graph is as shown below.
(A) The distance S1S2 = 2l
(B) There are a total of 4 minima on the screen P 4p
S1 f
p q
(C) The first maxima above the centre is at q = q p/2
4 S2
Screen
p
(D) At q = , intensity is maximum
6
11. In a YDSE arrangement, white light is used to illuminate the slits. At point on the screen directly in front
of the slits, which of these wavelengths is/are missing ?
(l = wavelength of light used, d = distance between the slits, D = separation between the slits and the
screen, d << D) :-
d2 d2 d2 d2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
D 3D 4D 8D
12. In a Young's double slit experiment two thin transparent sheets are used in front of the slits S1 and S2.
t1 + t 2
One of thin sheet has refractive index m1 = 1.6 and other has m2 = 1.4. Both sheets have thickness
2
the central maxima is observed at a distance of 5mm from centre O. Now the sheets are replaced by two
m1 + m 2
sheets of same material of refractive index but having thickness t 1 and t2. Now central maxima
2
is observed at a distance 8 mm from centre O. Find the thickness of two sheets. Given d = 1mm, D = 1m.
Then :-
S1
d
O
S2
D
(A) t1 = 1.2 × 10–5 m (B) t1 = 3.3 × 10–5 m (C) t2 = 1.7 × 10–5 m (D) t2 = 2 × 10–5 m
13. M1 and M2 are two plane mirror & S is monochromatic source. AB is a 'stop' which stops direct light to
reach CF and allows reflected light from M1 and M2 to reach CF. P is a point on CF such that SP is
parallel to M1 & M2 & perpendicular to CF :- C
(A) Circular fringes will be formed on CF
M
(B) P will be central maxima 1
d A
P
6d 2
(C) P will be a point of maxima if l = 2d B
D M2
D
d2 F
(D) P will be a point of maxima if l =
D

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Let us consider an interference experiment with electrons. They are emitted from a box after being
accelerated to a voltage V. The slits are both of same width. To detect the electron waves, we use a small
metal patch connected to an ammeter as shown. At the centre of the screen, it shows current i0.
14. If current shown by ammeter is i0/2 if patch is at :-

Dh 3Dh 3Dh Dh
(A) 2d 2mqV (B) 2d 2mqV (C) 4d 2mqV (D) 8d 2mqV
15. In front of the upper slit, we have produced a thin slab of thickness w in which potential is DV higher
than surroundings. Which of the following effects will be observed :-
(A) fringe pattern shifts up. (B) fringe pattern shifts down.
(C) fringe width increases. (D) fringe width decreases.
SECTION-II
1. Each light source (S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6) in a line has same power, same wavelength (l) and all are in
phase. Distance between consecutive sources is a if smallest value of a is a' such that point P(r>>a) has
2
ælö
zero light intensity, find the value of ç ÷ .
è a' ø
P
30°
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
2. In a Young experiment the light source is at distance l1 = 20µm and l2 = 40 µm from the slits. The light
of wavelength l = 500 nm is incident on slits separated at a distance 10 µm. A screen is placed at a
distance D = 2m away from the slits as shown in figure. How many maxima will appear on the screen.
P
l1
S1
l2 q
C
d
S2

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-III
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 2 Q . [ 4 M (0)]
1. The outer surface of a transparent glass slab of refractive index µS = 1.5 is coated by a thin layer of
transparent medium of refractive index µc = 1.6. Orange light of wave length 6400 Å fall normally on
the coat. The reflected light at the upper surface and at the lower surface of the coat interfere distructively.
If thickness of the coat is 5K × 10–8 m, calculate the minimum value of K.
2. The fundamental frequency of an open pipe would be independent of small variation in temperature at
h
a temperature T0 = , where a is the coefficient of linear expansion of the material of the tube. Fill
14a
the value of h in OMR sheet.
SECTION-IV
1. Column I represents how a quantity can change in each situation mentioned in column II. In each
situation three different physical quantity denoted by option 1, 2 & 3 have been chosen.
COLUMN I COLUMN II
(A) Property in (P) In a standard YDSE the slits are created
option 1 S1 in a metallic sheet.
increases. d Temperature increases.
S2
Option 1 : Fringe width
Option 2 : Intensity at maxima
D
Option 3 : Position of zero order maxima
y
(B) Property in (Q) Two rods of same cross-section area are
option 2 rigidly fixed to a wall.
decreases O x Y, a are usual notations.
xi
For Y1a1 > Y2a2
Temperature is increased
Option 1 : Co-ordinate of interface xi.
Option 2 : x-Co-ordinate of centre of mass
of composite rod.
Option 3 : Stress at any cross-section
(C) Property in (R) A metallic cylinder resonates with a tuning fork
option 3 (constant frequency).
constant Temperature is increased.
Option 1 : Fundamental frequency of cylinder
Option 2 : Velocity of sound.
Option 3 : End correction.
(D) Property in (S) A charged conducting sphere with
option 3 spherical cavity as shown in figure.
increases Temperature is increased
Option 1 : Potential outside the sphere.
Option 2 : Potential at centre of cavity.
Option 3 : Electric field outside the sphere.
(T) El Spectral emissive power v/s wavelength
(El) m
graph of a black body.
Temperature is increased.
lm
l Option 1 : (El)m
Option 2 : lm
Option 3 : Area under graph.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Consider a ray of light incident from air onto a slab of glass (refractive index n) of width d, at an angle
q. The phase difference between the ray reflected by the top surface of the glass and the bottom surface
is (l is wavelength of light in vacuum)
1/ 2 1/ 2
n 4p d æ 1 ö p n 4p d æ 1 ö
ç 1 - 2 sin q ÷ + ç 1 - 2 sin q ÷ +p
2 2
(A) (B)
l è n ø 2 l è n ø
1/ 2 1/ 2
4p d æ 1 ö 4p d æ 1 ö p
ç 1 - 2 sin q ÷ + p ç 1 - 2 sin q ÷ +
2 2
(C) (D)
l è n ø l è n ø 2
2. Two mirrors M1 and M2 make an angle f with line AB. A point source
M1
S is kept at a distance r from the point of intersection of mirrors. A b Surface
small hemispherical annular mask is kept close to S so that no ray f Sc
r b
emanating from S directly reaches the screen kept at a distance b
f S
from the source. Interference pattern of rays reflected from M1 and hemispherical
M2 is observed on the screen. Find the fringe width of this interference annular mask
pattern. l = wavelength of light being emitted by source.
l(b + 2r sin 2 f) l(b + 2r cos2f) l(b + r cos 2f) l(b + 2r cos2f)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2r sin 2f 2r sin 2f 2r sin 2f r sin 2f
3. A monochromatic light is used in Young's double slit experiment when one of the slits is covered by a
transparent sheet of thickness 1.8 mm, made of material of refractive index m1 number of fringes which
shift is 18. when another sheet of thickness 3.6 mm, made of material of refractive index m 2 is used,
number of fringes which shift is 9. Relation between m1 and m 2 is given by.
(A) 4m 2 - m1 = 3 (B) 4m1 - m 2 = 3 (C) 3m 2 - m1 = 4 (D) 2m1 - m 2 = 4
4. A light with wavelength (l = 550 nm) from a distant source falls normally on the surface of a glass
wedge with refractive index 1.5. A fringe pattern whose neghbouring maxima on the wedge are separated
by a distance (Dx = 11 mm) is observed in reflected light. The angle between the wedge faces is :-
1 1 1
(A) rad (B) rad (C) rad (D) None of these
30 60 90
5. In the given figure light is incident at an angle q with the normal to a plane
containing two slits of separation d. Select the expression that correctly
describes the positions of the interference maxima in terms of the incoming
angle q and outgoing angle f.
d
æ 1öl q f
(A) sin f + sin q = ç m + ÷ (B) dsinq = ml
è 2ød
l l
(C) sin f - sin q = ( m + 1) (D) sin f + sin q = m
d d
6. When monochromatic light falls normally on the surface of the soap film in air, the intensity of the
reflected light depends on the wavelength: it has a maximum at l1 = 630 nm and the minimum at
l2 = 525 nm. What can be the film thickness? Refractive index of the film n = 4/3.
(A) 590.625 nm (B) 640 nm (C) 562.625 nm (D) 466.66 nm

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. Two polaroid sheets are placed one over the other with their axes inclined to each other at 30o. The ratio
of the intensity of the unpolarised incident light and the polarised emergent light is :-
1 3 8 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 4 3 8
8. In young's experiment, the upper slit is covered by a thin glass plate
4 µ1
of refractive index and of thickness 9l, where l is the wavelength
3 d
S1
P
of light used in the experiment. The lower slit is also covered by another S S2
µ2
3 d
glass plate of thickness 2l & refractive index , as shown in figure. If 1
2 D
I0 is the intensity at point P due to slits S1 & S2 each, then : d1 , D > > d
(A) Intensity at point P is 4I0
(B) Two fringes have been shifted in upward direction after insertion of both the glass plates together.
(C) Optical path difference between the waves from S1 & S2 at point P is 2l.
(D) If the source S is shifted upwards by a small distance d 2 then the fringe originally at P after inserting
æd ö
the plates, shifts downward by D ç 2 ÷ .
è d1 ø
9. A lens of focal length f = 40 cm is cut along the diameter into
f = 40cm
two equal halves. In this process, a layer of thickness t = 1mm Screen
is lost, then halves are put together to form a composite lens.
In between focal plane and the composite lens a narrow slit is S O
placed very close to the focal plane |u| < |f|. The slit is emitting |u|<|f|
monochromatic light of wavelength 0.6 µm. Behind the lens 0.5m
a screen is located at a distance L = 0.5 m from it as shown :-
(A) Fringe width is 0.12 mm (B) Fringe width is 0.24 mm.
(C) Length of interference pattern is 1/8 cm (D) Length of interference pattern is 1/16 cm
10. Mark the CORRECT statements(s) :
(A) Direction of wave propagation is along the normal to wavefront.
(B) For a point source of light, the shape of wavefront can be considered to be plane at very large
distance from the source.
(C) A point source of light is placed at the focus of a thin spherical lens, then the shape of the wavefront
for emerged light may be plane.
(D) The shape of the wavefront for the light incident on a thin spherical lens (kept in vacuum) is plane,
the shape of the wavefront corresponding to emergent light would be always spherical.
Refracting angles of biprism are both 0.15°. Distance of biprism from source l=6000Å
is 30 cm. Distance between source and screen is 140 cm. The Fresnel's biprism 0.15°
arrangement shown in the figure uses a source of light of wavelength 6000Å. S
When a converging lens is moved between the biprism and the screen two
images of S are focused on the screen for two positions of the lens. The 30cm
separations between the two images for the two positions are found to be 140cm
0.9mm and 1.6mm
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
11. The focal length of the lens is :-

120 240
(A) cm (B) cm (C) Data not sufficient (D) None
7 7
12. Gap between two position of the lens is :-
(A) 80 cm (B) 60 cm (C) 40 cm (D) 20 cm
13. Refractive index of the prism material is approximately :-
(A) 1.46 (B) 1.56 (C) 1.66 (D) 1.76
14. The fringe width of the pattern on screen (after the lens has been removed) is :-
(A) 0.7 m (B) 0.35 mm (C) 1.4 mm (D) None
15. The total number of fringes obtained on the screen :-
4400 400 44
(A) (B) (C) (D) None
7 7 7
SECTION-III
1. The intensity received at the focus of the lens is I when no glass slab has
been placed in front of the slit. Both the slits are of the same dimension and
the plane wavefront incident perpendicularly on them, has wavelength l.
On placing the glass slab, the intensity reduces to 3I/4 at the focus. Find out
the minimum thickness of the glass slab (in 1000Å) if its refractive index is
3/2. Given l = 6000Å, µ = 1.5.
2. For the arrangement given in the following figure, the coherent light sources A, B and C radiating in
phase have individual intensities of 2 mW/m2, 2 mW/m2 and 5 mW/m2, respectively at point P. The
wavelength of each of the sources is 600 nm. The resultant intensity at point P (in mW/m2) is.
P
15mm
A
3.22mm
1m
B
2.04mm
C
3. In Young's double slits experiment parallel monochromatic electromagnetic waves of wavelength
3 × 10–5 m fall on the slits at an angle of 30° with the normal to the plane of slits as shown in the figure.
A transparent sheet of thickness 5 × 10–5 m and refractive index 1.5 is introduced near the slit S1. The
distance between the two slits is 0.5 mm and the distance between the plane of slits and the screen is 1m.
Find the y-coordinate (in cm) of the closest maxima to the origin on the positive y-axis.
y
S1
30°
O
0.5mm
S2
30°
1m

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
4. A convex lens of focal length 50 cm is cut along the diameter into two identical halves A and B and in
the process a layer C of the lens thickness 1 mm is lost. Then the two halves A and B are put together to
form a composite lens. Now infront of this composite lens a source of light emitting wavelength
l = 6000 Å is placed at a distance of 25 cm as shown in the figure. Behind the lens there is a screen at
a distance 50 cm from it. The fringe width (in mm) of the interference pattern obtained on the screen is
x. 10x is equal to
A Screen
Source A
C 1mm *
B
B
25cm 50cm
SECTION-IV
1. Light from source S (| u | < | f |) falls on lens and screen is placed on the other side. The lens is formed by
cutting it along principal axis into two equal parts and are joined as indicated in column II.
Column I Column II
(A) Plane of image move towards screen if | f | (P)
is increased Small portion of each part near pole

is removed. The remaining parts are
joined.
(B) Images formed will be virtual (Q)
The two parts are separated slightly.

The gap is filled by opaque material.
(R)
The two parts are separated slightly.

The gap is filled by opaque material.
(C) Interference pattern can be obtained if (S)
screen is suitably positioned. Small portion of each part near pole

is removed. The remaining parts are
joined.

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. Unpolarized light of intensity I scattered from point A. Intensity of light perceive by given observer
is :-
I
I 2 A
(A) I (B) cos q
2 q
I I I I
(C) + sin 2 q (D) + cos2 q
2 2 2 2
2. An electron microscope is operated at 40 kV. The ratio of resolving power of this microscope and
another one which uses yellow light of wavelength 6 × 10 –7 m, is :-
(A) 9.78 × 106 (B) 9.78 × 104 (C) 9.78 × 10–4 (D) 9.78 × 10–6
3. Consider Fraunhofer diffraction pattern obtained with a single slit illuminated at normal incidence.
At the angular position q of the first diffraction minimum, the phase difference (in radians) between
the wavelets from the opposite edges of the slit is :-
(A) p (B) 2 p (C) p /4 (D) p /2
4. A small mirror of mass m is suspended by a light thread of length l. The angle through which the
thread will be deflected when a short pulse of laser of energy E falls normally on the mirror is :-
(Assume mirror is a perfect reflector)
2E mc gl mc 2gl 2E
(A) (B) (C) (D)
mc 2gl 2E 2E mc gl
5. A beam of light has two wavelengths 3100 Å and 4133 Å with a total intensity of 12.8 W/m2 equally
distributed between the two wavelengths. The beam falls normally on an area of a clean metallic
surface of work function 3.1 eV. Assume that there is no loss of energy by reflection and that each
energetically capable photon ejects one electron. How many electrons will emit per second from the
face area ?
(A) 2 × 1019 (B) 1019 (C) 1018 (D) 2 × 1018
6. If the surface of a metal is successfully exposed to radiation of l1 = 350 nm and l2 = 450 nm the
maximum velocity of photoelectrons will differ by a factor 2. The work function of this metal is
(A) 2.84 × 10– 19 J (B) 1.6 × 10–19 J (C) 3.9 × 10–19 J (D) 2.4 × 10–19 J
7. In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the wavelength of the incident radiation is l. The wavelength
1
of the incident radiation is reduced to rd of the initial value and the maximum kinetic energy of
3
the photoelectron is observed to be n times the previous value. The threshold wavelength for the
metal plate is :-
æ n -1 ö æ n ö ( n + 1) l l
(A) ç ÷l (B) ç ÷l (C) (D)
è n -3ø è n -3ø ( n - 3) n
8. When 1 cm thick surface is illuminated with light of wavelength l, the stopping potential is v.
When the same surface is illuminated by light of wavelength 2l, the stopping potential is v/3.
Threshold wavelength for metallic surface is :-
4l 8l
(A) (B) 4l (C) (D) 6l
3 3

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. If light of wavelength of maximum intensity emitted from surface at temperature T 1 is used to

cause photoelectric emission from a metallic surface, the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted
electron is 6eV, which is 3 times the work function of the metallic surface. If light of wavelength of
maximum intensity emitted from a surface at temperature T 2 (T2 = 2T1) is used, the maximum
kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted is :-
(A) 2 eV (B) 4 eV (C) 14 eV (D) 18 eV
10. Two identical capacitors are arranged as shown. Work
hn
f 1 2 3 4
function of plate 1 is f eV. The emf of battery is . If
e
energy of incident photon is hn then maximum kinetic
f
energy of e– reaching plate 2 is :-
(A) hv – f/2 (B) hn – f
(C) hn – 2f (D) hn
hc
11. The work function of a certain metal is l . When a monochromatic light of wavelength l < l0 is
0
incident such that the plate gains a total power P. If the efficiency of photoelectric emission is h%
and all the emitted photoelectrons are captured by a hollow conducting sphere of radius R already
charged to potential V, then neglecting any interaction between plate and the sphere, expression of
potential of the sphere at time t is :-
100hlPet hlPet lPet
(A) V + 4pe RhC (B) V - 400pe RhC (C) V (D) 4pe RhC
0 0 0
12. A proton and an alpha particle are accelerated under the same potential difference. The ratio of de-
Broglie wavelengths of the proton and the alpha particle is :
1
(A) 8 (B) (C) 1 (D) 2
8
13. When a point light source of power W emitting monochromatic light of wavelength l is kept at a
distance 'a' from a photo-sensitive surface of wave function f and area S then
W lS
(A) Number of photons striking the surface per unit time is
4phca 2
1
(B) The stopping potential needed to stop the most energetic emitted photoelectrons is (hc – lf)
el
hc
(C) Photo emission occurs only if l lies in the range 0 < l £
f
1
(D) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photo electron is (hc-lf )
l
14. When light of sufficient small wavelength is incident on a metal, electrons having different K.E. are
emitted depending on loss of energy due to collision. The maximum K.E. of electron can be,
hC hC
K.E.max = l - l , where l0 is thresold wavelength which depends on the metal. If wavelength of
0
l0
incident light is and mass of electron is m then :
4

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
6hl0 l
(A) Minimum debroglie wavelength of emitted electron is
mC
hl 0 e –
(B) Minimum debroglie wavelength of emitted electron is

6mC
(C) Maximum de-broglie wavelength of emitted electron tends to infinity v
metal
(D) Maximum de-broglie wavelength of emitted electron tends to zero
15. A clean surface of a metal in a vacuum tube is irradiated with a light l = 500 nm
monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm and the resulting A
photoelectric current is measured by the ammeter A, as shown in
the circuit. It is found that if the voltmeter (V) reading is greater + –
than 0.8 V, the ammeter shows zero reading. Now, with a second V
source of light, the ammeter reading vanishes when the voltmeter
reading is changed to 1.2 V. Then, [Battery B with rheostat R makes R
a potential divider circuit] [Given : h = 6.6 × 10 Js c = 3 × 10 ms ,
–34 8 –1
e = 1.6 × 10–19 C.] B

(A) the frequency of second source is 6.97 × 10 Hz. 14
(B) the kinetic energy of photoelectrons due to first source is less than or equal to 0.8 eV.
(C) the work function of emitting surface is 1.68 eV.
(D) the kinetic energy of photoelectrons due to second source is less than or equal to 1.2 eV.
A metal plate of length 2l is placed as shown in figure. A light of frequency l
5n0 [n0 is threshold frequency] is incident uniformly on upper half of the E
plate. Efficiency of photo-electric effect is 50% and all electrons comes l
out horizontally with KE = 1/4 of KEmax. Then x
4hn0
[Consider gravity free space & electric field E = in vertically upward direction].
el
16. Kinetic energy of the emitted electron will be
(A) 4hn0 (B) 2hn0 (C) hn0 (D) 5hn0
17. The length of the portion on the horizontal ground on which electron will strike the ground
(A) ( 2 - 1) l (B) ( 2 + 1) l (C) ( 3 - 1) l (D) ( 3 + 1) l
18. At any instant charge density in the region where electrons fall
(A) increases with x (B) decreases with x
(C) is uniform (D) first increases & then decreases
SECTION-II
(upto second decimal place) Light source
1. The figure below shows a vacuum tube containing electrodes made
of different metals, 1 and 2 whose work functions are f1 and f2. The
electrodes are illuminated simultaneously. The maximum kinetic
energy of photoelectrons reaching plate 2 is 2 eV and maximum
1 2
kinetic energy of photoelectrons reaching plate 1 is 6 eV. Assume
that photoelectron emitted from either plate do not interact with
each other. f1 = 3 eV and f2 = 1.4 eV. Find wavelength (in nm) of + –
A
the electromagnetic wave used. V0

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
SECTION-IV
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) 1Q. [8 M (for each entry +2(0)]
1. The diagram shows a cuboidal container with a non-viscous liquid of nonuniform density but a
uniform refractive index m0. The height of container is 0.4 SI units and the density of liquid varies
linearly according to the relation :
r = r0(1 – 4y)
where r0 is a constant and y is the vertical distance measured from the midplane (ABPQ) of the
container. (y is positive when measured upward, and negative when measured downward).
There are two horizontal slits, covered with perfectly transparent films, in one of the vertical faces
as shown in the figure. A thin transparent strip of material having superficial dimensions equal to
the slits and thickness equal to d (volume V0) is released from rest from an initial depths below the
mid-plane (ABPQ) (i.e., from y = –s) close to the slits. The strip has a constant density r0, uniform
refractive index m(> m0) and it moves due to buoyancy keeping its plane parallel to the plane of the
slits ; always remaining very close to the plane of the slits.
Monochromatic plane wavefronts (of light) parallel to the plane of the slits enter into the liquid
through the face opposite the double-slit. The intensity of light is observed on the screen placed
outside the container parallel to the plane of the slits.
Plane of
N the slits
S1
S1 Screen
M
Q P d/2
Light
S2 A B C
waves
A Mid d/2
B point Light s
O waves
Mid-plane
S2
film
L film
d Slide vies Screen
d
(A) s = 2d and 0 < t < 1 sec (P) Central bright fringe is always at C
(B) s = 3d and 0 < t < 2 sec (Q) Central bright fringe is below C four times
(C) s = d/4 and 0 < t < 6 sec (R) Central bright fringe is above C twice
(D) s = d and 0 < t < 3/4 sec (S) Central bright fringe is above C four times
(T) Central bright fringe is below C twice

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. The additional energy that should be given to an electron to reduce its de-Broglie wavelength from 1 nm
to 0.5 nm is :
(A) 2 times the initial kinetic energy (B) 3 times the initial kinetic energy
(C) 0.5 times the initial kinetic energy (D) 4 times the initial kinetic energy
2. Two particles A and B have de-Broglie's wavelengths 30Å and 20Å, combined to form a particle C.
Momentum is conserved in this process. The possible de-Broglie's wavelength of C is :-
(A) 10Å (B) 20Å (C) 65Å (D) 80Å
3. A perfectly absorbing, black, solid sphere with constant density and radius R, hovers stationary above
the sun. This is because the gravitational attraction of the sun is balanced by the pressure due to the sun's
light. Light pressure P is given by the intensity I of the absorbed light divided by the speed of light c =
3 × 108 m/s. P = I/c. Assume the sun is far enough away that it closely approximates a point source of
light. The distance from the centre of the sun at which the sphere hovers is:
(A) proportional to R (B) proportional to 1/R
(C) proportional to 1/R2 (D) independent of R
4. If electron beam in a Coolidge tube is accelerated by 100 volt and targeted on high atomic number
(z > 30) material. What will be spectrum of energy emitted?
(A) Superimposed continuous and characteristic energy spectrum of X-rays
(B) Only continuous spectrum in mainly ultraviolet and visible region
(C) Only characteristic energy spectrum of X-rays
(D) Only characteristic spectrum in visible and ultraviolet region.
5. When two different materials A and B having atomic number Z1 and Z2 are used as the target in Coolidge
X-ray tube at different operating voltage V1 and V2 respectively their spectrums are found as below.
The correct relation is :
I Ka
1 Ka
2
l
l1 l2
(A) V1 > V2 and Z1 > Z2 (B) V1 < V2 and Z1 < Z2

(C) V1 < V2 and Z1 > Z2 (D) V1 > V2 and Z1 < Z2
6. The ka wavelength of an element with atomic number z is lz. The ka wavelength of an element with
atomic number 2z is l2z. How are lz and l2z related ?
(A) lz > 4l2z (B) lz = 4l2z
(C) lz < 4l2z (D) Depending on z, lzcould be greater than or less than 4l2z
7. The half lives of radioisotopes P32 and P33 are 20 days and 30 days respectively. These radioisotopes are
mixed in the ratio of 4 : 1 of their atoms. If the initial activity of the mixed sample is 7 mCi, then the
activity of the mixed isotopes after 60 days.
(A) 2.5 mCi (B) 1 mCi (C) 3.2 mCi (D) 3 mCi

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

8. In an experiment suppose we want to increase the intensity to desired result
(A) decreasing the distance d between filament (electron gun) & target metal
(B) increasing the current in filament circuit
(C) increasing the size of collinator
(D) increasing the accelerating potential
9. In K–capture process,
(A) a neutrino is emitted from the nucleus.
(B) an X–ray photon is emitted having wavelength same as the X-ray photon emitted by parent nucleus.
(C) an X–ray photon is emitted having wavelength same as the X-ray photon emitted by daughter
nucleus.
(D) proton number Z is reduced by one.
10. Figure shows intensity versus wavelength graph of X-rays coming from Coolidge-tube with molebdenum
as anticathode. The two peaks shown in graph corresponds to Ka & Kb X-rays
0.4 0.63 0.71

l (in Å)
(A) Wavelength of La X-rays from Coolidge tube will be (approximately) 5.60 Å

(B) Voltage applied across Coolidge tube is (approximately) 16 kV
(C) If the potential difference across the Coolidge tube is increased such that the cut off wavelentht of x-
ray becomes 0.2Å. Then the value of (lka – lkb) in this condition is 0.08 Å
(D) If cut off wavelenth is increased to 0.65 Å, intensity of Ka & Kb must increase.
11. Which of the following statements about X-rays is/are TRUE?
(A) E(Ka) + E(Lb) = E(Kb) + E(Ma) = E(Kg)
(B) For the harder X-rays, the intensity is higher then soft X-rays
(C) The continuous and the characteristic X-rays of same wavelengths differ only in the method of
creation
(D) The cut-off wavelength lmin depends only on the accelerating voltage applied between the target
and the filament.

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
12. In the a-decay of a U-238 nucleus the energy released in the decay is Q. The U-238 nucleus was
initially stationary. Which of the following is (are) true?
(A) Ratio of K.E. of a-particle and Thorium nucleus is 117 : 2
(B) Ratio of K.E. of Thorium nucleus and a-particle is 1 : 234
234Qm a
(C) Momentum of a-particle is
119
234Q
(D) Recoil velocity of Thorium nucleus is
119 ´117m Th
13. A radioactive sample has a half life of 40 seconds. When its activity is measured 80 seconds after the
begining, it is found to be 6.932 × 1018 dps. During this time total energy released is 6 × 108 joule (ln2
= 0.6932) :-
(A) The initial number of atoms in the sample is 1.6 × 10 20
(B) The initial number of atoms in the sample is 1.6 × 1021
(C) Energy released per fission is 5 × 10–13 J
5
(D) Energy released per fission is × 10–13 J
3
THERMAL ACCELERATION
Consider a cube of side length a = 1cm, made of aluminium (density r = 2.7g/cm3, molar mass MA =
23g/mol). The heat capacity of one mole of aluminium is given as a function of temperature in the graph
below. The speed of light c = 3 × 108 m/s, universal gas constant R = 8.31J/(mole·K). The initial
temperature of the cube is T0 = 300K.
CV
3R
2R
0 T(K)
100 200 300
14. What is the total internal thermal (approximately) energy of such a cube at initial temperature T0 :
(A) 439 J (B) 878 J (C) 329.25 J (D) 109.75 J
15. Now, the cube has 5 faces painted in white (reflect all wavelengths) and one face painted in black
(absorbs all these waves). The cube is surrounded by vacuum at very low temperature (near absolute
zero); there is no gravity field. Initially, the cube is at rest; as it cools down due to heat radiation, it starts
slowly moving. Find its terminal speed (assuming that radiation emitted by a cube face is normal to
surface)
(A) 2.16 mm/s (B) 0.54 mm/s (C) 1.08 mm/s (D) 1.62 mm/s

CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE

Gold Nucleus (79Au ) can decay into mercury nucleus (80Hg198) by two decay schemes shown in
198
figure. (i) It can emit a b particle (b1) and come to ground state by either emitting one g ray(g1) or
emitting two g rays (g3 & g2) (ii) It can emit one b particle (b2) and come to ground state by emitting g2
ray. Atomic masses : 198Au = 197.9682 amu, 198Hg = 197.9662 amu, 1 amu = 930 MeV/c2. The energy
levels of the nucleus are shown in figure.
198
79 Au
b1-
E3= –1 MeV Second excited state
b -2
g1 g3
E2= –1.6 MeV Frist excited state
g2
E1= –2 MeV
Ground state
198
80 Hg
16. What is the maximum kinetic energy of emitted b2 particles

(A) 1.44 MeV (B) 0.59 MeV (C) 1.86 MeV (D) 1.46 MeV
17. What is the maximum kinetic energy of emitted b1 particle is -
SECTION-III
1. If the series limit of the Balmer series for hydrogen is 2700 Å. Calculate the atomic number (Z) of the
element which gives X-ray wavelength of Ka line as 1.0 Å. If Z = 10p + 1 then find p.
2. When the nucleus of 7N14 is bombard with an a - particle of sufficient kinetic energy, it gets transformed
into 8O17. If the masses of 7N14, 2He4, 1H1 and 8O17 are respectively 14.00307u, 4.00260u, 1.00783u and
16.99913u and 1u = 931.5 MeV, if the minimum kinetic energy that must be possessed by the a particle
x+y+z
is xyz × 10–2 MeV then find value of .
2
SECTION-IV
1. With respect to photoelectric experiment, match the entries of Column I with the entires of Column II.
Column I Column II
(A) If n(frequency) is increased keeping (P) Stopping potential increases
I (intensity) and f (work function) constant
(B) If I is increased keeping n and f constant (Q) Saturation photocurrent increases
(C) If the distance between anode and (R) Maximum KE of the photoelectrons increase
cathode increases.
(D) If f is decreased keeping n and (S) Stopping potential remains the same
I constant

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM
CLASS
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
ENTHUSIAST
PHASE COURSE
: TNAS

SECTION-I
1. Which of the following reaction(s) is/are an endoergic reaction :-
(A) 12H + 12H ® 13H + 11H (B) 12 H + 12 H ® 32 He + n
(C) 12 H + 13 H ® 24 He + n (D) 42He + 24 He ® 84 Be
Mass in amu. Given m ( 11H ) = 1.0073, m(n) = 1.0087, m ( 12H ) = 2.0141 , m ( 13H ) = 3.0160 ,
( ) (
m 32H e = 3.0160 , m 42H e = 4.0026 and m ) ( 8
2 )
Be = 8.0053
2. Consider the nuclear reaction X200 ® A110 + B90 if the binding energy per nucleon for X, A and B is 7.4
MeV, 8.2 MeV and 8.2 MeV respectively, what is the energy released ?
(A) 200 MeV (B) 160 MeV (C) 110 MeV (D) 90 MeV
3. The following deuterium reactions and corresponding reaction energies are found to occur :
14
N(d, p)15N, Q = 8.53 MeV
15
N(d, a) C,
13
Q = 7.58 MeV
13
C(d, a)11B, Q = 5.16 MeV
The notation 14N(d, p)15N represents the reaction 14N + d® 15N + p, 24He = 4.0026 amu,
1
2
He = 2.014 amu, 11H = 1.0078 amu, n = 1.0087 amu (1 amu = 931 Mev)
The Q values of the reaction 11B(a, n)14N is :-
(A) 0.5 eV (B) 0.5 MeV (C) 0.05 MeV (D) 0.05 eV
1
4. Probability of decay of a particular nucleus of substance Z in next 1 hour is . Then probability of
3
decay of a nucleus of same substance :
1 1 5
(A) In next hours is (B) In next 2 hours is
2 3 9
1 1
(C) In next 3 hours is (D) In next 1.5 hour is
3 3
5. If the b-rays spectrum is represented by n µ (Emax – E)2 × E where n is the number of b particles
emitted with energy E and Emax is energy released in b decay, then maximum number of neutrinos
would come out with energy equal to (approximately) :-
E max 4E max
(A) (B) (C) Emax (D) 0
5 5
6. Nuclei A decays to B with decay constant l1 and B decays to C with decay constant l2. Initially at t =
0, number of nuclei of A and B are 2N0 and N0 respectively. At t = t0, number of nuclei of B stop
3N0
decaying. If at this instant number of nuclei of B are .
2
1 4 l1 1 4 l1
(A) the value of t 0 is l l n 3 l (B) the value of t0 is l l n 3 l
1 2 2 2
3N0 l2 2N0 l 2
(C) the value of NA at t0 is 2 l (D) the value of NA at t0 is 3 l
1 1

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
7. Nuclie of a radioactive element X are being produced at a constant rate K and this element decays to a
stable nucleus Y with a decay constant l and half life T1/2. At time t = 0, there are N0 nuclei of the
element X. :-
K + lN 0
(A) The number NX of nuclei of X at time t = T1/2 is
2l
æ K - lN 0 ö -lt K - lN 0
(B) The number NY of nucleus Y at time t is Kt + ç ÷e -
è l ø l
ln2 1 æ K - lN 0 ö
(C) The number NY of nuclei of Y at t = T1/2 is K - ç ÷
l 2è l ø
ln2 1 æ K + lN 0 ö
(D) The number NY of nuclei of Y at t = T1/2 is K + ç
l 2è l ÷ø
8. Choose the CORRECT option(s) :-
(A) When two light nuclei fuse together, the rest mass of resulting nucleus is more than the sum of
the rest masses of light nuclei.
(B) When a heavy nucleus disintegrates, the binding energy per nucleon of resulting nuclei is
higher.
(C) In a typical fission reaction, approximately 200 MeV energy is released.
(D) In a typical fusion reaction, approximately 1 GeV energy is released.
9. A stationary nucleus 226
88 Ra (ground state) decays into the nucleus 222
86 Rn (ground state) by emitting an
a-particle. (Given that m(88

226 222
Ra) = 226.02540 u, m( 42 He) = 4.00260 u, m(86 Rn) = 222.01750 u.) and
Take 1amu = 931 MeV/c2.
(A) The Q-value for the a-decay of (88
226
Ra) is (approximately) 4.93 MeV
(B) The Q-value for the a-decay of (88

226
Ra) is (approximately) 9.8 MeV
(C) The K.E. of the emitted a-particle in the decay of 226

88 Ra is (approximately) 4.85 MeV
(D) The K.E. of the emitted a-particle in the decay of 226

88 Ra is (approximately) 9.7 MeV
10. A nucleus has a radius of 7.2 × 10–15 m. When an a-decay takes place from this nucleus, ratio of number
65
of neutrons and number of protons in the daughter nucleus becomes :-
41
(A) Parent nucleus is 84Po. (B) Daughter nucleus is 82Pb.
(C) Mass number of daughter nucleus is 216. (D) Mass number of parent nucleus is 216.
(A) The stability of nucleus is directly proportional to total binding energy.
(B) As the accelerating potential in Coolidge apparatus increases, difference between lcut-off and
wavelength Ka characteristic X-ray increases due to change in both lcut-off & lka.
(C) A neutron with kinetic energy of 24.2eV collides with stationary H-atom in ground state then
collision may be elastic, inelastic & perfectly inelastic.
(D) Presence of Ka in characteristic X-ray ensures the availability of all types of characteristic X-rays.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS

Interaction within a nucleus is so very complex that no one has so far tried to do the quantum mechanical
analysis of each and every nucleus. The complexity of interaction is so vast that no formula exists that is
able to predict the binding energy of a given nucleus.
Based on the interactions understood so far, semi-empirically derived formula for binding energy per
nucleon is given by : Eb (A, Z) = aI - aS A-1/ 3 - aC Z 2 A-4/ 3 - a A (A - 2 Z) 2 A-2
Where,
aI = 15.5 MeV : called as interior bonding coefficient
aS = 17.2 MeV: called as surface correction coefficient
aC = (2048/3000) MeV: called as coulomb repulsion coefficient
aA = 24 MeV: called as asymmetry coefficient
The constants given in above equation correctly predicts the measured values of the binding energy per
nucleon for the nuclei with A > 20 to within 1% error in comparison to the experimental results shown
below. But the same equation fails miserably when A < 20.
9
6
Binding energy per
nucleon, MeV
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
Mass number A
12. The measured binding energy per nucleon for N 715 is Eb = 7.700 MeV, while that for O815 is 7.464 MeV.
Why is average nucleon, in the oxygen nucleus, less tightly bound than in the nitrogen nucleus?
(A)It has fewer nucleons overall. (B) It has more nucleons on the surface.
(C)Electrostatic repulsion is greater. (D) The nucleus is asymmetric.
13. Find approximately the binding energy per nucleon for Zn30 64
:-
Few atomic masses are given
238 4 234 1 237
92 U = 238.05079u, 2 He = 4.00260u, 90 Th = 234.04363u, 1 H = 1.007834, 91 Pa = 237.065121u.
Answer the following questions on the basis of above data.
14. Calculate the energy released during the a–decay of 238
92 U .
(A) Q = 4.25 MeV (B) Q = 8.5 MeV (C) Q = 3.25 MeV (D) None of therse
15. Spontaneous emission of a proton from 23892 U is
(A) possible (B) impossible (C) can't say (D) none of these
CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
SECTION-II
1. The ratio of the components in a mixture, which consists of two elements, is to be determined. The
atomic number of the elements are big, their atomic mass numbers are the same and the amount of the
sample is only 58 mg. We know that both elements b decay when they are bombarded by neutrons.
They behave similarly when absorbing neutrons. The half-life of element A is half an hour and the half-
life of element B is an hour. Right after the neutron irradiation the b emission is measured. At this time
80 particles are measured in 2 seconds, and after an hour only 29 particles are measured during
2 seconds. Determine the mass of the element A (in mg) in the sample. Assume that spontaneous decay
statistical law is obeyed by nuclei of both the elements.
SECTION-III
1. A shell of radius 1m is coated with a thin layer of b active material. It's initial charge is zero and initial
–
4
number of active atoms is ´ 1012 . If half life of decay is 1 hr and all the electron are emitted with an
3
energy of 1.44 keV, find the time (in hr.) after which charge on the sphere becomes constant. Neglect
the time taken by electron to return back.
2. A nucleus with Z = 72 emits the following in a sequence : a, b-, b-, a, a, a, a, b-, b-, a, b+, b+ , a.
The Z of the resulting nucleus is 10N. Then fill the value of N in OMR sheet.
SECTION-IV
1. Figure shows a Coolidge tube being used to produce X-ray. Column–I shows change in various
parameters while column–II shows effects occurring due to change in the parameters. Match them
correctly. Initially filament circuit is in resonance condition and M series X-ray was obtained. The
emitted X-rays were incident on a metallic target, such that photo electrons were emitted.
Electric filament
Coolant
V1 = V0sinwt ~
L
X-ray
C
Battery
V2
metallic
target
(A) On increasing frequency (w) of AC source (P) Photo current from metallic target
increases
(B) On increasing pressure of gas inside the (Q) Photo current from metallic target
tube keeping temperature of gas constant decreases
(C) On increasing peak voltage (V0) of AC (R) Penetrating power of X-ray increases
(D) On increasing emf (V2) of battery. (S) Spectrum has more number of
characteristic X-ray lines.
(T) Temperature of coolant at output
would be higher.

CLASS TEST
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
PHASE : TNAS
2. Column–I shows a projectile and a target. Left particles are projectile and right is target. Column–II
shows subsequent event. All the collisions are head on. Mass of projectile is m and mass of target is M.
(A) (P) nuclear reaction may take place.

Electron accelerated H-atom
through 20 V
(B) Electron positron pair (Q)If energy is release it is of the order of MeV or greater
or small nuclei of equal
mass
(C) (R)Mass may be converted to energy

Neutron
235
U Nuclei
(D) (S) Photon may be emitted

Photon of energy
greater than k-shell atom of high
binding energy. atomic mass
(T) Electron emission may takes place

CLASS TEST
TEST
TM
TM ENTHUSIAST COURSE

CLASS ENTHUSIAST COURSE

SECTION-I
1. An environment study showed that the chernobyl disaster released 6.93 MCi of 137Cs into the
environment. If half life of 137Cs is 30 years then the released mass of 137Cs is-
(A) 112.5 kg (B) 56.3 kg (C) 79.6 kg (D) 7.9 kg
2. A radioactive sample decays by two modes by a decay and by b-decay. 66.6% of times it decays by a-
decay and 33.3% of times, it decays by b-decay. If half life of sample is 60 years then what will be half
life of sample, if it decays only by a - decay.
(A) 30 years (B) 90 years (C) 120 years (D) 180 years
3. A radioactive sample decays by b-emission. In first two seconds ‘n’ b-particles are emitted and in next
2 seconds, ‘0.25n’ b-particles are emitted. The half life of radioactive nuclei is
(A) 2 sec (B) 4 sec (C) 1 sec (D) None of these
4. Mass spectrometric analysis of potassium and argon atoms in a Moon rock sample shows that the ratio
of the number of (stable) 40Ar atoms present to the number of (radioactive) 40K atoms is 10.3. Assume
that all the argon atoms were produced by the decay of potassium atoms, with a half-life of 1.25 × 109
yr. How old is the rock [Given : ln(11.3) = 2.42, ln2 = 0.693]
(A) 2.95 × 1011 yr (B) 2.95 × 109 yr (C) 4.37 × 109 yr (D) 4.37 × 1011 yr
5. A radioactive sample decays by three modes simultaneously. Half lives corresponding to these modes
are in G.P. and half life of sample is 10 years. When the sample decays by the mode having largest half
life it takes 70 years for the sample to become half. If sample decays exclusively by other modes possible
values of half life is :
(A) 28 years (B) 35 years (C) 14 years (D) 17.5 years
1
6. The intensity versus graph for x rays is shown here. Two lines of characteristic x-ray spectra (ka &
l
kb) are also shown.
4.34 5.56 8
(Å–1)
(A) The accelerating potential difference across the x-ray tube is 99.2 kV
(B) The atomic member of target is Z = 74.
1 1
( )
-1
(C) = 5.56 (Å)–1 corresponds to Ka x ray & = 4.34 Å corresponds to Kb x ray
l l
1 1
(D) = 4.34 (Å)–1 corresponds to Ka x ray & = 5.56 (Å)–1 corresponds to Kb x ray.
l l
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
7. If all the known isotopes of the elements are plotted on a graph of number of neutrons (n) versus number
of protons (p), it is observed that all isotopes lying outside of a "stable" n/p ratio region are radioactive
as shown in figure.
The graph exhibits its straight line behavior with unit slope up to p = 25. Above p = 25 those isotopes
with an n/p ratio lying below the stable region usually undergo electron capture while those with n/p
ratios lying above the stable region usually undergo beta-decay. Very heavy isotopes p > 83 are unstable
because of their relatively large nuclei and they undergo alpha decay.
io
rat
/p
No. of neutrons (n)
le n
a-decay
b
sta
b-decay n = p line
electron capture
25 83
No. of protons (p)
(A) The radioisotope of magnesium with mass number 27 and atomic number 12 may undergo Beta
decay.
(B) The radioisotope of magnesium with mass number 27 and atomic number 12 may undergo Alpha
decay.
(C) For a hypothetical isotope of an element 178
88 X we may expect a-decay
(D) For a hypothetical isotope of an element 178

88 X we may expect b+–decay
8. In an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of a metal, two identical wires are suspended using
a vernier arrangement as shown in figure. The left wire is held taut with a fixed mass. Different loads
can be applied to the right wire and stretching of the wire can be measured by using the vernier scale
attached to the wire on right. The test wire has a length of 2.2 m between support and vernier and a
uniform diameter of 0.42 mm. Take g = 10ms–2 and give your answer in appropriate significant digits.
Vernier
cm cm
0 0 0
0
1 10 1
10
0kg
2kg
(A) The strain produced in the wire is 0.0010

(B) The Young’s modulus of the material is 1.4 × 1011 Nm–2
(C) If the wire is loaded statically, then the increase in internal energy of the wire is 0.022 J
(D) If the wire is loaded statically, then the increase in internal energy of the wire is 0.22 J
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
9. Select the CORRECT statement(s) :

(A) Accuracy of measurement by screw gauge can be increased by making more divisions on circular
scale
(B) If N division on main scale is equal to (N + m) divisions on vernier scale, then accuracy of measurement
can be increased by taking m smallest
(C) Zero errors can be minimised by taking large number of readings.
(D) Zero error in a given instrument always have a fixed value.
10. To measure speed of sound in air, we use a resonance column apparatus. The tuning fork has a frequency
of 1200 Hz. Resonance is obtained when height of air column is 6.8 cm, 20.6 cm and 34.8 cm.
(A) The velocity of sound is 331 m/s (B) The end carrection can be 0.2 cm
(C) The error in wavelength 0.4 cm (D) The error in velocity of sound is 4.8 m/s
Polonium (P ) emits 2a particles and is converted into lead (82Pb206). This reaction is used for producing
0
210 4
electric power in a space mission: P0210 has half life of 138.6 days. (Given masses of the nuclei) P0210 =
209.98264 amu, Pb206= 205.97440, 2a4 = 4.00260 amu)
11. Assuming an efficiency of 10% of the thermoelectric machine, how much P0210 is required to produce
1.2 × 107 J of electric energy per day at the end of 693 days?
(A) 1.0 gm (B) 2.0 gm (C) 3.0 gm (D) 0.5 gm
12. What is the initial amount of P 0 ?210
(A) 16 gm (B) 8 gm (C) 32 gm (D) 64 gm

13. Find the initial activity of the material.
(A) 4.57 × 1021 per day (B) 3.57 × 1021 per day
(C) 2.28 × 1021 per day (D) 1.785 × 1021 per day
The major errors in the experiment to determine specific resistance of the material of a wire using meter
bridge are due to the heating effect, end correction introduced due to shift of the zero of the scale at A
and B, stray resistances in gaps of meter bridge and due to non-uniformity of wire.
14. The major errors mentioned above are
(A) systematic in nature (B) random in nature
(C) neither systematic nor random (D) both systematic & random
15. End correction a and b can be estimated by including known resistances R1 and R2 in the two gaps and
finding the null point using equations
nksuksa fjDr LFkkuksa esa Kkr izfrjks/kksa R1 o R2 dks ysrs gq, vUR; la'kks/ku a o b dks vuqekfur dj fuEu ls dkuS lh lehdj.kksa
dk mi;ksx dj larqyu fcUnq Kkr fd;k tk ldrk g\ S
R1 l1 - a R2 l2 - a R1 l1 + a R2 l2 + a
(A) R = 100 - l - b , R = 100 - l - b (B) R = 100 - l + b , R = 100 - l + b
2 ( 1 ) 1 ( 2 ) 2 ( 1 ) 1 ( 2 )
R1 l1 - a R2 l2 + a R1 l1 + a R2 l2 - a
(C) R = 100 - l + b , R = 100 - l + b (D) R = 100 - l + b , R = 100 - l - b
2 ( 1 ) 1 ( 2 ) 2 ( 1 ) 1 ( 2 )
CLASS TEST
TM
ENTHUSIAST COURSE
16. Error due to non-uniformity of meter bridge wire can be reduced by interchanging the resistances in the
gaps of the meter bridge.
d r dR dr dL dR
Error in specific resistance is given by = +2 + . Here depends on
r R r L R
(A) error in the measurement of resistance in R.B.
(B) error in the measurement of unknown resistance.
(C) error in the measurement of balancing length.
(D) All of the above.
SECTION-III
1. A gas containing hydrogen like ions with atomic number Z, emits photons in transition (n + 2) ® n,
where n = Z. These photons fall on a metallic plate and eject electrons having minimum de-Broglie
wavelength l of 5Å. Find Z. (the work function of metal is 4.2 eV)
2. Mr. Vivek Taparia performed an experiment to verify Ohm's law. He connected following circuit to
measure voltage and current.
k
(•)
+ –
–
A
R +
+ V –
Here R is the unknown resistance, V the voltmeter, A the ammeter and K is the key. The value of R
from following readings is given by a × 10b kW, then find the value of a + b.
V(volt) 1 2 3 4 5
I(mA) 1.40 2.83 5.68 7.11 8.54
3. Suppose that we have a vernier callipers which does not expand or contract on heating. Such a device is
very useful in engineering applications where the dimensions are to be found at different temperatures.
One such vernier callipers is used to measure the diameter of a rod at different temperatures as shown in
table below. What will be the vernier scale reading (division coinciding) at a temperature of 50°C.
10 vernier scale divisions coincide with 9 main scale divisions and 1 main scale division = 1 mm.
Temperature T in °C Main scale reading Vernier scale reading
0 2.4 cm 4th division coinciding
20 2.4 cm 8th division coinciding
SECTION-IV
1. Column I shows various effects occurring/involved to isolated samples undergoing various processes
shown in Column II. Match them correctly
Column I Column II
(A) Remaining sample gets charged (P) Thermionic emission
( Sample is electrically heated)
(B) Electromagnetic force plays a (Q) K-capture process accompanied
substantial role by emission of characteristic X-ray
(C) Mass is getting converted into energy (R) Photoelectric effect
(sample is exposed to light
having sufficient energy)
(D) A chargeless particle carrying (S) b- decay
momentum is emitted (T) a-decay

Tnas Physics Class Tests

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tnas Physics Class Tests

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yashpatil TGCLASS

(A) w1 > w2 (B) w1 < w2 (C) w1 = w2 (D) none

PHYSICS / Class Test # 01 E-1/5

2mg sin q 3mg sin q 6mg sin q 8mg sin q

mg 2mg 3mg 4mg

E-2/5 PHYSICS / Class Test # 01

PHYSICS / Class Test # 01 E-3/5

Multiple Correct Answer Type 2 Q. [4 M (–1)]

(A) particle further comes to rest at x = 4 (B) particle oscillates about x = 2

the point of equilibrium to maximum displacement in 1 second

(D) None of the above

Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 3Q.) [3 M (-1)]

(A) 5 cm and 61 cm (B) 3 cm and 7 cm

E-4/5 PHYSICS / Class Test # 01

(D) Block B is released on a smooth (S) The motion of B is oscillatory

(T) The motion of B is periodic

PHYSICS / Class Test # 01 E-5/5

PHYSICS / Class Test # 02 E-1/4

would be (in rad s -1 )

(A) 4N (B) 10N (C) 12N (D) 15N

E-2/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 02

Linked Comprehension Type (1 Para × 2Q.) [3 M (-1)]

11. What is the amplitude of and time period of oscillation respectively.

2mg sin q 3m mg sin q m

PHYSICS / Class Test # 02 E-3/4

E-4/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 02

(A) K.E. versus phase angle curve (P)

(B) P.E. versus phase angle curve (Q)

(C) T.E. versus phase angle curve (R)

(D) Velocity versus phase angle curve (S)

PHYSICS / Class Test # 02 E-5/4

- 94î + 237ˆj + 68k̂ - 94î + 68 ĵ - 237k̂ 3î + 6ˆj - 2k̂

PHYSICS / Class Test # 03 E-1/4

9. Locus of the image is :-

E-2/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 03

PHYSICS / Class Test # 03 E-3/4

(A) (P) Total deviation after two reflection is 240° clockwise

(B) (Q) Total deviation after three reflection is 180°

(C) (R) Total deviation after two reflection is 60° anticlockwise

(D) (S) Total deviation after one reflection is 60° clockwise

E-4/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 03

(A) y = 2x – 2 (B) y = – x + 2 (C) y = – x – 2 (D) y = x – 4

(A) 60° (B) 90° (C) 120° (D) small devitation

(A) 0.5° (B) 1° (C) 1.5° (D) 2°

PHYSICS / Class Test # 04 E-1/4

concave mirror convex mirror

(A) This graph is hyperbola. (B) length a must be equal to length b.

E-2/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 04

30cm Principal axis of

(A) Mirror is concave of radius 40 cm

12. What is the focal length of the mirror?

PHYSICS / Class Test # 04 E-3/4

E-4/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 04

t2k t2k tk 2tk

PHYSICS / Class Test # 05 E-1/4

(A) 1.5 cm (B) 1 cm (C) 7 cm (D) 10 cm

E-2/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 05

Multiple Correct Answer Type 3 Q. [4 M (–1)]

PHYSICS / Class Test # 05 E-3/4

Paragraph for Questions 14 and 15

E-4/4 PHYSICS / Class Test # 05

PHYSICS / Class Test # 06 E-1/4

Multiple Correct Answer Type 5 Q. [4 M (–1)]

(A) sin–1 (cot r)